JP6547765B2 - Pachinko gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine generally acquires a random number value for lottery in response to the game ball entering the starting opening, and temporarily stores it as an operation holding ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. Such an operation reserving ball is sequentially digested one by one each time a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a judgment of whether or not it corresponds to a big hit is executed. When the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, after displaying the symbols in a plurality of lines in a variable display, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the big winning opening, which is normally closed, is opened. Special game (big hit game) is established.

  In this type of pachinko gaming machine, the number of award balls paid out based on the game ball entering the large winning opening during execution of the special game is notified (for example, Patent Document 1) reference).

JP, 2015-033452, A

  Since many pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration already exist as conventional models, it is required to improve the fun of gaming by jackpot effects in order to differentiate them from conventional models.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a pachinko game machine capable of improving the amusement of a game.

In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is provided to a gaming board provided with a gaming area, a starting opening provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball, and the starting opening In the game area, there is a special winning opening that is provided in the game area and can be opened according to the result of the judgment and the game ball can enter, and in the game area A round game which is provided at a position different from the starting opening and which allows the game ball to enter the ball and the result of the acceptance determination is a big hit, and executes a round game multiple times to open the big winning opening after closing It has a special game execution means capable of executing a special game to be played, an effect display device for displaying an effect suggesting the result of the judgment of success or failure, and an effect determination means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device , In the big winning opening The first prescribed number of gaming balls are paid out as winning balls when one technical ball enters, and when one gaming ball enters the predetermined winning opening, the second prescribed number It is comprised so that a game ball may be paid out as a prize ball, and the prize ball paid out during execution of the said special game triggered by the game ball entering the said big winning opening during execution of the round game in a special game The number of prize balls to be paid out during the execution of the special game triggered by the game ball entering the predetermined winning hole during the execution of the round game in the special game, which is the total number of the special prize It is possible to update and display the total number with the predetermined winning a prize winning ball total which is the total number, and is currently being executed as display contents capable of updating and displaying the total number with the large winning a prize winning ball total and the predetermined winning a prize winning ball total. Total number of big winning prize balls paid out in the special game And a total number display A which is a display of a total number with a predetermined number of winning prize balls, and a winning prize ball paid out in one or more special games executed prior to the currently running special game. The total number and the total number of the total number of predetermined winning a prize winning balls total number plus the total number of the large winning a prize winning balls total number paid out in the special game currently being executed and the predetermined winning a prize winning balls total number While having a certain total number display B, the total number display A and the total number display B can be simultaneously displayed during the round game in the special game currently being executed, and in any of the total number display A and the total number display B Every time the game ball enters the special winning opening or the predetermined winning opening during execution of the round game in the special game, it is updated and displayed, and during execution of the round game in the special game, the large of the game area The winning opening is While it is possible to display a predetermined image prompting the player to shoot the game ball in the direction of the arranged game area, and to simultaneously display the predetermined image, the total number display A, and the total number display B, The predetermined image, the total number display A, and the total number display B are configured so as not to be superimposed and displayed , and at least a predetermined winning opening A and a position different from the predetermined winning opening A as the predetermined winning opening. The predetermined winning opening A is provided in a predetermined gaming area of the gaming area, and the predetermined winning opening B and the special winning opening are provided. The game play area is provided in a game area different from the predetermined game area of the game area, and the predetermined winning hole B is provided on the upstream side of the big winning hole in the different game area. Currently running special games The winning ball by entering the game ball to the predetermined winning hole A in the round game in the is not subject to the update display of the total number display A, while the predetermined winning in the round game in the special game currently being executed A winning ball by the entry of the game ball into the mouth B is characterized by being a target of update display of the addition number display A.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine concerning this embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko game machine concerning this embodiment. It is a control block diagram of a pachinko game machine concerning this embodiment. It is a functional block diagram of a main control board and a production control board of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol equivalence lottery table based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol variation pattern table based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the consecutive villa production | presentation pattern table of on-premises inward consecutive villa effect based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation image of on-premises inn consecutive row production effect based on this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main control side main processing concerning this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 10 of the main control side main processing based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main-control side timer interruption process based on this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening monitoring control processing concerning this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol variation start monitoring control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start monitoring process in FIG. 14 based on this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol control processing concerning this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control general-purpose processing in FIG. 16 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 17 based on this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change in Drawing 17 concerning this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a special symbol stop symbol display in FIG. 17 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows control processing following FIG. 20 of processing during special symbol stop symbol display based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric symbol combination control processing based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 22 of the special electric symbol combination control processing based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 23 of the special electric symbol combination control processing based on this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows reset start processing concerning this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production control side main processing concerning this embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in FIG. 26 according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation state transfer process in FIG. 27 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production content determination process in FIG. 27 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-premises internal continuous sorrow effect A determination processing in FIG. 29 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit rendering content determination process in FIG. 27 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation internal continuation sorrow effect B determination processing in FIG. 31 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit rendering replacement process in FIG. 31 based on this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production control command reception interruption processing concerning this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a production control side timer interruption processing concerning this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the image control command transmission interruption process based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of a special continuous presentation based on this embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining the relation between reservation inside row villa production and special continuation production concerning this embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining a relation 1 between a reserved inner consecutive villa effect and a special effect according to a first modified example of the present embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining relations 2 and 3 of reservation inside consecutive residence effects and special effects concerning a 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special production determination processing based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation inside consecutive villa effect A determination processing based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation inside consecutive villa effect B determination processing based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the consecutive villa production pattern table of the reservation inside consecutive villa effect based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit rendering content determination process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production button monitoring control processing based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a production | presentation state transfer process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation inside consecutive villa effect A determination processing based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation inside consecutive villa effect B determination processing based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of reservation internal consecutive villa effect B based on the 3rd modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the consecutive villa production pattern table of the reservation inside consecutive villa effect based on the 3rd modification of this embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd big winning a prize mouth concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of big winning a prize mouth concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit production contents determination processing concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | prescribed inside consecutive villa effect B determination processing based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the yes / no prior determination table based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol equivalence lottery table based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol variation pattern table which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the consecutive villa production | presentation pattern table of on-premise internal consecutive villa effect based on 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | prescribed inside consecutive villa effect B determination processing based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | prescribed inside consecutive villa effect A determination processing based on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | prescribed inside consecutive villa effect B determination processing based on 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the effect | action which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of big winning a prize opening concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows the relationship of big hit classification and promotion production based on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of a probability variation promotion production based on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a probability variation promotion production pattern table which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of round promotion effect based on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the round promotion presentation pattern table based on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of a promotion effect based on the 1st modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol equivalence lottery table based on 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol variation pattern table which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation production pattern table which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the consecutive villa production pattern table of pending Uranso according to 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation production pattern replacement table which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows change production pattern selection processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | prescribed inside consecutive villa effect B determination processing based on 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine concerning a 7th embodiment. The big winning a prize mouth device which shows 7th execution form is shown, (a) is the strabismus figure of big winning a prize mouth device, (b) is the groundplan of big winning a prize mouth device. The big winning a prize mouth device concerning the 7th embodiment is shown, (a) is a front view showing the state which removed the shielding cover member of a big winning a prize mouth device, (b) shows the shielding cover member of big winning a prize mouth device It is a top view which shows the state removed. The big winning a prize mouth device concerning the 7th embodiment is shown, (a) is a perspective view showing the non-operation state of the big winning a prize mouth device which removed the shielding cover member, (b) removed the same shading cover member It is a perspective view which shows the operating state of a special winning opening device. It is a perspective view which shows the disassembled state of a big winning opening device which concerns on 7th Embodiment from diagonally upward. It is a perspective view which shows the disassembled state of a big winning opening device which concerns on 7th Embodiment from diagonally downward. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 7th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of big winning a prize opening concerning a 7th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the various prize presentation which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol intension lottery table based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the big winning a prize opening operation pattern table concerning an 8th embodiment. FIG. 42 is a schematic view showing a gaming state setting table according to the eighth embodiment. They are a schematic diagram (A) which shows a selection state transition table based on 8th Embodiment, and a schematic diagram (B) which shows a selection state setting table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 0 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 1 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 2 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 3 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 4 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 5 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 6 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 7 which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 8 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 9 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 10 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence of a fluctuation pattern selection state and an effect mode based on 8th Embodiment. FIG. 26 is a transition diagram of effect mode according to the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the pattern attribute of the decorative pattern based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the big hit symbol table which concerns on 8th Embodiment. They are a schematic diagram (A) which shows a big hit start demonstration time setting table based on 8th Embodiment, and a schematic diagram (B) which shows a big hit end demonstration time setting table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation production pattern table based on 8th Embodiment. It is a timing chart of reservation series mode performance concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of a chance up production lottery table concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an effect of off-set continuation mode off production | presentation based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of presentation of pending | repair series mode jackpot effect based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of a count-up effect pattern table based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of a count-up effect lottery table according to the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of production of count-up production based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen of prize ball number alerting | reporting production based on 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram of the number-of-awards ball number counter and the number-of-casings counter according to the eighth embodiment. They are a schematic diagram (A) which shows a selection state transition table based on the 1st modification of 8th Embodiment, and a schematic diagram (B) which shows a selection state setting table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 2A based on the 1st modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 2B based on the 1st modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen of the number-of-awards ball | bowl number alerting | presentation production | presentation, and the number notification effect | action of consecutive villas concerning the 2nd modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table A based on the 3rd modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table B based on the 3rd modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table C based on the 3rd modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of effect mode based on the 3rd modification of 8th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional first pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and the first game (the first special symbol game) and the second game (the first game) 2) special symbol game can be developed.

First Embodiment
A front view and a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment are shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2. First, with reference to this drawing, the general configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be outlined.

<Basic configuration of pachinko gaming machine>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine PM is, as shown in FIG. 1, configured in the form of a rectangular frame according to the opening front of the outer frame 1 forming a vertical fixed holding frame configured in the outer rectangular frame size, and is mounted open and closed The front frame 2 forming the frame is mounted so as to be able to open, close and open laterally and releasably by upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3a, 3b disposed at the front left side edge of each other, and is called double lock provided at the front right side edge By means of the locking device 4, it is always held in the closed state engaged with the outer frame 1.

  The glass frame 5 and the ball unit 6 are assembled on the front side of the front frame 2 so as to be able to open, close and releasably by using the hinge mechanisms 7a, 7b and 7c provided on the front left side. It is always held in a closed state covering the front of the front frame 2 by utilizing it. The game board 20 is set detachably at the upper part of the front frame 2 located behind the glass frame 5, and the play area PA on the front of the game board 20 through the double layer glass of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. To be visible.

  On the front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the game development status, and a speaker 11 that generates sound effects according to the game development status are provided. The ball dish unit 6 is provided with upper and lower ball dishes (upper ball dish 8 and lower ball dish 9) for storing game balls, and a player performs a pressing operation at the front center of the upper ball dish 8 A button 15 is provided, and on the front right side of the lower ball tray 9 is provided a launch handle 12 for launching the game ball. In the following, for convenience, the operation input means for effect is referred to as “effect button 15”, but the effect button 15 in this example is an on / off operation button type switch, an output according to the direction of the operation input Cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button), tilting lever type switch, rotary dial switch, proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches, touch It is used in the concept including all operation input means such as sensor and touch panel.

  The game board 20 is configured based on a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using, for example, a synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or ABS resin. On the front of the game board 20, an outer rail and an inner rail are fixed in a circular arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA where the game balls can be rolled is sectioned, and a windmill and a large number of games are formed in the game area PA. The first special symbol display device 71, the second, in addition to the various types of winning openings such as the first starting opening 61, the second starting opening 62, the operation gate 63, the first large winning opening 64, the second large winning opening 65, with nails. Various display devices such as a special symbol display device 72, a first special view holding lamp 73, a second special view holding lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a common view holding lamp 76 are provided. A center decoration 22 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the central opening of the center decoration 22. At the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided for discharging the game balls rolled down without entering each winning port to the back side of the game board 20. Hereinafter, each component provided in the game board 20 will be described in order.

  The first starting opening 61 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is provided with a first starting opening switch 611 for detecting entry of the game ball. Entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 61 is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery.

  The second starting opening 62 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is provided with a second starting opening switch 621 for detecting the entering of the game ball. Entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 62 triggers a second special symbol lottery. Further, the second start port 62 includes a normal motorized product 622 and a normal motorized product solenoid 623 for opening and closing the normal motorized product 622. The ordinary electric character 622 changes between a closed state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting opening 62 and an open state where the game ball is easier to enter than the state. Here, the second starting opening 62 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball unless the ordinary motorized part 622 is opened. On the other hand, when the ordinary motor-operated part 622 is opened, the ease of entering the second start opening 62 is enhanced.

  The actuation gate 63 is provided as a start winning hole corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an actuation gate switch 631 for detecting passage of gaming balls. In addition, passage of the game ball to the operation gate 63 becomes an opportunity of the normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not the normal motorized combination 622 of the second starting opening 62 is to be expanded.

  The first large winning opening 64 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape which is opened when a big hit or a small hit is obtained in a lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The first large winning opening 64 is provided with a first large winning opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of the game ball, and a first special electric combination 642 called an attacker device, and the first special electric combination 642 A first big winning opening solenoid 643 for driving the accessory 642 to open and close is provided. The first special electric character 642 is variable between a normal state where the gaming ball can not enter or difficult to enter the first big winning opening 64 and an open state where the gaming ball can enter or can enter easily.

  The second large winning opening 65 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape which is opened when a big or small hit is made in the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The second large winning opening 65 is provided with a second large winning opening switch 651 for detecting the ball entry of the game ball, and also the second special electric combination 652 called as a so-called attack device, and this second special electric combination A second large winning opening solenoid 653 for driving the accessory 652 to open and close is provided. The second special electric character 652 changes the second large winning opening 65 between a normal state where the gaming ball can not enter or difficult to enter and an opened state where the gaming ball can enter or can easily enter.

  The first large winning opening 64 and the second large winning opening 65 are provided in the area on the right side in the game area PA. Therefore, in the special game state, when firing the game ball toward the game area PA, it is easy to hit one of the big winning openings 64, 65 by performing a so-called right hit to hit the right area. It has become.

  The first special symbol display device 71 performs variable display and finalized display of the first special symbol in response to the game ball entering the first starting opening 61 as a trigger. The first special symbol display device 71 is constituted of, for example, seven segments of LEDs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of each segment, and the blinking of the segment is stopped and switched to lighting display. 1 Special symbol is displayed. The stop symbol of this first special symbol is formed by numbers, symbols, etc. represented by the combination of each segment.

  The second special symbol display device 72 performs variable display and finalized display of the first special symbol in response to the game ball entering the second starting opening 62 as a trigger. The second special symbol display device 72 is constituted of, for example, seven segments of LEDs, and the variable display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of each segment, and the blinking of the corresponding segment is stopped and switched to lighting display 2 Special symbols are displayed. The stop symbol of this second special symbol is formed by numbers, symbols, etc. represented by the combination of each segment.

  The first special view reserve lamp 73 and the second special view reserve lamp 74 are respectively composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the lighting / flashing display of the lamp Express (up to 4). The number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is the number according to the random number value acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 61 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicates the number of holding the acquired random number value, that is, the number of the judgment that the judgment of acceptance is temporarily held until the condition for judging the acceptance of the judgment (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value. The number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is the number according to the random number value acquired based on entering the second starting opening 62 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicates the number of holding the acquired random number value, that is, the number of the judgment that the judgment of acceptance is temporarily held until the condition for judging the acceptance of the judgment (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value.

  The normal symbol display device 75 is constituted of, for example, two LED lamps, and the variable symbol display and the fixed display of the normal symbol are performed by lighting and blinking display of the lamps. In this embodiment, for example, the variable display of the normal symbol is expressed by alternately repeating the lighting and extinguishing of the two lamps, and depending on which lamp is stopped and displayed in the final lighting state, the normal symbol Report the lottery results. The general drawing reserve lamp 76 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and the lighting and blinking display of the lamp represents the number (up to four) of operation reserved balls of the normal symbol. In addition, on the left side of the normal symbol display device 75, there is provided a round indicator 77 for displaying the number of round games in the special game (the number of rounds: the number of times the special electric role products 642, 643 operate continuously). .

  The effect display device 70 mainly displays an effect image including a decorative symbol to be displayed in a variable manner and stopped in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a notice effect, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol Make a pending display. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, the first special symbol in synchronization with the decorative symbol display portion 700 on which the variable display of the decorative symbol or the advance notice effect display is executed and the first special view holding lamp 73 The first special view reserve display section 701 where the reserve display of the second special symbol is performed, and the second special view reserve display section 702 where the reserve display of the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the second special view reserve lamp 74 It is provided. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the effect display device 70. In the decorative symbol display portion 700, three columns of display regions (left display region Z1, middle display region Z2, right display region Z3) serving as variable display regions of decorative symbols are provided on predetermined effective lines (not shown). The left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the left display region Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the middle display region Z2, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the right display region Z3 are respectively stopped and displayed. Ru. In the normal display mode, while the special design retention ball is activated, a special circle retention image is displayed on the special display reserve display parts 701 and 702, and the special retention feature is displayed when the special retention ball is digested. The hold image is lost. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the generation order of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol (the order of ball entry), and can be displayed on each of the reserved display portions 701 and 702 at a maximum of four each.

  The center ornament 22 is installed around the effect display device 70, and has functions such as protection of the flow path of the game ball, the screen of the effect display device 70, and decoration. The center ornament 22 is provided with a movable character 24 for executing a rendering operation according to the development status of the game. The movable part 24 is configured to include a driving source such as a stepping motor or a solenoid. Further, the center decoration 22 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light in accordance with the development status of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are collectively referred to as a "production lamp LP".

  Subsequently, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the back side of the front frame 2, a back setting board 30 formed in a rectangular frame shape somewhat smaller than the front frame 2 is detachably attached. Each part of the back setting board 30 is connected to the storage tank 31 for storing a large number of gaming balls, the tank rail 32 extending with a gentle downward slope from the storage tank 31, and the right end of the tank rail 32 The ball supply passage 33 extending in the direction, the prize ball payout unit 34 paying out the gaming balls guided by the ball feed passage 33, the prize for guiding the gaming balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper bowl 6 A ball passage 35 and the like are provided.

  On the back side of the game board 10, a main control board 100 for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM in an integrated manner, an effect control board 200 for controlling the overall effects, image display according to the game development, control of sound effects An image control board 300 or the like is attached. In the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 constitute a liquid crystal unit in an assembled state integrated with the effect display device (liquid crystal display device) 70. On the other hand, on the back side of the back setting board 30, a payout control board 400 for controlling the launch and payout of gaming balls, and power from the gaming facility side to supply power to various control boards and electric / electronic parts The power supply substrate 500 is attached. These control boards are assembled at a predetermined position on the back of the game board 20 or the back setting board 30 in an assembled state housed in a transparent resin base case having a caulking structure and a sealing structure to prevent tampering. It is arranged. The control board and the electric / electronic parts of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are mutually connected via a harness (connector cable), and the pachinko gaming machine PM is configured to be operable.

<Control configuration of pachinko gaming machine>
Next, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

  The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processing related to gaming, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area or buffer memory serving as a temporary storage area, peripheral boards and each A main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 including an I / O port circuit 104 for inputting and outputting signals to and from the device is mounted, and the main CPU 101 executes a game according to a control program stored in the ROM 102 It is configured to carry out the main control of the progression. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 is a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and is reset when the main CPU 101 malfunctions or runs out. Operates as a separate system from the WDT circuit that recovers to a normal state, the CTC circuit that enables the occurrence of real-time interrupts and time measurement, and the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101, and generates a predetermined random number (internal random number) A random number generation circuit etc. are mounted, and these are mutually connected via an internal bus.

  The main CPU 101 executes various processing related to main control of the game by reading various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performing arithmetic processing based on detection information and the like from each switch. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit backed up by a backup power supply (VBB) generated in the power supply substrate 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as the stack pointer and each register held at the time of the power shutdown when the power shutdown occurs. The state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power failure based on the information of the backup area.

  In addition, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first start opening switch 611, the second start opening switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the first large winning opening switch 641, the second large winning opening switch 651, etc. The detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. In addition, the main control board 100, the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special view reserve lamp 73, the second special view reserve lamp 74, the normal symbol display device 75 and the common view reserve lamp It is electrically connected to 76, and is further electrically connected to the ordinary electric service solenoid 623 and the special electric service solenoids 643, 653, and controls from the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Sends signals to various display means and various solenoids.

  The main control substrate 100 and the effect control substrate 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communication is performed only in a single direction from the main control substrate 100 to the effect control substrate 200. The various effect control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200, which are connected as possible. It is not possible to transmit data from the effect control board 200 to the main control board 100, and it is not possible to request the main control board 100 to transmit data.

  The effect control board 200 has a sub main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processing related to game effects based on effect control commands from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores effect control programs and various data, etc., a work area serving as a temporary storage area, The effect control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 configured to include a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral substrates and devices is mounted. The sub main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control relating to a game effect according to a control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the clock circuit for dividing the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate the internal system clock is reset to the effect control board 200, and the sub main CPU 201 is reset when it malfunctions or runs out. Circuit to return to normal state, TPU circuit to output various signals based on system clock, interrupt controller to start various interrupts such as timer interrupt based on signals from TPU circuit, etc., to input / output serial data A serial communication circuit or the like is mounted, and they are mutually connected via an internal bus.

  The effect control board 200 is an image control command for instructing the image control board 300 to generate an image and sound, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91 in the effect control process based on the effect control command from the main control board 100. (Lamp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to enable two-way communication, and while an image control command regarding an image and sound is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300, this response is A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been successfully received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the lamp connection board 91 mounted with a plurality of LED drivers, and a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 is provided via the serial communication circuit. Send. In the present example, serial communication of clock synchronous system is adopted between the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91, and transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 91 incorporates an LED driver that functions in response to a lamp control signal for driving an LED transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on / off switches in the circuit based on the lamp control signal. Thus, the drive current is supplied to or shut off from the effect lamp LP to perform control to turn on or turn off the effect lamp LP.

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the plurality of motor drivers 92, and a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 is sent to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies drive current to the stepping motor of each movable part 24 by switching on / off a switch in the circuit based on a drive control signal for accessory drive transmitted from the effect control board 200. Alternatively, it shuts off and controls the movable items 24 to operate. Although the data transmission to the motor driver 92 adopts the parallel communication method, it may adopt the serial communication method as the data transmission to the lamp connection substrate 91. Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the effect button 15, and a detection signal from an operation input detection means (for example, a photo sensor or the like) built in the effect button 15 is input, and the effect button 15 is displayed. A control signal for operating (for example, vertical movement, horizontal movement, vibration, rotation, etc.) is transmitted to drive a driving means (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) built in the effect button 15.

  The image control board 300 has a sub-sub-CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processing related to image effects based on image control commands from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 storing image control programs and various data, and a work area serving as a temporary storage area. And an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 configured with a RAM 303 that functions as a buffer memory, and an I / O port circuit 304 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral substrates and devices. The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute main control relating to image rendering in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the image control board 300 is in line with the effect contents based on the VDP for generating image data according to the effect contents based on the control signal obtained from the sub sub CPU 301 and the control signal obtained from the sub sub CPU 301 And a sound source IC for generating sound data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, reads image data stored in the image ROM according to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and processes the image data to transmit a video signal (image data) generated to the effect display device. The VPD is connected to a high-speed VRAM used to expand and process image data read from the image ROM. The sound source IC reads acoustic data stored in the voice ROM according to an instruction from the sub-sub-CPU 301, synthesizes the acoustic data, and outputs the acoustic data generated to the speaker 11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

  The payout control board 400 mainly includes a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of bi-directional communication, and is a control for driving the prize ball dispensing unit 34 based on the payout control command from the main control board 100 to dispense the prize balls. The ball feed mechanism 13 and the launch mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the amount of operation of the launch handle 12 to execute control of the launch of the gaming ball.

  Although not shown in detail, power supply substrate 500 is a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used in each control substrate based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply facility on the game island, and a backup power supply. A backup power supply circuit for generating (VBB) and a power cut-off monitor circuit for monitoring a power cut-off due to a voltage drop are provided, and they are used for electronic and electric parts such as control boards and gaming machines. Supply necessary power. The power supply substrate 500 is connected to a power supply switch for activating a power supply circuit, and assuming that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, the power supply substrate is turned on when the power supply switch is turned on. A predetermined power supply is supplied from a normal power supply circuit 500 to each control board or the like. The power supply substrate 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device on the gaming island has been cut off, and when the power supply is disconnected, the power control signal (NMI signal) notifying that effect is used as the main control substrate 100. , And the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is configured to be charged when power is supplied from the power supply device on the gaming island to the pachinko gaming machine PM. The power supply substrate 500 is also connected with a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporarily stored contents of the RAM 103 of the main control substrate 100 and setting an initial value when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to, for example, the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500.

<Basic operation of pachinko gaming machine>
In the pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above, the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the gaming island of the gaming facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, the bowl unit 6 and the like are closed and locked. The game is started by storing the game ball in the upper ball tray 8 and rotating the firing handle 12. When the firing handle 12 is turned, the gaming balls stored in the upper bowl 8 are shot one by one by the ball feed mechanism 13 (see FIG. 3) disposed on the back side of the glass frame 5. It is sent out to 14 (refer to FIG. 3), and is launched into the game area PA by the launch mechanism 14.

  When a game ball rolling down the game area PA enters any of the first start opening 61, the second start opening 62, the first large winning opening 64, and the second large winning opening 65, the type of the winning opening The winning balls according to the above are paid out to the upper bowl 8 or the lower bowl 9 by the prize dispensing unit 33. Further, when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 61 or the second starting opening 62, the lottery random number value of the special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored as the holding ball of the special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number. And when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the success / failure determination of special symbol, the symbol determination, and the fluctuation pattern determination are performed on the lottery random number value related to the first holding ball, and in the mode according to the determination result, 1 The special symbol is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 70. The variation display of the special symbol and the decoration symbol is synchronously stopped after the lapse of the variation time according to the selected variation pattern.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined and displayed in the stop mode indicating a big hit, it shifts to the special game which is a game state advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the first large winning opening 64 or the second Opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65 is started. The stop aspect of the decorative symbol indicating a big hit is, for example, an aspect in which three symbol types match. In the present embodiment, as special games, 16R special games set to 16 rounds (16 rounds), 8R special games set to 8 rounds (8 rounds), and 2 round games A 2R special game set to (2 rounds) is provided.

  In this embodiment, regardless of whichever of 16R special game, 8R special game and 2R special game, the probability change of the special symbol from the end of the special game until the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of closing times The function (also called "probability") operates uniformly. That is, the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine called a "stitching machine", which is a so-called "ST machine", which has a probability changing rush rate of 100%. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is in operation (also referred to as "the probability variation state of the special symbol") is not continued until the next big hit occurrence, but the probability variation state of the special symbol is maintained. Period (also referred to as "ST period") is limited to a predetermined number of closing times (also referred to as "ST number"). When the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, a lottery having a jackpot probability higher than that of the normal probability state is performed, so that a new special game is generated relatively early.

  On the other hand, after the special game is over, the variation time shortening function of special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "time-short") is attached to the probability variation function of the special symbol or independently of the probability variation function of the special symbol. May operate. When the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (also referred to as "special symbol short time condition"), the average variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol tends to be shorter than the normal condition, Also, the number of lottery numbers per unit time is improved (the easiness of winning a big hit per unit time can be improved).

  In addition, when the special symbol of the fluctuation time reduction function is activated, the electronic chew support function is activated. The electric chew support function increases the ease of entering the second starting opening 62 by activating the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the open extension function of the ordinary electric character 622 It is a state (it is also called "the ball entry easy state"). In addition, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol is higher than the normal state. When the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol is activated, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened. When the open time extension function of the normal motor vehicle 622 is activated, the open time of the normal motor vehicle 622 is in a state in which the open period is extended beyond the normal state. In this easy-to-enter-ball state, the possibility of increasing the number of times of fluctuation of the normal symbol per fixed time more than usual is increased, and the ease of entering the second start-up opening 62 is also improved. The possibility of increasing the number of ball entry also increases. Therefore, as a result of the chance to obtain a winning ball by entering the second starting opening 62 during that period by the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chow support function, the number of holding balls is hardly reduced. It becomes possible to continue the game.

<Main functional configuration of pachinko gaming machine>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly, the main control board 100 / the effect control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the functional block diagram of FIG. 4 additionally.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 is a ball entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, an advance determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, an ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145, The special game control unit 150, the symbol display control unit 155, the electric role control unit 160, the game state control unit 165, the error monitoring control unit 170, the main information storage unit 180, and the command transmission / reception unit 190. The above-described units in the main control board 100 are constituted by the main CPU 101, the ROM 102, the RAM 103, the hardware such as the electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and the software such as the control program stored in the ROM 102 or the like. Is a functional expression of

  The ball entrance judging means 110 is each based on detection signals from the first starting opening switch 611, the second starting opening switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the first large winning opening switch 641, the second large winning opening switch 651, etc. Determine the entry of the game ball to the winning opening.

  The game lottery random number generation means 120 is used for the success or failure lottery of the special symbol by taking in the built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software and adding the soft random number per special symbol described later to this. Generate a random number per special symbol. In addition, the game lottery random number generation means 120 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play a role as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. As this software random number, a soft random number per special symbol added to the above-mentioned built-in random number to make a random number per special symbol, a soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining an initial value and an end value of soft random number per special symbol, A special symbol per symbol special symbol used to determine a winning symbol (combination of symbols that will activate the condition device) as a stop symbol of a special symbol Special symbol for determining the initial value and end value of a symbol random number per symbol special symbol per symbol special symbol The initial value random number per pattern, the special pattern variation pattern random number for use in selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, the random number per ordinary symbol for use in the lottery of the normal symbol, the initial value and the end value of the random number per ordinary symbol The initial value random number per normal symbol to decide, the normal symbol variation pattern random number etc to be used for the selection of the variation pattern of the normal symbol That. The software random numbers are updated once each time the timer interrupt process occurs, and the initial value random number is the remaining time of the interrupt cycle while the timer interrupt process is not being executed (during loop processing) Update using.

  The suspension control means 130 includes a special symbol suspension control means 131 and a regular symbol suspension control means 132.

  The special symbol holding control means 131 is a random number value for a special symbol, which is a random number for drawing a special symbol game, triggered by the entry of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 61 or the second starting opening 62. The symbol random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol retention control means 131 is a main information storage means by combining the operation retention ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to the predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) respectively with the entering sequence of the retention balls. Temporarily store the 180 first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area.

  In the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area, the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area), the hold 2 storage area (2 A first pending storage area), a pending 3 storage area (third pending storage area), and a pending 4 storage area (fourth pending storage area) are provided. Each pending storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a special symbol random number per special symbol, and a special symbol variation pattern random number as a set of operation pending ball information. The operation holding ball information is stored in order of holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area, holding 3 storage area, holding 4 storage area, while holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area, holding 3 storage area, holding 4 storage Digested in order of area (first in first out principle). In addition, when the holding ball information of the holding 1 storage area is digested, the holding ball information stored in the holding 2 storage area, the holding 3 storage area, and the holding 4 storage area is shifted to the lower number storage area, Clear the contents of the pending 4 storage area to zero.

  Also, the special symbol suspension control means 131 is a first special symbol suspension ball number counter for counting the number of operation suspension balls of the first special symbol, a second special for counting the operation suspension ball number of the second special symbol It has a symbol holding ball number counter. The special symbol holding control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one operation holding ball of the special symbol is acquired, and one operation holding ball is digested, as update processing of the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by one.

  Also, when the special symbol retention control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, an effect control command ("symbol storage") including update information of the number of pending balls. To generate a "number command" and temporarily store it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information of both the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol. In addition, as a general rule, although operation reserve balls of each special symbol are digested in the order of entering the ball, in this embodiment, the second special symbol variation display is preferentially executed over the first special symbol Since the so-called priority digest is adopted, while the operation reserve ball relating to the second special symbol game is present, the operation reserve relating to the second special symbol game regardless of the presence of the operation reserve ball relating to the first special symbol game It is configured to preferentially digest the spheres. In addition, under this priority digestion, if there is an operation retaining ball of the second special symbol, even if there is an operation retaining ball of the first special symbol, the digestion of the operation retaining ball of the first special symbol is It will be put on hold.

  The normal symbol holding control means 132 is a random number value per symbol, a random number per symbol, a symbol random number per symbol, and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern, which is a lottery random number related to a normal symbol game triggered by the game ball entering the operation gate 63 The random number value is acquired, and the random number value is normally managed as the operation pending ball information of the symbol. The normal symbol holding control means 132 combines the normal holding symbol with the normal ball holding storage area of the main information storage means 180 in a form combining the normal holding symbol with the ball holding order up to a predetermined upper limit number (4). Temporarily store. Also, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the normal symbol. The normal symbol holding control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one normal operating symbol holding ball is acquired as an update process of the number of operating normal symbol holding balls, and one operating holding ball is digested. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by one.

  The prior determination means 135 performs the prior determination for the prefetch notice for the operation reserved ball, when the operation reserved ball of the special symbol is acquired at a predetermined prior determined timing. As an example of the pre-determination timing, (1) is waiting for each operation, and when the operation reserve ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric support function is not activated, (2) is waiting for each operation, and When the support function acquires the operation reserving ball of the second special symbol while operating, (3) when the operation reserving ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or small hit, either of the conditions It is time to be satisfied. Specifically, the prior determination means 135 reads the random number value corresponding to the operation reserve ball acquired this time from the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the lottery for winning or not The prior determination of (presence or absence determination), the prior determination of the symbol lottery (pattern prior determination), and the prior determination of the variation pattern lottery (variation pattern prior determination) are sequentially executed. Although the preliminary determination table used in each preliminary determination is not shown, a table for determining prioritization, a table for prior determination of symbols, and a table for prior determination of fluctuation patterns is divided into a plurality of areas. For each of the areas (determination numbers), a lottery ID (a number indicating the result of the prior determination (also referred to as a "predetermination number")) is assigned. Therefore, the result of this prior determination is in accordance with the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 described later (the result of the determination of success or failure, the result of the symbol determination, the result of the variation pattern determination). It should be noted that the table for the preliminary determination of acceptance or failure, the table for preliminary determination of symbol, etc. may be the same as the lottery table for acceptance or failure, etc. Here, in the variation pattern prior determination table, there is a possibility that the gaming situation (presence or absence of definite variation, presence or absence of time reduction, whether or not during limited frequency period referring to special table, etc. number of holding balls) may change From the point of view, as described above, it is desirable to determine which of the plurality of regions is included. Then, the prior determination means 135 sequentially generates a presentation control command (referred to as a “predetermined event command”) including information on the prior determination result (the prior determination number) and places it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store.

  Special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes special symbol suitability determination means 141, special symbol stop symbol determination means 412, and special symbol variation pattern determination means 143. The special symbol lottery processing means 140, when the variation start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, per random special symbol stored in the first storage area (pending 1 storage area) of the special symbol holding storage area in the main information storage means 180 The numerical value, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number are read out and stored in the special symbol judgment area, the special symbol judgment region, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment region of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, "a variation start condition of a special symbol is satisfied" means, as an example, (1) not being in a big hit or a small hit, (2) both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation It is when all the conditions of being inside, (3) presence of the operation reserving ball in at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, and as a result, the special symbol can start fluctuation State is determined.

  The special symbol compliance determination means 141 reads out the random value per special symbol from the special symbol compliance determination area of the main information storage means 180 and executes the compliance determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of big hit, small hit, and off Decide what to do. The result of this success or failure judgment is temporarily stored in the special symbol judgment flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, off data “00H”), and used in the subsequent processing It is cleared at the time of the stop of the change of the special symbol. Special symbol propriety determination means 141 holds a special symbol propriety lottery table which is referred to at the time of this determination.

  Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol acceptance lottery table, (A) is referred to in a normal state (low probability state), (B) is referred to in a positive change state (high probability state) Ru. In this special symbol hit / lottery table, random symbol values for special symbols, big hit, small hit, judgment result of losing, are associated, and according to the associated random number range, the winning probability of big hit and small hit Is determined. As can be seen from FIG. 5, in the success or failure lottery of the special symbol game, in the normal state (low probability state), it becomes a big hit only when the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163”. On the other hand, the jackpot range is expanded in the probability change state (high probability state), and not only when the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163”, but also when it falls within the range of “164 to 1639” Become. That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the lottery probability of the big hit is varied from the low probability state (1 / 399.6) to the high probability state (1 / 39.96). As described above, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big hit is equal between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Here, even if the random value per special symbol does not fall within the range of the big hit, it will be a small hit if it falls within the predetermined range. In this example, small hits only exist in the first special symbol winning lottery, but for example, small hits are also provided in the second special symbol losing lottery, and from the second special symbol losing lottery Also, the first special symbol may be configured to be a small hit with a higher probability of success or failure lottery.

  The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the symbol group to which the stop symbol belongs based on the result of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Do. The special symbol stop symbol judging means 142 is a symbol table per first special symbol referred to when deciding the stop symbol and symbol group of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the result of the lottery is a big hit It has a symbol table per second special symbol.

  FIG. 6 (A) is a view schematically showing an example of the symbol table per the first special symbol. This first special symbol per symbol table, for a special symbol per symbol random number, stop symbol, symbol group, contents of big hit (number of operations of probability variation function of special symbol and variation time shortening function, the first big prize The operation patterns of the mouth 64 are respectively associated. In addition, the numerical value "100" in a parenthesis means the number of times of operation of the probability variation function of a special symbol and the variation time shortening function, that is, the number of ST. In this table, stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups A and B according to the type of the big hit.

  Specifically, symbol groups A (16R specific short-period fixed symbols) are displayed for symbols "1", "2", "3" and "4", and symbol group B is displayed for symbols "5" and "6". A symbol group C (2R specified short-time exclusive symbol) is associated with each of the symbols “7” and “8” (8R-specific short-period exclusive symbol). In the present embodiment, the “specific symbol” is a symbol that activates the probability variation function after the end of the special game, and the “normal symbol” is that the probability variation function is activated after the end of the special game. There is no symbol (the same applies to the second special symbol described later).

  The symbol groups A and B are so-called “perceivable variation hits” that shift the gaming state after the end of the special game to a definite variation state (high probability state), and the number of times the variation of the special symbol is within the ST number Of the special symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time shortening function, as well as the electronic Chu support function until the next big hit occurs within the ST number of times until it is finished without generating It will be done. For the symbol group A, the specified number of special games is 16 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. For the symbol group B, the specified number of rounds of the special game is eight, and the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  The symbol group C has the opening count and opening time of the first large winning opening 64 different from the above-mentioned "certain hit", but the gaming state after the end of the special game is changed to the special symbol (high probability state) It is a specific symbol that indicates so-called "sudden probability variation hit" to be transferred, and the next big hit will occur in the ST count while the variation count of the special symbol is finished without generating the big hit in the ST count or Until then, the special symbol's probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time shortening function, and the electronic chew support function will be added. The prescribed number of rounds of special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the first large winning opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a small hit, symbol determination based on random numbers per special symbol is omitted, and symbol "9" is uniquely assigned as a stop symbol. A symbol group F (special power operating symbol 1) is associated with the symbol "9". In the case of a small hit, there is no trigger for changing the gaming state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time shortening function, power chute support function) and fluctuation pattern selection state, and the gaming state is maintained before and after the lottery. Be done. In addition, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a loss, the symbol "0" is uniquely assigned as a stop symbol.

  Then, FIG. 6 (B) is a figure which shows typically an example of a 2nd special symbol per symbol table. This second special symbol per symbol table, for a special symbol per symbol symbol random number, stop symbol, symbol group, contents of big hit (number of operations of probability variation function and variation time shortening function of special symbol, second big prize The operation patterns of the ports 65 are associated with one another. In this table, the stop symbols "11" to "18" of the second special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups D and E according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, the symbols "11", "12", "13" and "14" indicate that the symbol group D (16R specific short-time fixed symbol) has symbols "15", "16", "17" and " A symbol group E (8R specific short-term symbol with special symbol) is associated with 18 ".

  The symbol groups D and E are special symbols indicating so-called “perceivable variation hits”, which shift the gaming state after the end of the special game to a definite variation state (high probability state), and the number of times of variation of the special symbol is a large hit within the ST number Of the special symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time shortening function, as well as the electronic Chu support function until the next big hit occurs within the ST number of times until it is finished without generating It will be done. For the symbol group D, the specified number of special games is 16 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the second big winning opening 65 in one round game is about 30 seconds. For the symbol group E, the specified number of rounds of the special game is eight, and the maximum opening time of the second big winning opening 65 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a small hit, symbol determination by random numbers per special symbol is omitted, and symbol "19" is uniquely assigned as a stop symbol. A symbol group G (special electric power operating symbol 2) is associated with the symbol "19". In the case of a small hit, there is no trigger for changing the gaming state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time shortening function, power chute support function) and fluctuation pattern selection state, and the gaming state is maintained before and after the lottery. Be done. In addition, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a loss, the symbol "0" is uniquely assigned as a stop symbol.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, three types of big hit types are provided: 16R big hit (16R specific short main symbol), 8R big hit (8R specific short main symbol) and 2R big hit (2R specific short main symbol) ing. And, the expectation value (winning ball winning expectation value) of winning ball winning in the special game is 16R big hit> 8R big hit> 2R big hit. Therefore, in the following, the 16R big hit is also referred to as the highest "high profit big hit" with the prize ball expected value, and the 2R big hit is also referred to as the "low profit big hit" with the lowest prize ball expected value. In addition, even if the number of long open unit games (30 seconds) and short open unit games (0.05 seconds) are mixed even with the same number of execution rounds, the big hit where many long open unit games exist is “high It will be a profit hit. Specifically, the special game may have a common number of execution rounds, such as unifying the number of execution rounds into 16 rounds, but may include a special game in which the aspect of the unit game changes in a predetermined round. In that case, the special winning game of the type having only a short opening unit game with a relatively short opening time of the special winning opening 64, 65 and the opening time of the special winning opening 64, 65 relative to the predetermined number of execution rounds is relative The game may include a special game of a type that switches to a long long unit game, and the latter constitutes a "high profit jackpot". In addition, even in the big hit of the same number of execution rounds, it may be configured such that the substantial benefit, that is, the winning ball winning expectation value is different due to the difference in the winning opening opening pattern.

  Here, as can be understood from the above description, when the big win in the first special symbol lottery, 16R big hit is selected with a probability of 50%, but the second special symbol If you get a big hit in the lottery, the 16R big hit is selected with a probability of 75%, so it is better to win the second start opening 62 than to win the first start opening 61, more balls coming out It is advantageous to the player in that it can be earned. In the present example, the special game for opening and closing the first large winning opening 64 is executed when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol success or failure, and the second special symbol if it becomes a big hit in the second The special game for opening and closing the 2 large winning a prize opening 65 is to be executed, but it is not limited to this, when it becomes a big hit in the judgment of the first special symbol, the 2nd large winning opening 65 A special game for opening and closing may be executed, or a special game for opening and closing the first large winning opening 64 may be executed when a big hit is made in the determination of the second special symbol. Also, in this case, the special game for opening and closing the second large winning opening 65 is executed in the case of becoming a big hit in the second special symbol's success determination than in the case of the first special symbol's success or failure. The rate at which they are Also, at this time, the player may be set to have a higher degree of advantage for the player to enter the second large winning opening 65 than to enter the first large winning opening 64, for example, per round It may be set to have a high count number, a high expectation for winning balls, a high number of winning balls per ball, and a high entry ease. Further, even when there are a plurality of jackpots with the same number of special games, the substantial profit (expected ball winning expectation value) may be configured to be different due to the difference in the opening pattern of the big winning opening. Note that the count number (prescribed count number) is the maximum number of game balls allowed to enter the large winning opening 64, 65 in unit game.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Here, as shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143 selects any variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state and the result of the acceptance lottery. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. In each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation patterns are defined. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “selectivity” is indicated, but in actuality, the judgment value (range of random number value) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. The variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation pattern random value belongs to. It is premised that the variation time of various variation patterns is determined for each variation pattern as the termination condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation by the decorative symbol composed of a plurality of symbols is also executed in the variation time. Defined as In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, only a plurality of types of variation patterns are described as an example, but there are actually 100 or more types of variation patterns.

  FIG. 7A is a view schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for big hit / small hit. The upper (A1) is a normal variation pattern table, the middle (A2) is a probability variation variation table, and the lower (A3) is a special variation pattern table. In this example, the selected fluctuation pattern is set to be different according to the fluctuation pattern selection state or according to the jackpot type even in the same fluctuation pattern selection state.

  In the normal variation pattern table (A1), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, the variation pattern PX2 (normal reach A) or the variation pattern PX3 (super reach A) is selected and the variation is 8R big hit Either pattern PY2 (normal reach A) or variation pattern PY3 (super reach A) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of 2R big hit or small hit, either the fluctuation pattern PZ2 (normal reach A) or the fluctuation pattern PZ4 (super reach D) is selected. In the normal fluctuation pattern table for the big hit / small hit, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach mode is not selected, and only the fluctuation pattern of the reach mode is selected in the case of the big hit or the small hit in the normal state. obtain.

  In the probability variation variation pattern table (A2), only the variation pattern PX7 (Super Reach B) is selected when the jackpot type is 16R big hit or 8R big hit. On the other hand, in the case of the 2R big hit or the small hit, either the fluctuation pattern PZ6 (normal reach B) or the fluctuation pattern PZ8 (super reach D) is selected. In this big hit / small hit probability variation variation pattern table, the variation pattern of the non-reach mode is not selected, and if it becomes a big hit or a small hit in the probability variation state of the special symbol, only the variation pattern of the reach feature May be selected.

  In the special variation pattern table (A3), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, only the variation pattern PX9 (non reach C) is selected, and when it is 8R big hit, only the variation pattern PY10 (super reach C) is selected Be done. . On the other hand, in the case of the 2R big hit or the small hit, only the variation pattern PZ10 (Super Reach C) is selected. Here, the variation pattern PX9 of the non-reach C mode is configured as a super-shortening variation time (2 seconds), while the variation patterns PY10 and PZ10 of the super reach C mode are configured as relatively long variation times (120 seconds) Be done.

  FIG. 7B is a view schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for disconnection. The upper (B1) is a normal variation pattern table, the middle (B2) is a probability variation variation table, and the lower (B3) is a special variation pattern table. In this example, the selected fluctuation pattern is set to be different according to the fluctuation pattern selection state.

  In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), any of fluctuation pattern PH1 (non reach A), fluctuation pattern PH2 (normal reach A), fluctuation pattern PH3 (super reach A), and fluctuation pattern PH4 (super reach D) is selected . In the probability variation variation pattern table (B2), one of the variation pattern PH5 (non-reach B), variation pattern PH6 (normal reach B), variation pattern PH7 (super reach B), and variation pattern PH8 (super reach D) is selected . In the special variation pattern table (B3), only the variation pattern PH9 (non-reach C) is selected. Here, the variation pattern PH9 of the non-reach C mode is configured as a variation time (2 seconds) of ultrashortening.

  In the above description, the variation pattern table for outliers is expressed as a single table in any case, but when the result of the lottery for the result is out, the number of operation reserved balls of the special symbol ( Different fluctuation pattern tables may be selected depending on 0 to 4). In other words, by using the variation pattern table according to the number of actuation reserved balls of the special symbol, the larger the number of actuation pending balls is, the higher the ratio for which the relatively short variation time is selected. It is possible to increase the rate at which relatively long fluctuation times are selected.

  In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects the variation pattern of the special symbol, and then instructs the effect control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol, thus including the variation control pattern information of the special symbol ( Generate a production control command (referred to as a "pattern designation command") including information on a special pattern (design group) and a game state (hereinafter referred to as "variation pattern designation command") (collectively from these production control commands) And stores the command in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 includes an ordinary symbol suitability determination means 146, an ordinary symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and an ordinary symbol variation pattern determination means 148. The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the random symbol value per normal symbol and the normal symbol variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol storage area when the variation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, The main symbol storage area 180 is stored in the normal symbol suitability determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area, respectively.

  The normal symbol suitability determination means 146 reads out the random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol suitability determination area of the main information storage means 180 and executes the yes / no determination, and the determination result corresponds to either hit or off. decide. The result of the success or failure lottery is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180, and after being used in the subsequent processing, cleared when the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. The normal symbol success / failure determination means 146 holds the normal symbol success / loss lottery table to be referred to in this success / failure lottery, and in a normal state (low probability state), for example, a hit normally with a probability of "160/283" For example, in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the normal symbol with reference to the symbol success lottery table, for example, with reference to the normal symbol success lottery table which will be hit with the probability of "282/283", execute the regular lottery of the normal symbol Do.

  The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to the symbol lottery table and assigns a predetermined hit symbol if the result of the success or failure lottery is a hit, but assigns a predetermined lost symbol if it is an offset. It has become.

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148 reads out the normal symbol variation pattern random number value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 and refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table to display the variation of the normal symbol in the normal state. In (1), a relatively long fluctuation time is selected (for example, 7 kinds of "4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, 10 seconds" are uniformly selected, respectively). On the other hand, a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, "0.5 seconds") is selected in the time-shortened state of the ordinary symbol (the ball entry easy state). In the control of the normal symbol game, in order to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100, in the non-power chew support state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set to "0" or the variation time of the normal symbol It is also conceivable to adopt a specification that makes a single.

  The special game control means 150 relates to the start demonstration effect and the end demonstration effect displayed on the effect display device 70 or the like during the special game according to the type of the determined big hit, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a big hit. Determine the demonstration time. In addition, the special game control means 150 instructs the effect control board 200 side to execute a start demonstration effect (referred to as a "big hit start demonstration command") and an effect to instruct execution of an end demonstration effect. A control command (referred to as a “big hit end demo command”) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The jackpot start demonstration command also serves as a trigger for determining the contents of a series of jackpot effects (start demonstration effect, round effect, end demonstration effect) developed during the special game on the effect control board 200 side. In addition, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “round effect designation command”) for instructing start of a round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game in a special game. This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds, information on the opening and closing of the large winning opening 64, 65, information on detection of the large winning opening switch 641, 651, and the like. In addition, with regard to the demonstration time, not only the big hit symbol but also the same big hit symbol depending on the gaming state (usually medium or short) during the big hit if the big hit start demonstration or the big hit end demonstration demo time is different You may

  In addition, the special game control means 150, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a small hit, during the small hit game demo demonstration time according to the small hit start demonstration effect and the small hit end demonstration effect displayed on the effect display device 70 etc decide. In addition, special game control means 150, production control command ("small hitting start demonstration command") which instructs execution of small hitting start demonstration production, production control command which instructs execution of small hitting end demonstration production ("small hitting An end demonstration command “) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 71 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and confirms the first special symbol after the variation display. Let Further, the special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol to be variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 72 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is displayed after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, final display time) relating to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operation states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage unit 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the display of the decorative symbol at the time of stopping the variation of the special symbol (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol gaming timer becomes "0"). To generate an effect control command (referred to as a "variable stop command"). The ordinary symbol display control means 157 causes the ordinary symbol to be variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 75 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol, and also causes the ordinary symbol to be determined and displayed after the fluctuation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, final display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operation state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage unit 180.

  If the result of the lottery of special symbols is a big hit, the electric role control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric role solenoids 643, 653 as a special game processing after the final display of the special symbol, and the special role processing special The motorized components 642, 652 are opened in accordance with a predetermined operation pattern. In special game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric character 642, 652 is regarded as one round game, and the round game is continuously executed for the prescribed number of rounds (in this example, 16R, 8R, 2R) It is. The motorized prize control means 160 holds a big winning opening opening counter for storing the number of times of operation of the special motorized prizes 642, 652 (ie, the number of rounds being executed). Here, if the big hit type is the so-called 16R big hit (symbol group A, D) or 8R big hit (symbol group B, E), the first big winning opening 64 or the second big winning opening in one round game Allow 65 to open for up to about 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the big hit type is a so-called 2R big hit (symbol group C), the first big winning opening 64 is opened for about 0.05 seconds at maximum in one round game. Here, the closing condition (end condition of the unit game) of the special winning opening 64, 65 in the special game is the lapse of the winning of the game ball of the specified count number or the openable period of the specified second number.

  In addition, when the result of the lottery of special symbol turns into a small hit, the electric role control means 160 controls the special electric position solenoid 643, 653 as a small hit game processing after the final display of the special symbol. Output the special motorized components 642 and 652 for a short period of time. A small hit game is distinguished from a special game (big hit game) consisting of a plurality of round games in that the small hit game is made up of one round game. Here, when comparing the 2R special game and the small hit game described above, although they are different internally, the same point in one open / close time (0.05 second) and the same open / close times are the same (the former Since one opening and closing is common to two rounds of two rounds and the latter is two rounds per opening and round two rounds), the game of an open time and opening pattern similar in appearance is unfolded.

  In addition, when the winning combination lottery of the normal symbol is won, the motorized prize control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary motorized prize solenoid 623 to open the ordinary motorized prize 622 for a predetermined opening time. Here, the electric part control means 160 opens the ordinary electric part 622 for a very short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the normal state, whereas in the easy entering state (the electric chow support state) the ordinary electric part 622 The item 622 is opened for a relatively long time (eg, 4 seconds) as compared to the normal state.

  The game state control means 165 determines the game state after the end of the special game based on the type of the symbol group pertaining to the big hit, when the result of the lottery of special symbols is a big hit, and after the end of the special game Switch the game state of. In the following, among various functions relating to the special symbol and the normal symbol described above, 1) the gaming state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the power chew support function operate is referred to as "probable variation state", 2) A game state in which only the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chow support function operate is referred to as "time saving state", and 3) a game state in which only the special symbol probability fluctuation function is activated is referred to as "latency probability change state" 4) A state in which all functions are not activated is referred to as a "normal state". Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, since it is a so-called ST machine with limited number of times, in the gaming state after the end of the special game, the variation number of the special symbol is counted from the end of the special game, the predetermined number of ending times, That is, until the ST number is reached, the definite variation state continues (However, when the next big hit occurs within the ST number, the definite variation state ends at the fluctuation). When the small hit occurs during the ST period, the ST number is not reset to 0 (revived), and the ST number is continuously counted before and after the occurrence of the small hit. In the present embodiment, the number of times ST is set to 100, but of course it may be set to another number. In addition, when it shifts to the definite change state, the probability change function of the special symbol, the change time shortening function of the special symbol, and the electric chow support function operate at the same time, and each function also continues as long as the positive change state continues. Become. In addition, if the result of the lottery of special symbol is a big hit, regardless of the game state before the big hit is either the normal state or the probability change state, it is the normal state during the special game and ST after the special game It becomes definite variation state uniformly to the limit. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, if the gaming state before the small hit is a normal state, the gaming state in the small hit game and after the small hit game will also be a normal state. In addition, when the gaming state before the small hit is a definite variation state of the special symbol, the gaming state during the small hitting game and after the small hitting game also becomes the definite variation state of the special symbol. It should be noted that the “probable change state”, the “time reduction state”, and the “latency change state” are all advantageous game states for the player as compared to the “normal state”. In addition, in the following, each gaming state, the combination of the operating state of the special symbol game (high probability / low probability) and the operating state of the normal symbol game (with open extension / without open extension) (1) probability variation state "High Probability / Open Extension", (2) Time Short State "Low Probability / Open Extension", (3) Latent Probability Change State "High Probability / Non-Open Extension", (4) Normal State "Low Probability / Unopened It may be called "extension".

  Further, when the result of the lottery is a big hit, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the special game based on the type (type of symbol group A to E) of the big hit, as well as the special Switch the variation pattern selection state after the game. The variation pattern selection state is one of the conditions referred to when selecting the above-mentioned variation pattern table. The switching timing of the variation pattern selection state is at the end of the special game or when the number of terminations of the variation pattern selection state has expired. In the present embodiment, there are three types of fluctuation pattern selection states such as “low probability normal fluctuation state α”, “high probability shortening fluctuation state β”, and “high probability special fluctuation state γ”. Here, the low probability normal fluctuation state α refers to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the normal fluctuation pattern table (A1, B1 in FIG. 7) selected when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state). It is a state to decide. The high probability shortening fluctuation state β refers to the probability variation fluctuation pattern table (A2, B2 in FIG. 7) selected when the gaming state is the probability variation state of the special symbol (except for the limited period described later), and the special symbol It is a state of determining the fluctuation pattern. The high probability special fluctuation state γ is the number of times of symbol fluctuation corresponding to the maximum number (four) of the operation holding balls of the second special symbol after the gaming state is the definite variation state of the special symbol and immediately after the end of the special game. (4 times) Over the fluctuation display: In the state where the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the special fluctuation pattern table (A3, B3 in Fig. 7) where selection is allowed only for the "limited period". is there. In this embodiment, even when any of the symbol groups A to D is selected, the variation pattern selection state is (1) immediately after the end of the special game, the high probability special variation state γ only for the limited period of four symbol variations. Stay, (2) after the end of the limited period, and when the number of times of execution is within the ST number (100 times), stay in the high probability shortening fluctuation state β, (3) after the end of the ST number, ie, As the number of times of execution, after the 101st time, it stays in the low probability normal fluctuation state γ. Of course, the period until the first hit occurs is to stay in the low probability normal fluctuation state α. In addition, the gaming state control means 165 generates a production control command (referred to as a "gaming state designation command") including the current gaming state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores this in the command of the main information storage means 180. Store in the area.

  The error monitoring control means 170 monitors input information of the I / O port circuit 104, and inspects a magnetic detection signal by a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short circuit power source abnormality signal, a radio wave detection signal by a radio wave sensor, a door / frame open signal, etc. , It is determined whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, in order to indicate an error state effect on the effect control board 200, an effect control command ("error effect designating command") including the error information is requested. In addition, although description is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. 3, a door open switch is a means to detect whether the glass frame 5 is open, and a frame open switch is a means to detect whether the front frame 2 is open. The back set opening switch is a means for detecting whether or not the back setting board 30 is open. The magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are so-called detection means for detecting so-called goto action.

  The main information storage unit 180 is random number value information acquired in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, the operation holding ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, and the gaming state related to the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game Information on entering the ball easy state, information on the variation pattern selection state, result information of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, off) information on stop symbols and variation patterns pertaining to special symbols and normal symbols, information on special games (round Number, opening time, opening mode (number of opening per round game, etc.), status information indicating the operating status of the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, status information indicating the operating status of the special electric symbol 642, effect control command It is configured to temporarily store data information and the like, and has a predetermined storage area for storing each information.

  The command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the effect control board 200 by parallel transmission when there is a command transmission request. It is done. Each effect control command has a 2-byte structure including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. In order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 of MOD data is “1”, Bit7 of EVENT data is "0". When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output for each of MODE and EVENT. The effect control command generated in each process is, in principle, transmitted as one command for each interrupt cycle in the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The effect control board 200 is, as shown in FIG. 4, an effect lottery random number generation means 210, an effect control means 220, a lamp effect control means 230, a feature effect control means 240, an error effect control means 250, and a sub main information storage means 260. , Command transmitting / receiving means 270. The above-described means in the effect control board 200 are constituted by the sub main CPU 201, the ROM 202, the RAM 203, the hardware such as the electronic circuit disposed on the effect control board 200, and the software such as the control program stored in the ROM 202. Is a functional expression of

  The effect lottery random number generation means 210 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub main CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. As this software random number, pre-reading notice lottery random number which is used for drawing of the execution possibility of pre-reading notice production, pre-reading notice pattern random number which is used for selection of pre-reading notice pattern, decoration design random number which is used for selection of stop design of decoration design, decoration Variation production pattern random number used to select the variation production pattern of the pattern, notice production pattern random number used to select the notice production pattern, big hit production pattern random number used for selection of the big hit production pattern, whether or not to hold in consecutive reservation effects It includes a continuous random effect production random number used for a lottery, a continuous continuous character effect pattern random number used to select a continuous local effects pattern of on-hold internal continuous effects effects, and the like. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when the command analysis is not performed in the effect control side main processing described later.

  The effect supervising means 220 includes the effect mode control means 221, the hold information display control means 222, the advance notice control means 223, the decoration symbol determining means 224, the change effect determining means 225, the notice effect determining means 226, and the big hit effect determining means 227. Including.

  The holding information display control means 222 is a first holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol, and a second number holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. Have. When the holding information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the first holding sphere number counter and the second holding sphere number counter are based on the information of the operation holding sphere number included in the symbol storage number command. Update the value of the number counter. Further, the holding information display control means 222 causes the holding display portions 701 and 702 of the effect display device 70 to hold the operation holding balls of the first special symbol based on the values of the first holding ball number counter and the second holding ball number counter. Control is performed to display the number of reserved images corresponding to the number and the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol. In the normal display mode, while the white-displayed reserve image is displayed when the operation reserve ball of the special symbol is generated, it becomes the target of the advance notice when the reserve change look-ahead notice effect described next is executed. The reserved image can take one of "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow" as a special display mode (display color) from "white" in the normal display mode (display color) . The above four kinds of special display modes are related to the reliability that the lottery result is a big hit (referred to as "big hit reliability"), and "blue", "green", "red" and "rainbow" It is set so that the big hit reliability becomes high one by one in order. In this example, when the reserve image changes to "rainbow color", the big hit becomes definite in the action reserve ball of the prefetch target. Note that in the pending change pre-reading advance notice effect, the change in the display mode of the pending image may be expressed not by the display color but by a shape, a pattern, or the like.

  Pre-read notice control means 223 determines whether or not to execute pre-read notice by lottery at the time of receiving the pre-determination command from main control board 100. The prefetch notice control means 223 distinguishes the information of the prior determination result of the first special symbol and the information of the prior decision result of the second special symbol, and enters the ball for the operation holding ball up to a predetermined upper limit number (four) respectively. It is temporarily stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 in a form combined with the order. This prefetch information storage area has the same configuration as the pending storage area of the main control board 100, and the pending 1 storage area (the first pending storage area) in the order of ball entry into the starting ports 61 and 62, A reserve 2 storage area (second reserve storage area), a reserve 3 storage area (third reserve storage area), and a reserve 4 storage area (fourth reserve storage area) are provided. Each of the pending storage areas can store information on the result of the preliminary determination of the success or failure, information on the result of the preliminary determination of the symbol, and information on the result of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern as one set.

  When the advance notice control means 223 determines whether or not to execute the advance notice, based on the result of the pre-judgment by the main control board 100, the action judgment ball targeted for this advance notice is judged beforehand (“preread judgment”). (Also referred to as In the present embodiment, the pre-reading advance notice includes a normal pre-reading advance notice and a special pre-reading advance notice (represented in-president rendition effect described later). The normal pre-reading advance notice is generated as one mode of so-called continuous advance notice effect of giving notice of the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit or reach effect over a plurality of continuous change displays of the decorative symbol. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect (continuous advance notice effect) is executable, the information of the pre-determination command from the main control board 100 (result of the pre-judgment) and the information of the symbol memory number command (the number of existing operation pending balls) After analysis, an advance notice effect pattern for a plurality of continuous variable displays is determined by lottery for the operation holding ball (referred to as “trigger hold”) serving as a trigger for generating the advance notice effect of this time. Note that there are various variations in the normal advance notice, such as a pending change advance notice effect, a chance eye advance notice effect, and a background change advance notice effect. On the other hand, the special pre-reading advance notice corresponds to a pending inside-raku effect that suggests or informs that there may be an operation-reserved ball that becomes a big hit when the big hit is won. Hereinafter, the outline of "pending Uchirenso effect" will be described.

  First of all, when "preceding in-line Uranzo" is a big hit as a result of determination of success or failure of a certain preceding operation holding ball, it is permitted from the time of end of the special game after the permission judgment on the operation holding ball is permitted In one or more subsequent operation reserving balls existing at a predetermined timing within a specific period of, there is an operation reserving ball (also referred to as “specific reserving”) scheduled to be a big hit. In the following, among the subsequent operation reserving balls, an operation reserving ball scheduled to become out of place is also referred to as "removal holding", and an operation reserving sphere scheduled to be a small hit is also referred to as "small hit reserving" .

  In this embodiment, so-called preferential digestion is adopted, which preferentially digests the action-retention ball of the second special symbol over the action-retention ball of the first special symbol, and the subsequent action to be subjected to a hold-in connection As a holding ball (specific holding), it targets the operation holding ball of the second special symbol. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the preferential digestion for preferentially digesting the operation retaining ball of the second special symbol is adopted, the pending inside-train unit is selected when the preceding operation retaining ball is won by the big hit. It occurs on the premise that the gaming state is the specific gaming state. The “special game state” is a state in which the transition probability to the special game is higher than that in the normal state, and at least one of the special symbol probability fluctuation function, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chow support function. It is the state in which the function of In this example, at least the power chute support function (ball-loading easy state) is activated as a specific gaming state. Here, in the present embodiment, during the ST period after the end of the special game, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the power chew support function are activated (at the same time, the operation is started and the operation is ended). Because of the configuration, it can be said that during the ST period, it is always in the specific gaming state. . In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is in the normal state, if the result of the pass / fail determination is a definite change jackpot (if the special gaming state is to be transitioned to after the end of the special game), the subsequent Even if the specific hold exists in the operation hold ball, it is configured such that the hold inside row effect is not generated during the special game.

  Subsequently, “pending Uchi-Ranso effect” is an effect for suggesting or notifying that it is a Pending-Uchi-Ranso. In this pending in-line rowing effect, the first in-row rowing effect (referred to as "in-row row effect A") that occurs during symbol variation and the second in-row row that occurs in special games It includes an effect (referred to as "pending in-line consecutive effect B"). In addition, in this embodiment, although both the 1st on-premise in-line effect and the 2nd in-on effect are provided, any one in-on effect may be provided. .

  Whether or not the pending in-line effect A is to be executed is determined by drawing if the first execution condition is satisfied at the timing at which the preceding operation pending ball is digested. In this embodiment, on the premise that the preceding operation holding ball is a high profit big hit (16R big hit), the specific holding which is a high profit big hit (16R big hit) in the subsequent operation holding ball is the first specific holding. When it is included, the first execution condition is satisfied. In other words, even if there is a specific hold (= hold scheduled to become a big hit) in the subsequent operation hold, if the big hit type pertaining to that specific hold is not a high profit big hit, the hold inside consecutive villa effect A Not run. Further speaking, "under a situation where there are multiple specific suspension within the operation suspension, the big hit type related to the first specific suspension is not a high profit big hit and the big hit type related to the next specific suspension is a high profit big hit Even in the case, the on-premises in-line consecutive effect A is not executed. Therefore, in the present example, when the pending in-line consecutive direction effect A occurs, it becomes definite that the high-end jackpot (16R big hit) makes the pending in-line lasting. In addition, even if a specific hold that will be a high profit jackpot (16R big hit) is included as the first specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, the reserve scheduled for digestion will be "the loss before the specific hold" Even in the case of a specific variation pattern (if it is a variation pattern for a predetermined time or more, for example, a variation pattern other than the shortest variation time or a variation pattern related to reach) is to be selected, A may not be executed.

  Whether or not the on-hold on-line consecutive effect B is to be executed is determined by lottery when the second execution condition is satisfied at the timing before the start of the special game. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the preceding operation reserving ball is a high profit big hit (16R big hit), and in the subsequent operation reserving ball except that the specific reserving is included in the subsequent operation reserving ball, Even in this case, the second execution condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when the pending in-line consecutive effect B is generated, it is not determined that the on-hold in-line continuous effect is, and in some cases, so-called "gasse" effect may be obtained. In addition, you may employ | adopt the structure from which a pending | prescribed in-line succession becomes definite, as with the in-stage in-line continuation effect A, when a pending in-line succession effect B generate | occur | produces. In addition, you may employ | adopt the structure from which a pending | prescribed in-line succession becomes definite, as with the in-stage in-line continuation effect A, when a pending in-line succession effect B generate | occur | produces. In addition, also in pending U-Ran effects B, as with the pending U-R elements C, it is premised that the preceding operation holding ball will be a high profit jackpot (16R big hit), and high profit within the subsequent operation holding ball The second execution condition may be satisfied when a specific hold to be a big hit (16R big hit) is included as the first specific hold. In other words, even if there is a specific hold (= hold scheduled to become a big hit) in the subsequent operation hold, if the jackpot type pertaining to the specific hold is not a high profit big hit, then the pending internal connection effect B is Not run. Further speaking, "under a situation where there are multiple specific suspension within the operation suspension, the big hit type related to the first specific suspension is not a high profit big hit and the big hit type related to the next specific suspension is a high profit big hit Even in the case, the on-premises in-line effect B is not executed. Therefore, in this case, when the pending in-line consecutive direction effect B occurs, it becomes definite that the high-end jackpot (16R big hit) makes the pending in-line lasting. In addition, even if a specific hold that will be a high profit jackpot (16R big hit) is included as the first specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, the reserve scheduled for digestion will be "the loss before the specific hold" Even in the case of a specific variation pattern (if it is a variation pattern for a predetermined time or more, for example, a variation pattern other than the shortest variation time or a variation pattern related to reach) is to be selected, The configuration may be such that B is not executed.

  The prefetch advance notice control unit 223 refers to the information of the prior determination result stored in the prefetch information storage area (pending 1 storage area, pending 2 storage area, pending 3 storage area, pending 4 storage area) of the sub main information storage unit 260 Then, the prefetch determination is performed in the order of the pending 1 storage area → pending 2 storage area → pending 3 storage area → pending 4 storage area, that is, from the first one among the subsequent operation pending balls, When a plurality of specific holdings are included in the operation holding ball, only the first specific holding is targeted in the pre-reading determination of the holding internal combination effects A, while the pre-reading determination of the holding internal compound effects B Let's target multiple specific holds. In other words, while the number of specific reservations notified in the reservation internal arrangement effect is always one, the number of specific reservations indicated in the internal arrangement effect B is not limited to one and a plurality There are also possible times.

  Subsequently, the rendering content (referred to as a “roster pattern production pattern”) of the on-premises rink effect is determined on the basis of the magic pattern pattern table. In the present example, a plurality of types of continuous rendering effect pattern tables to be referred to when determining the continuous rendering effect pattern are held.

  FIG. 8 (A) shows a linked pattern for creating a linked pattern when selecting a linked pattern for a reserved channel linked to the linked effect “A”, and FIG. It is a multi-story effect pattern table to be referred to when making A plurality of continuous play effect patterns are defined in each continuous play effect pattern table, and the contents of the effect and the execution timing are determined corresponding to each continuous play effect pattern. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “selectivity” is described, but in actuality, a judgment value (range of random value values) for determining a continuous effect pattern according to a continuous effect pattern random value. Is set, and based on which judgment value the continuous rendering effect pattern random value belongs to, the continuous rendering effect pattern is determined. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the effect images AX and BX are prepared as specific effect modes of on-hold on-line consecutive effects, but the “effect image” is composed of still images An effect image, an effect image composed of moving images, and an effect image composed of both still images and moving images can be exemplified.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a plurality of effect patterns PA1 and PA2 are defined in the effect pattern table of the on-premises consecutive effect A effect. When the consecutive pattern effect pattern PA1 is selected, a special effect image “AX1” which does not appear in any scene other than the reserved in-line consecutive condition effect is displayed during the change of the decorative symbol. As shown in FIG. 9A, as the effect image AX1, for example, an effect in which a shooting star crosses the screen while the decorative symbol changes is applicable. When the consecutive pattern production pattern P2 is selected, as the final stop design of the decoration design, as shown in FIG. An effect in which “S · S” is fixedly displayed corresponds.

  In the present example, the pending U-line directing effect A is that the preceding operation retaining ball is a high profit big hit (16R specific big hit) and is a high profit big hit (16 R specific big hit) in the subsequent operation pending ball Occurs only if a specific hold is scheduled. Therefore, it is determined that the high profit jackpot is continuous at the time of the occurrence of the pending inner row effect A.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, a plurality of effect patterns PB1 to PB9 are defined in the effect pattern table of the pending internal connection effect B. When the effect pattern PB1 is selected, a special effect image “BX1” which does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold in-place effect is displayed during the start demonstration effect. As shown in FIG. 9C, in the start demonstration effect, character information "bonus" is displayed as the effect image BX1. Further, when the effect patterns PB2 to PB7 are selected, a special effect image "BX2" which does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold in-line effect is displayed during the round effect. As shown in FIG. 9D, as the effect image BX2, for example, an effect in which one image imitating a copy book appears on the screen corresponds to the effect image BX2. When the effect pattern PB8 is selected, a special effect image "BX3" which does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold in-line consecutive effect is displayed during the round effect. As shown in FIG. 9E, as the effect image BX3, for example, an effect in which two images imitating a mystery book appear on the screen. Note that this effect pattern PB8 may be selected when there are a plurality of specific suspension within the subsequent operation suspension ball. Further, when the effect pattern PB9 is selected, a special effect image “BX4” which does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold in-line effect during the end demonstration effect is displayed. As shown in FIG. 9 (F), in the end demonstration effect, character information "Omoku-no-Rusetsu" is displayed as the effect image BX4.

  As described above, the pending inner row effect B is generated in any of the start demonstration effect, the round effect, and the demonstration end effect in a series of processes of the jackpot effect. In addition, there may be a case where only one time (a single round) occurs and a case where a plurality of times (a plurality of rounds) occur within a plurality of round effects. In the present example, when the pending motion continuous ball is included in the subsequent motion pending ball on the premise that the preceding motion pending ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R specific big hit) In addition, it may occur even if no specific hold is included in the subsequent operation hold ball (ie, only the release hold). That is, the effect patterns PB1 and PB9 selected as the pending internal connection effect B that occur during the start demonstration effect and during the end demonstration effect can be selected only when the specific hold (one) is included. Because there is, while it corresponds to the effect of notifying the decision of the pending Uranso, the effect patterns PB2 to PB8 selected as the pending Uranastero effect B generated during the round effect are the specific suspension (one, Not only when 2 pieces are included, but because it can be selected even when no specific hold is included, it corresponds to an effect that indicates the possibility of holding inside a row. Therefore, even if a mystery book (one or two) appears as a pending Uchirenso effect B, the pending Uchisenso is not necessarily determined, but when the pending Uchisenso effect B pertaining to the particular right book occurs If there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball (if the notification for the pending in-line is true) and if if the specific hold does not exist (if the notification for the in-hold on-line is Gasse) It can occur alternatively. In addition, the effect patterns PB2 to PB7 selected as the pending internal connection effect B generated during the round effect may be selected when one specific pending is included or when the specific pending is not included. Therefore, the effect image BX2 corresponding to this can notify only the possibility that one specific hold is included in the subsequent operation hold ball, whereas the effect pattern PB8 has a plurality of specific hold As it may be selected if it is included or not included in the specific suspension, the corresponding effect image "BX3" may have a possibility that a plurality of specific suspension is included in the subsequent operation retaining ball. It can be informed. That is, the number of specific holdings included in the subsequent operation holding balls is suggested to the player in a form corresponding to the number of the right notes.

  In addition, when a special hit is generated in each of the preceding operation holding ball and the subsequent operation holding ball, a plurality of special games may be generated in a short period of time when the holding inner row effect is generated. When scheduled, on the appearance, special continuous effects are generated to make the plurality of special game states appear as one special game state. In other words, the special continuous effect is actually made to appear as if the special game continues even during this symbol change effect despite the fact that the special game is temporarily ended and the symbol change effect is shifted. It is. In this example, two big hits are assumed as a plurality of big hits for convenience of explanation. Here, the big hit and the special game based on the preceding operation holding ball are also referred to as "the first big hit" and "the first special game", and the big hit and the special game based on the subsequent operation holding ball are "the next big hit" and Also called "special game of".

  Special special effects are at least symbol demonstration effects (“special symbol fluctuation effects”) that occur between the end demonstration effect (“special end demonstration effect”) in the special game earlier and the special game later and the special game later And a start demonstration effect (“special start demonstration effect”) in a later special game are continuously connected. Specifically, a special end demonstration effect, a special symbol variation effect, and a special start demonstration effect are executed as a series of continuous effects, and an effect having a consistent story in the effects from the first special game to the second special game. By setting the content, the relevant presentation content, or a series of moving image display, it can be shown as one special game continued by the first special game and the second special game. By the way, with this effect, in the special end demonstration effect in the previous big hit, unlike the normal end demonstration effect, the message to tell the end of the special game is not displayed, and similarly, the special start demo effect in the later big hit However, unlike the normal start demonstration effect, a message telling the start of the special game is not displayed. In addition, as a variation described above, the special continuous effect is constructed by continuously connecting the end demonstration effect in the special game above and one or more symbol fluctuation effects up to the symbol fluctuation effect relating to the later big hit It may be

  In this example, the execution condition of the special continuous performance is that the first big hit is high profit big hit (16R specified big hit) and the second big hit is high profit big hit (16R specified big hit), that is, the preceding activated hold ball It is that 16R big hit is included as the first specific pending in the following operation pending ball on the premise that is won by 16 R big hit. In addition, when all the following operation pending balls are only suspension of disapproval, or when 8R big hit is included as the first specific pending in the subsequent operation pending balls, special continuous effect as so-called gusset effect End in the middle.

  The special symbol variation effect which constitutes a part of the special continuous effect is generated within a limited period immediately after the end of the special game. Therefore, the content of the special symbol variation presentation is based on a variation presentation pattern (referred to as a "special variation presentation pattern") selected while staying in the special presentation mode. In the present example, the special variation presentation pattern is selected only when the lottery result is the 16R big hit or the loss. That is, in this limited period, when the 16R big hit or fall off, a special fluctuation effect occurs in which the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds (of the shortest fluctuation time in this example) shorter than the average fluctuation time. The special variation production pattern is selected even in the case of a loss, if the first specific hold (16R big hit) is not necessarily the first in the subsequent operation hold ball, and if there is a gap hold between them However, it is because it is necessary to connect by special variation production until the first specific hold (16R big hit) is digested. Specifically, on the main control board 100 side, transition is made to the high probability special variation state γ within the limited period after the special game, and the special variation pattern table is referred to in the selection of the variation pattern of the special symbol. In the special variation pattern table, special variation patterns PX9 and PH9 are selected, each of which is a variation time (2 seconds) which is extremely shortened, in the case of a 16R big hit or a break. On the side of the effect control board 200, while staying in the special effect mode, the above-mentioned special change effect pattern is selected in association with the change patterns PX9 and PH9, and the special change effect is executed. Thus, as a reason for configuring the special variation effect from the extremely shortening variation time (2 seconds), the variation effect occurring between the first special game and the second special game is shortened, and the first special game is performed. In order to connect seamlessly with the special game after.

  In addition, when the subsequent operation reserving balls are all off, special fluctuation effects occur during the limited period, but the subsequent big hit (16R big hit) does not occur, and special continuous effects are en route by the end of the limited period. It ends with (it becomes so-called production effect). On the other hand, if the subsequent big hit is the 8R big hit, super reach production is revealed during the limited period, and the special continuous production is ended in this way (it becomes so-called gasse production), the occurrence of high profit big hit Is also denied. Therefore, within the limited period, when the result of the lottery is the 16R big hit as the variation production pattern, only the ultra-shortened variation mode (special variation production: 2 seconds) is selected, while the 8R big hit Since only the long-time fluctuation mode (super reach production: 90 seconds) is selected, it is denied that the high profit jackpot is executed when the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol develops to reach production. In addition, when all the following operation pending balls are only suspension of the release, or when the 8R big hit is included as the first specific pending in the subsequent operation pending balls, the special continuous effect should not be executed. It may be configured (i.e., special continuous rendition is generated only when the first specific hold is a 16R big hit). In that case, it is preferable that the specification is such that the on-premises in-line arrangement is determined by the occurrence of the on-off in-line succession effects B without including the gasse effect in the on-hold in-line succession effect B.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special continuous effect includes a pseudo count effect which occurs in a round effect in a special game to be performed later. The pseudo count effect is displayed by adding the number of rounds and the number of prize balls obtained in the previous special game to the number of rounds and the number of prize balls obtained in the later special game (described in detail later).

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are the following constraint conditions for executing the on-hold in-line effect and the special continuous effect (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38).

  1-1) If the on-premises in-line consecutive effect A occurs during the symbol variation display based on the consumption of the preceding operation holding ball, the on-off in-line continuous effect B does not occur during the special game after the change indication. The reason for this is that if the pending internal connection effect B is generated again during the special game, the pending internal connection number of times (the number of specific holdings present in the subsequent operation holding ball) is also one. Regardless of whether there are multiple times, there is a fear of causing the player to misunderstand, and in this example, the player is worried about whether the pending in-line event will actually occur because it is a pending in-line event effect B which is not a fixed notification effect. It is because there is a possibility of making me remember. In addition, even if the pending internal connection effect A occurs during the symbol variation display based on the consumption of the preceding operation holding ball, after the variable display, the internal response effect B is generated during the special game. In this case, it is preferable to configure the on-hold U-link effect B as a fixed notification effect on-off.

  1-2) In the case where the in-place interlocking effect A occurs during the symbol variation display based on the digestion of the preceding operation retaining ball, the in-place interlocking symbol is displayed during the symbol variation display when the subsequent in-operation retaining ball is digested The effect A does not occur again. This is that even when trying to show two special game states as one special game state with the generation of special continuous effects, there is a pending internal connection effect A as a symbol variation effect during execution of this special continuous effect. Then, it is because there is a possibility that the meaning of concealing that it is under symbol change production may be overwhelmed. In addition, when the special continuous rendition is started triggered by the occurrence of the pending inner rendition effect A, the fluctuation time when the subsequent operation reserving ball is digested during this special continuous rendition (within the limited period) is a very short time Since it is set to (2 seconds), the rendering effect is low even if the on-hold on-line continuous effect A is generated within this short time, and the on-time in-on direct on-time effect and the special continuous effect conflict with each other It is because the effect may be diluted.

  1-3) In the case where the pending internal connection effect A is generated during the variable display based on the digestion of the preceding active holding ball, the pending internal connection during the big hit presentation when the subsequent active holding ball becomes a big hit The effect B can occur. This is because the player feels that the normal on-hold in-line continuous effect B has occurred if it is generated during the big hit effect even during the special continuous effect, and a sense of discomfort can not be generated. In addition, since the special continuous rendition is to connect at least a series of effects from the end demonstration rendition during the big hit rendition ahead to the start demonstration rendition during the big hit later, after the end of the special continuous rendition (that is, This is because, if the on-hold U-Ran effect is generated at the timing after the round effect in the special game, there is no problem that the on-off U-Ran effect and the special continuous effect conflict with each other.

  Based on the game state designation command from the main control board 100, the effect mode control means 221 controls the transition of the effect mode in the form of consistency with the gaming state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. Run. In this embodiment, the normal effect mode α, the probability variation effect mode β, and the special effect mode γ are included as three types of effect modes, and the variation patterns of the special symbols instructed from the main control board 100 are the same. Also, variation effect patterns (described in detail later) for specifying specific contents of symbol variation effects are set to be different for each effect mode. In the effect display device 70, an effect mode notification image (in this example, a background image to be displayed on the back of the decorative symbol) corresponding to the effect mode currently in stay is displayed, and the background images are different for each effect mode Since the setting is made, the player can recognize which one of the effect modes currently in stay is from the type of the background image.

  An outline of each effect mode is given. First, the normal effect mode α is set when the low probability normal fluctuation state α is selected as the fluctuation pattern selection state on the main control substrate 100 side, and “normal background” is displayed as the background image. The probability variation presentation mode β is set when the high probability shortening variation status β is selected as the variation pattern selection status on the main control substrate 100 side, and “probability background” is displayed as the background image. The special effect mode γ is set when the high probability special fluctuation state γ is selected as the fluctuation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side. In this special effect mode, stay for a period of four times (limited period) immediately after the end of the special game as a limit, and when the limited period is exceeded, transition to the probability change effect mode β. If the on-premises on-hold effect B is generated during the special game, that is, if the continuous change effect is being executed, “special background” is displayed as the background image. This special background is common to the background display in the special start demonstration effect and the special end demonstration effect, and as the common background display is performed as a series of processes in the special continuous presentation, it is an element of the special continuous presentation Also works. On the other hand, if the on-hold in-line effect B is not generated during the special game, that is, if the continuous change effect is not executed, the “probable change background” common to the probability change effect mode is displayed as a background image.

  The decorative symbol determination means 224 is a combination of the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol (left symbol, middle symbol,...) Based on the information (variation pattern information, character effect number information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100. Determine the left symbol) by lottery. In this example, three symbol rows including multiple types of decorative symbols are configured. This decorative pattern is formed of, for example, identification elements consisting of numbers or letters. In this example, all ten types such as the numbers “1” to “9” and the letter “S” are set as identification elements. Each decorative symbol is circulated in the display areas Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” →... → “8” → “9” → “S” according to the arrangement of symbol rows Display.

  In addition, the decorative symbol determination means 224 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables to be referred to when the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. As the plurality of types of tables, there are a stop symbol pattern table for big hit, a stop symbol pattern table for small hit, a stop symbol pattern table for reach loose, a stop symbol pattern table for non reach loose, and the like. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and includes a "stop symbol (big hit symbol) showing a big hit" and a "stop symbol (drop symbol) showing a loose". A big hit symbol indicating a specific big hit (probable variation big hit) is a combination of stop modes in which three identical odd-numbered symbols are aligned (for example, “7 · 7 · 7”). A big hit symbol indicating a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) is a combination of stop modes in which three identical even-numbered symbols are aligned (e.g., "2.2.2"). The off symbols are a combination of stop modes (for example, “1 · 3 · 8”) in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol of a number different from other numbers. Here, out of reach symbols out of reach reach symbols are combinations of stop modes in which only the middle symbol is shifted several frames forward and back (for example, "3 · 1 · 3") with left symbol and right symbol matched. Become. In addition, in the case of "stop symbol (small hit symbol) showing small hit" or 2R big hit symbol even if it is a big hit symbol, it becomes a combination of a predetermined stop mode such as "3 ・ 5 ・ 7". There is a case. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, "S * S * S" is provided as a special big hit symbol for alerting | reporting pending reservation continuously. When it is determined that the decoration symbol determination means 224 is to execute the reserved inner consecutive row effect A, when the consecutive row effect pattern PA2 is selected, the normal jackpot symbol (“3 · 3 · 3 etc. Replace the) with the special jackpot symbol ("S · S · S").

  The fluctuation effect determining means 225 specifies the fluctuation process (rendering process) from the fluctuation start to the stop in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol based on the information (fluctuation pattern information) included in the fluctuation start command from the main control board 100 Determine the presentation pattern. In the present embodiment, as the symbol variation effect (reach effect) performed after the reach display, the reach effect (normal reach effect) with simple effect content and the reach effect (super reach effect) in which the effect content is developed are included . The fluctuation effect determining means 225 holds a plurality of fluctuation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a fluctuation effect pattern, and a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol (a fluctuation time is selected from among the plurality of fluctuation effect pattern tables. Is selected to correspond to the variation production pattern table corresponding to. In the variation effect pattern table, the variation effect pattern random number and the variation effect pattern are associated with each other according to the result of the variation pattern lottery of the special symbol (that is, the reach type). Here, while the basic pattern (for example, "Normal reach A", "Super reach A", etc.) of symbol variation is determined as the variation pattern on the main control substrate 100 side, the variation control pattern is concerned on the side of the presentation control substrate 200. A detailed pattern of symbol variation (for example, "normal reach A1, A2, A3 ...", "super reach A1, A2, A3 ...", etc.) defining in detail the scenario of the effect display process based on the basic pattern is determined. As described above, the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol defines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the end of the variation. The timing etc. which generate a preliminary announcement production in a stage are also prescribed as a time schedule. In addition, the stop order for stopping a decorative symbol is previously determined for every fluctuation production pattern, and it is made to stop in order of a left symbol-> a right symbol-> a middle symbol in this embodiment in principle. However, in the case of a fluctuation effect pattern with a short fluctuation time, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped almost simultaneously, and in the case of a specific fluctuation effect pattern, the order of left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol It can also be stopped. At this time, if it is not the stop order of the above principle (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the big hit expectation tends to be relatively high.

  The notice effect determining means 226 determines a notice effect pattern defining the contents of the notice effect to be executed at each step of the process of changing the decorative symbol along the above-described scenario of the change effect pattern. The preview effect pattern includes an effect pattern for displaying an image of a specific character, an animation, etc. temporarily or stepwise, an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating a movable character, and the like. The advance presentation effect is executed in parallel with the variation display of the decorative symbol, and it is indicated in advance that it is highly probable that the symbol variation stops in the big hit mode and the big hit reliability is high. The notice effects include a notice effect performed before the reach state occurs (including when the reach occurs) in the process of changing the decorative symbol, and a notice effect performed after the reach state occurs. The preview effects are different from each other in the big hit reliability, and basically, the big hit reliability in the advance effects displayed after the reach occurrence is relatively larger than that shown before the reach occurrence. It's getting higher. The notice effect determining means 226 holds the notice effect pattern table to be referred to when selecting the notice effect pattern by type of notice effect according to the type of notice effect occurring along the scenario of the change effect pattern. It is designed to select the notice effect pattern table. Based on the notice effect pattern random number value acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, the notice effect determining means 226 refers to the notice effect pattern table selected above and selects from among a plurality of notice effect patterns by lottery. Choose one. Specific types of preview effect patterns include comment preview effect pattern, background preview effect pattern, SU (step-up) preview effect pattern, group preview effect pattern, cut-in preview effect pattern, feature movable preview effect pattern, Etc. are prepared. This advance notice effect is basically performed by combining the display of one or more advance notice effects with the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 70. Therefore, even if the variation display of the decorative symbol by the same variation representation pattern, it becomes possible to generate a variety of representation modes by the combination with one or a plurality of advance presentation.

  The big hit effect determination means 227 determines the content (big hit effect pattern) of the big hit effect notifying that it is in the special game. The jackpot effect includes a start demonstration effect for notifying the start of the special game, a round effect for notifying that the game is a round game, and an end demonstration effect for notifying the end of the special game. When the big hit effect determination means 227 receives a big hit start demo command from the main control board 100, the big hit effect pattern (start demo effect pattern, round effect based on the information etc. of the big hit type stored in the sub main information storage means 260 Determine the pattern, the end demonstration pattern). In this big hit effect pattern, depending on the big hit type, a big hit start demonstration time, a round effect time (show time according to the opening pattern of the big winning opening 64, 65) and a big hit end demonstration effect time are set A series of presentation contents are set along the time axis. In addition, the jackpot effect determination means 227 executes the start demonstration effect triggered by receiving the jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100 according to the jackpot effect pattern, and each round triggered by receiving the round effect designation command The effect is executed, and the end demonstration effect is executed when the big hit end demonstration command is received.

  Here, in the normal jackpot start demonstration effect, for example, the characters "jackpot start" are displayed on the screen to tell the start of the special game. Further, in the normal round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of winning balls on the screen are displayed, and various images (animation images and the like) for promoting the special game are displayed. Then, in the normal big hit end demonstration effect, for example, the characters "big hit end" are displayed on the screen, and the end of the special game is notified.

  In addition, when the special continuous rendition is executed, while replacing the end demonstration rendition in the previous big hit with the special rendition contents (the rendition contents to be integrated with the special variation rendition) from the usual rendition contents, the character of the big hit end Do not display In addition, when the special continuous rendition is executed, while replacing the start demonstration rendition in the later big hit from the special rendition contents to the special rendition contents (those with the special variation rendition and the rendition contents), the character of the big hit start Do not display Furthermore, when the special continuous effect is executed, in the round effect in the later special game, it is notified in the form of adding the number of previous special game rounds to the number of execution special rounds in the later special game, and A pseudo-counting effect is performed in which the number of winning balls obtained in the special game above is added to the number of winning balls obtained in the special game. The jackpot effect determination means 227 executes a promotion effect (promotion success effect, promotion failure effect) as a jackpot effect in the special game (details will be described later).

  As described above, the image supervising means 220 controls the image control command relating to the image and sound based on the determined effect contents (pre-reading effect pattern, continuous effect pattern, variation effect pattern, advance effect pattern, stop symbol pattern, big hit effect pattern, etc.) Are stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260.

  The lamp effect control means 230 controls lighting of the effect lamp, light emission color and the like in accordance with the contents of the effect set by the effect generalizing means 220. The lamp effect control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for lighting control of the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 25), and a lamp corresponding to the determined effect pattern Data is read out and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection substrate 91.

  The feature effect control means 240 controls the drive of each movable role 24 in accordance with the effect contents set by the effect supervising means 220. The feature effect control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable role 24 and transmits to the motor driver 92 a drive control signal (drive data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern. Do.

  The error presentation control means 250 is configured to determine an error presentation pattern when an error presentation designation command is received from the main control board 100, and to notify an occurrence of an error condition in the gaming machine according to the error presentation pattern There is.

  The sub main information storage unit 260 is configured to temporarily store information of a decorative symbol, information of a variation effect pattern, information of a notice effect pattern, information of a control command, and the like, and is a predetermined for storing each information. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing effect control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands to the image control board 300, an image control board 300. And an ACK command buffer for storing an ACK command from Each command buffer is formed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, an image control command, and an ACK command.

  The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store this effect control command in the effect control command buffer. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal from the main control board 100 to execute reception interrupt processing (described in detail later) of the rendering control command, and various rendering control commands are executed in this interrupt processing. It is supposed to get. When the command transmitting / receiving unit 270 receives a strobe signal, it performs the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command with priority over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing below priority level 7 described later). ing.

  Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 is stored in the sub main information storage means 260 in order to instruct execution of the effect contents (the change effect pattern information, the notice effect pattern information, the decoration symbol information, etc.) set by the effect generalization means 220. The image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by serial communication. In principle, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined period (500 μs in this example) in the order set in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260. Thus, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative symbol along the scenario of the change effect pattern. The notice effect is displayed in the form of being superimposed on the effect of the symbol change at each stage of the change display process. Furthermore, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives an ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300, and stores the ACK command in an ACK command buffer.

<Process on main control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The process on the main control board 100 side is configured to include a main control side main process and a main control side timer interrupt process.

Main control side main process
10 to 11 are flowcharts showing the main control side main processing of the main control board 100. In the main control side main processing, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by the reset at the time of power on, the program is started and the processing after S1 is started.

  First, as the initial setting necessary at the time of power on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S1), and the access of the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table storing the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). When the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is zero cleared in S9 described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read, and it is judged whether the information of the power-off normal is stored (S6).

  Here, when the information on power-off normal is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether the checksum is 0, that is, whether the checksum is normal (S8). The checksum at power on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated at power off processing described later, so if it is backed up normally, the check at power on is checked. Sam is "0". As described above, it is determined when the power is turned on whether the information stored in the RAM 103 before power-off is properly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12 described later in order to return to the state before the power failure. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamp LP, and the like, a request for an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 is requested (S11).

  Next, in the power failure / return setting process, setting of power on normal information, initialization of various errors, and communication initialization with the payout control board 400 in the RAM 103 are sequentially performed (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to store that the power-on was correctly performed, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag and the information on the power-off occurrence is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and data for the number of transfer bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of the power-off is read, and the power-off recovery process relating to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

  Subsequently, a transmission request of the effect control command ("power-off recovery command") at the time of power-off recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is made (S15). The power failure recovery command includes information on the inspection of the communication line, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of probability variations, the number of time reductions, the number of easy entering states, the variation pattern selection status, and the error status. The command request for the unsent part before power-off is cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, read the information of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off, and request the effect control command including the information of the number of operation pending balls ( S16).

  Subsequently, return setting is performed to return the normal motorized combination 622 to a state before the power is turned off (for example, the second start port 62 is in the open state) (S17). Further, return setting is performed to return the special electric combination 642 to a state before the power is turned off (for example, the large winning opening 64 is in the open state) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the special symbol mode flag is read, and the operating state of the probability variation function of the special symbol at the time of power-off is set (S19). In addition, a special symbol mode flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, in order to start the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as an initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt prohibition is set (S21). Then, clear word 1 ("55H") is set as preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (S22).

  Next, in order to determine the occurrence of the power failure, the value of the power failure confirmation flag is read, and it is determined whether or not the power failure has occurred (S23). When the power is not shut off, the initial value random number updating process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number updating process, in this initial value random number updating process, the initial value random number per symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value "0".

  Next, interrupt permission is set to permit generation of timer interrupt processing (S25), and the process returns to the processing for prohibiting the above-described interrupt (S21), and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but the remaining time from the completion of the previous interrupt process to the generation of the next interrupt process is utilized in S21 to S25. Repeat the above process. When there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is activated when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is on in S23, that is, if the power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 to execute the power-off process described next.

  Next, as the power-off process (S26 to S32), first, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is the power-on normal information (S27: Yes), the power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if it is not the power-on normal information (S27: No), the power-off abnormal data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

  Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, a complement to the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of the complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the processing is looped until the power is turned off.

<< Main control side timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the main control timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse every fixed time (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed by interrupting the above-mentioned main control side main process. In addition, as a term used below, the terms "condition device" and "character continuous actuation device" mean conceptual control equipment, and "condition device" means a big hit in the special symbol game The "character continuous operating device" is capable of operating the special motorized component 642 a plurality of times in succession.

  First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

  Next, in order to restart the watchdog timer, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set (S52). At this time, the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 are sequentially written to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within a preset timeout time, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. That is, when the main CPU 101 executes the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are periodically set, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before it times out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input process, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, input information such as the first start port switch 611, the second start port switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the big winning port switch 641, the door open switch, the frame open switch, the back set open switch, the magnetic sensor, the radio wave sensor, etc. , And after performing their state determination, store these detection information.

  Next, various random number update processing is executed (S54). In the various random number update processes, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the numerical value of the random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value “0”. On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtraction result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50000) is added to the subtraction result.

  Next, the initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number updating process, the random number per symbol, the soft random number per special symbol and the symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value "0". In addition, when the value of the counter makes one turn, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

  Next, initial value random number update processing is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per symbol, the software initial value random number per special symbol and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value "0".

  Next, timer subtraction processing is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for controlling the game operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are decremented by an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, final display time) relating to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, and the like.

  Next, a second starting opening valid period setting process is executed (S58). In the second starting opening effective period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning ineffective period of the second starting opening 62 are determined, and the effective period data or the invalid period data of the second starting opening 62 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a prize monitoring process is executed (S59). In this prize monitoring process, based on the detection information of the first starting opening switch 611, the second starting opening switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, and the special winning opening switch 641 in the input process (S53), the switch passing inspection of the gaming ball As a result, when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed each switch, a transmission request for effect control command including information indicating that the gaming ball has passed each switch is performed.

  Next, a winning ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is sent to the payout control board 400 to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning, and the received data from the payout control board 400 is monitored and the payout control board 400 is executed. Perform communication inspection with

  Next, a normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 63 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation gate 63 is passed, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as operation holding ball information As well as updating the number of operation pending balls up to a maximum of four, storing the random numbers pertaining to the normal symbol lottery.

  Next, normal symbol control processing is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control processing, in order to perform a series of processing according to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric actor 622, according to the value of the normal symbol game status, processing during normal symbol fluctuation, processing during normal symbol stop symbol display Execute processing during normal electric part operation, processing during demonstration of normal electric part operation end, and the like. In the normal symbol change processing, display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to change or display the normal symbol.

  Next, the normal symbol variation start monitoring process is executed (S63). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, the operating state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the variation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol operation retention ball number is digested by one and the normal symbol The determination of success or failure, the determination of symbols, the determination of fluctuation patterns, the setting of fluctuation time, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, the starting opening monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this starting opening monitoring control process, when the winning of the first starting opening 61 and the second starting opening 62 of the gaming ball is monitored, and there is a winning of the gaming ball, the number of holding balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is concerned. The random number storage, the pre-reading advance notice effect judgment, the command request of the number of the figure memory and the like it does in order.

  Next, special symbol control processing is executed (S65). In this special symbol control processing, as a series of processing concerning the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, according to the value of the special symbol gaming status, the special symbol variation start processing (S420) described later in detail, the special symbol variation processing (S430) ), Special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440), etc. are executed.

  Next, a special motorized product control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", the setting of the operation start and the operation end of the special electric symbol 642 as the operation processing according to the special electric symbol 642, large The opening time and opening number of the winning opening 64 are updated, the operation start setting of the probability fluctuation function, the operation start setting of the fluctuation time shortening function, the setting of the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the like are sequentially executed.

  Next, the special winning opening valid period setting process is executed (S67). In the special winning opening valid period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning invalid period of the special winning opening 64 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the special winning opening 64 is set as the determination result.

  Next, special symbol variation start monitoring control processing is executed (S68). In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process, when there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the number of holding balls is digested by one, and the command request of the symbol memory number, the pass / fail judgment of the special symbol , Special symbol pattern determination, probability variation function determination, time reduction function determination, setting of operation pattern of special electric combination product, setting of demonstration effect time, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, abnormality detection processing is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the open circuit short circuit power source abnormal signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame open signal, etc. , It is determined whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, in order to request an error display from the effect control board 200, an effect control command ("error effect designating command") including the error information is generated.

  Next, the ball passing time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball passing time abnormality detection process, when the on signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, the ball passing time abnormality is set, and the effect control command (“error While performing the request of the effect designation command “), the output request of the security signal for outputting to the external terminal is performed.

  Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special motorized character 642 operates continuously (prescribed number of rounds), the number of operation reserved balls of the normal symbol and the special symbol, and the like are created. In addition, display data for causing the status indicator of the main control board 100 to display information on the error status detected in the above-mentioned abnormality detection processing is created.

  Next, LED output processing is performed (S73). In this LED output process, the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S65) is performed to display the special symbol and the normal symbol, the number of holding balls, the number of times the special motorized symbol is operated continuously, and the error. Display data created by abnormality detection processing (S69), gaming state display processing (S71), etc., each special symbol display device 71, 72, normal symbol display device 75, each special view reserve lamp 73, 74, general drawing reserve While outputting to the lamp 76 and the status indication lamp of the main control board 100, etc., the display in these various display devices is initialized.

  Next, emission control signal output processing is executed (S73). In this emission control signal output process, when communication abnormality with the payout control substrate 400 or disconnection short circuit power source abnormality is not detected, a signal of release permission is output to the payout control substrate 400, and release of the gaming ball is permitted. Do. On the other hand, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short circuit power source abnormality is detected, a signal for prohibiting the firing is outputted to the payout control board 400, and the firing of the gaming ball is prohibited.

  Next, a solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special motorized item control process (S66) are performed to operate the respective motorized items 622, 642. Based on the acquired control data, an excitation signal is output to each of the motorized combination solenoids 623, 643.

  Next, an effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read out from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage unit 180 in the above process, and this effect is produced. A control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

  Next, external information output processing is executed (S76). In this external information output process, operation state information of the gaming machine is output as external information to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board.

  Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main control timer interrupt process is terminated and the process returns to the main control main process, and the main control main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

  When the main control board 100 detects a power cut (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during main control side main processing or interrupt processing, a non-maskable interrupt is generated to turn on the power cut confirmation flag. Do. Then, after returning to the original processing, the above-mentioned power-off time processing (S26 to S32) is executed.

«Special symbol game processing»
Next, a series of processes relating to the special symbol game in the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-mentioned start opening monitoring control processing (S64), the special symbol control processing (S65), the special electric character control processing (S66), the special symbol variation start monitoring control processing (S68), etc. Is the case.

(Starting opening monitoring control processing)
First, the starting opening monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the details of the starting opening monitoring control process (S64).

  First, it is determined whether a game winning on the first starting opening 61 has been detected (S201). If the winning of the first starting opening 61 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit number 4 (S202).

  When the operation reserve ball number of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), a random number per special symbol, a symbol random number per special symbol, a special symbol as a lottery random number according to the first special symbol game The variation pattern random number value is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage unit 180 according to the order of ball entry (S203). Then, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter is incremented by one (S204) as the update of the operation holding ball number of the first special symbol (S204), and the winning check of the first starting opening 61 is ended.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether a game winning on the second starting opening 62 has been detected (S205). If a winning on the second starting opening 62 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number 4 (S206). When the operation reserve ball number of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), a random number value per special symbol, a symbol random number value per special symbol, a special symbol as a lottery random number value according to the second special symbol game The variation pattern random number value is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage unit 180 according to the order of ball entry (S207). Then, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter is incremented by one (S208) as the update of the operation holding ball number of the second special symbol (S208), and the winning check of the second starting opening 62 is ended.

  Subsequently, whether or not there is an update of the number of actuation reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, ie, whether or not the number of actuation reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is added in S204 or S208. It is determined (S209). If there is an update of the number of operation pending balls (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is used as the main information storage means It is stored in the 180 command storage area (S210).

  Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is a prior determination timing (S211). When it is the prior determination timing (S211: YES), the random value per special symbol is read out from the hit random number buffer of the holding n storage area, and the prior judgment is made (S212). Then, a success / failure predetermination command including information of the predetermination result (success / failure predetermination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S213).

  Also, the symbol random number per special symbol is read out from the hit symbol random number buffer of the storage n storage area, and symbol prior determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol prior determination command including information of the prior determination result (symbol prior determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is read out from the fluctuation pattern random number buffer of the holding n storage area, and the fluctuation pattern prior determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern prior determination command including information of the prior determination result (a variation pattern prior determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S217).

(Special symbol variation start monitoring control process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68).

  In this special symbol variation monitoring monitoring control process (S68), of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol variation start monitoring processing described later for the special symbol side satisfying the variation start condition Execute (S310). When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the change start condition, as described above, the process of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is medium or small (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in change standby, that is, whether both the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are "00H (during change)" It is determined whether or not it is (S302).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and if the number of pending balls is not "0" (S303: NO), the second special is selected. It is considered that the variation start condition of the symbol is established, and the address of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in the subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) is set (S304) The second special symbol side of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310). That is, in the present embodiment, when there is an operation holding ball of the second special symbol, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol has priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. It is supposed to be digested. The details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is "0" (S305) . Here, when the number of holding balls is not "0" (S305: NO), it is considered that the variation start condition of the first special symbol is established, and the address of the first special symbol variation start monitoring table (following After setting the addresses of various tables and addresses of the RAM storage area used in the process (S306), the process shifts to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) on the first special symbol side.

  In addition, when the change start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. .

(Special symbol change start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310).

  In this special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310), with reference to the first special symbol variation start monitoring table or the second special symbol variation start monitoring table set in S304 or S306 described above, with the target of the current variation start The special symbol side process will be executed, but since the method of processing is common to the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except in special cases, in the first special symbol side process It will be described together without distinction as to whether it is the processing of the second special symbol side.

  First, the number of operation reserved balls on the side of the special symbol to be subjected to the start of fluctuation this time is decremented by 1 (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol hold storage area on the special symbol side targeted for the variation start this time is accessed, and a random number per special symbol stored in the first hold storage area (hold 1 storage area), special symbol per The symbol random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are read out in order, and these random number values are used in the special symbol qualifying process (S320), the symbol determining process (S330) and the variation pattern selecting process (S423) described later. It is transferred to the special symbol conformity determination area, the special symbol pattern determination area, and the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S313). Further, as updating of the pending storage area, the pending ball information stored in the pending 2 storage area to the pending 4 storage area is shifted to the lower pending storage area, and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

  Subsequently, special symbol propriety judgment processing is executed (S320). In the special symbol compliance determination process (S320), first, a special symbol compliance lottery table is acquired. At this time, when the gaming state is a special symbol probability variation state, a high probability success or failure lottery table is acquired, and when the gaming state is a normal state, a low probability success or failure lottery table is acquired. Next, a random value per special symbol is read out from the special symbol compliance determination area of the main information storage means 180. Then, with reference to the special symbol odds lottery table, based on the random number value per special symbol, to determine whether the special symbol success or failure. In addition, the value (the big hit data “55H”, the small hit data “33H”, the outlying data “00H”) corresponding to the result of the yes / no determination is stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, symbol determination processing is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), the stop symbol of the special symbol, the type of symbol group, and the character effect number (variation added symbol information) are determined according to the result of the pass / fail determination. Then, the stop symbol of the special symbol determined this time, the type of symbol group, and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. In addition, the character effect number is determined type of symbol group (7 patterns of symbol groups A to G) and operation state of probability variation function of special symbol and normal symbol (probability variation of special symbol / probability variation of special symbol off) / 28 patterns are determined on the basis of the combination of 4 patterns of probability variation on / normal symbol pattern / probability variation of normal symbol pattern). When the result of the pass / fail determination is an out-of-order, the character effect number “0” is determined.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the pass / fail determination corresponds to a small hit (S341), and it is determined whether the result of the pass / fail determination corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the pass / fail determination is a small hit (S341: YES), the process proceeds to S347, and if the result of the pass / fail determination is a removal (S341: NO, S342: NO), the process proceeds to S349.

  On the other hand, if the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit (S341: NO, S342: YES), based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S330, the special symbol It is determined whether to operate the probability variation function (S343). That is, if the type of symbol group (big hit type) indicates a specific symbol, it is decided to give the probability variation function, and if the type of symbol group is that usually indicates a symbol, probability variation Decide not to give features. The determination result is stored in the probability variation determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Also, based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S330, as the gaming state after the special game, the number of activation times of the fluctuation time shortening function is determined (S344), and the number of activations of the electric cho support function is determined. To do (S345). The determination result (operation count information of the fluctuation time shortening function, operation count information of the electronic chow support function) is stored in the time saving storage area of the main information storage unit 180 and the number of easy-to-enter-ball storage area.

  Subsequently, based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric symbol 642 is set (S346). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special motorized character 642, the prescribed number of rounds of round game (16 rounds, 8 rounds, 2 rounds in this example), the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 (30 in this example) Set the second, 0.05 second etc.

  Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 and the current gaming state, a variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game or after the small hit game is set (S347). Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330, a demonstration effect time (a start demonstration time and a finish demonstration time) of a special game or a small hit game is set (S348). Next, the special symbol suitability determination area and the special symbol design determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol qualification determination process (S320) and the symbol determination process (S330) are cleared (S349). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be subject to variation this time is transited from "00H (during standby)" to "01H (variation start)" (S350).

(Special symbol control process)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control process (S65).

  First, it is determined whether the special electric combination 642 is inactive or not, that is, whether the special combination game status is "00H (waiting state)" (S401). Subsequently, if the special motorized character 642 is inactive (S401: YES), it is determined whether the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402).

  If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the processing relating to the second special symbol. The addresses of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area are set (S403), and the processing proceeds to special symbol control general processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the processing relating to the first special symbol. The addresses of various tables to be used and the addresses of the RAM storage area are set (S404), and the processing proceeds to special symbol control general processing (S410).

  In addition, in the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) to be described next, using the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above-described S403 or S404, the special to be the subject of the present variation Although the processing on the symbol side is to be executed, since the method of processing is common to the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, is it the processing on the first special symbol side except in the special case? The second special symbol side processing will be described collectively without distinction. Details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol control general processing)
Subsequently, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S410). Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410).

  In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410), branch processing (S411 to S414) is performed to shift to processing according to the value ("01H", "02H", "03H") of the special symbol game status. First, it is determined whether the special symbol game status on the special symbol side subject to the current variation is not zero (S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "01H (variation start)" (S412). If the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol variation start processing (S420). The details of the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if NO in S412, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "02H (during change)" (S413). If the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the processing proceeds to special symbol variation processing (S430). The details of the special symbol variation process (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. If NO in S413, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "03H (during stop symbol display)" (S414). If the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440). The details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol change start process)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

  First, the special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the success or failure lottery and the variation pattern selection state (S421). Subsequently, a special symbol variation pattern random number value is read out from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S422). Then, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (S423).

  Next, a fluctuation time corresponding to the currently selected fluctuation pattern is set (S424). Then, as the setting of the start of the change of the special symbol, the change time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S 425), and the change start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S 426). As the change start command, in order to start the symbol change effect in the effect display device 70, the change pattern specification command and the symbol specification command are sequentially generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used to determine the variation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (start of change)" to "02H (during change)" (S428).

(Process during special symbol change)
Next, special symbol variation processing (S430) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation process (S430).

  First, in order to perform variable display of a special symbol, display pattern number switching processing of the special symbol is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data of a special symbol is generated every predetermined switching time. The display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to change or display the special symbol.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has ended (S432). When the variation time of the special symbol is finished (S432: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be determined and displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S433). Subsequently, a change stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to display the decorative symbol is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S434).

  Next, "500 (ms)" is stored in the special symbol game timer as the determined display time (S435). In addition, "determination display time" is time which makes a stop symbol stop display definite at the time of the fluctuation | variation stop of a special symbol. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (during variation)" to "03H (during stop symbol display)" (S436).

(Process during special symbol stop symbol display)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display process (S440) will be described. 20 to 21 are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the finalized display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). Here, when the finalized display time of the special symbol is finished (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is transited from "03H (during stop symbol display)" to "00H (during standby)" (S442).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the success or failure determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180 is the big hit data "55H" (S443). If the hit or not judgment data is a big hit data (S443: YES), the special symbol probability fluctuation function operation stop (S444), the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function operation stop (S445), the power chew support function operation Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, the special symbol mode flag is set to "00H (not operated)", and the hour reduction number counter and the ball entry number state number counter are set to "00H" to clear them to zero.

  Next, as a start demonstration setting process of the special game, a start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (big hit start demonstration command) for instructing start of the start demonstration effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of times of execution of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). Further, the special electric role thing game status is transited from "00H (waiting state)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, "00H" is set to clear the content of the success or failure determination flag (S450).

  On the other hand, when the success / failure determination data is not the big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether the probability variation function of the special symbol is in operation (S451). When the probability variation function of the special symbol is in operation (S 451: YES), the probability variation number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as a part of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S 452) . Subsequently, it is determined whether the probability variation frequency counter is zero (step S453). If the probability variation number counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol is stopped (S454). If the probability variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (S 453: NO), S 454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S 455.

  Next, it is determined whether the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is in operation (S455). When the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is in operation (S455: YES), the time reduction number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as a part of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S456) . Subsequently, it is determined whether the time saving number counter is zero (step S457). If the time reduction number counter is zero (S 457: YES), it is determined that the number of times the special symbol time reduction state has ended, and the operation of the variation time reduction function of the special symbol is stopped (S 458). If the time reduction number counter after subtraction is not zero (S 457: NO), S 458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S 459.

  Next, it is determined whether the electronic chew support function is in operation (S459). When the electric chew support function is in operation (S459: YES), the easy entry state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as a digesting amount of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S460) . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the easy-to-enter-state number counter is zero (step S461). If the easy-to-enter-state number counter is zero (S461: YES), it is determined that the end number of the easy-to-enter state has been reached, and the operation of the electric chow support function is stopped (S462). If the entry easy state number counter after subtraction is not zero (S 461: NO), S 462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S 463.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset number of ends. If it has reached, it is switched to the fluctuation pattern selection state defined next. On the other hand, if the end number has not been reached, the current fluctuation pattern selection state is maintained.

  Next, a presentation control command (gaming state designation command) including the current gaming state information and variation pattern selection state information updated in the above-mentioned S451 to S464 is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. (S465). In addition, on the effect control board 200 side, setting and updating of the effect mode are executed based on the information of the game state designation command.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the small hit data "33H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466). When small hit data is stored (S466: YES), as a start demonstration setting process of the small hit game, while setting the start demonstration display time, the production control command (small hit for instructing the start of the start demonstration effect) A start demonstration command is generated (S467). Then, the special electric role thing game status changes from "00H (waiting state)" to "02H (small hit game)" (S468). Then, "00H" is set to clear the content of the success or failure determination flag (S469).

  On the other hand, when the small hit data "33H" is not stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466: NO), that is, when the shift data "00H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag, S467 to S469. To skip In addition, when the special symbol determination flag is outlier data, the reason why the process of clearing the content of the flag is not performed is that “00H” is originally stored as the outlier data.

(Special electric role control process)
Next, the special motorized product control process (S66) will be described. FIG. 22 to FIG. 24 are flowcharts showing the details of the motorized prize control process (S66).

  First, it is determined whether the special electric role thing game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). If the special electric role thing game status is "01H" (S501: YES), special game processing is executed in the subsequent processing. In the special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric combination 642, 652 is in operation (S502). If the special electric symbol 642, 652 is not in operation (S502: NO), it is determined whether it is the operation start time of the special electric symbol 642, 652 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric symbol 642, 652 is the timing at which the operation of the special electric symbol 642, 652 is started in each round game.

  If it is the operation start time of the special electric role products 642 and 652 (S 503: YES), a production control command (round production designation command) is generated to start the round production, and this is stored in the main information storage unit 180. It stores in the command storage area (S504). In addition, on the effect control board 200 side, the round effect corresponding to each round game in the special game is executed based on the information (information such as the current number of rounds) of this round effect designating command. Then, the operation of the special motorized components 642, 652 is started (S505), and the processing of S506 to S510 is executed as the processing during the operation of the special motorized components 642, 652.

  As processing during the operation of the special electric symbol 642, 652, while determining whether the game ball has won the maximum winning number in the large winning opening 64, 65 (S506), the operation of the special electric symbol 642, 652 It is determined whether time (opening time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, when the game ball has won the maximum winning number in the special winning opening 64, 65 (S506: YES), or when the operation time of the special electric combination 642, 652 has passed (S507: YES), the special electric The operation of the accessories 642, 652 is stopped (S507). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of times of continuous operation of the special electric symbol 642, 652 has reached a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (S509). If the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric symbol 642, 652 is incremented by one (S510).

  On the other hand, when the number of times of continuous operation of the special electric role products 642, 652 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511, and the end demonstration display time is set as the end demonstration setting process for the special game. Is set, and an effect control command (big hit end demo command) instructing the start of the end demonstration effect is generated (S511).

  Subsequently, the fluctuation time reduction number information set in S344 is stored in the time reduction number counter (S512). Further, the easy-to-enter-state number information set in S345 is stored in the easy-to-enter-state number counter (S513).

  Subsequently, with reference to the contents of the probability fluctuation determination flag set in the above S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation with a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S514). If it is the operation of the condition device by the specific symbol (S514: YES), the data at the time of operation "7FH" is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter of the main information storage means 180 and the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is started (S515). On the other hand, when it is not the operation of the condition device by the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-operation data "00H" is stored in the probability variation number counter, and S515 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction number information stored in the time reduction number counter is fluctuation time reduction function operation data (data other than "00H") (S516). When it is fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S516: YES), operation of a fluctuation time shortening function of a special symbol is started (S517). On the other hand, if it is not the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the ball entry easy state frequency information stored in the ball easy entry state frequency counter is the electric chow support function operation data (data other than "00H") (S518). If it is the electric chow support function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric chow support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the operation start of the probability variation function of the normal symbol (S519), the operation start of the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol (S520), and the operation start of the open extension function of the ordinary electric character 622 (S521) are sequentially executed. On the other hand, if it is not the electric chow support function operation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

  Subsequently, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in the above-mentioned S347 (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (playing state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in the above-described S512 to S522 is generated, and this is stored in the main information storage unit 180. It stores in the command storage area (S523). In the effect control board 200, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric role thing game status changes from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state)" (S524).

  On the other hand, when the special electric role thing game status is not "01H (special game)" (S501: NO), the process proceeds to S530, and whether the special electric role thing game status is "02H (small hit game)" It is determined whether or not (S530). When the special electric role thing game status is "02H" (S530: YES), small hit game processing is executed in the subsequent processing.

  In the small hit game process, first, it is determined whether the special electric combination 642, 652 is in operation (S531). When the special motorized components 642, 652 are not operated (S531: NO), the special motorized components 642, 652 are activated (S532). On the other hand, when the special electric symbol 642, 652 is in operation (S531: YES), S532 is skipped.

  Subsequently, as processing during the operation of the special electric role products 642 and 652, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the maximum winning number in the special winning opening 64 and 65 (S533) It is determined whether the operating time (opening time) of 652 has elapsed (S534). At this time, when the game ball has won the maximum winning number in the special winning opening 64, 65 (S533: YES), or when the operation time of the special electric combination 642, 652 has passed (S534: YES), the special electric The operation of the accessories 642, 652 is stopped (S535).

  Subsequently, an end demonstration display time is set as an end demonstration setting process for the small hit game, and an effect control command (small hitting end demonstration command) instructing generation of an end demonstration effect is generated (S536). Subsequently, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in the above-mentioned S347 (S537). Then, the effect control command (gaming state designation command) including the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in S537 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 ( S 538). The game state specification command is used on the side of the effect control board 200 to determine the transition trigger of the effect mode, to specify the effect mode to which the transition is made, and the like. Then, the special electric role thing game status changes from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state)" (S538).

<Process on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The process on the side of the effect control board 200 is reset start process (including main process on the effect control side) which is executed when the sub main CPU 201 is reset such as after the power is turned on, and the effect control side timer interrupt activated every predetermined cycle. Processing, reception interruption processing of effect control command activated due to strobe signal from main control board 100, and lamp activated with arrival of predetermined occurrence time specified in time schedule of variation effect pattern It is configured to include the effect interruption process and the transmission interruption process of the image control command activated every predetermined period.

  In each interrupt process (exception process), a priority level indicating a priority when multiple interrupt processes occur is set. In this example, "Reset start processing by power reset (Fig. 25): highest priority", "Reset start processing by various abnormality (Fig. 25): highest priority"-> "Interpretation processing of effect control command (Fig. 34): Level 7 "→" Reset start process by WDT (during runaway detection) (Fig. 25): Level 3 "→" Interrupt process of transmission of image control command (Fig. 36): Level 2 "→" Timer interrupt process for effect control (Fig. 35): Priority levels are prioritized in the order of “level 1” and the like. Note that “Reset start processing due to various types of abnormality” is, for example, during the DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer when the CPU 201 attempts to access the illegal area or the illegal method when the CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction. Start when an error occurs. In the present embodiment, the above-described plural types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

  In the effect control side main processing, basically, the processing is advanced after being set in any state of all interrupts inhibited or interrupts inhibited other than the effect control command reception interrupt. After that, when the effect control side main process is in the interrupt enabled state, each interrupt process is started in the form of interrupting the main process. In each interrupt process, when there is a request for another interrupt process during the execution of the interrupt process (a multiple interrupt occurs), it is basically an interrupt process with a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed. While the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is inhibited if the interrupt processing has a lower priority level or the same priority level than the interrupt processing being executed. That is, each interrupt process is performed in a state in which other interrupts with the same priority level or lower priority levels are prohibited. Then, each interruption process returns to the effect control side main process in a state in which all interruptions are permitted. In addition, the priority (priority level) of such an interruption factor is prescribed by the register setting of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<< Reset start processing >>
First, the reset start process of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the reset start process of the effect control board 200. In this reset start process, the power is turned on, the reset caused by various abnormalities, or the reset caused by WDT (due to runaway detection) is activated, and the security check of the sub main CPU 201 is performed. , The program is started, and the processing after S601 is started.

  First, as an initial setting necessary at power-on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is inhibited until the various initial settings are completed (S602).

  Subsequently, as a basic setting regarding hardware, an initial value is set in a built-in register provided in the sub main CPU 201, and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, an initial value is set to a variable with an initial value, and initialization is performed by clearing 0 to a variable having no initial value. Further, the sub main CPU 201 appropriately develops the control program stored in the ROM 202 in the RAM 203.

  Subsequently, interrupts other than the reception interrupt process of the effect control command are prohibited (S605). Next, processing is performed to set the type of error to be validated for the model among the various errors set in advance for all models (S 606). Further, a turn-off request is made to put all of the effect lamps LP (the frame lamp 10 and the panel lamp 25) in the off state (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is activated to monitor runaway of the sub main CPU 201 (S 608).

  Subsequently, a main effect control process is executed as a main process of the game effect (S609). The details of the effect control side main processing (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, when it shifts to the effect control side main processing in S609, the return from the main processing to the reset start processing can not normally be made, but in the case where the processing returns to this processing by the occurrence of a bug of the program. Transition to the low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is reduced compared to that in the normal operation.

<< main processing of production control side >>
Next, the effect control side main process (S609) of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing effect control side main processing (S609).

  First, in the effect control side main processing, an address (head address where the program is developed) for acquiring a check as to whether or not the control program is correctly developed in the RAM 203 is acquired (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (activation of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

  Next, the device initialization operation is performed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once at the time of power on (when reset starts) of the pachinko gaming machine PM, and in order to control the operation of the movable part 24 by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the position information required for At the end of the initialization operation, the movable part 24 returns to a preset initial position (reference position).

  Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, the watchdog timer is configured to write a predetermined clear word in the WDT clear register of the sub main CPU 201 within a preset timeout time. It is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Subsequently, an input port check process is executed (S615). In this input port check processing, monitoring of reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in port input / output processing S912 in timer interrupt processing described later is monitored at each interrupt generation, and monitoring is performed several times (for example, four times). The signal level is “1 (H level)” if all the input port states are “1”, “0 (L level)” if all “0”, otherwise the signal level is Do not change (this determines the input signal).

  Subsequently, an error presentation management process is executed (S616). In this error presentation management process, based on the error presentation pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S620), the error presentation by various devices is started. Furthermore, in the error presentation management process, the error management timer is set to an initial value (error presentation time) to manage the progression of the error presentation. The error management timer is decremented and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. Then, if the error management timer has timed out, the error presentation is ended.

  Subsequently, an effect button monitor control process is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button advance effect is incorporated during symbol variation, the input state of the effect button 15 within the operation effective time is monitored, and a plurality of buttons are set in advance according to the button advance effect. The content of the effect corresponding to the input state of the effect button 15 is determined from among the effect contents of the species.

  Subsequently, a notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern (noting the contents of the notice effect occurring at each stage of the change process of the decorative symbol) along the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620) The advance notice number is determined by lottery. The notice effect number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect number storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. Also, an image control command for designating the preview effect number to the image control board 300 is generated, and this is set in the image control command buffer of the sub main information storage unit 260. At this time, if a feature preview effect pattern (feature preview effect number) is selected as the preview effect pattern, a feature request occurs, and in the subsequent device management process (S619), the movable role 24 is selected. The drive pattern of is identified. In this example, the main loop processing efficiency is improved instead of drawing all of the plurality of types of advance notice effects (notice effect effect patterns) generated within one variation of the decorative symbol in one main loop process. In order to make it perform, it is divided into every occurrence time (for example, fluctuation start stage, reach generation stage, fluctuation stop stage) of advance notice effect, and it is the composition which draws the lottery over plural times main loop processing. At that time, since it is necessary to synchronize with the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (send the image control command immediately) about the notice effect which occurs at the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the lottery is made in the main loop processing of the start. It is supposed to be done.

  Next, device management processing is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there are operation requests (lamp request and feature request) of various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, plural types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203 Among them, the pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, feature preview effect number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for the drawing process of one frame when drawing etc. at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) in the effect display device 70. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable part 24, drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at fixed intervals, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is all completed, the effect lamp LP is turned off, or the operation of the movable part 24 is stopped. , End control of the target device.

  Subsequently, command analysis processing (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the read effect control command Execute the effect control process corresponding to the type of. The details of the command analysis process (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, it is determined whether or not command analysis (analysis of effect control command) has been executed during the current loop processing (S621). If the command has just been analyzed (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 to shift to the next loop process. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), the effect lottery random number updating process is executed (S622). In this effect lottery random number update process, effect lottery random numbers such as a pre-reading notice lottery random number, a decorative symbol random number, a variation effect pattern random number, and a notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the command analysis process (S620) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing details of the command analysis process (S620). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of effect control command stored. Execute control processing.

  First, it is determined whether a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S631). When the gaming state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process shifts to effect state transition processing (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the variation pattern selection state information included in the gaming state specification command. The details of the effect state transition process (S632) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether a hold related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S633). Here, the hold related command includes a symbol storage number command and an advance determination command. If the hold related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In this suspension information management process (S 634), the symbol storage number command or the prior determination command is read out from the sub main information storage means 260, and prefetching determination is executed based on the information of the prior determination result. A process is performed to update the display number and display mode (display color etc.) of the hold images displayed on the units 701 and 702.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related command includes a variation start command and a variation stop command. If the symbol variation related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to variation effect content determination processing (S636). In this variation effect content determination process (S636), when the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, a process for starting symbol variation effect is executed, and the received symbol variation related command is a variation stop command. If there is a process, the process for ending the symbol variation effect being executed is executed. The details of the change effect content determination process (S636) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a big hit rendering related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot production related command includes a jackpot start demonstration command, a round presentation specification command, and a jackpot end demonstration command. If the jackpot effect related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the jackpot effect content determination process (S638). In the jackpot effect content determination process (S638), a process for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demonstration effect is performed. Details of the jackpot effect content determination process (S638) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether a small hit effect related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S639). Here, the small hit production related command includes a small hit start demonstration command and a small hit end demonstration command. If the small hit effect related command is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit effect content determination process (S640). In the small hit effect content determination process (S640), a process for executing a small hit start demonstration effect and a small hit end demonstration effect is performed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether an error presentation designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S641). If the error presentation designation command is stored (S641: YES), the process goes to error presentation content determination processing (S642). In this error effect content determination process (S 642), an error effect designation command is read out from the sub main information storage unit 260, and an error for notifying an error state by the image display of the effect display device 70 or the light emission mode of the effect lamp LP. Determine the presentation pattern.

  If the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO), The command analysis process is ended without doing anything.

(Effective state transition process)
Next, the effect state transition process (S632) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the details of the effect state transition process (S632).

  First, the contents of the game state designation command from the main control board 100 are analyzed, and information on the variation pattern selection state included in the contents of the command is acquired (S701). Subsequently, based on the information on the variation pattern selection state acquired in the above-described S701, it is determined whether a transition trigger of the effect mode has arrived (S702). When the transition trigger of the effect mode has come (S702: YES), the transition setting to the predetermined effect mode is performed after S703. In addition, as a transition trigger of the effect mode, it is basically linked with the transition trigger of the change pattern selection state, for example, at the end of the special game or when the end number of the change pattern selection state has expired. In addition, the end number of times of a fluctuation pattern selection state is the number concerning the number of times of fluctuation of special symbol.

  First, it is determined whether the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state managed by the main control board 100 is the low probability normal variation state α (S703). If the transition destination is the low probability normal fluctuation state α (S703: YES), the normal effect mode Mα is set as the transition destination of the effect mode (S704). When shifting to the normal effect mode Mα, a normal background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S 705). Then, in the normal effect mode Mα, for example, a normal background image of “wilderness” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. On the other hand, if the transition destination is not the low probability normal fluctuation state α (S703: NO), it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is the high probability time short fluctuation state β (S706). If the transition destination is the high probability time short fluctuation state β (S706: YES), the probability change presentation mode Mβ is set as the transition destination of the presentation mode (S707). When shifting to this probability variation effect mode A, a probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S 708). Then, in the probability variation effect mode Mβ, for example, a probability variation background image of “Fortress” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation.

  If the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is not the high probability time short fluctuation state β (S706: NO), it is determined whether the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is the high probability special fluctuation state γ (S709) ). If the transition destination is the high probability special fluctuation state γ (S709: YES), the special effect mode Mγ is set as the transition destination of the effect mode (S710). Subsequently, it is determined whether the special continuous effect flag in the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S711). The special continuous effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the special continuous effect is performed. If the special continuous effect flag is on (S711: YES), a special background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S712). Then, in the special effect mode Mγ, for example, a special background image of “star starry sky” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. On the other hand, if the special continuous effect flag is off (S711: NO), a probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S713). Then, in the special effect mode Mγ, for example, a probability variation background image of “fortress” (a background image substantially the same as in the probability change effect mode Mβ) is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. Subsequently, an image control command for instructing display of the effect content (background image) determined in the processing is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S721).

(Change production effect determination process)
Next, the change effect content determination process (S636) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the details of the fluctuation effect content determination process (S636).

  First, it is determined whether or not a change start command is stored in the sub main information storage unit 260 (S731). If a change start command is stored (S731: YES), the content of this change start command (a change pattern specification command, a change additional symbol information specification command, a character effect number specification command) is analyzed, and the contents of this command As a result of the success or failure lottery included in the information, information indicating a symbol group, a fluctuation pattern (variation time), a gaming state and the like is acquired (S732). The acquired information is stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub main information storage unit 260.

  Subsequently, the variation presentation pattern selection process is executed (S733). In this variation effect pattern selection process, based on the variation pattern information acquired in S732 and the effect mode set in the effect state transition process in S632, the variation effect pattern table is obtained, and from the effect lottery random number generation means 210 The fluctuation presentation pattern random number value is acquired, and one of the plurality of fluctuation presentation patterns is selected by lottery. The fluctuation presentation pattern constitutes a scenario of the effect display process in which the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol, the type and time of occurrence of reach effect, the type and time of occurrence of the notice effect, and the like are defined. The variation effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the variation effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260. Further, a lamp effect number corresponding to the selected variation effect pattern number is requested, and the requested lamp effect number is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub main information storage means 260.

  Next, the decorative symbol stop symbol selection process is executed (S734). In this decorative symbol stop symbol selection process, combinations (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol to be finally stopped are respectively drawn based on the symbol group information and the variation pattern information acquired in S732. decide. The decorative symbol combination number determined here is temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the sub main information storage means 260.

  Subsequently, the pending ball information stored in the pending 2 storage area to the pending 4 storage area is shifted to the lower pending storage area as an update of the prefetch information storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 and the pending 4 storage area It clears to zero (S735).

  Next, special effect determination processing is executed (S736). In this special effect determination process, it is determined whether or not the special effect with high rarity (so-called ascension effect) displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the so-called continuous state. In addition, with predetermined conditions, for example, the number of consecutive acquisitions reaches a predetermined number of times, the number of accumulations of specific big hits in a continuous connection state reaches a predetermined number of times, the number of accumulated winning awards in a continuous connection state reaches a predetermined number, There may be a case where a specific effect (specific effect during symbol variation or special game) is generated during the quiet state. The details of the special effect determination process (S736) will be described later using FIG. 41 in the first modification.

  Next, the on-premises-in-place effect A determination process is executed (S737). In the on-hold on-line consecutive-effect effect A determination process, while determining whether to execute on-off on-line continuous-on effect A, when it is decided to execute on-off on-line continuous-on effect A, a on-line effect pattern is selected. The details of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect A determination process (S737) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, in the case of executing the on-premises internal arrangement effect A at S 737, the process of replacing the content of the symbol variation effect selected at S 733 and S 734 in accordance with the contents of the on-preceding intra-sequence effects A is executed. (S738). For example, when the multi-station effect pattern PA2 is selected, the normal jackpot symbol selected in S734 is replaced with the special jackpot symbol "S · S · S" as a substitution process of symbol variation presentation. The decorative symbol combination number (big hit symbol number) replaced here is temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. In the present embodiment, the target of the pre-read determination in the pending internal connection effect A is the subsequent active holding ball existing at the time when the preceding active holding ball is digested (at the time of satisfaction of the change start condition) It is. Therefore, even if the operation pending ball that occurred during the change is the specific hold, the pending in-line consecutive effect A determination process (S737) and the replacement process (S738) are not executed, but the specified during the change When the hold is generated, the hold internal consecutive effects A determination process (S737) and the replacement process (S738) are executed even during the change, and the change effect data set at the start of the change is replaced It is also good.

  Then, based on the effect information acquired in the above S733 to S738, an image control command (variation effect start command) required to start the change of the decorative symbol is generated, and this image control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260. The setting is made (S739).

  On the other hand, when the change start command is not stored (S731: NO), it is determined whether the change stop command is stored in the sub main information storage means 260 (S740). If the variable stop command is stored (S740: YES), the contents of the variable stop command are analyzed, and symbol stop information included in the contents of the command is acquired (S741). Then, an image control command (variation effect stop command) required to stop the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S742).

(Pending Uranso production A judgment processing)
Next, the on-premises-in-place effect A determination process (S737) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect A determination process (S737).

  First, it is determined whether the special continuous effect flag in the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S761). If the special continuous effect flag is not on (S 761: NO), the information (result of the winning lottery and the big hit type) stored in the change effect content determination area of the sub main information storage means 260 in S 732 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed this time is the 16R big hit (S762). If the lottery result is a 16R big hit (S762: YES), it is determined whether or not the predetermination information of the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol is stored in the preread information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S763). In this example, the pre-reading determination of the pending inside consecutive effect A is performed on the operation pending ball of the second special symbol that occurred before the start of the symbol variation. If there is an operation retention ball of the second special symbol (S 763: YES), it is determined whether or not there is a specific suspension in the operation retention ball of the second special symbol (S 764). If a specific hold exists (S 764: YES), it is determined whether this specific hold indicates a 16R jackpot (S 765). If the specific hold corresponds to the 16R big hit (S765: YES), the hold within continuous play effect A lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute the hold within continuous play effect A by lottery (S766) ). In this on-hold in-line consecutive effect effect A lottery process, when the continuous time effect lottery random number value matches one of the judgment values of "execution" and "non-execution" with reference to a continuous action effect A lottery table (not shown) Determine the presence or absence of execution. In this example, for example, execution is performed at a rate of 80%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the player has been elected in the on-hold consecutive-run effect A lottery process (S767). If the player has been won (S 767: YES), it executes a multi-story effect pattern selection process for determining the content of the on-premises multi-stream effect A (S 768). In this consecutive villa effect pattern selection process, while acquiring the consecutive chamber effect pattern table shown in FIG. 8 (A), the consecutive chamber effect pattern random number is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and plural types of consecutive villas are obtained. From the effect patterns, one of the consecutive effect patterns is determined by lottery. Next, the number of the selected consecutive rendering effect pattern selected this time is temporarily stored in the continuous storage effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S769). Then, the on-hold on-line consecutive play effect flag of the sub main information storage means 260 is turned on (S770). Note that the on-hold on-line consecutive-play effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the on-hold on-line consecutive-off effect is executed.

(The jackpot effect contents determination process)
Next, the jackpot effect content determination process (S638) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot effect content determination process (S636).

  First, it is determined whether the start demo command is stored in the sub main information storage unit 260 (S801). If the start demonstration command is stored (S801: YES), the content of the start demonstration command is analyzed, and information indicating the jackpot type included in the content of the command is acquired (S802). The acquired information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the sub main information storage unit 260. Subsequently, the number-of-casings number counter for counting the number of successive-casings is updated (S803). Specifically, when the present big hit is a big hit in the normal state (referred to as "first hit"), "1" is set in the consecutive count counter, and when it is continuous, the continuous count counter Add 1 ".

  Next, a jackpot effect pattern selection process is executed to determine the contents of the jackpot effect pattern (start demonstration effect pattern, round effect pattern, end demonstration effect pattern) (S804). In this big hit effect pattern selection process, while obtaining the big hit effect pattern table (not shown) and obtaining the big hit effect pattern random number value from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, any of the plural types of big hit effect patterns, Determine the jackpot effect pattern by lottery. The jackpot effect pattern number (start demo pattern number, round effect pattern number, end demo pattern number) determined here is temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage means 260.

  Next, the on-premises-in-place effect B determination process is executed (S805). In the on-hold on-line consecutive effects effect B determination process, while it is determined whether or not on-off on-line consecutive effects B are to be executed, if it is decided to execute on-off on-line consecutive effects B, a on-time effect pattern is selected. The details of the on-premises-in-place effect B determination process (S805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the jackpot effect replacement process is executed (S806). In this jackpot effect replacement process, when a pending internal connection effect B (special continuous effect) is executed, the normal start demonstration effect pattern and the normal end demonstration effect pattern are a special start demonstration effect pattern and a special end demonstration effect pattern Replace with. The details of the jackpot effect replacement process (S806) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, what is the target of the pre-reading determination in the pending internal connection effect B exists at the start time of the special game (at the time of the end of the change) when the preceding operation pending ball becomes a big hit Is a subsequent operation holding ball. Therefore, even if the operation holding ball that has occurred during the special game is the specific holding, the pending internal consecutive effects B determination process (S805) and the replacement process (S806) are not executed, but during the special game If a specific hold occurs, execute the hold internal consecutive effects B determination process (S805) and the replacement process (S806) even during the special game, and replace the jackpot effect data set at the start of the special game You may configure it.

  Then, the start demonstration effect pattern number temporarily stored in the big hit effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 in S804 and S806 is transferred to the start demonstration effect storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260, and the start demonstration effect is The start is set (S807).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a round effect designating command is stored in the sub main information storage unit 260 (S811). If the round effect designating command is stored (S 807: YES), the contents of the round effect designating command are analyzed, and the number of rounds included in the contents of this command, and the number of winnings for the big winning opening 64, 65 The information to show is acquired (S812). The acquired information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the sub main information storage unit 260. Subsequently, the round number counter of the sub main information storage unit 260 is updated based on the information acquired in S812 (S813), and the big win number counter of the sub main information storage unit 260 is updated (S814). In the present example, “14” balls are paid out each time the game ball wins in the large winning opening 64, 65, so that “14” is multiplied by the number of winnings in the large winning opening 64, 65. The number of winning balls is calculated.

  Next, it is determined whether the pseudo count flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S815). A pseudo count flag is a flag that turns on when a pseudo count effect is performed to notify that the number of rounds and winning balls in the special game above is added to the number of rounds and winning balls in the special game later It is. If the pseudo count flag is on (S815: YES), that is, if it is scheduled to execute a round effect (pseudo count effect) at a later big hit, a round number pseudo addition process is executed (S816). In this round number pseudo addition processing, the number of round game executions (round number: 16 R) executed in the special game is set to the number of round game execution numbers (round number: 1 R to 16 R) stored in the round number counter. to add. Thereby, in the special continuous effect, the first round game in the later special game is reported as the 17th round game.

  Subsequently, the winning prize ball number pseudo addition processing is executed (S817). In this winning prize ball number pseudo addition processing, the number of winnings for the special winning opening in the previous special game is added to the number of winnings stored in the large winning number counter. Thereby, in the special serial performance, the number of winning balls obtained in the later special game is notified as the total number of winning balls obtained in the first special game and the second special game.

  Then, the round effect pattern number temporarily stored in the big hit effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 in the above S804 and S806, together with the numbers of the round number counter and the big winning number counter, the round effect of the sub main information storage means 260 It transfers to a storage area and sets the start of round presentation (S818).

  Next, it is determined whether or not an end demonstration command is stored in the sub main information storage unit 260 (S821). If the end demonstration command is stored (S 821: YES), the content of the end demonstration command is analyzed, and the information included in the content of this command is acquired (S 822). The acquired information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the sub main information storage unit 260. Next, it is determined whether the special continuous effect flag in the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S823). When the special continuous effect flag is on (S823: YES), the value of the round number counter (round number) and the value of the large winning number counter (big winning number) are stored in the big hit of the sub main information storage means 260 Temporarily store in the area (S824). This is that, if the present big hit corresponds to the previous big hit in the special continuous production, the final round number and the number of big winnings in the previous big hit are pseudo addition processing in the big hit production later (S816, S817) Because it is scheduled to be used in, it is to store it as the record information of the previous special game. Therefore, in the above-described pseudo addition processing in S816 and S817, the numerical values (the number of rounds and the number of big winnings) stored in the future big hit storage area will be added. Next, the round number counter and the big winning number counter of the sub main information storage means 260 are cleared (S825, S826).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the pseudo count flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S827). If the pseudo count flag is on (S827: YES), the pseudo count flag is turned off (S828). Next, it is determined whether the on-hold internal consecutive-play effect flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S 835). If the on-hold on-line consecutive-play effect flag is on (S 835: YES), the on-hold-on on-line consecutive effect flag in the sub main information storage unit 260 is turned off (S 836).

  Then, the end demonstration effect pattern number temporarily stored in the big hit effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 in S804 and S806 is transferred to the end demonstration effect storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260, and the end demonstration effect is performed. The start is set (S837). Then, based on the effect information acquired in S805, S807, S818 and S837, an image control command required for the big hit effect is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S838) .

(Pending Uranso production B judgment processing)
Next, a description will be given of the process for determining whether or not the on-premises multiple-run effect B (S805) is performed. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive effects B determination process (S805).

  First, it is determined whether or not the on-hold consecutive-run effect flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on, that is, whether or not the on-hold internal-run effect A has already been executed in the symbol variation effect (S851). If the on-hold storage unit production flag is not on (S851: NO), the information (result of the winning lottery and the big hit type) stored in the variation presentation content determination area of the sub main information storage unit 260 in S732 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol to be subject to variation this time is the 16R big hit (S852). If the lottery result is a 16R big hit (S 852: YES), it is determined whether or not the predetermination information of the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is stored in the preread information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S853). In this example, the pre-reading determination of the pending inside consecutive effect B is performed on the operation pending ball of the second special symbol which has occurred until the special game is started, that is, until the big hit start demonstration command is received. If there is an operation retention ball of the second special symbol (S853: YES), it is determined whether or not there is a specific suspension in the operation retention ball of the second special symbol (S854). If a specific hold exists (S 854: YES), a hold internal play effect B lottery process 1 is executed to determine whether or not to execute the hold internal play effect B by lottery (S 856). In this on-hold in-line consecutive effects effect B lottery process 1, referring to unshown continuous effects effect B lottery table 1, the in-time effects effect lottery random number value matches any judgment value of "execution" or "non-execution" If there is a problem, decide whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is performed at a rate of 80%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%. In addition, according to the classification (16R big hit, 8R big hit) of specific reservation, you may differ the election probability of pending inside consecutive house effect B. For example, in the case of the specific suspension of the 16R big hit, the on-premises combination effect B is executed at a rate of 100%, and in the case of the 8R big hit on the specific suspension, the on-delivery in-line effects B execution is executed at the rate of 50% It may be a configuration. This is to increase the appearance probability of the on-hold on-line effect B when the degree of advantage for the player is large, and to increase the player's sense of expectation.

  On the other hand, when there is no specific hold (S 854: NO), a hold internal run effect B lottery process 2 is performed to determine whether or not to execute the hold internal play effect B by lottery (S 857) . In this on-hold in-line consecutive effect B lottery process 2, with reference to unshown in-line effect B lottery table 2, a continuous period effect lottery random number value matches with any of the judgment values of "execution" and "non-execution" If there is a problem, decide whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is performed at a rate of 10% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 90%.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the player has been elected in the on-hold consecutive-run effect B lottery process (S858). If the player is won (S 858: YES), the multi-station effect pattern selection process for determining the content of the on-premises multi-station effect B is executed (S 861). In this consecutive home effect pattern selection process, while obtaining the continuous home effect pattern table shown in FIG. 8B, the continuous home performance pattern random number value is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and plural types of continuous home landscaping From the effect patterns, one of the consecutive effect patterns is determined by lottery. Next, the number of the selected consecutive rendering effect pattern selected this time is temporarily stored in the continuous storage effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S868). Then, the on-hold on-line consecutive-play effect flag of the sub main information storage means 260 is turned on (S870).

(Big hit production replacement process)
Next, the jackpot effect replacement process (S806) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot effect replacement process (S806). In this jackpot effect replacement process, if it is the first special game, the special end demonstration effect is set in S881 to S885 in order to execute the special continuous effect in the form of connecting the first special game and the second special game. If it is a special game after, special start demonstration effects are set in S886-S890.

  First, it is determined whether the special continuous effect flag in the sub main information storage unit 260 is on, that is, whether the special continuous effect is already being executed (S881). If the special continuous effect flag is not on (S881: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending internal connection effect flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S882). If the on-hold in-line consecutive-play effect flag is not on (S882: NO), information to the effect of "previous big hit (01H)" is set in the special continuous effect status of the sub main information storage means 260 (S883). Thereby, it is determined that the present big hit (special game) is the previous big hit (special game) in the special continuous effect. Subsequently, the normal end demonstration effect pattern number set in S804 is replaced with a special end operation demonstration effect pattern number (S884). Then, in order to generate a special continuous effect, the special continuous effect flag is turned on (S885).

  On the other hand, if the special continuous effect flag is on (S881: YES), that is, if the special continuous effect is already being executed, the special continuous effect status of the sub main information storage means 260 is "big hit later (02H Information to the effect that ")" is set (S886). Thereby, it is determined that the present big hit (special game) is the next big hit (special game) in the special continuous effect. Next, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a 16R big hit (high profit big hit) (S 887). If it is a 16R big hit (S887: YES), the normal start demonstration effect pattern number set in S804 is replaced with a special end start demonstration effect pattern number (S888). Subsequently, in order to connect the special continuous effect to the pseudo-count effect, the pseudo-count flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is turned on (S889). Then, the special continuous effect flag is turned off (S890).

<< Reception interrupt processing of production control command >>
Next, a reception interrupt process of the effect control command will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process of effect control command. In the reception interrupt process of this effect control command, as described above, it is started when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It is supposed to be. The effect control command is configured to include 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, MODE data is also referred to as “first command”, and EVENT data is also referred to as “second command”.

  First, when an interrupt based on a strobe signal from the main control board 100 occurs, it is determined whether the input value of the effect control command has been determined (S901). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is determined when the same value is read twice in a row. This is because reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not determined until the same value is read twice in a row.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). If the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S904). In addition, as for the acquisition time of the effect lottery random number, it is assumed that the effect control command is received when the effect control command is received, and the effect control command is transmitted at irregular timing such as the start winning of the game ball or the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is to prevent periodicity at the acquisition time by using it as a trigger. As described above, by making the acquisition time of the effect lottery random number irregular, it becomes difficult to generate inconveniences such as the same effect being repeated unnaturally and repeatedly even in various effect lottery.

  On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control command is received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether or not there is any contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of effect control commands (S 905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is acquired (S 906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub main information storage unit 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S 907). The stored command data is read out in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of the effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909).

<< Production control timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the effect control timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing effect control timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is activated by clock pulses at regular time intervals, and is executed in a form of interrupting the effect control side main process described above.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the sub main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and the processes after S911 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, an interrupt with priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100, a watchdog timer interrupt, etc., is permitted (S911).

  Subsequently, port input / output processing is executed (S912). In this port input / output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub main information storage unit 260 are read out and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

  Subsequently, device control data output processing is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined time is read out from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in the device control data output process, the drive data is switched at every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

  Next, the effect timer update process is executed (S914). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for effect operation control are subtracted and updated for each interrupt cycle (1 ms in the present embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the variation time of the decorative symbol, and a timer for managing the generation timing of the advance effect. The time schedule in the fluctuation effect pattern is managed by the effect timer, and time management such as the drive timing of the movable object 24 and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP is performed on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S918) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

  Subsequently, a button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the effect button 15 is subtracted and updated from the interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation valid time is the time when the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid.

  Subsequently, task control counter update processing is executed (S717). In this task control counter updating process, the value ("0" to "15") of the task counter is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is “0” to “14”, the value is incremented by one, and if the value of the task counter is “15”, the value is returned to “0”. That is, this task counter can take a cyclic cycle of 16 ms. Then, various tasks (task processing) are allocated corresponding to the value of the task counter updated this time, and the lamp control task (the lamp data update process in S718) and the runaway monitoring according to the value of the task counter. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in S719) and an error management task (error management timer update process in S720) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values (“0” to “15”) is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values at intervals of 8 ms) are for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to a task, and one other value is assigned to an error management task (an explanation of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the cycle period of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match the minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and realizes synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

  Subsequently, lamp data update processing is executed (S918). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read out and set from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) or the like. The lamp data set in this process is data representing lighting control for 16 ms which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamp LP. When lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts lamp data of the transmission buffer in units of one byte, and outputs the lamp data to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all ramp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in the lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection substrate 91 by serial transfer. The lamp data update process is a process that is executed when the task counter value reaches a predetermined value (a value indicating a lamp control task) in the task control counter update process (S917) (that is, executed in a cycle of 16 ms) Processing).

  Subsequently, the image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S919). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and the image control board 300 is not continuously changed for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames). It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 is running away, and the effect control board 200 transmits a reset signal to the image control board 300. Thereby, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process in response to the occurrence of the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301. The toggle signal is a signal of a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every one frame time. The image CPU runaway monitoring process is a process executed when the value of the task counter reaches a predetermined value (a value indicating an image monitoring task) in the task control counter updating process (S917).

  Next, an error management timer process is executed (S920). In this error management timer process, the value of the error presentation timer for managing the error presentation time set in the above-mentioned error presentation management process (S617) is subtracted and updated. The error management timer process is a process executed when the value of the task counter becomes a predetermined value (a value indicating an error management task) in the task control counter update process (S917). Then, after making all the interrupts permitted, and restoring the contents of the saved register, the effect control timer interrupt processing is ended, and the processing returns to the original processing before the occurrence of the interruption.

<< Interrupt processing of image control command transmission >>
Next, transmission interrupt processing of the image control command will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing transmission interrupt processing of an image control command. The transmission interrupt process of the image control command occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs) set in advance.

  In this image control command transmission interrupt process, first, the image control command buffer of the sub main information storage unit 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, the read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer coincide with each other, the image control command is not stored. If the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit 205 designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, an image control command is serially transmitted to the image control board 300 from the serial port. Next, the command data (command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by one and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interrupt process of the image command is ended, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

[Effect]
Next, in order to facilitate understanding of the present embodiment, the characteristic operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 37, the flow of effects when the on-hold in-line consecutive effects and the special continuous effects are performed will be described. FIG. 37 is a schematic view showing an effect screen of a pending in-line effect and a special continuous effect.

  First, as shown in FIG. 37A, in the round effect (final round) in the special game, the final round number “16 rounds” and the winning prize ball number “1988” in the special game are It is displayed. Then, in this final round, the image of "the book of righteousness" is displayed as the pending inner rown directing effect B, and the specific hold is included in the subsequent operation pending balls, that is, the possibility of the inner edge of the left behind inner rowing Is suggested.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), in the end demonstration effect in the special game, the special continuous effect is started along with the occurrence of the pending internal connection effect B in the last round described above. In the illustrated example, an ally character and an enemy character appear as a special end demonstration effect. In addition, in this special end demonstration effect, unlike normal, the character information of "continuation" is displayed instead of the character information of "big hit end" being displayed, as if the special game is continued. I can show it. Then, internally, the special game is ended, and the symbol variation game is resumed in a state in which the special symbol is in a definite variation state and a short time state, and a power chute support state is set.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 37C, in the first symbol change after the end of the special game, the lottery result is lost, and the super-shortened change (2 seconds) is set as the special symbol change effect. In a very short time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "1-2-5". In the illustrated example, in this special variation effect, a battle effect in which an ally character identical to that in FIG. 37B and an enemy character fight is started. This is to display the same character as that displayed in the previous special game in order to give the player the impression that the special game (the first special game) is finished as much as possible. In addition, during this special symbol variation production, it is displayed in the state which shrunk the decorative symbol by which variable display or stop display is carried out toward the edge of a screen. Thereby, the player can be seen as if the previous special game has ended, as if it were continuing. When the special symbol variation effect is not being performed, that is, during the normal symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol is displayed substantially at the center of the screen without being reduced. Further, during the limited period (during special variation effect), a background image of a special background (“star star”) different from normal is displayed, so that the player's expectation for future development can be enhanced. In addition, it is good also as a state which can not recognize symbol variation or it is hard to recognize by making the whole screen into a specific display color.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37D, in the second symbol change after the end of the special game, the lottery result is a big hit (16R big hit), and the super shortening change (2 seconds) is set as a special change effect. Therefore, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode "7-7-7" in a very short time. In the illustrated example, in this special variation effect, an effect in which the teammate character beats the enemy character is executed. As described above, in the special variation effect in the special continuous effect, the time required to shift to the later special game is compressed by rapidly digesting the subsequent operation reserving ball in a very short time, and the symbol for the player It is configured to seamlessly connect to a special game later without being aware as much as possible that the variable effect has been executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 37E, in the start demonstration effect in the later special game, the special continuous effect continues. In the illustrated example, as the special start demonstration effect, an effect is performed in which the ally character tells the enemy character the line saying “The strongest in the mystery”. In addition, in this start demonstration effect, the character information of "big hit start" is not displayed unlike usual.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 37F, the pseudo count effect is started in the round effect (start round) in the later special game. In this pseudo count production, "17 rounds", which is the cumulative number of rounds from the previous special game, and the cumulative winning prize from the previous special game, in order to make it appear as if it is continuing as an extension of the previous special game. The ball number "1988" is informed. Further, the same teammate character and enemy character as in FIG. 37 (B) are continuously displayed.

  In this way, it is possible to show the previous special game and the subsequent special game by the on-hold Uranzou as a series of effects across the symbol variation effect. Further, since the number of winning balls obtained by the two special games is displayed, it is possible to give the player a satisfaction that a large number of winning balls have been obtained. This makes it possible to artificially create a new special game state exceeding the number of rounds and the number of prize balls limited by the rule.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the relationship between the on-hold in-line continuous effect and the special continuous effect will be described. FIG. 38 is a time chart showing the relationship between the pending and in-line effect and the special continuous effect.

  When the preceding operation reserving ball is digested and the jackpot is won in the determination of yes or no (t11), the processing shifts to a pending internal connection effect A determination process, and the pre-reading determination is executed on the subsequent operation reserving ball. If there is a specific hold (the third is a specific hold in the example shown) in the subsequent operation hold ball, whether or not to execute the hold inside consecutive effect A is determined by lottery, and if it is won during the symbol variation production The on-premises in-house effect A occurs (t12).

  Subsequently, when the symbol variation is stopped and the jackpot symbol is finalized and displayed, thereafter, a special game (a special game ahead) is started. At the start of this special game, the process proceeds to the on-hold on-line consecutive effects B determination process, but since on-off on-line consecutive effects effect A has already occurred in the symbol variation effect, the on-off on-line consecutive effects in this special game B does not occur (t13). The reason for this is that if the pending internal connection effect B is generated again during the special game, the pending internal connection number of times (the number of specific holdings present in the subsequent operation holding ball) is also one. Regardless of whether there are multiple times, there is a fear of causing the player to misunderstand, and in this example, the player is worried about whether the pending in-line event will actually occur because it is a pending in-line event effect B which is not a fixed notification effect. It is because there is a possibility of making me remember.

  Next, special continuous effects are started in the end demonstration effect in the previous special game (t14). In addition, this special continuous effect is continued from the end demonstration effect in the current special game (the previous special game) to the round effect in the next special game (the next special game) (t14 to t18). Then, when the previous special game ends, the symbol variation effect is resumed (t15). In this example, a limited period for staying in the special effect mode Mγ is set with four symbol variations as a limit, and special symbol variation effects are executed within this limited period.

  Then, after the end of the previous special game, the third operation suspension ball (specific suspension notified at t12) is digested, and if you win a big hit in the judgment (t16), within suspension The process proceeds to a continuous play effect A determination process. At this time, a new specific hold exists in the subsequent operation hold ball (the second is a specific hold in the example shown), but this is the third time because special continuous rendition is already being executed. During the symbol change effect, no on-hold in-line consecutive effect A occurs (t16). The reason is that even when trying to show two special gaming states as one special gaming state in conjunction with the generation of special continuous effects, a pending inside consecutive effect A as a symbol variation effect occurs during execution of this special continuous effect The reason is that there is a risk that the intention of concealing that the symbol variation is being produced may be overwhelmed. In addition, when the special continuous rendition is started triggered by the occurrence of the pending inner rendition effect A, the fluctuation time when the subsequent operation reserving ball is digested during this special continuous rendition (within the limited period) is a very short time Since it is set to (2 seconds), the rendering effect is low even if the on-hold on-line continuous effect A is generated within this short time, and the on-time in-on direct on-time effect and the special continuous effect conflict with each other It is because the effect may be diluted.

  Then, when the symbol variation is stopped and the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, the later special game is started. In addition, at the start of the special game later, the process proceeds to the on-hold consecutive-run effect B determination process, and the pre-read determination is executed on the subsequent operation-hold ball. At this time, even if a special continuous effect is being executed, if there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball (in the example shown, the second is a specific hold), the possibility of execution of the on-premises continuous effect B is lottery If it is determined that the game is decided on and if it is elected, a pending internal connection effect B can be generated during the special game (t17). The reason is that the player feels that the normal on-hold in-line continuous effect B has occurred if it is generated during the big hit effect even during the special continuous effect, and a sense of discomfort can not be generated. In addition, since the special continuous rendition is to connect at least a series of effects from the end demonstration rendition during the big hit rendition ahead to the start demonstration rendition during the big hit later, after the end of the special continuous rendition (that is, This is because, if the on-hold U-Ran effect is generated at the timing after the round effect in the special game, there is no problem that the on-off U-Ran effect and the special continuous effect conflict with each other.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first on-hold in-line effect A that occurs during symbol variation and the second on-off in-line effect B that occurs during special game are provided, On the other hand, in the case of the second holding in-game effect B, only one specific hold is made in the subsequent operation hold ball, while in the case of the continuous play effect A, the possibility that there is one specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball is informed. By configuring to be able to notify that there is not more than one, through a series of game processes from when the symbol starts to change until the special game is ended, the sense of expectation for the occurrence of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect is sustained In addition to being able to, the player can be taught various information regarding the pending U-linked in response to the occurrence timing of the pending U-in-linking effect in the game process, thereby causing the pending U-in-linked effects to occur. Variations are given to the aspect It may extend the width of the hold in extended game effect, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, in this embodiment, during the limited period after the end of the special game, by executing the special symbol variation effect, the next big hit at an early stage after the end of the special game The expectation for the occurrence of a “big hit” related to the present invention can be enhanced, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Also, by configuring the special symbol variation effect with a very short time shortening variation, it is possible to suppress the time interval between the first special game and the second special game, and it is possible to prevent the extension until the next big hit. By prohibiting the generation of reserved U-Ran effects within a limited period, it is possible to prevent the effects of the effects from being diluted due to the competition between the special effects and the Pending U-Ran effects during the limited period. it can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when there is a specific suspension that makes a big hit, the on-premises in-line effect is not necessarily executed, so even if it is not notified, it is expected to the possibility of on-off in-line connection. It can give you a feeling. In addition, when a specific hold exists, you may be comprised so that a reservation inside consecutive house effect may be performed.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit, and the holding internal connection effect B does not occur during the special game, and the subsequent operation holding ball (ending internal connection effect after the end of the special game If a high expectation effect (Super Reach B) is generated during symbol variation, it is possible that the action-retaining ball existing at the time of B occurrence will be removed rather than the possibility of becoming a big hit Is set higher.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the game of the second special symbol, the probability of becoming a big hit is about 1/40, and the probability of being out is about 39/40 in the definite variation state of the special symbol.

  In addition, as shown in Figure 7, in the special symbol state of variation, if the result of the judgment is a big hit, regardless of the type of big hit, whether it is 16R specific big hit and 8R specific big hit, it is 100% The fluctuation patterns PX7 and PY7 of Super Reach B (high expectation degree effect) are selected with probability. That is, in the special symbol state of probability variation, only the variation pattern PX7 of the super reach B is selected in the case of the 16R specific big hit, and only the variation pattern PY7 of the super reach B is selected in the case of the 8R big hit. On the other hand, in the definite variation state of the special symbol, when the result of the pass / fail determination is a loss, the variation pattern PH7 of super reach B (high expectation degree effect) is selected with a probability of 5%.

  At this time, as described in S 856 in FIG. 32, in this example, when there is a specific hold (16R big hit, 8R big hit) in the subsequent operation hold ball, the winning probability of the execution permission or non-presence of the in-row combination effect B Is set to 80%, so even if there is a specific hold (16R big hit, 8R big hit), the pending inner row effect B is unexecuted with a probability of 20% remaining.

  Under the conditions as described above, under the condition that the pending inner row directing effect B is not executed, the probability X of becoming a big hit by the appearance of Super Reach B and the probability Y of being out of position due to the appearance of Super Reach B are as follows It will be.

X = (probability of becoming a big hit) × (probability of not producing a pending in-house effect B) × (probability of becoming a super reach B)
Y = (probability of becoming out of place) x (probability of becoming super reach B)

  Subsequently, when the probability X of becoming a big hit due to the appearance of Super Reach B and the probability Y of being out of place due to the appearance of Super Reach B are specifically calculated using the above numerical values, the following results are obtained.

X = 1/40 x (100-80) / 100 x 100/100 = 20/400
Y = 39/40 × 5/100 = 195/400
It becomes.

  Therefore, when a high expectation degree effect is generated in the subsequent operation holding ball without generation of the holding inside row sorrow effect B during the special game (when it is developed into the super reach B), a big hit is possible There is a higher possibility of falling off than sex.

  In the first embodiment described above, basically, the pre-reading determination relating to the pending inside consecutive effects is performed for the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol acquired while the electric chew support function is activated. However, this is only an example, and for example, the pending special reciprocation ball (or the second special symbol work reserving ball) acquired while the electric support function is inactive is targeted for reserving Pre-reading determination concerning the cho-to effect may be executed.

  Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the determination timing of the pending internal connection effect B is set to the timing of the big hit start time (when the start demo command is received), but this is merely an example, for example It may be set to any timing at the time of big hit start, round game, or big hit end.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although it was the structure which makes the 1st special winning opening 64 correspond to the 1st special symbol game, and makes the 2nd special winning opening 65 correspond to the 2nd special game, it is limited to this Instead, at least one of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is made to correspond to both the first large winning opening 64 and the second large winning opening 65, alternately these large winning openings 64, 65 You may open it. Further, without providing the two large winning openings 64, 65, only one large winning opening may be provided.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although what is called a preferential digestion which digests the operation reserve ball of the 2nd special symbol preferentially over the operation reserve ball of the 1st special symbol is adopted, it is limited to this Instead, the operation holding ball may be digested by the order of ball entry into the first starting opening 61 or the second starting opening 62. In addition, when this structure is employ | adopted, it is preferable to make both the operation | movement reservation ball of a 1st special symbol, and the operation | movement reservation ball of a 2nd special symbol into the object of notification within reservation.

First Embodiment First Modified Example
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained.

(Relationship between pending Uchizhuang production and ascension production)
In the present modification, when the so-called consecutive units continue a specified number of times, a rare special effect (so-called ascension effect) occurs. "Renso" means that, when a predetermined jackpot occurs during a specific game, the specific game state continues again as the game state after the end of the special game. As described above, the "specific gaming state" is a state in which the transition probability to the special game is increased compared to the normal state, and the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol, the electric chow support function At least one of the functions is activated. In this example, at least the power chute support function (ball-loading easy state) is activated as a specific gaming state. Here, in the present embodiment, during the ST period after the end of the special game, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the power chew support function are activated (at the same time, the operation is started and the operation is ended). Because of the configuration, it can be said that during the ST period, it is always in the specific gaming state.

  As the execution condition of the special effect, it is determined that the consecutive villas continue for a prescribed number of times (20 times in this example), but in addition to the prescribed number of times, for example, the cumulative number of specific jackpots in the consecutive villa state is predetermined When reaching the number of times, the total number of acquisition rounds and the total number of award winning balls in the consecutive villa state reach a predetermined number, and a specific effect (specific effect during symbol variation or special game) is generated during the consecutive villa state And the like may be added to the execution condition. You may add the total number of acquisition rounds and the total number of winning prizes in the consecutive state to the execution condition. In this example, the number of consecutive acquisitions of the special game repeatedly while continuing the specific game state (entering ball easy state) reaches a prescribed number (20 times), and at least the final N-th high profit big hit (16 R Condition that you win the jackpot). The special effect is displayed on the time axis across the variation effect of the decorative symbol and the big hit effect. However, the special rendition ends with the round rendition in the big hit rendition (the final round), and the subsequent end demonstration remarks are not included. As the contents of this special effect, for example, by displaying a special character with high rarity that appears only in the special effect in order, one cut at a time, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction in jackpots being continuous. It can enhance the sense of premium.

  Subsequently, the relationship between the on-hold reservation and the special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are time charts showing the relationship between the on-hold on-the-line effect and the special effect. In the following, the number of consecutive units is also referred to as "N" and the specified number is also referred to as "Nset".

  (2-1) When a pending in-line resort effect occurs due to a symbol change or a special game pertaining to the previous big hit, a big hit (later big hit) by this pending in-link element is the number of consecutive passes as the occurrence condition of the special effect Is not counted, it does not become a requirement for the occurrence of special effects. That is, as shown in FIG. 39, when the preceding operation reserving ball is digested and a big hit is won in the judgment of yes or no (t21), if it is at the time of the digestion, it shifts to the pending internal connection effect A determination processing and If it is the start time, the process proceeds to the on-premises consecutive-run effect B determination process. If there is a specific hold (the third is a specific hold in the illustrated example) in the subsequent operation hold ball in this hold internal play effect A, B determination processing, whether or not the execution of the hold internal play effect A, B is possible or not If it is decided by lottery, if it is elected, if there is a symbol change, a pending internal connection effect A occurs (t22), and if a special game is under execution, a pending internal connection effect B occurs (t23). Here, if it is assumed that the current jackpot is the number of consecutive nights N = Nset-1st, then the pending inner rowing effect A (t 22) or the pending inner rowing effect B (t 23) When notification of the presence of the specific suspension to be is made, the special effect is not generated across the symbol variation (t25) accompanied by the number N = Nset of big hits in the consecutive arrangement and the round effect (t26) of the special game. The reason is that, in the present embodiment, two special game states (in this example, the special game states of the Nset-first and the Nset-th ones) are triggered by the occurrence of the reserved U-line consecutive effects A and B. In order to generate special continuous effects to be shown as one special gaming state (t24 to t26), the effect is not included in the number of consecutive times as a condition for executing special effects, but the special effect is included in the Nset-time big hit It is because the direction of avoiding execution does not lose the player's sense of satisfaction due to the simulated extension of the special game, and the competition between the special effect and the special continuous effect can be avoided, and the overall effect can be balanced. In addition, internally, even if it is a big hit by pending Urenso, the number of times of Renso has been updated as one sorrow.

  (2-2) When special effects are generated across the symbol variation and the special game, regardless of whether or not there is a specific suspension in the subsequent operation suspension ball when the symbol variation is started. There is no on-hold Uchi-Ran effect A in the variable effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 40, the preceding operation holding ball is digested, and as a result of winning the high profit jackpot in the judgment of success or not (t 31), the number N of consecutive bundling becomes Nset number, and the symbol variation and the special game If a special effect occurs across t (t31 to t33), whether there is a specific hold (with a specific hold on the third one in the example shown) in the subsequent operation hold ball in the symbol variation concerned Regardless, the on-premises in-line consecutive effect A is not generated (t32). The reason is that the competition between the special effect in the symbol change and the reserved internal connection effect A avoids the fact that the effect of the two effects becomes relatively thin.

  (2-3) When special effects are generated across the symbol variation and the special game, regardless of whether or not there is a specific suspension in the subsequent operation suspension ball when the symbol variation is started. In the said fluctuation production, reservation Uchi rown production B may occur. That is, as shown in FIG. 40, the preceding operation holding ball is digested, and as a result of winning the high profit jackpot in the judgment of success or not (t 31), the number N of consecutive bundling becomes Nset number, and the symbol variation and the special game In the special game, if a special effect occurs (t32 to t33), whether there is a specific hold (the third specific hold in the example shown) in the subsequent operation hold ball in the special game Regardless, it is possible to generate a pending in-line connection effect B (t34). This is because, as described above, the special effect is executed from the symbol variation effect to the special round effect of the special game, so it occurs in the end demonstration effect in which the on-premises consecutive effect B is a round effect or later (t34 The reason is that the situation in which a special effect and a pending internal connection effect B are in competition during the special game is avoided. In addition, if you do not want to generate pending U consecutive villa effect B during the special game, even if there is a specific suspension within the limited period after the end of the special game, the symbol variation effect relating to the specific suspension as a special symbol variation effect Instead of generating it, it is usually a shortening of the big hit fluctuation effect (It is not a special symbol fluctuation effect such as performing over a symbol fluctuation effect relating to the postponement of the digestion schedule, but it is completed only by the symbol fluctuation effect relating to the specific suspension It may be generated as an immediate hit effect).

  Subsequently, the procedure of operation processing in the first modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS.

(Special effect determination processing: first modification)
First, the special effect determination process (S736) according to the subroutine of S736 of FIG. 29 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the details of the special effect determination process (S736).

  First, it is determined whether or not the number N of consecutive loaves is smaller than the specified number Nset by 1 with reference to the consecutive loaves counter of the sub main information storage means 260 (S751). If the number of consecutive nights N = the number of prescribed times Nset-1 (S751: YES), that is, if the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed this time is a big hit, the number of consecutive times N will reach the prescribed number Nset If it is, the information stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub main information storage means 260 in the above S732 (the result of the winning lottery and the big hit type) is analyzed, and the lottery result of the special symbol to be the current variation target It is determined whether or not the 16R big hit (S752). If the lottery result is 16R big hit (S 752: YES), that is, if the number of consecutive times N reaches the specified number Nset, and the big hit with this number of consecutive times N is to be a high profit big hit, sub main information It is determined whether the special continuous effect flag in the storage unit 260 is on (S753).

  If the special continuous effect flag is not on (S753: NO), that is, if the special continuous effect is not being executed, the number of the effect pattern of the special effect is submain information storage means 260 to execute the special effect. It temporarily stores in the special effect pattern storage area of (S754). Then, the special effect flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is turned on (S755). Here, the special effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the special effect is executed. Although not shown, this special effect flag is turned off when the round effect ends.

  On the other hand, if the special continuous effect flag is on (S753), that is, if the special continuous effect is already being executed, S754 and S755 are skipped to avoid competition between the special effect and the special continuous effect. To complete this process.

(Reserved Uchien effects A judgment processing: first modification)
Next, the on-premises / on-premises presentation A determination process (S737) according to the subroutine of S737 in FIG. 29 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive effect A determination process (S737) in the first modified example.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is that the process of S 760 is added, and if the special effect is already being executed, the execution of the pending internal connection effect A is avoided. . In FIG. 42, the processes of S761 to S770 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the process of S760 which is the difference will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether the special effect flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S760). If the special effect flag is not on (S760: NO), that is, if the special effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to the next S761 in order to continue the determination as to whether or not the on-hold on-line consecutive effect A is performed. On the other hand, if the special effect flag is on (S760: YES), that is, if the special effect is already being executed, the processing after S761 is skipped in order to avoid the execution of the pending internal connection effect A. To complete this process.

(Reserved Uchien effects B determination processing: first modification)
Next, the on-premises / on-premises effect B determination process (S805) according to the subroutine of S805 in FIG. 31 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive-play effect B determination process (S805) in the first modified example.

  Here, the difference from the above-described first embodiment is the processing of S859, S862, and S863, and depending on whether or not the special effect is in execution, It is a point which is different from the effect pattern selection process. In FIG. 43, the processes of S851 to S858 and S868 to S870 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S859, S862, and S863 which are differences are mainly described.

  First, when the execution of the on-premises internal connection effect B is determined, it is determined whether the special effect flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S859). If the special effect flag is not on (S 859: NO), that is, if the special effect is not being executed, the continuous pattern effect pattern selection processing 1 for determining the content of the pending internal connection effect B is executed ( S862). In this consecutive home effect pattern selection process 1, while obtaining the continuous home effect pattern table shown in FIG. 8 (B) described above, a continuous home effect pattern random number value is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and plural types of From among the consecutive villa production patterns, one of the consecutive villa presentation patterns is determined by lottery.

  On the other hand, if the special effect flag is on (S859: YES), that is, if the special effect is being executed, the continuous pattern effect pattern selection processing 2 for determining the content of the pending internal continuous effect B is selected. Execute (S863). In this consecutive villa effect pattern selection process 2, while acquiring the consecutive chamber effect pattern table (not shown) different from the above-mentioned FIG. 8 (B), the consecutive villa effect pattern random number value is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210 Among the plural types of multi-story production patterns, one of the multi-story production patterns is determined by lottery. In the non-illustrated twin pattern effect pattern table, only the continuous pattern effect pattern generated in the end demonstration effect is defined, and the continuous pattern effect pattern generated in the start demonstration effect or the round effect is not defined. That is, in the consecutive residence effect pattern selection process 2, only the adjacent passage effect pattern for the end demonstration effect is selected. Since this special effect is executed from the variable effect to the round effect as described above, if the pending internal connection effect B is generated by the end demonstration effect, it is a special game in special game This is because the competition between the effect and the reserved in-line effect B can be avoided.

  As described above, according to the first modified example of the first embodiment, after the occurrence of the pending internal row presentation, if a big hit is made by the pending internal row, the number N of consecutive passages reaches the specified number Nset internally Even if you are, you are prohibited from generating special effects, and effects will be continued interlockingly after the occurrence of on-hold consecutive effects (in this example, special continuous effects or special background effects within a limited period) By avoiding the situation in which the special effect and the special effect compete, it is possible to prevent the effect of the pending in-line effect from becoming thin, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the first modification described above, the expectation for the special effect is the number of non-delivery times (for example, 5 times, 10 times, 15 times) before the number of consecutive times N reaches the prescribed number Nset (= 20 times). For example, a special route effect may be provided that is configured as part of a special effect. At this time, in the first modified example described above, when the special effect is executed when the number of consecutive times reaches the specified number (20 times), basically, the execution of the pending internal consecutive time effect is limited (end Although it will be permitted only in demonstration effects, in the case of special via effects, even if this special via effect is being executed, it may be configured to be able to simultaneously execute on-hold in-line consecutive effects. .

First Embodiment Second Modified Example
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained.

(Relationship between on-premise and on-play mode)
In the first embodiment described above, the effect mode on the effect control board 200 side is uniquely determined according to the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side, but in this modification, it is determined by the player. The production mode can be selected with the operation of the production button 15 as a trigger.

  That is, in this modification, when a big hit (first hit) occurs in the normal state, during the big hit effect (during an end demonstration effect), to identify the type of symbol variation effect and big hit effect after the special game is over The player can select one of a plurality of effect modes. In this example, two effect modes (first effect mode M1 and second effect mode M2) having different types of effects are prepared as the probability variation effect mode Mβ during the ST period, and a plurality of types are provided for each effect mode. The variation presentation pattern is stored. About this variation production pattern, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even when the variation start command of the same information is received), if the presentation mode is different, the variation presentation patterns of different presentation contents are selected. It will be.

  The first effect mode M1 and the second effect mode M2 are configured as a battle effect mode in which the player-side ally character battles against the enemy character, and for each effect mode, the player-side ally character and the opponent enemy The characters are set to be different from each other.

  While staying in the first effect mode M1, a change effect pattern of effect contents in which the teammate character C1 corresponding to the effect mode M1 plays against the enemy character on the arena is selected as the symbol change effect. In addition, while staying in the first effect mode M1, the first effect mode M1 is selected by selecting a big hit effect pattern of effect contents (attack type) that attack the enemy character with the ally character C1 as a main character as a big hit effect. The relationship between the symbol variation production and the big hit production in has been secured.

  While staying in the second effect mode M2, as the symbol change effect, a change effect pattern of effect contents in which the teammate character C2 corresponding to the effect mode M2 plays against the enemy character on the stage of the enemy's adige is selected. In addition, while staying in the second effect mode M2, as a big hit effect, a big hit effect pattern of the effect contents (defense system) for preventing an attack from the enemy character by using the ally character C2 as a main character is selected. Reciprocity of symbol variation production and big hit production in the production mode M2 is secured.

  The selection of the effect mode is performed by displaying a predetermined mode selection screen during the end demonstration effect in the big hit effect when the first hit occurs in the normal state. While the mode selection screen is displayed, an operation valid period in which the operation of the effect button 15 is validated is set. In the mode selection screen, the display area of the effect display device 70 is divided into two right and left, the name of the teammate character C1 is displayed with the related image in the left area, and the name of the teammate character C2 is displayed with the related image in the right area. Ru. Then, effect modes M1, M2 corresponding to the teammate characters C1, C2 selected by the effect button 15 during the operation effective period are set. If no operation is performed during the operation valid period, one of the effect modes is set in the internal lottery.

  Next, the relationship between the on-premises on-hold effect and the effect mode in the second modification will be described.

  (3-1) The execution probability (frequency of occurrence) of the pending in-line consecutive effect A is different between the case where the user is staying in the first effect mode M1 and the case where the user is in the second effect mode M2. It is set. In this example, when staying in the first effect mode M1, for example, execution is performed at a rate of 90% (high probability), and non-execution is determined at a rate of 10%, while staying in the second effect mode M2 If it is, execute at a rate of 10% (low probability) and determine non-execution at a rate of 90%. It should be noted that if the execution probability of the on-premises in-line arrangement effect A is different for each of the effect modes, if one is staying in any one of the effect modes, the on-off in-line association effect A is not executed, that is The execution probability of the sho effect A may be set to 0%.

  (3-2) The execution probability (frequency of occurrence) of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect B is set the same in the case of staying in the first effect mode M1 and in the case of staying in the second effect mode M2 There is. In this example, even when staying in any of the effect modes M1 and M2, for example, execution is performed at a rate of 80%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%. In addition, it is not limited to this, you may make the execution probability of reservation U continuous production effect B different for every production mode similarly to reservation U continuous production A.

  (3-3) If it is determined that the on-hold on-line consecutive-island effect A is determined, the on-hold-on in-line consecutive-on effects A (on-to-long-out effect pattern) are the case of staying in the first effect mode M1 and the second The same setting is made in the case of staying in the effect mode M2. Here, FIG. 44 (A) is a schematic view showing a multi-use effect pattern table of the non-premises-in-one effect A in this modification. In the present example, in the on-premises consecutive-run effect A, one of the same continuous-action effect patterns PA1 and PA2 is selected regardless of the effect mode. The effect patterns PA1 and PA2 have been described in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  (3-4) When the execution of the pending in-line consecutive-room effect B is determined, the effect contents of the pending-in-period consecutive-state effect B (continuous-up effect pattern) are the case of staying in the first effect mode M1 and the second They are set to be different from each other when staying in the effect mode M2. Here, FIG. 44 (B) is a schematic view showing a multi-use effect pattern table of pending inner-run multi-effect effect B in the present modification. In this example, one of the consecutive rendering effect patterns PB11, PB12, and PB13 is selected in the first effect mode in the on-hold in-line consecutive effects effect B, and in the second effect mode, the continuous effect effects patterns PB21 and PB22 , PB23 is selected. Special effect images “BX11” to “BX13” that do not appear in any scene other than on-hold in-line consecutive effects when the continuous change effect patterns PB11 to PB13 are selected in the first effect mode M1 Is displayed. The effect images BX11 to BX13 correspond to, for example, an attack-based effect content in which an image imitating an "invincible sword" or character information such as "Attack is the maximum defense" appears. On the other hand, in the second effect mode M2, when the continuous pattern effect patterns PB21 to PB23 are selected, a special effect image “BX21” which does not appear in any scene other than the pending in-line continuous effect pattern "BX23" is displayed. As the effect images BX21 to BX23, for example, an effect imposing content of a defense system in which an image imitating an "invincible armor" or character information such as "complete defense" appears.

  Subsequently, the procedure of the operation processing in the second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

(The jackpot effect content determination process: the second modification)
First, the jackpot effect content determination process (S638) according to the subroutine of S638 in FIG. 27 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot effect content determination process (S638) in the second modified example.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S829 to S831, and is that the operation of the effect button 15 is set effectively during the end demonstration effect at the time of the first hit. In FIG. 45, the processes of S801 to S826 and S835 to S838 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S829 to S831, which are differences, are mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is the first hit (S829). If it is the first hit (S829: YES), an operation effective period for measuring the operation effective period of the effect button 15 so that the effect mode can be selected according to the operation of the effect button 15 by the player. A predetermined value is set to the timer (S830). The operation valid period is a period in which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid. Subsequently, the effect button valid flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is turned on (S831). The effect button effective flag is a flag which is turned on when the operation of the effect button 15 is effective.

(Effect button monitoring control process: the second modification)
Subsequently, the effect button monitor control process (S617) according to the subroutine of S617 of FIG. 26 in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing details of the effect button monitor control process (S617).

  First, it is determined whether the effect button valid flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S951). If the effect button valid flag is on (S951: YES), it is determined whether the operation valid period of the effect button 15 is in progress, that is, whether the operation valid period timer is not "0" (S952) ). As described above, the operation valid period timer is set to a predetermined value at the start of the end demonstration effect at the first hit, and is decremented by 1 ms each time the timer interrupt process described later occurs. In addition, during the operation effective period, the effect screen (mode selection screen) based on the end demonstration effect pattern set in S804 is displayed, and based on the operation input of the effect button 15, the first effect mode M1, the second effect mode One of M2 can be selected. Specifically, although not shown, two selected images corresponding to each effect mode are displayed on the mode selection screen horizontally, vertically or vertically, and the display mode of the selected image is displayed at predetermined time intervals during the operation valid period. By sequentially switching, one of these two selected images can be selected according to the operation timing of the effect button 15, and the effect mode corresponding to the selected image is set.

  Here, if it is during the operation effective period of the effect button 15 (S952: YES), it is determined whether or not there is an operation input of the effect button 15 (S953). If there is an operation input of the effect button 15 (S953: YES), the operation input information of the effect button 15 is stored in the sub main information storage means 260 (S954). In this example, the operation input information includes information indicating that the first effect mode has been selected and operated, and information indicating that the second effect mode has been selected and operated. Subsequently, an image control command for instructing the operation control information of the effect button 15 to the image control board 300 side is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S955). In addition, when there is an operation input of the effect button 15 as described above, the operation valid flag is set to confirm the operation input and set the end of the operation valid period even before the expiration of the operation valid period. Turn off (S956). On the other hand, if the operation effective period is not in progress (S952: NO), that is, if the operation effective period timer is “0”, the effect button effective flag is turned off (S956).

(Effect state transition process: second modification)
Subsequently, the effect state transition process (S632) according to the subroutine of S632 of FIG. 27 in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing details of effect state transition processing (S632) in the second modified example.

  Here, the difference from the above-described first embodiment is the processing of S714 to S720, and based on the operation input information of the effect button 15 set in the above-mentioned effect button monitor control process (S617) This is a point in which the rendering mode is alternatively determined in response to the pressing operation of the button 15). In FIG. 47, the processes of S701 to S705 and S721 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S714 to S720 which are differences will be mainly described.

  First, when the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is the high probability shortening fluctuation state β (S706: YES), it is determined whether the present big hit is the first hit (S714). If it is the first hit (S714: YES), it is determined whether the operation input information set in S954 is information indicating that the first effect mode M1 has been selected (S715). When the first effect mode M1 is selected (S715: YES), the first effect mode M1 is set as a transition destination of the effect mode (S716). When shifting to the first effect mode M1, first probable variation background data is set in the background data storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S717). Then, in the first effect mode M1, for example, the first probable background image of the “fight ground” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation.

  On the other hand, if the operation input information set in S954 is information indicating that the second effect mode M2 has been selected and operated (S715: NO), the second effect mode M2 is set as the transition destination of the effect mode ( S 718). When shifting to the second effect mode M2, second probable variation background data is set in the background data storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S719). Then, in the second effect mode M2, for example, the second probable background image of "enemy agitate" is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation.

  If the current big hit is not the first hit (S714: NO), the effect mode and background image selected at the first hit are maintained (S720). Not only the operation input at the time of the first hit in S714 to S719 but also the effect mode may be switched when a certain condition is satisfied. As a certain condition, for example, when it becomes a specific big hit (including a case where the type of big hit is a specific type, a case where the big hit effect is a specific effect, etc.), a predetermined condition is satisfied regarding the continuous state (The occurrence of the special effect described above) or the case where there is a specific operation input during the big hit (for example, the button 5 times pressed or long pressed as the special operation input at the specific timing of the big hit).

(Pending Uchirenso Effect A determination processing: second modification)
Subsequently, the on-premises / on-premises presentation A determination process (S737) according to the subroutine of S737 in FIG. 29 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line effect A determination process (S737) in the second modified example.

  Here, the difference from the above-described first embodiment is the processing of S771 to S773, and the execution probability of the on-hold internal consecutive effects A lottery process is set to the effect mode set in the effect state transition process (S632). It is in the point which is different according to it. In FIG. 48, the processes of S761 to S765 and S767 to S770 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S771 to S773, which are differences, are mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the effect mode currently being stayed is the first effect mode M1 (S771). When it is the first effect mode M1 (S771: YES), the on-hold in-line consecutive effect A lottery for deciding whether or not to execute the on-hold in-line consecutive effect A in the first effect mode M1 by lottery The process 1 is executed (S772). In this on-hold in-line consecutive effect effect A lottery process 1, referring to the continuous effect effect A lottery table (not shown), the continuous effect effect lottery random number value matches the judgment value of either “execution” or “non-execution” Determine if there is a run. In this example, for example, execution is performed at a rate of 90%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 10%.

  On the other hand, in the case where the rendering mode during stay is the second rendering mode M2 (S771: NO), it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the on-premises consecutive rendering A in the second rendering mode M2 by lottery. The on-premises in-line consecutive effect A lottery process 2 is executed (S773). In this on-hold in-line consecutive effect effect A lottery process 2, referring to the continuous effect effect A lottery table (not shown), the continuous effect effect lottery random number value matches the judgment value of either “execution” or “non-execution” Determine if there is a run. In this example, for example, execution is performed at a rate of 10% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 90%.

  As described above, in this modification, the probability that the on-hold on-line consecutive-show effect A is executed in the case of staying in the first effect mode M1 and the case on which it stays in the second on-the-fly mode M2, that is, The occurrence frequency of A is set to be different.

(On Hold U-Ran Effect B Determination Process: Second Modified Example)
Next, the on-premises / on-premises effect B determination process (S805) according to the subroutine of S805 in FIG. 45 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive-play effect B determination process (S805) in the second modified example.

  Here, the difference from the above-described first embodiment is the processing of S860, S864, and S865, and the continuous pattern effect pattern table for pending internal continuous effect B is set in the effect state transition process (S632). It is in the point which is different according to the production mode. In FIG. 49, the processes of S851 to S857 and S869 to S870 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S860, S864, and S865 which are differences are mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the effect mode currently being stayed is the first effect mode M1 (S860). If it is the first effect mode (S 860: YES), the multi-station effect pattern selection process 1 is executed to determine the content of the on-premise internal multi-room effect B (S 864). In this consecutive home effect pattern selection processing 1, while obtaining the continuous home effect pattern table shown in FIG. 44 (B) described above, the continuous home performance pattern random number value is obtained from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and plural types of Of the consecutive pattern effect patterns PB11 to PB13, any continuous pattern effect pattern is determined by lottery. As described above, in this consecutive residence effect pattern selection process 1, only the adjacent passage effect patterns PB11 to PB13 of the content of the attack system are selected.

  On the other hand, if the rendering mode during the stay is the second rendering mode M2 (S860: NO), the continuous rendering effect pattern selection process 2 for determining the content of the pending internal rendering B is executed (S865) . In this consecutive home effect pattern selection process 2, while obtaining the continuous home effect pattern table shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 44 (B), a continuous home effect pattern random number value is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and plural types of Of the consecutive pattern effect patterns PB21 to PB23, one of the continuous pattern effects patterns is determined by lottery. As described above, in this consecutive residence effect pattern selection process 2, only the adjacent passage effect patterns PB21 to PB23 of the content of the defense system are selected.

  As described above, in the present modification, when the execution of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect B is determined, the on-off in-line consecutive effects in the case of staying in the first effect mode M1 and in the case of staying in the second effect mode M2 The display mode of B (continuous production pattern) is set to be different.

  As described above, according to the second modified example of the first embodiment, it is possible for the player to change the appearance rate of the on-premises in-store effect and the content of the effect according to the type of effect mode selected by the player himself. It is possible to provide the player with on-hold reservation effect suitable for the preference, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present modification, the special effect mode of staying only within the limited period after the end of the special game is not provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special effect mode may be provided. In this case, a first special effect mode corresponding to the first effect mode and a second special effect mode corresponding to the second effect mode are provided, and the desired special effect mode is operated by the player after the first hit. May be configured to be selectable. In this configuration, for example, when transitioning to the first special effect mode, special continuous effect may be generated, and when transitioning to the second special effect mode, special continuous effect may not be generated. Further, as a further modification, at least one of the one or more subsequent operation holding balls being in a specific holding state makes it possible to carry out the holding inside consecutive effects B in the special game display process. The special game is a trigger for transitioning from the first effect mode M1 to the second effect mode M2 even under the condition that the on-hold in-line consecutive effect execution condition is satisfied and the on-hold in-line consecutive effect effect execution condition is satisfied. In the case of a game (referred to as "special special game"), the frequency of occurrence (execution probability) of the pending internal connection effect B as compared to the case where the special game is not a special special game (referred to as "non-special special game") ) May be configured to be low. In that case, the jackpot type includes at least the first jackpot and the second jackpot, and when the first jackpot is won, transition to the first effect mode after the end of the special game (non-special special game), When the second jackpot is won, the second effect mode is entered after the end of the special game (special special game). At this time, during the execution of the special special game, as a jackpot effect, for example, a special jackpot effect that does not appear in any other scene is executed. Therefore, when a second jackpot is won, a special jackpot effect is generated during the special game (during a special special game), so in order to prevent the competition with the reserved in-house effect B, The frequency of occurrence of Chuang effect B is set relatively low.

First Embodiment Third Modified Example
Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the third modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained.

(Reserved in-house production requiring multiple operations)
In the above-described first embodiment, in the pending inner row directing effect, the configuration is suggested or notified that there is a possibility that a specific hit that will be a big hit exists in the subsequent operation pending ball, but it is not limited to this. Not only the presence or absence of a hold, but also a change presentation aspect of the subsequent operation holding ball may be suggested or notified.

  In this modification, while the suggestion or notification of the change production mode of the subsequent operation holding ball is performed in the hold inside continuous play effect B, the suggestion or the notification of the change production mode of the subsequent operation hold sphere in the hold inside continuous production A Do not do. In addition, the reason for not giving a suggestion or notification of the change production mode in the pending U-Ran effects A, is because the pending U-in-Ran effects A occur within the fluctuation, so special on both sides of the special game due to the big hit in the fluctuation This is because the significance of suggesting or notifying even the change presentation mode after the game is low.

  Next, the on-premises-on-line effect B in this modification will be described. FIG. 50: is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the content of an effect of pending internal succession effects B in this modification. In the effect contents of the pending inside continuous effect B in this modification, the treasure box displayed on the screen is opened by the player operating the effect button 15 a plurality of times, so that the obtained point value is obtained. In response, the presence or absence of a specific hold within the subsequent operation hold ball and the variation presentation mode are suggested or notified. As described above, in order to receive the indication or notification of the presence / absence of the specific hold and the change effect mode in the hold internal consecutive effect B, multiple button operations by the player are required.

  In this modification, as shown in FIG. 50, a total of three treasure boxes are arranged in a row on the screen, and one treasure box is opened by one operation of the effect button 15, and this opened treasure box Among them, the acquisition score (0 or 1) appears. And according to the total acquisition score obtained when opening all treasure chests, the presence or absence of specific suspension in the following operation | movement pending ball and a fluctuation presentation aspect will be suggested or alert | reported.

  As will be described in detail later, in the present modification, when the total acquisition score is 0, it indicates that there is a possibility that a working ball with reach effect is present in the following working ball. When the total acquisition score is one, it is informed that the operation-reserved ball with reach effect is present in the subsequent operation-reserved ball. When the total acquisition score is 2 points, it announces definitely that there is a specific suspension which will be a 16R big hit or 8R big hit in the following operation pending ball, that is, that it will hold on to a hold. When the total acquisition score is 3 points, it announces definitely that there is a specific suspension which will be a 16R big hit in the following operation pending ball, that is, it is a high profit big hit that it will be suspended in a row.

  Here, the continuous rendering effect pattern in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a schematic view showing an example of a continuous pattern effect pattern table for pending internal continuous effect B in the third modified example. A plurality of consecutive sorrow effect patterns are defined in the consecutive sorrow effect pattern table. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “selectivity” is described, but in actuality, a judgment value (range of random value values) for determining a continuous effect pattern according to a continuous effect pattern random value. Is set, and based on which judgment value the continuous rendering effect pattern random value belongs to, the continuous rendering effect pattern is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 51, according to each consecutive house effect pattern, according to each continuous house effect pattern, the point for each treasure box that can be acquired by one button operation (the first treasure box, the second The points of the treasure box and the points of the third treasure box are specified (refer to the column of "Production content (acquired points)" in the figure), and each consecutive presentation effect pattern is the total acquisition points of the treasure box (0 points, It is classified into a plurality of pattern types according to one point, two points, three points). That is, when the total acquisition score is “0 point”, only the continuous residence effect pattern PB31 is selected, and when the total acquisition score is “1 point”, any one of the continuous relationship effect patterns PB32 to PB34 is selected, and the total When the number of points acquired is “2 points”, any one of the continuous pattern effect patterns PB35 to PB37 is selected, and when the total number of obtained points is “3 points”, only the continuous pattern effect pattern PB38 is selected. For example, in the case where the multi-station effect pattern PB35 is selected, “0 point” can be acquired by the first operation, “1 point” can be acquired by the second operation, and “1 point” can be acquired by the third operation. Is set, and as a result, the total number of earned points "2 points" is set.

  In this consecutive house effect pattern table, the selection rate of the continuous house effect pattern is set to be different according to the result of the pre-reading determination (pre-judgment). In principle, the selection rate is assigned according to the final total acquisition score, and if the result of the pre-reading judgment is a big hit, the total acquisition score is “0 points” If the result of the pre-judgment is out while the selection rate is higher in the order of 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, the total acquisition score is 0 points, 1 point , “2 points”, “3 points” decrease in selectivity.

  Furthermore, even if the result of the pre-reading determination is out, even in the case of a big hit, the selection rate of the continuous play effect pattern differs according to the type (non reach out, reach out) and the type of big hit (8R big hit, 16R big hit). That is, when the result of the pre-reading determination is non-reach out, “1 point” or more is not selected as the total acquisition score, so when the total acquisition score becomes “1 point” or more, the subsequent operation is performed. It becomes definite that there is an operation holding ball with reach effect in the holding ball. Although "1 point" may be selected as the total acquisition score even when the result of the pre-reading determination is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 7 in this example, only reach variation is selected as the variation pattern of the big hit. Therefore, as described above, it is determined that it becomes definite that there is an operation-reserved ball with reach effect in the subsequent operation-reserved ball when the total acquisition score becomes "one or more". Does not occur.

  Similarly, when the result of the pre-reading determination is a big hit, "2 points or more" may be selected as the total acquisition score while the result of the pre-reading determination is out of reach (normal reach out, super reach out) Since there is no selection of "2 points" or more as the total acquisition points, when the total acquisition points become "2 points" or more, there is a specific suspension in the subsequent operation holding ball, that is, It will be definitive to hold on the way. Furthermore, when the result of the pre-reading judgment is 16R big hit, “3 points” may be selected as the total score, while when the result of the pre-reading judgment is 8 R big hit, “3 points” as the total number of points Is not selected, so that when the total score reaches “3 points”, there is a specific hold of 16 big hits in the following operation hold ball, that is, a high profit big hit and a pending ream. It will be definitive to stay quiet.

  The content of the effect of such a pending in-line consecutive effect B will be specifically described using FIG. In this example, the case where the continuous pattern effect pattern PB37 is selected is illustrated. As described above, in this combination pattern, since "0 point" can be acquired by the first operation, "1 point" can be acquired by the second operation, and "1 point" can be acquired by the third operation, the total acquisition score can be obtained. Are two points, that is, the content of the effect that announces the occurrence of the pending U-Ran.

  First, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), with the start of the operation effective period in which the operation of the effect button 15 is made effective, images of three treasure boxes (closed treasure boxes) are displayed on the screen, The text "Let's open the treasure chest by pressing the button" is displayed. Further, on the screen, along with the "remaining time" for which the operation of the effect button 15 can be performed, the "total acquisition score" representing the score acquired at the current stage is displayed. Furthermore, on the screen, a cursor pointing to a treasure box to be operated is displayed, and the cursor is shifted stepwise from the left to the right by one treasure according to the remaining time that can be operated. . In the screen, the left treasure box is also referred to as "first treasure box", the center treasure box as "second treasure box", and the right treasure box as "third treasure box".

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50B, when the effect button 15 is operated when the cursor points to the first treasure box, the first treasure box is opened. At this time, in the case where the treasure box is detached, the letter "Sorry" appears along with the letter "0 point" from the inside of the treasure box.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50C, when the effect button is operated 15 when the cursor points to the second treasure box, the second treasure box is opened. At this time, when the treasure box is hit, the word "one chance" appears along with the letter "one point" from the inside of the treasure box. At this point, since “one point” or more is committed as the total acquisition score, it becomes definite that there is an operation-reserved ball with a reach effect in the subsequent operation-reserved ball.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50D, when the effect button 15 is operated when the cursor points to the third treasure box, the third treasure box is opened. At this time, when the treasure box is hit, the word "one chance" appears along with the letter "one point" from the inside of the treasure box. In addition, a character of "two points" is displayed as a "total number of points obtained by adding up the first obtained points and the second obtained points. As a result, the fact that the specific hold is included in the subsequent operation hold ball, that is, the fact that the hold is to be held is definitely notified.

  When the effect button 15 is not operated in spite of the occurrence of the pending inside continuous effect B as described above, the treasure box remains closed, and the prefetching judgment for the subsequent operation pending ball is performed. I can not get results. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that each operation of the effect button 15 has a meaning. In addition, although it was set as the structure which requires multiple operations in this modification, it is not limited to this, It is good also as composition which suggests or reports the fluctuation production mode of the following operation pending ball only by one operation. . In addition, if the button operation is performed by the player but the button operation is not performed despite the fact that “three points” is obtained, it is complementarily performed that is different from the on-hold consecutive effects effect B − End 2 may be configured to be performed at the time of demonstration effect. Conversely, if the button operation is performed at a prescribed timing and "3 points" can be obtained, it may be configured not to perform the on-hold on-line consecutive effect B-2.

  As described above, according to the third modification of the first embodiment, not only the possibility that a specific hold exists in the subsequent operation hold ball but also the subsequent operation hold ball is digested in the hold internal connection effect. By suggesting or notifying even the fluctuation presentation aspect of the game, various additional information according to the presentation result can be taught to the player, so that the presentation effect of the on-premises in-house presentation effect is enhanced, and as a result, It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the synergetic effect of the on-hold on-line effect and the button effect can further increase the added value when the on-off on-line effect occurs, and can further enhance the player participation type effect. .

[First Embodiment-Fourth Modified Example]
Next, a gaming machine according to a fourth modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the fourth modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained.

(Confirmed notification timing by pending Uranso effect)
In the above-described first embodiment, when the pending in-line consecutive effect A is generated, the on-off in-line continuous effect becomes definite, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure that the on-hold U-Ran is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the generation of the on-hold U-Ran effect A, without determining the on-Ran.

  For example, in the probability change mode in which the gaming state is a definite variation state of a special symbol, a battle effect is developed as a symbol change effect, in which battle character between an ally character and an enemy character is played. The battle effect in this modification is an effect that suggests the determination of the 16R big hit in the variation by the ally character on the player side winning the enemy character immediately before the end of the symbol variation effect (immediately before the stop of the decoration symbol). It is.

  In the present modification, there may be a case in which the on-premises in-house effect A is generated as a battle effect (special battle effect) during symbol change. In this special battle rendition, special enemy characters that do not appear in ordinary battle rendition appear. If the ally character wins the enemy character in this special battle rendition, it is determined that the 16 big hit in the corresponding change and the specific hold exists in the following operation hold ball, that is, the hold within a row Determine what to do. On the other hand, when the ally character loses the enemy character in this special battle effect, the deviation in the change becomes definite, and furthermore, the occurrence of the pending inside rowing is denied (it becomes so-called gasse effect) ). As described above, in the present modification, it is not determined whether or not the pending inner row will occur until the battle result is notified in the battle production, and therefore, attention is paid to the relevant rendering process and a sense of expectation for the pending inner row Can be enhanced.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to only pending on-line consecutive effects A, and even in pending on-line consecutive effects B, the pending on-line consecutive effects are not fixed at the time of occurrence After that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the pending reservation may be determined. In the present modification, as the effect contents of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect B, for example, a roulette effect in which the possibility of the on-off in-line consecutiveness is notified by the stopping result of the roulette is exemplified. In this roulette effect, a total of three stop positions of “弐”, “弐”, and “参” are provided, and when the roulette stops at “壱”, the pending inside row is denied and stops at “で” If it does, it is suggested that there is a possibility of holding Uchiso, and if it is stopped at "Go," it will be notified that the holding Uchiso is decided. As described above, in this modification, it is not determined whether or not the pending inner row will occur until the lottery result is notified in the roulette effect. It can be enhanced. The roulette may be stopped on condition of the player's button operation.

  As described above, according to the fourth modification of the first embodiment, it is taught to the player whether or not the on-hold on-hold state is decided until the predetermined condition is satisfied even if the on-hold on-line continuous effect is generated. Because it is not, it is possible to maintain interest in the contents of the effect until the final timing when the on-hold in-line effect is finished, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

First Embodiment Fifth Modification
Next, a gaming machine according to a fifth modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the fifth modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be assigned the same reference numerals. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained.

(A button announcement effect including a pending Uranso effect)
In the first embodiment described above, the on-hold in-line consecutive effect A is configured to display the effect image according to the in-line effect pattern, but a button advance effect that causes a preview effect image to be displayed in association with a button operation by the player It is good also as composition including reservation Uchi-Ran effects A as one mode.

  Here, in the first embodiment described above, the notice effect pattern corresponding to the change effect pattern is selected, and a notice effect is generated during the symbol change effect, but one of the notice effects is a button operation by the player. There is a button preview effect required. The button preview effect is a preview effect that indicates or notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by displaying a predetermined effect image on condition of a button operation by the player. In the present modification, the pending in-line consecutive effect A is generated in a form included in the button advance effect. At this time, in the normal button preview effect, a plurality of items A, B and C appear on the screen, and any one item can be selected. On the other hand, in the button advance notice effect as the pending inside consecutive effect A, in addition to the normal items A, B and C, a special item D can appear on the screen and this item D can be selected. . In this manner, the appearance of the special item D during the button preview effect notifies of the possibility of the on-hold reservation.

  As described above, according to the fifth modification of the first embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the added value when the on-hold on-line effect is established, by the synergetic effect of the on-hold on-line effect and the button advance effect. The player participation type effect can be enhanced, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

First Embodiment Sixth Modification
Next, a gaming machine according to a sixth modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the sixth modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained.

(A combined image of a pending Uchiso effect and a symbol change effect)
In the above-described first embodiment, only the effects that do not appear in any other scenes are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect image of the on-premises in-house effect B is displayed during the symbol variation effect It may be configured to be shared with any effect image to be played. For example, in a battle effect during a symbol change effect, when there is a case where an effect image in which an ally character delivers a special move appears in some cases, this effect image may be used also as the effect image of the on-hold consecutive effect B effect. In addition, the reason for not combining the effect image of pending inside consecutive villa effect A and the effect image in the symbol variation effect is that, when the combination image is displayed during the symbol variation effect, this combined image is a normal battle effect Because it is difficult to identify whether it is displayed as one process or as displayed in the pending in-line consecutive effect A, there is a possibility that the possibility of not being able to notify the player of the possibility of the in-pending in-line condition to the player properly Because it is expensive.

  As described above, according to the sixth modification of the first embodiment, since the effect image of the symbol variation effect and the effect image of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect are partially shared, the limited hardware of the gaming machine It is possible to prevent wasteful consumption of resources.

  In addition, you may provide the turning production | presentation in order to hear generation | occurrence | production of pending inside consecutive production effect B during a big hit production. In this case, while in the big hit effect, the pending inner row effect can be generated only once, but the beat effect can be generated multiple times. For example, in the case where it is intended to display the above-mentioned combined image in a predetermined round during a big hit, for example, in the pending U-link consecutive effect effect B, the pending U-link continuous effect effect B (relevant) over a plurality of rounds prior to the predetermined round. In order to recognize the occurrence of the combined image), a scattered image may be displayed that associates or foresees the occurrence of the combined image, such as the shadow of the friend character and the afterimage of the special move.

First Embodiment Seventh Modification
Next, a gaming machine according to a seventh modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the seventh modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained.

(The number of announcements for pending Uranso)
In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration is such that the possibility of the presence of a plurality of specific suspension may be notified in the subsequent operation suspension ball in the suspension internal linkage effect B. When teaching the possibility that there are multiple specific reservations within the operation reservation ball, the maximum value of the number of specific reservations that can be notified by the reservation internal arrangement effect (“the number of announcements within reservation”) is determined in advance In addition, it is good also as composition which can be informed of the number of specific pending present in the following operation pending ball in the range which does not exceed this maximum value.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the maximum value of the number of on-hold notification in the on-hold in the on-the-off row consecutive effect A is “1”, and the maximum value of the on-hold in-position notification on the on-hold notification in B It is "2". In other words, in the on-premises multiple-run effect A determination process, the pre-reading determination is performed for only the first specific suspension among the subsequent operation suspension balls, and the presence of one specific suspension is notified, while Of the subsequent operation holding balls, the pre-reading judgment that targets not only the first specific holding but also the subsequent specific holding among the subsequent operation holding balls is executed to notify the existence of two or more specific holdings. It is configured to earn.

  In this modification, when executing such a pending internal connection presentation A, B determination process, the number of specific suspension (called the "on-going application connection number") present in the subsequent operation pending ball is counted. In order to do so, set up a number of on-premises consecutive residences counters. The on-hold on-premises number counter is sequentially updated within a range not exceeding the predetermined maximum value of on-premises on-line notification numbers. The maximum value of the number of on-premises in-line notification is set larger in the on-off in-line consecutive direction effect B than in the on-time in-line consecutive direction effect A. Specifically, the maximum value for the number of on-premises in-store notifications in the on-premises in-store effect A is "1", and the maximum value of the on-hold in-station notification numbers in on-off in-line effects B is "3" . In addition, the maximum value of the number of notification of pending reservation can be set in the range which becomes less than the maximum value of the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol.

  As the notification mode of the number of pending consecutive units in the pending internal consecutive direction effect, as in the first embodiment described above, the number of pending internal consecutive units is "1" when "one book" appears Informing the possibility of being, in the case where "two books" appears "informed book" announces the possibility of being "2" in the number of pending inside consecutive houses, in the case where "three books" appeared "inside book" The aspect which alert | reports the possibility that it is "3" of consecutive villas is illustrated.

  In addition, the maximum value of the number of pending in-line consecutive villas in this modification is only an example, and the maximum value of the number of in-pending intra-range alertings in the in-position in-between sequential effects A may be “2” or more, The maximum value of the number of on-premises in-line announcements in the on-premises in-line succession effect B may be “4”.

  As described above, according to the seventh modified example of the first embodiment, the maximum values of the number of on-hold in-row notification numbers for on-hold in-row effect A and on-off in-row effect B are set to be different from each other. By updating the number of pending U-Ran units individually within the range that does not exceed N, the display mode of the Pending U-Ran effects A and B can be made rich and rich in content according to the number of R-in announcements, As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Second Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, and in the following, parts having similar configurations are given the same reference numerals. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming state after the special game is determined based on the stop symbol (symbol group) of the special symbol, but in the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the stop symbol of the special symbol (symbol group) The game state after the special game is determined on the basis of the game mode in the special game and the special game.
That is, in the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the game ball enters the special winning opening (in this example, the second large winning opening 65 in this example) having the specific area in the special game and passes the specific area. It is configured as a so-called ball check type game machine that decides to shift to a definite change state after the end of the special game.

  FIG. 52 is a schematic view showing a configuration of the second big winning opening 65 in the second embodiment. As described above, the second large winning opening 65 is provided with a second large winning opening switch 651 for detecting entry of the game ball into the second large winning opening 65, and the second large winning opening A second special motorized symbol 652 for opening and closing 65 is provided. In addition, a distribution device 654 is provided in the second big winning opening 65, located downstream of the second big winning opening switch 651, for determining the gaming state after the end of the special game. The sorting device 654 is provided with a specific area 658 and a non-specific area 659 to which the gaming balls having entered the second big winning opening 65 are distributed. In addition, the sorting device 654 is provided with a wing member 655 for selectively guiding the game ball entered in the second big winning opening 65 to the specific area 658 or the nonspecific area 659, and opens and closes the wing member 655. A specific area solenoid 656 is provided for this purpose. When the wing members 655 are in the closed position, the specific area 658 is closed by the wing members 655, and the gaming balls are distributed to the non-specific area 659. On the other hand, when the wing member 655 is in the open position, the specific area 658 is opened, and the gaming balls are distributed to the specific area 658. In the specific area 658, a specific area switch 657 for detecting gaming balls having flowed into the specific area 658 is provided. The specific area switch 657 functions as a probability change switch for shifting the gaming state after the end of the special game to the state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated.

  In this example, the opening / closing operation of the second special motorized product 652 and the opening / closing operation of the blade member 655 are synchronously controlled in synchronization, and the second big winning opening 65 is open and the specific period 658 is temporally open. It is configured to overlap. Therefore, when the second large winning opening 65 is opened, the specific area 658 is also opened, and when the second large winning opening 65 is closed, the specific area 658 is also closed. The drive control of the blade member 655 (specific area solenoid 656) is executed by the main control board 100 (electric combination control means 160).

  Based on the detection information from the specific area switch 657, the main control board 100 (the ball entrance determination means 110) determines whether the gaming ball has entered the specific area 658 of the second big winning opening 65 or not. Then, when entering the specific area 658 is detected, the main control board 100 (entering ball determining means 110) produces an effect control command (“specific area entering ball command”) including the specific area entering ball information. Generate).

  Then, the stop symbol (big hit classification) of the special symbol in the second embodiment will be described.

  The upper part of FIG. 53 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the second embodiment. In the first special symbol per symbol table, operation patterns of a stop symbol, a symbol group, and a special winning opening 64, 65 are respectively associated with a special symbol per symbol random number value. In this table, stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups A and B according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, the symbol group A (16R length open big hit symbol) has symbols “5”, “6”, “7”, “D” for the symbols “1”, “2”, “3” and “4”. The symbol group B (8R short open jackpot symbol) is associated with 8 ′ ′.

  The lower part of FIG. 53 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the second embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, operation patterns of a stop symbol, a symbol group, and a special winning opening 64, 65 are respectively associated with a special symbol per symbol random number value. In this table, the stop symbols "11" to "18" of the second special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups C and D according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, the symbol group C (16R length open big hit symbol) has the symbols "15", "16", "17", and "11", "12", "13" and "14". The symbol group D (8R length open jackpot symbol) is associated with 18 ".

  The “long open jackpot” is a big hit with a round game in which the second big winning opening 65 is long opened, and entry of the game ball into the specific area 658 is relatively easy. The “short open jackpot” is a big hit with a round game in which the second large winning opening 65 is short-opened, and it is relatively difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area 658. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a big hit, it corresponds to long open big hit (16R long open big hit) at 50% ratio, and short open big hit at 8% ratio (8R short open big hit) It corresponds to). On the other hand, when the second special symbol is a big hit, it corresponds to long open big hit (16R long open big hit, 8R long open big hit) at a rate of 100%.

  Here, FIG. 54 is a time chart for describing an operation pattern of the special winning opening 64, 65 in the special game in the second embodiment. In the drawing, the state changes of the first large winning opening 64 and the second large winning opening 65 in the special game are shown in time series from left to right. Between each round, an interval time (waiting time) in which the closed state of the big winning opening 64, 65 is maintained is provided. In the operation pattern of the large winning opening 64, 65 in the present embodiment, it is determined that the second large winning opening 65 (specific area 658) is opened and closed only in a specific round (also referred to as a "specific round") of the special game. ing. In the present embodiment, the specific round is defined as the seventh round and the eighth round. However, the present invention is not limited to this, a specific round may be changed to another round number, and three or more specific rounds may be set.

  FIG. 54A shows a 16R long open pattern which is an operation pattern by the 16R long open big hit. In the 16R long opening pattern, in the rounds other than the specific round, the first large winning opening 64 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, while in the seventh round and the eighth round, which are the specific rounds, the second large winning opening 65 It is determined to open continuously for 29 seconds.

  FIG. 54B shows an 8R long open pattern which is an operation pattern by the 8R long open big hit. In the 8R long opening pattern, in the rounds other than the specific round, the first large winning opening 64 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, while in the seventh round and the eighth round, which are the specific rounds, the second large winning opening 65 It is determined to open continuously for 29 seconds.

  Thus, when the 16R long open big hit or the 8R long open big hit is selected, the open period of the second big winning opening 65 is set to a long time of 29 seconds in the specific round, and the second big winning opening 65 Since the opening period and the opening period of the specific area 658 overlap in time, the gaming ball entered from the second large winning opening 65 easily wins the specific area 658. As a result, passage of the game ball to the specific area 658 is maintained in an easy state.

  FIG. 54C shows an 8R short open pattern which is an operation pattern by the 8R short open big hit. In the 8R short opening pattern, in the rounds other than the specific round, the first large winning opening 64 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, while in the seventh round and the eighth round, which are the specific rounds, the second large winning opening 65 It has been decided to open for only 0.2 seconds.

  As described above, when the 8R short opening big hit is selected, the second big winning opening 65 is only opened for a very short time of 0.2 seconds in the specific round, so the gaming ball is in the second large winning opening 65. The possibility of entering the specific area 658 is extremely low. As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which passage of the gaming ball to the specific area 658 is difficult or substantially impossible.

  When the game ball enters the specific area 658 in the specific round, after the end of the special game, it shifts to the special symbol oddity change state (high probability state). In addition, when it shifts to the special variation state of the special symbol, it simultaneously shifts to the time shortening state and the electric chow support state of the special symbol, and as long as the positive variation state of the special symbol continues, the time shortening state of the special symbol and the electric chow support state also continue. In addition, after the end of the special game, when the next big hit does not occur in the number of times of variation of the special symbol within the ST number (100 times), the definite variation state of the special symbol is ended and it shifts to the normal state.

  On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the specific area 658 in the specific round, after the end of the special game, it becomes the time saving state (low probability state) of the special symbol. In addition, when it shifts to the time saving state of the special symbol, it shifts to the power chow support state at the same time, and as long as the time shortening state of the special symbol continues, the power chow support state also continues. In addition, after the end of the special game, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (70 times), the time saving state of the special symbol is ended, and the state shifts to the normal state.

  Next, the on-premises-on-pending effect in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the on-premises in-store effect B as a big hit effect can be performed at timings after the specific round in the special game. This is not the timing after the specific round has passed (at least after the game ball enters the specific area), the game state after the end of the special game transitions to the high probability state or the low probability state This is because it is difficult to report the occurrence of the pending U-Ran in this unconfirmed state. In other words, according to the game state after the end of the special game, the lottery result whether or not the subsequent operation holding ball existing in the special game will be a big hit depends, so whether or not to execute the pending internal consecutive effects B By making the lottery of the specific round or later, the confirmation notification of the pending Uranso is possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the game ball has entered the specific area in the specific round, that is, the transition of the special symbol to the definite change state is committed after the end of the special game, The execution of B is determined. Therefore, in addition to the fact that there is a specific suspension that will be a big hit in the subsequent operation suspension ball in the present embodiment, the game state after the special game is a definite variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol and It has significance as an effect that announces that it will become definite. That is, in the seventh round, the eighth round, or the subsequent rounds, if there is no entry into the specific area 658, the on-premise-on-line effect B does not occur, in other words, the seventh round or the eighth In the case where the reserved in-line consecutive effect B is generated in the round, it can be said that it is the same timing as the game ball entering timing to the specific area 658 or a timing after that.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, at the timing after the specific round (the timing after entering the specific area), the current determination is being performed with reference to the result of the prior determination (the prior determination number) from the main control board 100. Perform a read-only readiness decision in the gaming state after the special game is over (become a definite change state by entering a specific area) on the subsequent operation holding ball, and there is a specific hold that will be a big hit Only the pending inside consecutive villa effect B can be executed by the lottery. Now, specific processing will be described below.

(Big Hit Effect Content Determination Process: Second Embodiment)
Next, the jackpot effect content determination process (S638) according to the subroutine of S638 in FIG. 27 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot effect content determination process (S638).

  Here, in the above-described first embodiment, the on-premises internal connection effect B determination process (see S805 in FIG. 31) is executed in response to the reception of the start demonstration command, but this second embodiment In this case, the on-premises-in-line effect B determination process is executed when the specific area entry command is received. This is because, as described above, it is made consistent with the timing after the game ball enters the specific area 658 that the execution availability of the on-hold reservation effect B is entered. In FIG. 55, the processes of S801 to S818 and S821 to S838 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S841 to S843 which are differences will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not a specific area entry command is stored in the sub main information storage unit 260 (S841). If the specific area entry command is stored (S841: YES), the specific area entry flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is turned on (S842). The on-premises in-line consecutive effect B determination process is executed (S843). In addition, the details of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect effect B determination process (S842) will be described later with reference to FIG. Subsequently, the jackpot effect replacement process is executed (S844). In this jackpot effect replacement process, the normal end demonstration effect pattern is replaced with the special end demonstration effect pattern, when the on-hold internal consecutive effect B (special continuous effect) is executed. In the preceding big hit effect replacement process (S806), when the special continuous effect is executed, the normal start demonstration effect pattern is replaced with the special start demonstration effect pattern. On the other hand, when the specific area entry command is not stored (S841: NO), S842 and S843 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S821.

  Although not shown, when a specific area entry command is received during the special game, the game ball enters the specific area 658, that is, it shifts to the special symbol oddity state after the end of the special game. Determine the effect pattern of the notification effect (referred to as “specific area entry notification effect”) to notify that the number of the effect pattern of this specific area entry notification effect the specific area of the sub main information storage means 260 Temporarily store in the ball entering effect pattern storage area.

(On Hold U-Ran Effect B Determination Process: Second Embodiment)
Subsequently, the on-premises / on-premises effect B determination process (S843) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive effects B determination process (S843) in the second embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the above-described first embodiment is the processing of S850 and S869, and the processing of S850 and subsequent steps is executed when the specific area entering command is received. In FIG. 56, the processes of S851 to S868 and S870 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S860 and S869, which are differences, are mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether the specific area entering flag in the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S850). When the specific area entry flag is on (S850: YES), in the processing after S851, the on-premises consecutive-island effect B lottery process (S856), the continuous-state effect pattern selection process (S861), etc. are executed . In addition, in this example, since the on-premise internal connection effect B determination processing is performed on the assumption that the game ball enters the specific area in the specific round, the round effect after the specific round is selected in this connection effect pattern selection processing. Only a series of rendition effects patterns generated in a specific round or including an end demonstration effect can be selected. Then, in the second half of this process, the specific area entering flag in the sub main information storage unit 260 is turned off (S869).

  In addition, in the specific round (the 7th round-the 8th round) in the special game under execution this time, when there are two or more entering balls to the specific field 658, this processing based on the first entering ball (S850) Since the on-hold in-line consecutive effect flag is turned on in ~ S870), even if the main processing based on the subsequent entry is executed, a negative determination is made in S731 (NO), and the on-off in-line consecutive effects effect is repeated again The lottery process of B is to be avoided.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, entering the specific area 658 can acquire the right to transition to the definite variation state of the special symbol, and the sense of expectation for the occurrence of the on-premises in-store effect is enhanced. It is possible to further enhance the staging effect of the continuous play effect, and restrict the execution of the on-hold continuous running effect in the situation where the gaming state after the end of the special game is undecided, and is reflected as a result of the pre-reading judgment By preventing the occurrence of wrinkles in the display mode and the actual result of the pending in-line consecutive effect, it is possible to improve the reliability of the pending in-line consecutive effect as the advance notice, and as a result, the taste of the game It is possible to improve the excitement.

  In the second embodiment described above, the open pattern in which the open period of the second big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 is completely overlapped is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second big winning The mouth 65 and the opening period of the specific area 658 may be partially overlapped without completely overlapping. In addition, the opening period of the specific area 658 is delayed with respect to the opening period of the second big winning opening 65, taking into consideration the delay time until the gaming ball entered the second big winning opening 65 reaches the specific area 658. May be

Second Embodiment First Modified Example
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained.

  In the above-described second embodiment, the on-premise internal connection effect B determination process is executed at the timing when the gaming ball enters the specific area 658 in the specific round, but the present invention is not limited thereto. A configuration may be adopted in which the on-premises-in-line effect B determination process is executed before the gaming ball enters the specific area 658.

  First, in describing the configuration, a predetermination number, which is the result of the preliminary determination of acceptance or rejection on the main control substrate 100 side, will be described. FIG. 57 is a view schematically showing a success / failure determination table, in which (A) is a table referred to in the success / failure determination of the first special symbol lottery, and (B) is referred to in the success / failure determination of the second special symbol lottery Table. This FIG. 57 has contents corresponding to the special symbol acceptance lottery table (FIG. 5) referred to in the first embodiment.

  In the prior judgment of the first special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), when the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163”, the prior judgment number “1” and the random number value “164 to 1639 When it corresponds to the range of “2”, the judgment number corresponds to the range of “65208 to 65535” when the random number value falls within the range of “1640 to 65207”. When the predetermination number "4" is set as the predetermination result. This prior determination number is included in the contents of the yes or no prior determination command together with the information indicating that it is the prior determination result of the first special symbol and the information indicating the order of the operation holding ball, and is transmitted to the effect control board 200 side (See S213 in FIG. 13).

  In the prior judgment of the second special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), when the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163”, the prior judgment number “1” and the random number value “164 to 1639 When the random number falls under the range of “1640 to 65535”, the preliminary determination number “3” is set as the preliminary determination result. This prior determination number is included in the contents of the yes or no prior determination command together with the information indicating that it is the prior determination result of the second special symbol and the information indicating the order of the operation holding ball, and is transmitted to the effect control board 200 side (See S213 in FIG. 13).

  As can be seen by comparing the special symbol equivalence lottery table of FIG. 5 and the yes / no pre-judgment table of FIG. 57, the prior decision number “1” always depends on the “big hit” regardless of the gaming state (normal state / probability state). It is a judgment result derived | led-out becoming. On the other hand, in the determination result that the prior determination number “2” is “big hit” in the probability variation state (high probability state) but “off” in the normal state (low probability state) is there. Also in this example, as in the above-described first embodiment, the target of the pre-reading determination relating to the pending internal connection effect is only the operation reserving ball (pre-judgment result) of the second special symbol, but the first special You may include the operation holding ball (predetermination information) of the symbol.

  In the pending inner consecutive effects effect A determination process and the pending internal distance effects B determination process, the pre-reading determination whether or not the specific hold to be a big hit is included in the subsequent operation pending ball (the operation pending ball of the second special symbol) Is determined based on this prior determination number. At this time, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending internal connection effect B before the specific round, that is, before the game ball enters the specific area (for example, before the start of the special game, at the start demonstration effect, the specific round Consider the case of playing in the previous round game etc

  First, in the case of executing the pending inside consecutive directing effect B determination process before the specific round, if there is an operation pending ball whose pre-decision number is "1" in the subsequent operation pending ball, with respect to this operation pending ball Since the result of the judgment is a big hit regardless of whether the special game state (high probability state) or the normal state (low probability state) is switched to after the end of the special game, the game ball enters the specific area 658 At this point, the pending Uranso is decided, regardless of the presence or absence of Therefore, in this case, it is possible to generate the on-hold on-line effect B as the confirmation notification on the on-hold on-line.

  On the other hand, in the case where there is an operation holding ball for which the predetermination number is "2", with regard to this operation holding ball, whether or not the success or failure judgment result is a big hit depends on the gaming state after the end of the special game Therefore, considering that the gaming state changes in accordance with the presence or absence of the game ball entering the specific area 658, the pending reservation is not determined at this time. Therefore, in this case, it is not possible to generate the on-hold on-line effect B as the confirmation notification of on-off on-line, it only indicates the possibility of on-hold on-line.

  Therefore, regardless of whether or not there is a game ball entering the specific area 658 (regardless of which game state is transitioned), the result of determination of success or failure of the point at which the operation holding ball is actually digested is accurate If it can be specified to (in the case of prior judgment number "1"), it is possible to notify the decision of the pending Uranzou, conversely, accurately identify the pass / fail judgment result of the point at which the operation holding ball is actually digested If this can not be done (in the case of the predetermination number "2"), it may only be suggested to indicate the possibility of a pending Uranzou. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is preferable to prepare a fixed notification effect and a suggested effect of the pending inner row in different effect modes.

  As described above, according to the first modification of the second embodiment, when the pre-reading determination is performed under a situation where the gaming state after the end of the special game can not be identified accurately, the big hit winning is uniquely derived regardless of the gaming state If it is something to be done, while pending on-line consecutive-effect effect B is generated in a mode to notify the on-off on-line on-line, if the result of the judgment changes depending on the gaming state, Even when it is the timing before the game ball enters the specific area, the notification content by the on-hold in-row effect and the actual judgment result by generating the on-hold in-row effect B in a manner that suggests the possibility In this way, it is possible to prevent a notification effect that is against the expectation of the player, such as causing wrinkles, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, similarly, as pre-reading advance notice other than reservation inside consecutive house production, for example pre-reading decision whether or not there is specified reservation which becomes big hit inside the operation reservation sphere also in pre-reading announcement such as reservation change, this pre-judgment It is done based on the number. At this time, under the situation where the preceding operation reserving ball is a big hit, when the pre-reading judgment is executed on the subsequent operation reserving ball, the prior judgment number is a pre-judgment result of the pre-reading target's operation reserving ball. If it is "1", a presentation mode (for example, a "rainbow-colored" reserved image representing a big hit decision) may be made to appear to notify a big hit decision as a pending change previewing effect based on this action pending ball. That is, with regard to this operation-reserved ball, the operation-reserved ball is actually in effect regardless of whether the gaming state after the end of the special game is the special symbol's probability change state (high probability state) or the normal state (low probability state). Because it is scheduled to be a big hit when it is digested, regardless of the presence or absence of the game ball to the specific area 658, at this point the pending Uranzou is decided, the result of the pre-reading judgment is reflected There is no possibility that wrinkles will occur between the display mode of the reserved image and the actual result (for example, if the prior determination number is "2", the gaming ball does not enter the specific area 658, and after the end of the special game In the normal state, even if a reserved image representing a big hit decision is made to appear, a big hit does not occur.

  In this modification, only the pass / fail predetermination table is illustrated as the predetermination table, but the predetermination number may be allocated to the random number range of each determination value also regarding the symbol predetermination table and the variation pattern predetermination table. Can be expressed by

Third Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the third embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, and in the following, parts having similar configurations are given the same reference numerals. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

  Although the gaming machine of the first embodiment has been described by exemplifying a gaming machine called a so-called "ST machine" which has a probability variation rush rate of 100%, the gaming machine of the first embodiment has been described by way of example. In this case, it is a so-called normal probability variation type gaming machine in which the probability variation function of the special symbol continues from the end of the special game until the next big hit occurs.

  Here, FIG. 58 is a view schematically showing the special symbol odds lottery table in the third embodiment, (A) is referred to in a normal state (low probability state), (B) is a probability variation state (high probability) State) is referred to. As can be seen from FIG. 58, in the success or failure lottery of the special symbol game, in the normal state (low probability state), it is a big hit only when the random number value falls within the range of 0 to 163. On the other hand, in the probability variation state (high probability state), the range of the big hit is expanded, and it becomes a big hit not only when the random number value falls within the range of 0 to 163 but also when it falls within the range of 164 to 1639. That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the lottery probability of the big hit is varied from the low probability state (1 / 399.6) to the high probability state (1 / 39.96). As described above, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big hit is equal between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Here, even if the random value per special symbol does not fall within the range of the big hit, it will be a small hit if it falls within the predetermined range. In this example, the winning lottery of the first special symbol is a higher probability of being a small hit with a higher probability than the winning lottery of the second special symbol.

  Subsequently, the upper part of FIG. 59 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the third embodiment. This first special symbol per symbol table, for a special symbol per symbol random number, stop symbol, symbol group, contents of big hit (number of operations of probability variation function of special symbol and variation time shortening function, the first big prize The operation patterns of the mouth 64 are respectively associated. In this table, stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups A to C according to the type of the big hit.

  Specifically, symbol groups A (16R specific short-period fixed symbols) are displayed for symbols "1", "2", "3" and "4", and symbol group B is displayed for symbols "5" and "6". A symbol group C (2R normal time short symbol special symbol) is associated with each of the symbols “7” and “8”.

  Subsequently, the lower part of FIG. 59 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the third embodiment. This second special symbol per symbol table, for a special symbol per symbol symbol random number, stop symbol, symbol group, contents of big hit (number of operations of probability variation function and variation time shortening function of special symbol, second big prize The operation patterns of the ports 65 are associated with one another. In this table, the stop symbols "11" to "18" of the second special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups D to F according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, symbol groups D (16R specific short-period fixed symbol symbols) are attached to the symbols "11", "12", "13" and "14", and symbol group E is attached to the symbols "15" and "16". A symbol group F (2R normal time short symbol special symbol) is associated with each of the symbols “17” and “18”.

  The symbol groups A, B, D, and E are special symbols indicating the so-called "probable big hit" which causes the gaming state after the end of the special game to transition to the special variable state (high probability state). The symbol variation function and the time saving function, and the electronic chew support function are provided. When the symbol groups A and D (16R probability variation big hit) are selected, the specified number of rounds of special game is 16 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. When the symbol group B or E (2R probability variation big hit) is selected, the number of specified rounds of special game is 2 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds . The symbol groups C, F are normal symbols indicating the so-called "normal hit", which shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to the normal state (low probability state), and limited to only 100 times after the end of the special game The special symbol, time saving function and electronic chew support function are provided. When the symbol group C, F (2R normal big hit) is selected, the special game has a defined number of rounds of 2 rounds, as in the case of the symbol group B, E (2R probability variation big hit) The maximum opening time of the ports 64, 65 is about 0.05 seconds.

  Next, FIG. 60A is a diagram schematically showing a hit variation pattern table. The upper part (A1) is a normal variation pattern table, and the lower part (A2) is a probability variation variation table. In this example, the selected fluctuation pattern is set to be different according to the fluctuation pattern selection state or according to the jackpot type even in the same fluctuation pattern selection state.

  In the normal variation pattern table of (A1), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, either one of the variation pattern PX2 (normal reach A) or the variation pattern PX3 (super reach A) is selected and 2R big hit. One of the fluctuation pattern PZ2 (normal reach A), the fluctuation pattern PZ3 (super reach A), and the fluctuation pattern PZ4 (super reach D) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the variation pattern PK4 (Super Reach D) is selected.

  In the probability variation variation pattern table of (A2), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, only the variation pattern PX7 (Super Reach B) is selected, and when it is 2R big hit, variation pattern PZ7 (Super Reach B), variation One of the patterns PZ8 (Super Reach D) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, only the variation pattern PK8 (super reach D) is selected.

  FIG. 60B is a view schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for disconnection. The upper (B1) is a normal variation pattern table, and the lower (B2) is a probability variation variation table. In this example, the selected fluctuation pattern is set to be different according to the fluctuation pattern selection state.

  In the normal fluctuation pattern table of (B1), any of fluctuation pattern PH1 (non-reach A), fluctuation pattern PH2 (normal reach A), fluctuation pattern PH3 (super reach A), and fluctuation pattern PH4 (super reach D) is selected Ru. In the probability variation variation pattern table of (B2), any one of variation pattern PH5 (non-reach B), variation pattern PH6 (normal reach B), and variation pattern PH8 (super reach D) is selected.

  Here, in this probable variation variation pattern table for outliers, only variation patterns which are variation modes of non-reach B, normal reach B and super reach D can be selected (in other words, variation of super reach B) The variation pattern which is the aspect is different from the above-mentioned probability variation pattern table for hitting in that the variation pattern is not selected. Therefore, in the special variation state of the special symbol, the variation pattern to be selected in the big hit and the off time is clearly distinguished in terms of whether or not the variation pattern becomes the super reach B, and the super reach B ( In the present example, when a variation mode that develops into battle reach) appears, the big hit is configured to be definite.

  In this embodiment, so-called battle specs are adopted, and in a state where the player stays in the probability variation production mode Mβ as a production mode, battle reach production occurs when the symbol variation production is developed to super reach B. As described above, this battle reach effect (Super reach B) is selected only when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, so when the battle reach effect occurs during the symbol change effect The jackpot is definitive. Note that this battle reach effect is a reach effect in which the ally character and the enemy character fight to determine the outcome, and when the ally character finally wins the enemy character, the 16R hit and the ally character finally loses the enemy character. Then 2R big hit is decided.

  Subsequently, the on-premises-on-pending effect in the third embodiment will be described. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the operation pending ball to be prefetched for the pending in-line consecutive effects A and B is the specified pending (16R big hit, 8R big hit) or out-of-date holding, but in the third embodiment The action holding ball to be prefetched for the effects A and B is a specific hold (16R big hit) or a small hit hold (does not include release hold). The reason for including a small hit is that, in general, if the result of the judgment is a failure, a large number of variation patterns are prepared, so any of the following operation holding balls can not be held against In the case of small hits, there are fewer types of variation patterns to be selected than in the case of designing whether to carry out the staging of Gasse (pending in a row), and due to the nature of the lottery results of small hits. This is because it is suitable to be used as a garbled effect, so it is possible to reduce the number of judgment elements for performing the pre-reading determination and to perform the simplified processing.

  FIG. 61 (A) is a continuous pattern effect pattern table to be referred to when selecting a continuous effect pattern of on-hold internal continuous effect A in the third embodiment, and FIG. 61 (B) is a pending internal sequence in the third embodiment It is a continuous pattern effect pattern table to be referred to when selecting a continuous pattern effect pattern of a silent effect B. Since these consecutive play effect pattern tables are basically the same as the continuous play effect patterns in the first embodiment (see FIG. 8), detailed description will be omitted, but as described above, the pending inner consecutive trains It differs in that small hit retention is included as an operation retention ball of pre-reading object in chou rendition A and B. Now, specific processing will be described below.

(Pending U-Ran Effect B Determination Process: Third Embodiment)
Subsequently, the on-premises / on-premises effect B determination process (S843) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive effects B determination process (S843) in the third embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the above-described first embodiment is the processing of S871 to S874, in which small hit retention is included in the operation pending ball which is the pre-read target of the pending internal connection effect B. In FIG. 62, the processes of S851 to S854 and S858 to S870 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S871 to S874 which are differences will be mainly described.

  First, when the specific suspension exists in the operation suspension ball of the second special symbol (S 854: YES), it is determined whether this specific suspension indicates the 16R big hit (high profit big hit) (S 871) . When the specific suspension corresponds to the 16R big hit (S871: YES), the intra-parking inter-station effect B lottery process 1 is executed to determine whether or not to execute the inter-station internal-riso effect B by lottery ( S872). In this on-hold in-line consecutive effects effect B lottery process 1, referring to unshown continuous effects effect B lottery table 1, the in-time effects effect lottery random number value matches any judgment value of "execution" or "non-execution" If there is a problem, decide whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is performed at a rate of 70%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 30%.

  On the other hand, when there is no specific suspension in the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol (S 854: NO), it is determined whether small hit suspension is included in the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol (S 873) . If small hit hold is included (S 873: YES), a pending hold continuous play effect B lottery process 2 is executed to determine whether or not to execute the hold within continuous play effect B by lottery (S 874) . In this on-hold in-line consecutive effect B lottery process 2, with reference to unshown in-line effect B lottery table 2, a continuous period effect lottery random number value matches with any of the judgment values of "execution" and "non-execution" If there is a problem, decide whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is performed at a rate of 0.1%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 99.9%.

  When the player is elected in the on-hold in-row effect B lottery process (S 872, S 874), while selecting the on-off effect pattern for determining the content of the in-hold in-row effect A (S 861), After temporarily storing the sub main information storage means 260 in the continuous play effect pattern storage area (S868), the on-hold internal continuous play effect flag of the sub main information storage means 260 is turned on (S870), and this processing is ended.

  By the way, as a point to be noted in the present embodiment, no pending internal connection effect B occurs during the execution of the special game, and after the end of the special game, the following operation pending ball (onward connection internal effect B is generated If the high expectation degree effect (Super Reach B) occurs by the action-retaining ball existing at the time being digested, the high profit jackpot is higher than the probability of the low profit jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot) The probability of becoming (16R probability variation big hit) is set higher.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (B), as the allocation of the jackpot type in the second special symbol game, the 16R probability variation big hit with 70% probability, 2R probability variation big hit with 20% probability, 2R usual big hit with 10% probability It has become. In the present example, the 16R probability variation big hit is also referred to as "16R big hit", 2R probability variation big hit and 2R normal big hit collectively.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60, in the special symbol state of variation, if the result of the acceptance determination is a big hit, if it is a 16R big hit, the fluctuation of Super Reach B (high expectation degree effect) with 100% probability When the pattern PX7 is selected and the 2R big hit (2R specified big hit, 2R normal big hit), the variation pattern PZ7 of the super reach B (high expectation degree effect) is selected with a probability of 60%.

  At this time, as described in S872 in FIG. 62, in this example, when there is a specific hold (16R big hit) in the subsequent operation hold ball, the probability of winning the possibility of execution of the on-premises consecutive effect B is 70% Since it is set to, even when there is a specific hold (16R big hit), the pending inside consecutive effect B becomes unexecuted with a probability of 30% remaining.

  Under the conditions as described above, under the condition that the pending Uranzou rendition B is not executed, the probability of becoming a 16R jackpot by the appearance of Battle Reach (Super Reach B) X, the appearance of Battle Reach (Super Reach B) The probability Y of becoming a 2R jackpot according to is as follows.

X = (probability of becoming a 16R jackpot) × (probability of not producing a reserved in-house consecutive effect B) × (probability of becoming a super reach B)
Y = (2R big hit probability) × (super reach B probability)

  Subsequently, using the above numerical values, the probability X of becoming a 16R jackpot due to the appearance of Super Reach B and the probability Y of becoming a 2R jackpot due to the appearance of Super Reach B are specifically calculated as follows.

X = 70/100 × (100-70) / 100 × 100/100 = 21/100
Y = (20 + 10) / 100 × 60/100 = 18/100

  Therefore, when a high expectation degree effect is generated in the subsequent operation reserving ball (when it is developed into the super reach B) without the occurrence of the pending inner row directing effect B being generated, it is more likely than the possibility of becoming a low profit jackpot The possibility of being a big hit other than this low profit big hit (ie, high profit big hit = 16R big hit) is higher.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, even if the on-premise-on-park effect B does not occur during the special game, the player holds a high profit with respect to the high expectation degree effect after the end of the special game. It is possible to enhance the player's sense of expectation by the occurrence of the high expectation degree effect without losing the sense of expectation to the big hit, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and in the following, parts having similar configurations are given the same reference numerals. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

  In the above-described first embodiment, regardless of the jackpot type, the ST machine with a probability change rate of 100% (time cut probability change machine) which shifts to the high probability state (special symbol change state) uniformly after the end of the special game. Although adopted, it is not limited to this, including a jackpot to shift to a low probability state (time saving state of special symbol or normal state) after the end of the special game in a part of the jackpot type, a predetermined ratio (for example, probability variation You may adopt ST machine which shifts to the special symbol's definite change state by the rush rate 80%).

  In such a model, when it is usually a big hit in the special game oddity state (high probability state), when transitioning to the time saving state (low probability state) of the normal state or special symbol after the end of the special game, The game state may change, for example, when transitioning to the time saving state (low probability state) of the normal state or the special symbol after reaching the ST period in the definite gaming state (high probability state) of the special game.

  In this example, when pre-reading determination is performed on the side of the effect control board 200 based on the information of the pre-determination result from the main control board 100, the operation holding ball (referred to as "target reserving") targeted for the pre-reading determination is digested. If the gaming state is scheduled to change before being played (high probability state → low probability state, etc.), the information on the predetermination result relating to the operation holding ball is ignored. That is, although it was determined to be a "big hit" in the pre-reading judgment of the target reserve, it usually becomes a big hit (non-probable variation big hit) as a result of the operation reserve ball (preceding hold pending) stored prior to the target reserve being digested. If the game state reaches the normal state after the end of the special game, or if the ST period ends after the pre-reading determination and before the trigger hold is digested, this trigger hold is actually digested Occasionally, situations may arise where it is determined to be an outlier. Therefore, in order to prevent such a situation, when the gaming state is scheduled to change, the information of the preliminary determination result is not to be the target of the prefetch determination. Note that "ignore" includes the meaning of "receiving but not using the sent information" and the meaning of "not receiving the sent information".

  As an example in which this configuration is applied to the pre-reading determination relating to the pending in-line effect, the present gaming state (previous in the following pending ball) if it becomes a big hit as a result of the preceding pending ball being digested In the gaming state at the time when the operation holding ball is digested, even if there is one that is determined to be a specific hold, if the game state is scheduled to change before the specific hold is digested, this specification It is configured to ignore the information of the predetermination result relating to the suspension. Here, if there is a possibility that the game state may be switched before and after execution of the special game (special game when the previous operation holding ball is a big hit) that "the game state is scheduled to change". For example, as a result of the previous operation holding ball being digested in the special symbol oddity state, the game state is usually a big hit, and after the end of the special game and before the subsequent operation holding ball is digested, the game state is This is the case, for example, when it is planned to switch to the normal state. In addition, it is not limited to this, When switching from the definite variation state of a special symbol to the time saving state of a special symbol, the case where it switches from the time saving state of a special symbol to a normal state etc. may be included. Now, specific processing will be described below.

(Reserved U-Ran Effect A Determination Process: Fourth Embodiment)
Subsequently, the on-premises-and-non-play effect A determination process (S737) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive effect A determination process (S737) in the fourth embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the process of S771, and when the gaming state is scheduled to change, the advance determination information relating to the specific suspension is present regardless of whether or not there is the prior determination information. The point is to ignore the judgment information. In FIG. 63, since the processes of S761 to S770 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, the process of S771 which is the difference will be mainly described.

  First, in the case where the prior determination information of the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S763: YES), before the operation reserve ball is digested It is determined whether the current gaming state is scheduled to change (S771). In addition, based on the information of the effect control command from the main control board 100, the effect control board 200 may individually manage the game state as to whether or not the game state is scheduled to change, or the advance determination command The determination may be made based on the information of the prior determination command by adding information (detailed next statement) concerning the gaming state to. If there is no plan to change the gaming state (S771: NO), then if there is a specific hold (16R big hit) (S 764, 765), a draw is made to determine whether or not to execute the hold inside row effect A Is selected (S766), and the consecutive residence effect pattern for determining the content of the pending internal connection effect A is selected (S768), and this is temporarily stored in the adjacent character effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. After storing (S769), the on-hold on-line consecutive-play effect flag of the sub main information storage means 260 is turned on (S770), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is scheduled to change (S771: YES), regardless of whether or not there is a specific hold, the predetermination information relating to the operation holding ball is ignored, and this processing is ended. . In the present example, as the case where the gaming state is scheduled to change, (1) when it is usually a big hit in the specific gaming state (probability change state), (2) is a definite variation big hit, and specific suspension (probability change It is assumed that there is a specific hold for a jackpot that is scheduled to be a big hit, but a specific hold for a jackpot that is usually a big hit precedes the specific hold. However, it is possible to change the gaming state by the ST period ending after a predetermined number of times of change, etc., in pre-reading advance notice effects such as simple holding change, etc., as well as pending holding arrangement effect.

(Pending U-Ran Effect B Determination Process: Fourth Embodiment)
Subsequently, the on-premises-and-non-play effect B determination process (S843) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive-play effect B determination process (S843) in the fourth embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the above-described first embodiment is the processing of S875, and when the gaming state is scheduled to change, regardless of whether or not the prior determination information relating to the specific hold exists. The point is to ignore the prior decision information. In FIG. 64, the processes of S851 to S870 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the process of S875 which is the difference will be mainly described.

  First, in the case where the prior determination information of the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S853: YES), before the operation reserve ball is digested It is determined whether the current gaming state is scheduled to change (S875). If the gaming state is not scheduled to change (S875: NO), it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the on-premises in-store effect B by lottery (S856, S857). The sub main information storage means 260 is selected after temporarily storing it in the sub main information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S 861). This process is ended by turning on the on-hold in-line consecutive effect flag (S870).

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is scheduled to change (S875: YES), regardless of whether or not there is a specific hold, the predetermination information relating to the operation holding ball is ignored, and this processing is ended. .

  As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to prevent a notification effect betraying the player's expectation that a wrinkle is generated between the result notified in advance by the pending inner row effect and the actual lottery result, As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, if the configuration of the fourth embodiment described above is, for example, a gaming machine capable of mutually transitioning a plurality of types of gaming states such as a normal state (low probability state) and a special symbol oddity state (high probability state), The present invention is not limited to the ST machine, and may be applied to a game machine according to the second embodiment (ball check type) or the third embodiment (normal probability change type).

Fourth Embodiment First Modified Example
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained.

  In the fourth embodiment described above, when the gaming state is scheduled to change, the information on the predetermination result from the main control board 100 is ignored regardless of whether or not the specific hold exists. Even if the gaming state is scheduled to change by adding the information related to the gaming state to the prior determination command, the effect control is not performed based on the prior determination information to which the information on the gaming state is added. The pre-read determination may be performed on the side of the substrate 200, and the on-premises-in-one effects A and B determination process may be performed. Here, “pre-judgment information to which information on gaming state is added” is correct under the gaming state at the time when the operation holding ball which is the target of the pre-reading judgment on the effect control board 200 is actually digested The mode is not particularly limited as long as the information can specify the pre-judgment result. For example, (1) prior determination results in the current gaming state, (2) prior determination results in the next gaming state, (3) the number of remaining continuations of the current gaming state (variation number), (4) The remaining number of continuations (the number of fluctuations) before changing to the next gaming state, (5) that the gaming state is scheduled to change within the predetermined number of fluctuations, (6) the hold information in the predetermination command is actually digested A combination of one or two or more of the information such as information on the planned gaming state after deriving the gaming state at the scheduled time is adopted. Furthermore, as described in the above-mentioned pre-decision table of FIG. 57, according to the gaming state (normal state / probability state, more specifically, normal state / probability state / short time state), as a lottery result It may be information related to the prior determination number that the meaning of the random number value changes or does not change.

  As described above, according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment, even if the game state is scheduled to change, the change is made based on the information relating to the game state included in the pre-judgment result without disregarding the pre-judgment result. By performing the pre-read determination under the later gaming state, it is possible to prevent the notification effect betraying the player's expectation that there is a gap between the result notified in advance by the pending inner row effect and the actual lottery result. While being able to do, it is possible to increase the execution opportunity of reservation inside consecutive relief production, as a result it becomes possible to improve the interest of game.

Fourth Embodiment Second Modified Example
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained. In the second modification, the following configuration can be added in any of the above-described fourth embodiment and the first modification.

  In this modification, in the case where the preceding operation-reserved ball is a big hit in the on-hold consecutive-run effect A determination process, when a plurality of specific-retentions are included in the subsequent operation-reserved ball, the first first one The specific hold is treated as an operation hold ball (hereinafter referred to as “target hold”) that is the target of the pre-reading determination in the hold inside consecutive effects effect determination process (hereinafter referred to as “target hold”). It is not treated as a target hold of the Chuang rendition A determination process, and the prior determination information of the subsequent specific hold is ignored. Note that "ignore" includes the meaning of "receiving but not using the sent information" and the meaning of "not receiving the sent information".

  The operation of this modification will now be described with reference to FIG. It is assumed that when the preceding operation reserving ball X0 is digested, there are two specific retentives X1, X3 in the subsequent operation reserving balls X1, X2, X3. At this time, if it becomes a big hit as a result of the previous operation holding ball X0 is digested, it is possible to execute the on / off effect of the in-row consecutive effect A only in relation to the first specified holding X1 of the two specified holdings X1 and X3. judge. This is, as described above, in the pre-reading determination according to the pending inside consecutive effect A, the pre-reading determination is performed in order from the first one among the subsequent action holding balls, and a plurality of identifications in the subsequent action holding balls If there is a hold, the reason is to determine whether or not the on-premises on-hold effect can be performed only in relation to the first specific hold. Therefore, the subsequent specific suspension X3 of the two specific suspension X1 and X3 existing in the subsequent operation suspension ball is not a target of the suspension internal arrangement effect A, and the prior determination information of the specific suspension X3 is not ignore. As described above, in this modification, when the preceding operation holding ball is digested and becomes a big hit, the on-hold in-line consecutive effect A is executed based on the existence of the advance-specific identification suspension, but the later-generation identification suspension is present. The on-premises in-house consecutive effect A is not executed based on that.

  As described above, according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment, when there is a plurality of specific reservations in the subsequent operation reservation ball, the on-premises consecutive connection effect is executed only in relation to the first specific suspension. By enabling it, it is possible to prevent the target of the originally intended pending union from fluctuating due to the presence of other specific suspension (for example, a specific suspension which is usually scheduled to be a big hit) existing between them It is possible to enhance the sense of satisfaction when the pending Uchirenso effect occurs, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game

Fourth Embodiment Third Modified Example
Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained. In the third modification, the following configuration can be added to any of the above-described fourth embodiment and the first modification.

  In this modification, in the case where the preceding operation reserving ball is a big hit in the reserving internal consecutive effects A determination process, when a plurality of specific reservings are included in the subsequent operation reserving ball, it relates to the preceding operation reserving ball Although there may be occurrences of pending U-Ran effects A in the relationship between the jackpot and the advance specific identification hold, and the pending U-in connection effects A in the relation between the big hit and the late departure specific Pending pertaining to the advanced identification hold. When comparing the prior determination information of the specific hold of the advance and the prior determination information of the specific hold of the late on the basis of the player's advantage, the specific reserve with high relative priority is only compared. To indicate or inform.

  The operation of this modification will now be described with reference to FIG. It is assumed that when the preceding operation reserving ball X0 is digested, there are two specific retentives X1, X3 in the subsequent operation reserving balls X1, X2, X3. At this time, if the first specific hold X1 is "8R big hit" and the second specific hold X3 is "16R big hit", the second specific hold X3 has a higher priority than the first specific hold X1 with a specific hold. Become. Therefore, if the leading activated holding ball X0 is a big hit as a result of being digested, the leading specified holding X1 is a specific holding with a relatively low degree of advantage, so the jackpot and leading of the leading activated holding ball X0 There is no occurrence of a pending internal connection effect A in relation to the specific suspension X1. On the other hand, if it is a big hit as a result of digestion of the advance-action holding ball X1 is a big hit, the specific hold X3 of the late start is a specific hold with a relatively high degree of advantage. A pending internal connection effect A in relation to the pending X3 may occur.

  As described above, according to the third modified example of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the continuous occurrence of the highly reserved reserved in-line effect and to perform only the notification of the highly retained in-position big hit, which is truly advantageous. , It is possible to increase the interest in the occurrence of the pending in-line effect, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and in the following, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

  The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine of the second embodiment, depending on whether or not the gaming ball wins a specific area (V area) in the big winning opening during execution of the special game. It is configured as a so-called ball check type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to a definite change state after the end of. In addition, a definite change state may be continued until symbol variation of a predetermined number of times (ST number of times) is performed, and may be continued until the next big hit occurs.

  FIG. 66 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine PM according to a fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66, in the fifth embodiment, only a single large winning opening 65 (a ball probability attacker having a specific area 658) is mounted in the game area PA. That is, in the second embodiment described above, the second large winning opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened only in the specific round, and the first large winning opening not having the specific area 658 in the rounds other than the specific round. In the fifth embodiment, the big winning opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all the rounds. The configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the above-described second embodiment, and thus the description thereof will not be repeated.

  Subsequently, an operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, the jackpot type (stop symbol of a special symbol) in the fifth embodiment will be described.

  The upper part of FIG. 67 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the fifth embodiment. In the first special symbol per symbol table, operation patterns of a stop symbol, a symbol group, and a special winning opening 65 are respectively associated with a special symbol per symbol random number value. In this table, the stop symbols “1” to “6” of the first special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups A, B, and C according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, symbol group A (16R long short opening big hit symbol) is for symbols "1" and "2", symbol group B (8R long short opening hit symbol) for symbols "3" and "4" The symbol group C (8R short open jackpot symbol) is associated with the symbols "5" and "6", respectively.

  The lower part of FIG. 67 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the second embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, operation patterns of a stop symbol, a symbol group, and a special winning opening 65 are respectively associated with a special symbol per symbol random number. In this table, the stop symbols "11" to "16" of the second special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups D and E according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, the symbol group D (16R length open big hit symbol) is attached to the symbols "11", "12" and "13", and the symbol group E is attached to the symbols "14", "15" and "16". (8R length open jackpot symbols) are respectively associated.

  In this example, even if it corresponds to any of the plural types of jackpots (symbol groups A to E), in the specific round in the special game, the round game for distributing the probability variation prize to the specific area 658 (" The "specified round game" is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (A), three types of 16R long short open big hit, 8R long short open big hit and 8R short open big hit are prepared for the big hit by the first special symbol. "Long open short hit" is a long open specific round game A in which the specific area 658 is open for a long time and entry to the specific area 658 is relatively easy in a specific round, and the specific area 658 is open for a short time It is a big hit with a short open specific round game B in which it is difficult to enter the specific area 658. The “short opening big hit” is a big hit with only a short opening specific round game B in which the specific area 658 is opened for a short time and it is relatively difficult to enter the specific area 658 in a specific round.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), two types of 16R long open big hit and 8R long open big hit are prepared for the big hit by the second special symbol. The “long open jackpot” is a big hit with only a long open specified round game A in which the specific area 658 is opened for a long time and entry to the specific area 658 is relatively easy in the specific round.

  Subsequently, FIG. 68 is a time chart for describing an operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the fifth embodiment. The operation pattern shown in FIG. 68 conceptually shows the state of execution of the long open specific round game A and the short open specific round game B, and the long open specific round game A, the short open specific round game B, and the big winnings The length and ratio of each time width of the interval period (waiting period) in which the closing state of the port 65 is maintained does not correspond to the actual time width length and ratio. In the second embodiment described above, in the specific round, the special motorized product 652 and the blade members 655 are synchronously controlled in synchronization, and the opening period of the special winning opening 65 and the opening period of the specific area 658 are one. In the fifth embodiment, the opening period of the special winning opening 65 and the opening period of the specific area 658 are deviated at least in part. Here, the opening time "29 seconds" of the special winning opening 65 is the maximum opening time value in this example. In this example, in any operation pattern, in the rounds other than the specific round, the big winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, and the specific area 658 is always closed. On the other hand, in the specific round, a long open specific round game A or a short open specific round game B is executed. In this example, a plurality of specific rounds (a first specific round, a second specific round) are provided, and the first specific round is "the first round" and the second specific round is the "eighth round". It is set to. Also in this example, as described above, in order to regulate the determination of the executability of the on-premises in-store effect B in a situation where the gaming state after the end of the special game is undecided, the timing of the executability is specified round Although it will be later, by setting the specific round to the first round, if the game ball passes through the specific area 658 in the first round and a definite transition is promised, it is suspended within a long period after the second round An effect is obtained that it is easy to secure an opportunity to generate the chorus arrangement effect B. In the following, as the operation pattern of the special winning opening 65, the opening and closing mode of the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 in a specific round will be mainly described. In this example, the opening and closing timings of the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are completely independent (the specific area 658 may be closed before the big winning opening 65 is closed), but preferably , The special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are synchronized (linked), and the specific area 658 is closed upon the closing of the special winning opening 65 (the specific area after the special winning opening 65 is closed) 658 is closed). In this case, if the special winning opening 65 is long open, the specific area 658 is also long opening, and if the large winning opening 65 is short open, the specific area 658 is also short open (by opening the large winning opening 65) The specific area 658 is also opened, and the closing of the large winning opening 65 also closes the specific area 658). Note that the open time of the specific area 658 may be the same for the long open specified round game A and the short open specified round game B.

  First, FIG. 68A shows a 16R long open pattern. In the 16R long opening pattern, long opening specific round game A is executed in the first specific round and the second specific round. Specifically, in the first round, the special winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, and 9 seconds after the opening of the special winning opening 65, the specific area 658 is continuously opened for 20 seconds. . In the eighth round, the special winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, and one second after the opening of the special winning opening 65 starts, the specific area 658 is continuously opened for 28 seconds.

  FIG. 68 (B) shows an 8R long open pattern. In the 8R long opening pattern, the long opening specific round game A is executed in the first specific round and the second specific round, as in the above-mentioned 16R long opening pattern.

  FIG. 68C shows a 16R long and short open pattern. In the 16R long short open pattern, the short open specific round game B is executed in the first specific round, and the long open specific round game A is executed in the second specific round. Specifically, in the first round, the special winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, and 9 seconds after the opening of the special winning opening 65, the specific area 658 is continued for 0.2 seconds. It is determined to be open. In the eighth round, the special winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, and one second after the opening of the special winning opening 65, the specific area 658 is continuously opened for 28 seconds.

  FIG. 68D shows an 8R long and short open pattern. In the 8R long short open pattern, the short open specific round game B is executed in the first specific round and the long open specific round game A is executed in the second specific round, as in the above-mentioned 16R long short open pattern.

FIG. 68E shows an 8R short open pattern. In the 8R short opening pattern, a short opening specific round game B is executed in the first specific round and the second specific round.
Specifically, in the first round, the big winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, and 9 seconds after the opening start of the big winning opening 65, the specific area 658 is continuously applied for 0.2 seconds. Open. In the eighth round, the special winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, and one second after the opening of the special winning opening 65, the specific area 658 is continuously opened for 0.2 seconds. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (C) to (E), when the first round is the short open specific round game B, the special winning opening 65 is long open and the specific area 658 is short open. Although the form which becomes is illustrated, originally, as the short opening specific round game B, the form where the big winning a prize opening 65 and the specific territory 658 become short opening is desirable desirably. That is, in the first round (short opening specific round game B) of 16R long short opening big hit, 8R long short opening big hit and 8R short opening big hit, the opening and closing pattern which makes big winning opening 65 and specific area 658 short open is adopted. It is also good. As the first modification, in the first round short opening specific round game B, the opening start timing of the special winning opening 65 is delayed by 8 seconds with respect to the first round long opening specific round game A Open continuously for 1.2 seconds, and open the specified area 658 continuously for 0.2 seconds one second after the opening of the big winning opening 65 (that is, specifying that the big winning opening 65 is closed) Region 658 is also closed immediately). In this case, in the short opening round game B of the eighth round, the opening timing of the large winning opening 65 is made to coincide with the long opening specific round game A of the eighth round, and the large winning opening 65 is In addition, the specific area 658 is continuously opened for 0.2 seconds one second after the opening of the big winning opening 65 while being continuously opened for 2 seconds. Further, as the second modification, in the first round short opening specific round game B, the opening start timing of the big winning opening 65 is made to coincide with the first round long opening specific round game A. The large winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 0.2 seconds, and 9 seconds after the opening of the large winning opening 65, the specific area 658 is continuously opened for 0.2 seconds. In this case, in the eighth round of the short opening round game B, the opening timing of the large winning opening 65 is made to coincide with the eighth round of the long opening specified round game A, and the large winning opening 65 is 0 In addition, the specific area 658 is continuously opened for 0.2 seconds one second after the opening of the big winning opening 65 while being continuously opened for 2 seconds. Note that the opening pattern of the specific area 658 may be the same for the long opening specific round games A and B.

  Subsequently, promotion effects during the special game in the fifth embodiment will be described. In this example, as the promotion effects to be executed during the special game, the first promotion effect (probability change promotion effect) and the second promotion effect (round promotion effect) are provided. In the present example, the promotion effect refers to the fact that the jackpot is “probably the jackpot” regarding the profit aspect (for convenience, “first suggestion”) pertaining to the jackpot suggested or informed before or at the start of the jackpot. The profit mode is an instruction to indicate or report “whether the profit is higher than the profit mode suggested or informed by the first suggestion”. That is, it is an indication that indicates whether the jackpot benefit aspect suggested or informed before the jackpot start is true or false (higher profit aspect). Furthermore, it is an effect to indicate or notify whether the degree of advantage is a relatively high jackpot or a relatively low jackpot. The promotion effect is executed as one mode of the jackpot effect during the special game.

  FIG. 69 is a schematic view showing the relationship between the jackpot type and the promotion effect. First, if the first special symbol is a big hit, ie, "16R long short open big hit", "8R long short open big hit", "8R short open big hit" is a big hit, V during the special game A rendition or a probability change promotion rendition may be performed. Here, the V-determination effect is an effect to definitely notify that the long open specific round game A (V round) has been acquired at the start of the special game or the like. In addition, with the probability change promotion effect, in the round game before the second specified round in the special game, a production that suggests the expected degree of probability change acquisition in the second specified round, that is, the long open specified round game in the second specified round It is an effect which suggests that A may be implemented. Note that the first special symbol is a big hit, which is typically the so-called first hit, and the player pays attention to whether or not the gaming state after the first hit will be a definite change state. By suggesting the possibility that the round will be the long open specific round game A, the player's expectation during the special game can be maintained. The "first hit" refers to a jackpot generated by winning in the special symbol judging whether the gaming state is the non-electric chew support state (the normal symbol winning probability is the low probability state). Also, in this example, the reason for excluding the first specific round as the target of the probability change promotion effect is the first specific round during the special game regardless of the type of jackpot if a big hit occurs in the first special symbol Since it is set to the short open specific round game B (a round game in which the probability variation can not be acquired substantially), it is because there is no significance in providing a probability change promotion effect before the first specific round. However, in this example, since the first specific round is set to the first round, there is no timing for providing a probability change promotion effect before that. In the case of a big hit with the first special symbol, the promotion effect (round promotion effect) may be executed only when a big hit with the second special symbol is not performed but the promotion effect (probable variation promotion effect) is not performed. .

  On the other hand, if it is a big hit in the second special symbol, that is, if it is a big hit in "16R long open big hit" or "8R long open big hit", round decision effect or round promotion effect occurs during the special game It can. Here, the round finalization effect is an effect in which the number of rounds (16 rounds or 8 rounds) of the big hit is notified definitely at the start of the special game or the like. Specifically, in the present example, 16R determined effects and 8R determined effects are prepared. In addition, the round promotion effect is an effect that suggests the possibility that the round game after the specified number may be continued in the round game before the specified number in the special game (generally referred to as "round up effect") . In addition, the case of big hit with the second special symbol is typically so-called continuous time, it is generally promised that a definite change state is continuously given during the continuous time, the player is special Since attention is paid to the number of rounds of the game (the number of payouts), by suggesting the possibility of the continuation of the second half round, the player's sense of expectation in the special game can be maintained.

  Here, the stop symbols (big hit symbols) of the decorative symbols in this example are roughly classified into “1 · 1 · 1”, “3 · 3 · 3”, “5 · 5 · 5”, “7 · 7 · 7・ ”,“ 9 ・ 9 ・ 9 ”and other definite variation symbols showing“ big variation ”,“ 2 · 2 · 2 ”,“ 4 · 4 · 4 ”,“ 6 · 6 · 6 ”,“ 8 · 8 · 8 ” Such as “big hit” or “indeterminate symbol indicating a big hit”. When the first special symbol is a big hit, which of the V finalization effect and the probability change promotion effect is to be executed in the special game is the stop symbol of the decorative symbol selected in the decorative symbol determination means 224 (big hit symbol It is decided according to the kind of). Here, as shown in FIG. 69, when the jackpot type is 16R long short open jackpot, that is, when the jackpot symbol is an odd symbol of “3 · 3 · 3” or “7 · 7 · 7”, V The fixed effect is selected. Also, if the jackpot type is 8R long short open jackpot, if the jackpot symbol is an odd symbol such as "1.1.1", "5.5.5", "9.9.9" V finalization effect is If the jackpot design is an even pattern such as "2.2.2," "4 .4 .4," "6 .6 .6," "8. . On the other hand, when the jackpot type is 8R short open jackpot, ie, the jackpot symbol is "2.2.2", "4.4.4", "6.6.6", "8-8. 8" If it is an even symbol, a probability change promotion effect is selected. On the other hand, when the second special symbol is a big hit, which of the final game effect and the round promotion effect is to be executed in the special game is the stop symbol of the decorative symbol selected in the decorative symbol determination means 224 (big hit It is decided according to the kind of pattern). Here, as shown in FIG. 69, when the big hit type is 16R long open big hit, if the big hit symbol is an odd symbol of “3 · 3 · 3” or “7 · 7 · 7” round determined effect ( The 16R finalization effect is selected, and if it is an odd symbol such as “1 · 1 · 1 ′ ′,“ 5 · 5 · 5 ′ ′, or “9 · 9 · 9 ′ ′, the round promotion effect is selected. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is 8R long open jackpot, the jackpot symbol is an even number such as "2.2.2", "4.4.4", "6.6.6", "8.8.8" If it is a symbol, the round finalization effect (8R finalization effect) is selected, and if the big hit symbol is an odd numbered symbol such as “1 · 1 · 1”, “5 · 5 · 5”, “9 · 9 · 9” round promotion An effect is selected. In addition, this effect content (promotional effect, finalized effect) may be configured to be executed only in the non-electric chew support state if it is a game of the first special symbol, and it is also a game of the second special symbol If there is, it may be configured to be executed only when in the power support state. Furthermore, the probability change promotion effect may be configured as in the following (1) to (3). (1) In the case of a big hit with the first special symbol in the non-electric chew support state, while performing a definite change promotion effect during the special game (during a big hit), the second special in the non-electric chew support state When it is a big hit with a symbol, you may be configured to execute a definite change promotion effect before the start of the special game (before the big hit) instead of during the special game (while playing the big hit) (as the aspect, the change related to the big hit It is suggested that the combination of the decorative design changes from "6,6,6" to "7,7,7", which means that the change in probability is promoted. (2) If the first special symbol is a big hit in the state of electric chew support, execute the definite change promotion effect before the start of the special game (before the big hit) and the definite change promotion effect during the special game (big hit) Will not run, and if the second special symbol is a big hit in the state of electric Chu support, perform a definite change promotion effect before the start of the special game (before the big hit) Because it is a big hit that will be, it will definitely be promoted to a certain degree)). (3) However, when the above (2) is applied, even if it is a big hit with the first special symbol in the electric chow support state, the player's sense of expectation also during the special game (during the big hit) In order to sustain the game, you may execute a definite change promotion effect during a special game (during a big hit).

(First promotion effect)
Subsequently, the probability change promotion effect (first promotion effect) will be described. FIG. 70 is a schematic view showing an example of the effect content of the probability change promotion effect. The probability change promotion effect, when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol, the eighth round (second specific round) is a long open specific round game A and over the second round to the seventh round in the special game It is an effect that suggests the possibility of The probability change promotion effect in this example is a ball entering effect (also referred to as a "first ball entering effect") to be executed in the second to fourth rounds and a V to be executed in the fifth to seventh rounds. It consists of a round winning presentation.

  The first ball entering effect is displayed in the second round to the fourth round as shown in FIGS. 70 (A) to (C). The first entry effect is an effect in which various objects are sequentially displayed on the screen according to the entry of the game ball to the special winning opening 65, and the long open identification round according to the display mode of the specific object The transition expectation to the game A (ie, the probability change expectation) is suggested.

  First, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), when the second round is started, a meter image (a meter image for the second round) is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. The meter image is displayed in a horizontally long band, and a scale is attached to the inside. The scale of the meter image is “0” at the start of each round game (the second round to the fourth round), and each time the game ball enters the big winning opening 65, an object for one scale in the meter image ( An object representing a color is displayed, and the meter image is increased by one division (the graduation is cleared to zero when moving to the next round). The meter image is set to all nine graduations, which corresponds to nine, which is the maximum ball number of the big winning opening 65 in each round game. That is, when there is a maximum number of ball entry (9) to the big winning opening 65 in the round game, the scale of the meter image is obtained by accumulating the object for 9 graduations (9 objects for one scale) Is full. As a display mode of the object for one graduation of the meter image, any of two colors of "white" and "giraffe pattern" can be taken. In the drawings, two types of display modes of white and giraffe are expressed by "plain" and "hatched", respectively. At this time, one star (an image resembling a star) is displayed (one star can be acquired) each time a giraffe pattern object corresponding to one scale appears. On the other hand, even if a white object of one division appears, the star is not displayed (the star can not be acquired). In this example, up to three stars can be displayed, which suggests the possibility of transition to the long open specific round game A according to the number of acquired stars. In the illustrated example, in this second round, by entering seven gaming balls into the large winning opening 65, the meter image has increased to seven divisions, but the giraffe pattern object does not appear, and the star is displayed. It shows the condition that could not be acquired.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), when the third round is started, a new meter image (meter image for the third round) is displayed on the screen. In the illustrated example, in the third round, the giraffe pattern object appears at the fifth entry into the big winning opening 65, and one star is acquired.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), when the fourth round is started, a new meter image (meter image for the fourth round) is displayed on the screen. In the illustrated example, in the fourth round, a giraffe pattern object appears at the seventh entry into the big winning opening 65, and another star has been acquired. Then, at the end of the fourth round, the total number (two) of the stars acquired in the first entering effect is determined. In the present example, although the number of acquired giraffe pattern objects in one round game is one, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of giraffe pattern objects can be acquired in one round game It may be configured.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 70 (D) to (F), the V round acquisition effect is displayed in the fifth to seventh rounds. The V-round acquisition effect is closely related to the display mode (rendering result) of the first entering game, and is an effect for which the contents of the rendering corresponding to the effect result of the entering game (the display mode of the object) are derived. According to the contents of the effect, an expectation (a transition expectation to the long open specific round game A) of probability variation acquisition is suggested.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (D), in the fifth round, with the start of the V round acquisition effect, a title image is notified. In the present example, a title image of “permanent change promotion chance time” is displayed on the screen. In accordance with the attribute of this title (in this example, a plurality of display colors are prepared), the transition expectation to the long open specific round game A is notified in advance. The details will be described later, but in this example, the display color of the title is set to be higher in the transition expectation to the long open specific round game A in the order of "blue" <"green" <"purple" <"red". ing. The attribute (display color) of this title is different according to the number of acquired stars in the entering effect. The illustrated example shows the case where the display color of the title is "purple", corresponding to the number "2" of acquired stars.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), in the sixth round, the enemy character is displayed on the screen, and a message of “strike the production button 15 continuously to defeat the enemy” is displayed, and the player is asked In contrast, the operation of the effect button 15 is prompted. In response to this, when the player operates the effect button 15, the enemy character can be attacked.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), in the seventh round, when the enemy character is successfully destroyed, the characters “V-round acquisition success” are displayed on the screen. On the other hand, although not shown, when the enemy character fails to be destroyed, the characters “V-round acquisition failure” are displayed on the screen. However, in practice, since the type of the big hit (ie, the presence or absence of the execution of the long open specific round game A) is determined in advance, the effect is developed according to the type.

  And although illustration is omitted, in the eighth round (second specific round), a specific round game (long open specified round game A or short open specified round game B) is executed according to the notification result by the V round acquisition effect It will be. At this time, in the eighth round, in the case of the long open specific round game A, for example, a predetermined effect that a message such as “Aim for V” appears appears, but in the case of the short open specific round game B, the above predetermined There is no production. However, even in the short opening specific round game B, if winning in the specific area 658, it shifts to a definite change state after the end of the special game. In addition, the above-described predetermined effect is configured not to be executed when the first round (first specific round) is a big hit that is a long open specific round game and the specific area 658 is won in the first round. You may

  The effect content (representation pattern) of such a probability change promotion effect is selected with reference to the probability change promotion effect pattern table. FIG. 71 is a schematic view showing an example of the probability variation promotion effect pattern table. In the probability variation promotion effect pattern table, a plurality of probability variation promotion effect patterns are defined. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “Selection ratio” is described, but in fact, according to the probability variation promotion effect pattern random number value, the judgment value (range of random number value) for determining the probability variation promotion effect pattern Is set, and the probability variation promotion effect pattern is determined based on to which determination value the probability variation promotion effect pattern random number value belongs.

  In the probability variation promotion effect pattern table, according to the probability variation promotion effect pattern, the contents of the entering effect (presence or absence of appearance of the giraffe pattern object, the number of acquired stars) and the content of the V round acquisition effect (display color of the title) Is defined (see the section "Production Content" in the figure). In FIG. 71, the presence or absence of the appearance of the giraffe pattern object in each round is determined, “○” means that the giraffe pattern object appears, and “−” means that the giraffe pattern object does not appear. There is. The number of acquired stars is determined according to the number of ○ marks (that is, the number of appearances of the giraffe pattern object). Then, the display color of the title in the V round acquisition effect is determined in accordance with the number of stars acquired in this ball entry effect. Specifically, for the number of acquired stars "0", the display color of the title "blue", for the number of acquired stars "1" the display color of the title "green", for the number of acquired stars "2" The display color of the title "red" is specified for the display color of the title "purple" and the number of stars acquired "3". In the example of the effect of FIG. 70 described above, the case where the probability variation promotion effect pattern PS107 is selected is illustrated.

In this probability change promotion effect pattern table, the selection rate of the probability change promotion effect pattern is set to be different according to the jackpot type. Basically, each rendering pattern is assigned a selection rate according to the number of final stars acquired and the display color of the title. That is, when the big hit type is 16R long short open big hit or 8R long short open big hit (when it is a big hit with long open specific round game A), the number of acquired stars is “0” <“1” <“2” < The selection rate increases in the order of “3”, and the selection rate increases in the order of “blue” <“green” <“purple” <“red” in the display color of the title. On the other hand, if the big hit type is 8R short open big hit (if it is a big hit without a long open specific round game A), the total winning points are in the order of "3"<"2"<"1"<"0". The selection rate is increased, and the selection rate is increased in the order of “red” <“purple” <“green” <“blue” in the display color of the title. Therefore, in this example, the total acquisition points are in the order of “0” <“1” <“2” <“3” ”and the display color of the title is“ blue ”<“ green ”<“ purple ” The degree of transition expectation to the long open specific round game A becomes high in the order of <red color>.
In addition, it is good also as a specification which long and short opening big hit is decided by appearance of "red color" as a display color of a title. In this case, for example, the selectivity of “red” in FIG. 71 is set to long open short hit: short open big hit = 20: 0.

(Second promotion effect)
Subsequently, the round promotion effect (second promotion effect) will be described. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents of the round up promotion effect. When the round promotion effect is a big hit with the second special symbol, it suggests whether or not the ninth and subsequent rounds (that is, the last eight rounds) will be executed over the second through eighth rounds of the special game. Or it is an effect to inform. In other words, this round promotion effect, for example, at the time of the stop of the decorative symbol as if appearing as 8R big hit, suggesting or notifying that it is actually a 16R big hit during the round (showing like 8R big hit promoted to 16R big hit) Production). The round promotion effect in this example is the ball entering effect (also referred to as "the second ball directing effect") performed in the second to fourth rounds and the second half round performed in the fifth to eighth rounds It consists of winning and directing.

  The second ball entering effect is displayed in the second round to the fourth round, as shown in FIGS. 72 (A) to (C). The second entering effect is an effect in which various objects are sequentially displayed on the screen in response to the game ball entering the big winning opening 65, and the second half of the eight rounds according to the display mode of the specific object Continuity expectations (ie round up expectations) are suggested. In addition, according to the number of appearances of a specific object (a giraffe pattern object) among a plurality of kinds of objects, in the first entering effect, the transition expectation to the long open specific round game A was suggested, but the second In the entry effect of, the round-up becomes definite when a special object (golden object) of a plurality of types of objects appears. In the drawing, the golden display mode is expressed by "filling". As a modification, the second entering game may be configured with the same effect pattern (showing contents) as the first entering game, and in that case, depending on the number of acquired giraffe objects The degree of expectation for round promotion may be configured differently.

  First, as shown in FIG. 72A, when the second round is started, a meter image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. Also in this example, the scale of the meter image is “0” at the start of each round game, and each time the game ball enters the big winning opening 65 in the round game, an object for one scale (white) An object or a gold object is displayed, and the meter image is increased by one division (the graduation is cleared to zero when moving to the next round). In addition, the description is abbreviate | omitted about the part which is common in the above-mentioned 1st ball-in-place effect in the following.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 (A) and 72 (B), in this example, it is assumed that no gold object appears and only white objects appear in the second to third rounds.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), in the present example, a gold object appears in the fourth round by the seventh entry into the large winning opening 65, and the round-up for the last eight rounds is It becomes definite. At this time, three stars can be acquired at a time by the appearance of the golden object (three stars are lit).

  Then, the second half round winning presentation is displayed in the fifth round to the eighth round as shown in FIG. 72 (D) to (F). The latter half round acquisition effect is closely associated with the display mode (display result) of the ball entering effect, and is an effect in which the effect image corresponding to the display mode (display mode of the object) of the ball entering effect is displayed. According to the image, it is suggested that the latter 8 rounds of acquisition expectation. In this example, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), three stars are continuously displayed to obtain satisfaction of the round promotion in the fifth round to the seventh round if a golden object can be acquired, Display a rendering image (gold effect) that is related to the gold object. Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), in the eighth round, the characters “successful acquisition of second half round” are displayed on the screen as the round-up success effect.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), when the golden object can not be acquired in the second to fourth rounds, the character of "round acquisition failure" is displayed on the screen as round-up failure presentation in the eighth round. Is displayed. That is, in the seventh round, the acquisition results of the last eight rounds will be determined and displayed. However, since the type of the big hit (that is, the presence or absence of the last eight rounds) is determined in advance, the effect is developed according to the type.

  The effect contents (effect pattern) of such round promotion effect is selected with reference to the round promotion effect pattern table. FIG. 73 is a schematic view showing an example of a round promotion effect pattern table. In the round promotion effect pattern table, a plurality of round promotion effect patterns are defined. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “selection rate” is described, but in fact, the judgment value (range of random value values) for determining the round promotion effect pattern according to the round promotion effect pattern random number value The round promotion effect pattern is determined on the basis of which judgment value the round promotion effect pattern random number value belongs to.

  In the round promotion effect pattern table, the appearance timing of a special object (golden object) in the entering effect and the display result in the second half round acquisition effect are specified according to the round promotion effect pattern ("in FIG. Refer to the section "Effective Content"). In FIG. 73, the presence or absence of the appearance of the gold object is determined for the second to fourth rounds, “○” indicates the appearance of the gold object, and “−” indicates no appearance of the gold object. Therefore, if "○" is attached to any of the round fields in the figure, the round promotion effect pattern becomes effect contents that become a round-up success, and "「 "is attached to any round field. If not, the round promotion effect pattern will be the effect contents of the round-up failure. In the effect example of FIG. 72 described above, the case where the effect pattern PS 204 is selected is illustrated.

  In this round promotion effect pattern table, the selection rate of the round promotion effect pattern is set to be different according to the big hit type. Basically, in each effect pattern, a selection rate is assigned according to the display mode (appearance presence / absence and appearance timing) of the golden object. That is, when the big hit type is 16R long open big hit (when the total number of rounds is 16 rounds), only the round promotion effect pattern PS 202 to 204 in which a golden object appears and the round up is successful is selected. Ru. On the other hand, when the big hit type is 8R long open big hit (when the total number of rounds is 8 rounds), only the round promotion effect pattern PS201 in which the gold object does not appear and the round up fails is selected. . As described above, since the golden object is selected only when the result of the determination is 16R long open big hit (in the case of 8R long open big hit it is not an object of selection), the appearance of the golden object is 16R big hit confirmation, that is, the latter half 8 rounds Show the securing of As a modification, even if it is not possible to acquire a gold object in the round promotion effect, the round promotion may be successful. In addition, even in the round promotion direction, the giraffe pattern object is made to appear, and when the gold object is acquired, the round promotion is decided, and even if the gold object can not be acquired, the round promotion is performed according to the number of giraffe pattern objects acquired. It may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation.

  As described above, in this example, as the big hit type of the first special symbol, long open short hit big hit and short open big hit are provided, and if long open short hit big hit, the first specific round is short open specified round game B, While the second specific round is set to the long open specific round game A, the first specific round and the second specific round are set to the short open specific round game B if long open short jackpot. At this time, since the degree of expectation of probability variation acquisition is relatively low in the first specific round, the presence or absence of probability variation acquisition is distributed in the second specific round, regardless of which jackpot. Therefore, during or after the end of the first specific round to before the start of the second specific round, whether or not the second specific round is a long open specific round game A, that is, suggest or notify the expected degree of probability change promotion It is a thing. On the other hand, as a big hit type of the second special symbol, only a long open big hit is provided, and the first specific round and the second specific round are set to the long open specific round game A. In the case of the long open big hit, basically the probability change acquisition is almost promised in the first specific round, so the significance of suggesting the possibility of the probability change acquisition in the second specific round is small. Therefore, during or after the end of the first specific round to the second specific round, whether or not the round game continues in the second or later specific round is suggested or informed of the expectation of the round promotion.

  As described above, according to the fifth embodiment, there are provided two types of promotion effects that are executed according to the type of the big hit before the predetermined round in the special game, and part of the two types of promotion effects different from one another In the case of big hit in the first special symbol, which is configured in the ball effect, while suggesting the expected degree of probability change acquisition in the predetermined round (expected degree of probability change round) by the first promotion effect, while the second special effect In the case of a big hit in the pattern, the second promotion effect, by suggesting the degree of expectation of the continuation of the round after the predetermined round (expected degree of acquisition in the second half round) While securing the frequency of occurrence of the ball effect, variations in the promotion effect can be provided to enhance the effect of the big hit effect, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Although the above-described fifth embodiment exemplifies a configuration having only a single big winning opening 65 (only a big winning opening 65 having a specific area 658) in the gaming area PA, the present invention is limited to this configuration. For example, as in the second embodiment described above, the two large winning openings 64 and 65 (a large winning opening 64 having no specific area 658 and a special The present invention may be applied to a configuration provided with a mouth 65). At this time, in the second embodiment described above, the first large winning opening 64 and the second large winning opening 65 are arranged to be vertically adjacent to the lower right area in the gaming area PA, and while the special game is being executed. In the specific round, the lower second large winning opening 65 (and the specific area 658) is opened, and in the rounds other than the specific round, the upper first large winning opening 65) is opened. It is not limited to the configuration. For example, while adopting the arrangement of the big winning opening 64, 65 similar to the second embodiment described above, the opening pattern of the big winning opening 64, 65 may be different from that of the second embodiment. As an example, when the 16R special game is executed, the upper first large winning opening 64 is opened in the odd number (1R, 3R, 5R ...) round game, and the even number (2R, 4R, 6R ...) In the round game, the lower second large winning opening 65 is opened. Then, in the odd number of round games, the large winning opening 64 is opened long (open for 29 seconds) in any round game. On the other hand, in the round game of the even number of times, in the rounds other than the specific round, the big winning opening 65 is opened long (29 seconds open) and the specific area 658 is always closed, while in the first specific round (1R), The big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are short-opened (0.5 seconds open), and in the second specific round (7R), the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are long-opened (29 seconds open). At this time, by opening and closing the first big winning opening 64 and the second big winning opening 65 alternately every one round, at the same time one big winning opening is closed in a certain round, the other big winning opening Will be released and the next round will begin. Therefore, in one round, one big winning opening is closed and the game ball which was not able to enter the ball or the game ball which did not enter the ball increased the opportunity for the ball to enter the other big winning opening adjacent to this to increase. Do. Further, since the first large winning opening 64 and the second large winning opening 65 are close to each other in the vertical direction, the player may aim at the same position, and a game can be made without changing the launch strength of the gaming ball. As a result, the entry efficiency into the special winning opening is enhanced, and the player's sense of gain is improved. At this time, even in the case of long open short hit or short open big hit, in the rounds other than the specific round, any big winning opening 64, 65 becomes long open (29 seconds open), and the ball entry efficiency is enhanced as described above As a result, the player gets more chances to get out balls than before, which also benefits the player. In addition, as a modification, the operation round of the big winning opening 64, 65 is reversed with the above, and the first big winning opening 64 is opened in an even number of round games (2R, 4R, 6R ...), and a second winning The mouth 65 may be opened in odd-numbered (1R, 3R, 5R,...) Round games.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment described above, a special round is set to distribute whether or not to shift to a definite change state after the end of the special game according to the presence or absence of entering the special area 658 during the special game execution. Certain area entering a ball directing instruction to enter the specific area 658 by launching a game ball aimed at the large winning opening 65 (specific area 658), or definite variation after the end of the special game by having entered the specific area 658 A specific area entry notification effect (see the second embodiment) or the like for notifying transition to a state is performed. As an example of the effect of the specific area entry effect, it is possible to display a message such as "Aim for V!" In addition, as an example of the effect of the specific area entry notification effect, it is possible to display a message such as “V winning!” Or “probable change get” on the screen. At this time, if a big hit with the first special symbol in the non-specific gaming state (in this example, when the opening extension function is not activated), the second special in the specific gaming state (in this example, when the opening extension function is activated) The configuration is such that at least one of the specific area entering instruction and the specific area entering effect has a lower execution probability than when the big hit is made with the symbol, or at least one of the specific area entering instruction and the specific area entering effect It may be configured not to execute. That is, in this example, when a big hit in the first special symbol (ie, in the case of the first hit), it is uncertain whether or not a definite change has been obtained (in the case of 16R or 8R long short open big hit possible of definite change acquisition The second specific round (the seventh round) in which the specific area 658 is long-opened because the player is paying attention to the presence or absence of probability variation acquisition if the probability is high when the 8R short opening big hit). By performing the specific area ball entry instruction effect and the specific area ball entry informing effect), it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation and satisfaction of the probability change acquisition. On the other hand, in the case of big hit with the second special symbol (that is, in the case of continuous state), basically, there is a possibility of probability variation acquisition with a definite variation acquisition (16R or 8R length opening jackpot and a definite hit) (High) and the player's interest in the odd variation acquisition is not so large, so at least one of the specific area entering instruction and the specific area entering notification effect may not be executed, or even if the instruction is executed The display may be small or the display mode may be simplified.

  Further, in the above-described fifth embodiment, when so-called consecutive units continue a specified number of times, a special effect with a rarity (so-called ascension effect) occurs. Also in this example, as in the first embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not special rendering (so-called ascension presentation) is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the so-called continuous state. In addition, with predetermined conditions, for example, the number of consecutive acquisitions reaches a predetermined number of times, the number of accumulations of specific big hits in a continuous connection state reaches a predetermined number of times, the number of accumulated winning awards in a continuous connection state reaches a predetermined number, There may be a case where a specific effect (specific effect during symbol variation or special game) is generated during the quiet state. This special effect is executed across the symbol variation effect relating to the big hit of the consecutive number of times N = Nset number (Nset: prescribed number of times) and the special game relating to the Nset number big hit. In addition, as a modification, even if the special effect does not cross the symbol variation effect relating to the big hit of N = Nset times (N set: specified number of times) of consecutive nights, and the special game relating to the big hit of N set times Good (can be run on either side). At this time, when the special effect is executed, the probability of executing at least one of the specific area entering instruction instruction and the specific area entering effect is lower in the specific round in the special game than when the special effect is not executed. Alternatively, it may be configured not to execute at least one of the specific area entering instruction and the specific area entering effect. Further, even if the specific area entering instruction or the specific area entering effect is executed, the message may be displayed small or simplified. The reason is that the competition between the special effect during the special game and the specific area ball entry instruction effect (specific area ball entry notification effect) is to avoid that both the effect of the both become thin. In this case, giving priority to the execution of the special effect with high rarity is a result that the player is satisfied with the result.

Fifth Embodiment First Modification
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to this modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment described above, and in the following, portions having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

(Third promotion effect)
In the fifth embodiment described above, when the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit symbol (decorative symbol) is an even symbol (for example, "2.2.2" etc.), round promotion is performed during the special game. Although the effect can be performed, in this modification, if the second special symbol is a big hit, the big hit symbol (decorative symbol) may be an even symbol (for example, "2.2.2") For example, while the special game is being performed, a third promotion effect is suggested to indicate or notify the occurrence of any one of the round promotion and the pending internal connection B. That is, in this modification, the round promotion effect and the pending internal connection effect B are combined with a predetermined effect (entering effect), and based on the end of the effect (rendering result), round promotion in the process of the effect It is determined which one of the pending Uranso has been suggested or informed. The third promotion effect may include so-called effect. In other words, a message "Sorry!" Is displayed at the end of the entry effect to notify that there is no occurrence of round promotion and pending Uranzou, or the effect is terminated without any notification and nothing is notified. It may be

  First, in the present modification, at the start of the special game, if the jackpot symbol is an even symbol, it is determined which of the round promotion effect and the pending internal connection effect B is to be executed as the third promotion effect. Specifically, at the start of the special game, if there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, it decides the execution of the hold inside continuous effect B at a rate of 80% (high probability), a rate of 20% It decides (non-probability) that non-execution of on-premises in-house production B is performed. In addition, if there is no specific hold, the execution of the pending in-house rendition B is decided at a ratio of 20% (low probability), and the non-execution of the pending in-line consecutive rendition B at a ratio of 80% (high probability) decide. On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the on-hold in-line consecutive effect B, the execution of the round promotion effect is determined. At this time, when it is determined to execute the on-hold in-line consecutive effect B, the on-hold in-line consecutive effect flag is turned on. Similarly, when it is determined to execute the round promotion effect, the round promotion effect flag is turned on. In addition, in this example, on the premise that the preferential digestion (digestion of the action-retaining ball of the second special symbol is preferentially adopted), these effects are particularly during a definite change state (including at least time in the middle) Preferably, it occurs at the jackpot of the second special symbol and the specific hold of the second special symbol.

  FIG. 74 is a schematic view showing an example of effect content of the third promotion effect. The third promotion effect in this example is the ball entering effect (also referred to as the “third ball entering effect”) performed in the second round to the sixth round and the promotion content notification effect performed in the seventh round It consists of

  The third ball entering effect is displayed in the second round to the sixth round as shown in FIGS. 74 (A) to (C) (in the example shown, the third and fifth rounds are omitted. Yes). The third entering game effect is an effect that various objects are sequentially displayed on the screen according to the entering of the game ball to the big winning opening 65, similarly to the entering effect up to the above, and a specific object It suggests the possibility of round promotion or pending Uranso according to the display mode of. That is, in this third ball entry effect, the effect proceeds in a state in which the player is concealed as to which of the round promotion and the on-hold reservation is possible. And also in this example, one star (image imitating a star) can be acquired each time a giraffe pattern object for one scale appears in the meter image. In this example, up to five stars can be displayed, and depending on the number of acquired stars, the possibility of round promotion or holding inside can be suggested. In other words, the greater the number of stars acquired, the better the expectation of round promotion or on-hold reservation. In the illustrated example, four stars are acquired between the second round and the sixth round.

  Then, the promotion content notification effect is displayed in the seventh round as shown in FIGS. 74 (D) to (F). This promotion content notification effect is based on the display mode (the number of giraffe pattern objects or the number of stars) of the third entering effect in the second round to the sixth land, in the process of the round promotion and on-hold consecutive units It is to inform which possibility it was suggested. Here, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), at the start of the seventh round, a message “Try pressing a button!” Is displayed. In response to this, when the player operates the effect button 15, it is informed which of the possibility of the round promotion and the pending in-line connection has been suggested. As shown in FIG. 74 (E), when the determination result at the start of the big hit is the execution of the round promotion effect (when the round promotion effect flag is on), the message “round up chance!” Is displayed on the screen. Is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility of acquiring the last eight rounds.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), when the determination result at the time of the big hit start is the execution of the pending internal connection effect B (when the pending internal connection effect flag is on), “on the screen The message “Corruption chance!” Is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility of pending urgency (the next big hit). As described above, it is possible to clearly instruct the player whether there is a possibility of round promotion or a possibility of being on hold within a row based on the presentation result of the promotion content notification effect.

  As described above, according to the first modification of the fifth embodiment, the different types of round promotion effects and on-hold in-line consecutive effects are configured with the same type of entering effects in the same system, and promotion content information is reached until a predetermined round is reached. Is executed in a state of concealing it from the player, and the promotion content information is notified to the player as the presentation result when the predetermined round is reached. It is possible to give the player the pleasure of inferring information, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. As a modification, the promotion content information may be determined when the effect button 15 is operated in the seventh round of the illustrated example. That is, at the timing of pressing the button, presentation results such as “round up chance”, “continuous chance”, “sorry” may be displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to require a button operation as a condition for informing the promotion content information. Moreover, you may perform the promotion content alerting | reporting production | presentation in the round (during a round) which performed the ball entering production, or the end of the round. In that case, the round for executing the entering effect may be determined by a predetermined lottery (may be performed in the round in which the lottery for determining whether to perform the entering effect is won). Moreover, in the special game, in the case of a flow such as "long open round-continuous effect-end", the special game may be ended in this long open round (that is, there may be no subsequent rounds in the special game) After this long opening round, execute a predetermined number of short opening rounds and then end the special game (that is, the round continues after the long opening round, but the prize ball acquisition expectation value is substantially equal to no ) It may be a specification. Also, the round promotion effect (round up effect) may be performed in a different round from the round in which the probability change promotion effect is executed when the first special symbol causes a big hit when the gaming state is normal, Furthermore, it may be executed not only before the specific number of rounds (eighth round in this example) but also after the specific number of times or at a specific number of times.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and in the following, parts having similar configurations are given the same reference numerals. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

  The gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, like the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, has a probability changing rush rate of 100% when it is a big hit with a special symbol. Machine.

  First, in the sixth embodiment, the determination of success or failure of special symbols, the determination of stop symbols, and the determination of variation patterns will be described.

  Here, FIG. 75 is a view schematically showing the special symbol odds lottery table in the sixth embodiment, (A) is referred to in a normal state (low probability state), (B) is a probability variation state (high probability) State) is referenced. In this special symbol qualification lottery table, random symbol values for special symbols, big hit, small hit, judgment result of out are associated, and according to the associated random number range, the winning probability of big hit and small hit Is determined. As can be understood from FIG. 75, in the success or failure lottery of the special symbol game, in the normal state (low probability state), it becomes a big hit only when the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 217”. On the other hand, the jackpot range is expanded in the probability variation state (high probability state), and not only when the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 217”, but also when it falls within the range of “218 to 2170” Become. That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the lottery probability of the big hit is varied from the low probability state (about 1/300) to the high probability state (about 1/30). As described above, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big hit is equal between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Here, even if the random value per special symbol does not fall within the range of the big hit, it will be a small hit if it falls within the predetermined range. In this example, small hits only exist in the first special symbol winning lottery, but for example, small hits are also provided in the second special symbol losing lottery, and from the second special symbol losing lottery Also, the first special symbol may be configured to be a small hit with a higher probability of success or failure lottery.

  Subsequently, the upper part of FIG. 76 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the sixth embodiment. This first special symbol per symbol table, for a special symbol per symbol random number, stop symbol, symbol group, contents of big hit (number of operations of probability variation function of special symbol and variation time shortening function, the first big prize The operation patterns of the mouth 64 are respectively associated. In this table, stop symbols "1" to "6" of the first special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups A to C according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, symbol group A (16R specific short main symbol symbol) is for symbol "1" and "2", and symbol group B (8R specific short symbol symbol) is for symbol "3" and "4". The symbol group C (2R specified short-term symbol symbols) is associated with the symbols "5" and "6", respectively.

  Subsequently, the lower part of FIG. 76 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the sixth embodiment. This second special symbol per symbol table, for a special symbol per symbol symbol random number, stop symbol, symbol group, contents of big hit (number of operations of probability variation function and variation time shortening function of special symbol, second big prize The operation patterns of the ports 65 are associated with one another. In this table, the stop symbols "11" to "16" of the second special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups D and E according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, the symbol group D (16R specific short-time fixed symbol symbol) is attached to the symbols "11", "12" and "13", and the symbol group E is attached to the symbols "14", "15" and "16". (8R specific short-term discount symbols) are associated with each other.

  In the sixth embodiment, as described above, three types of jackpot types, 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot and 2R jackpot, are provided. And, the expectation value (winning ball winning expectation value) of winning ball winning in the special game is 16R big hit> 8R big hit> 2R big hit. As described above, also in this example, the 16R jackpot is also referred to as the "high profit jackpot" having the highest expected prize ball acquisition value, and the 2R jackpot is also referred to as the "low profit jackpot" having the lowest prize ball acquisition expectation value.

  Subsequently, FIG. 77 is a view schematically showing a fluctuation pattern table in the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 77, among the variation pattern tables of a plurality of types, only the probability variation variation pattern table to be referred to when the gaming state is the probability variation status (when the variation pattern selection status is the high probability shortening variation status β) is illustrated There is. In this example, for convenience, each variation pattern table is made common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but in particular, the second referred to when the gaming state is a definite variation state of this table It is desirable to make it a fluctuation pattern table according to a special symbol (in that case, there is no setting of a small hit). In that case, different fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the same special symbol fluctuation pattern random number is acquired by making the respective fluctuation pattern tables different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Configured Moreover, in each figure, although the "selectivity" is described for convenience of explanation, the judgment value (range of random number values) for determining a fluctuation pattern according to a special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value in fact Is set, and the variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation pattern random value belongs to.

  First, FIG. 77A shows a probability variation change pattern table for big hit / small hit in the sixth embodiment. As described above, the present table is a fluctuation pattern table which is selected when the gaming state is a definite change state (when the change pattern selection state is a high probability shortening change state β). In this big hit / small hit probability change variation pattern table, various variation patterns are assigned according to the type of big hit / small hit. Specifically, if the jackpot type is 16R big hit or 8R big hit, the variation pattern PX4 (super reach) is selected. Also, when the big hit type is 2R big hit, the variation pattern PX3 (normal reach) is selected. Also, in the case of the small hit, the fluctuation pattern PX3 (normal reach) is selected as in the case of the 2R large hit. As described above, when the result of the determination of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the variation pattern of the non-reach mode is not selected, and the variation pattern of the reach mode is always selected. In this example, for convenience of explanation, the common variation pattern PX4 is selected in either of the 16R big hit and 8R big hit, but it is not limited to this, for example, it is 16R big hit In the case of fluctuation pattern PX1-1, 8R, it is assumed that fluctuation pattern PX1-2 is selected, and fluctuation time is different from each other, or even if fluctuation time is the same, it is different on the production control substrate 200 side A variation presentation pattern may be selected.

  FIG. 77B, on the other hand, shows a probable change pattern table for removal in the sixth embodiment. Specifically, if the result of the lottery is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH1 (non reach: shortening fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PH2 (non reach: normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PH3 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PH4 (super reach) One of them is selected.

  Subsequently, FIG. 78 is a view schematically showing an example of a variation effect pattern table in the sixth embodiment. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the fluctuation presentation pattern table of the super reach type is shown, and the fluctuation presentation pattern table of the non-reach type and the normal reach type is omitted. In the variation presentation pattern table in this example, random number values are assigned to the variation pattern of the big hit variation pattern and the deviation pattern so that any of a plurality of types of super reach presentation can be selected. Specifically, various super reach effects are associated with the fluctuation patterns PX4 and PH4. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, although "selectivity" is indicated, in actuality, a judgment value (range of random number values) for determining a fluctuation effect pattern according to a fluctuation effect pattern random number value Is set, and the variation presentation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation presentation pattern random value belongs to.

  Here, the super reach effect in this example will be described. Each super reach effect is configured as a battle effect effect in which the player-side ally character plays against the enemy character X (X1, X2, X3, X4, X5) in the probability variation effect mode β. The battle-based effect is an effect that suggests or notifies the determination of the big hit (that is, the determination of the continuous state) in the variation by the victory of the allied character. If the ally character can not win the enemy character during the duration of the ST period, that is, until the end of the definite change state, the jackpot can not be obtained, and the gaming state returns from the definite change state to the normal state. Specifically, when each super reach effect is started, one of the plurality of enemy characters X1, X2, X3, X4, and X5 appears as an opponent. At this time, enemy character X1 for super reach effect 1, enemy character X2 for super reach effect 2, enemy character X3 for super reach effect 3, enemy character X4 for super reach effect 4 and enemy for super reach effect 5 Character X5 appears. The strength of the enemy character is in the order of "enemy character X1"> "enemy character X2"> "enemy character X3"> "enemy character X4"> "enemy character X5". Therefore, when the strongest enemy character X1 among the plurality of enemy characters appears, the possibility that the ally character will be defeated is high, and the jackpot expectation becomes low. On the other hand, when the weakest enemy character X5 among the plurality of enemy characters appears, the possibility that the teammate character wins is high, and the jackpot expectation degree is high.

  As described above, the super reach effect is a variation effect pattern that is selected in the case where the success or failure lottery result is the 16R big hit, the 8R big hit or the loss. Here, with regard to the variable effect patterns PEX 41 to 45 selected in the case of the 16R big hit or the 8R big hit, while the allied character has the contents of the effect that the game is finally won in the battle, the variable effects selected in the case of the out With regard to the patterns PEH 41 to 45, the effect contents that the ally character finally loses in the battle are obtained. At this time, speaking of the relationship of each super reach production, in the case of 16R big hit or 8R big hit, selection ratio of super reach production 1, super reach production 2, super reach production 3, super reach production 4 and super reach production 5 In the case of a loss, the selection rate is higher in the order of super reach effect 5 <super reach effect 4 <super reach effect 3 <super reach effect 2 <super reach effect 1. Therefore, regarding each super reach production, in the order of "super reach production 1 <<super reach production 2 <<super reach production 3 <<super reach production 4 <<super reach production 5>, the jackpot expected degree ( Expectations for a high profit jackpot) are set to be high. That is, according to the strength of the above-mentioned enemy character, the big hit expectation degree of each super reach production is set.

  Next, the on-hold on-line consecutive-play effect in the sixth embodiment will be described. In this example, the first on-hold in-line effect (during in-line effect A) that occurs during symbol variation and the second on-off in-line effect (during on-line effect B) that occurs during special games Among them, the second on-hold in-line rowing effect (off-line in-line rowing effect B) is targeted. In addition, as mentioned above, it is premised that the gaming state when the preceding operation holding ball is hit is the specific gaming state (in the present example, at least the power Chuo support function is operating), as in the case of the holding Uchirenso. I assume. Moreover, the following operation | movement reservation ball (specific suspension) used as object of reservation inner row house is an operation reservation ball of the 2nd special symbol which arises based on the ball entering the 2nd starting opening 62. Then, whether or not the on-hold on-line consecutive effect B is executable is determined by drawing when a predetermined execution condition is established at the timing before the start of the special game. In this example, it is assumed that the preceding operation reserving ball is a high profit big hit (16R big hit), and the following operation except for the case where the specified reserving (16R big hit, 8R big hit) exists in the subsequent operation reserving ball. Even when there is no specific suspension within the suspension ball (when all are suspended), a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. Therefore, there are cases in which the on-premises in-line arrangement effect B is executed as the “true effect” in which the on-off in-line arrangement is established, and in other cases in which the on-hold in-line arrangement is not established.

  FIG. 79 shows a linked pattern effect pattern table to be referred to when selecting a linked pattern effect pattern of pending channel linked effects effect B in the sixth embodiment. A plurality of consecutive sorrow effect patterns are defined in the consecutive sorrow effect pattern table, and the content and the execution timing of the effect are determined corresponding to each continuous sorrow effect pattern. In the present example, the on-premises-in-place effect B is configured as a battle-based effect in which the player-side ally character battles against the enemy character X (X1, X2, X3, X4, X5). That is, in the present example, as for the on-premises in-line consecutive effect B, as in the above-mentioned symbol variation effect (super reach effect), a battle-based effect is adopted, and the on-off in-line consecutive effect B and the above-mentioned symbol variation effect ( Super reach effect) is configured as effect contents related to each other. Specifically, the jackpot symbol variation effect (referred to as "previous jackpot variation effect") that occurs when the previous operation hold ball (high profit jackpot specific hold) is digested, and the special game based on the jackpot The pending in-line consecutive effect B that occurs in the middle is generated as a battle-based effect in which the common enemy character is the opponent. Therefore, the rendering content of the pending in-line consecutive effect B corresponds to the rendering content (enemy character X) of the previous big hit fluctuation rendering (super reach rendering). In addition, when there is a specific hold in the following operation hold ball, the battle-related effect according to the hold inside row effect B is the effect contents (true effect) that the ally character wins, and the subsequent operation hold When there is no specific hold in the ball, the effect content (effect of the cast) in which the ally character is defeated is obtained. Therefore, the continuous play effect pattern of the pending inner running effect B is determined based on the relation between the contents of the preceding big hit fluctuation effect (enemy character X) and the presence / absence of specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball. For example, when a specific hold exists in the following operation hold ball (in the operation hold ball of the second special symbol), the continuous play effect pattern PB61 (enemy corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern PEX41 (wins against the enemy character X1) The character X1 is selected, and the continuous rendering effect pattern PB62 (the enemy character X2 is selected) corresponding to the variation effect pattern PEX42 (the enemy character X2) is selected, and the variation effect pattern PEX43 (the enemy character X3 is won). ) Is selected (corresponding to the enemy character X3), and selected corresponding to the variation effect pattern PEX44 (the enemy character X4), is selected (corresponding to the enemy character X4). , Corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern PEX45 (wins against the enemy character X5) Victory to the enemy character X5) is selected. On the other hand, when there is no specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, the continuous play effect pattern PB71 (defeat against the enemy character X1) is selected corresponding to the change effect pattern PEX41 (wins against the enemy character X1), and the change effect is generated. In response to the pattern PEX42 (win on the enemy character X2), the continuous pattern effect pattern PB72 (defeated to the enemy character X2) is selected, and in response to the variable effect pattern PEX43 (victory to the enemy character X3) continuous pattern effect pattern PB73 ( The enemy character X3 is selected to be defeated, and the continuous rendering effect pattern PB74 (to defeat the enemy character X4) is selected corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern PEX44 (winning to the enemy character X4), and the fluctuation rendering pattern PEX45 (to the enemy character X5). In response to the victory), the consecutive pattern production pattern PB75 (defeated to enemy character X5) is selected It is.

  In this way, it is possible to make the enemy character that appeared in the previous big hit fluctuation re-appearance appear again in the on-hold in-line consecutive remake effect B and configure both as a battle-based rendition that is common or related to each other. In addition, when the same enemy character is used as an opponent and wins in the battle system effect relating to the previous big hit fluctuation effect and wins again in the battle system effect relating to the on hold in tandem effect B, in the following operation pending ball That there is a specific hold on, that is, the pending inside is fixed. On the other hand, when the same enemy character is used as an opponent and wins in the battle system production related to the previous big hit fluctuation production, when it is lost in the battle system production related to the on hold on in-run effect B, Denied.

  As described above, in the super reach effect, the jackpot expectation is set in accordance with the type of the enemy character X appearing in the battle type effect. That is, the larger the opponent character X of the opponent becomes, the lower the expectation of the big hit becomes, and the smaller the enemy character X of the opponent becomes, the higher the expectation of the big hit. In order to follow this, also in the on-premises in-line effect B, according to the type of the enemy character X of the opponent, the degree of expectation of the on-off in-line is set. That is, the more the enemy character X of the opponent gets stronger, the lower the degree of expectation of the on-premises in-store becomes (the frequency of occurrence of staging effects relatively increases), and the on-coming Uchiso effects produce as the on-off opponent character X becomes weaker. The degree of expectation of B becomes high (the frequency of occurrence of the Gasse production becomes relatively low). Therefore, it can be said that the occurrence frequency of the pending internal connection effect B during the special game becomes relatively high, as the expectation of the change effect pattern is relatively low, when the big hit in the symbol change effect. That is, as the enemy character X of the opponent gets stronger, the big hit expectation of the fluctuation effect pattern becomes relatively low, but in this example, the same enemy character X is held in the on-premises inn special effect B during the special game. Since the enemy character X is to be made to appear again, the frequency of occurrence of the Gasse effect as the on-hold in-line consecutive effect B becomes relatively higher as the enemy character X of the opponent becomes stronger. On the other hand, the probability that the enemy characters X1, X2, X3, X4 and X5 appear in the symbol variation effect (the previous big hit variation effect) is set equal (the selection rate of the variation effect pattern at the time of big hit is even) Therefore, regardless of the strength of the enemy character X of the opponent, the frequency of occurrence of the real effects is the same as the on-hold in-line consecutive effects B. Therefore, the higher the generation frequency of the Gasse production, the higher the generation frequency of the on-premises consecutive production B effect (true production + Gasse production). Therefore, as the enemy character appearing in the symbol variation production becomes stronger (as the big hit expectation of the variation production pattern becomes lower), the same enemy character X reappears during the special game when the big game is hit in the symbol variation production The frequency of occurrence of on-premises in-house effect B is relatively high. Thus, it can be said that there is a trade-off relationship between the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation production and the frequency of occurrence of the on-premises in-house production B.

  In addition, as mentioned above, although the contents of the effect of the pending inner row sorrow effect B are determined with reference to the previous contents of the large hit change effect, the history of the previous big hit change effect (battle system effect) Information (referred to as “effect history information”) is temporarily stored in the effect history information storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260. The effect history information may be information that can specify at least the enemy character that has appeared in the previous big hit change effect. Then, with reference to this effect history information (the enemy character X of the previous big hit change effect effect), the enemy character X of the on-hold consecutive effect B effect is specified. During the special game, based on the effect history information, the name of the enemy character appearing in the previous big hit fluctuation effect may be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. Thus, it is possible that the enemy character appearing in the pending inner row effect B is the same as the enemy character appearing in the previous big hit variation effect, that is, there may be a pending inner row. Can be clearly taught to the player.

  Further, in this example, since the ST machine in which the probability change rush rate is 100% is adopted, the gaming state after the end of the special game always becomes the definite state, and after the end of the special game, in the subsequent operation holding ball When the specific hold (16R big hit or 8R big hit) is digested, super reach effect (battle-based effect) will be generated again as a symbol variation effect relating to the specific hold. In this example, if a predetermined execution condition is established that a specific hold exists in the subsequent operation hold ball, and a hold inside row effect B (true play) occurs during the special game, this hold is made Consecutive effect B and the symbol variation effect of big hit that occurs when the specific suspension is digested (referred to as “following big hit variation effect”) are configured as a battle-based effect with a common enemy character as an opponent Do. That is, the subsequent big hit fluctuation effect in this example is a battle type effect in which the ally character on the player's side battles against the enemy character X (the enemy character X that appeared in the on-hold consecutive effect B). Therefore, in the present example, the former big hit fluctuation rendition, the pending inner consecutive villa effect B, and the later big hit fluctuation rendition are configured as the mutually corresponding rendition contents (a battle type rendition with the same enemy character as the opponent). Be done.

  Here, FIG. 80 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the fluctuation effect pattern replacement table in the sixth embodiment. As described above, this fluctuation effect pattern replacement table generates a subsequent big hit fluctuation effect in a battle-based effect in which the enemy character common to the on-premises internal row effect B (the previous big hit fluctuation effect) is the opponent. Referring to the presentation history information, the variation presentation pattern selected using the variation presentation pattern table of FIG. 78, the variation presentation pattern (super reach presentation in which the same enemy character appears) corresponding to the pending inside consecutive story effect B Used to replace. That is, basically, the variation presentation pattern is selected by random number lottery using the variation presentation pattern of FIG. 78, but in the case of generating a subsequent big hit variation presentation, the variation presentation pattern selected above Are replaced with a change effect pattern (super reach effect) corresponding to the previous big hit change effect and on-hold in-line consecutive effect B with reference to the effect history information. Therefore, the fluctuation effect pattern related to the subsequent big hit fluctuation effect is replaced based on the effect history information (enemy character X). For example, a variation effect pattern PEX41 (winning enemy character X1) is selected corresponding to a pending internal production effect pattern PB51 (winning enemy character X1), and a pending internal production pattern PB52 (winning enemy character X2) is selected. Correspondingly, the variation production pattern PEX42 (winning enemy character X2) is selected, and the variation production pattern PEX43 (winning enemy character X3) is selected corresponding to the on-hold consecutive rendering pattern PB53 (winning enemy character X3). A variation effect pattern PEX44 (victorize the enemy character X5) is selected corresponding to the on-hold in-line effect pattern PB54 (victorize the enemy character X4). In addition, in the effect contents (super reach effect, pending inside consecutive effects effect) illustrated in this example, when the gaming state is a definite change state, a big hit concerning the second special symbol occurs, and furthermore, the second special symbol It is desirable to occur when there is a specific hold within the activation hold ball (following activation hold ball). That is, it is preferable that the effect contents of the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 78 to FIG. 80 relate to the second special symbol when the gaming state is the definite change state. In the present example, on the premise of preferential digestion for preferentially digesting the working reserving ball of the second special symbol, the above-mentioned is caused by the occurrence of big hit in the second special symbol and the specific reserving (big hit reserving) of the second special symbol. It is desirable to have a configuration in which the effect content (battle effect) is generated.

  Subsequently, the procedure of operation processing in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

(Variation effect pattern selection process: Sixth embodiment)
First, the variable performance pattern selection process (S733) according to the subroutine of S733 of FIG. 29 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the details of the fluctuation effect pattern selection process (S733).

  First, the fluctuation effect pattern random number value is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210 (S781). Next, based on the fluctuation pattern information acquired in S732 and the effect mode (further, the effect stage) set in the effect state transition processing in S632, any of the fluctuation effect patterns among the plurality of fluctuation effect pattern tables The table is acquired (S782).

Subsequently, based on the fluctuation presentation pattern random number value and the fluctuation presentation pattern table, one of the plurality of fluctuation presentation patterns is selected by lottery (S783).
The fluctuation presentation pattern constitutes a scenario of the effect display process in which the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol, the type and time of occurrence of reach effect, the type and time of occurrence of the notice effect, and the like are defined.

Next, it is determined whether or not the current symbol change effect is a big hit change effect (S784).
If it is a big hit fluctuation effect (S784: YES), it is determined whether or not the on-hold in-line consecutive effect flag is off (S785). If the pending inside consecutive effect flag is off (S785: YES), that is, if the current symbol variation effect is the previous big hit symbol variation effect, the contents of the super reach effect based on the big hit symbol variation effect (enemy The character type) is stored in the effect history information storage area (S786).

  On the other hand, if the on-hold in-line consecutive effect flag is on (S 785: NO), that is, if the current symbol change effect is a subsequent big hit symbol change effect, the effect history information is read (S 787). Next, referring to the rendering history information read in S787, the variation rendering pattern selected in S783 is replaced with a variation rendering pattern corresponding to rendering history information using the variation rendering pattern replacement table (S788). Next, the presentation history information is cleared (S 789), and the on-hold on-premises consecutive presentation flag is turned off (S 790).

  Then, the variation effect pattern number determined in S783 or S788 is temporarily stored in the variation effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S791). Further, a lamp effect number corresponding to the selected variation effect pattern number is requested, and the requested lamp effect number is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub main information storage means 260.

(Pending U-Ran Effect B Determination Process: Sixth Embodiment)
Next, a description will be given of the process of determining whether or not the on-premises internal player B is in the sixth embodiment (S805). FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive-play effect B determination process (S805) in the sixth embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the above-described embodiment is the processing of S 871, in which the rendering history information is read when selecting the rendering pattern of the rendering B of the on-hold rendering effect B. In FIG. 82, the processes of S851 to S870 are the same as the processes of the other embodiments, and therefore, the process of S871 which is the difference will be mainly described.

  First, the effect history information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 is accessed to read effect history information (S871). Then, while referring to this effect history information (content of effect of the previous big hit symbol variation effect: enemy character), using the continuous effect pattern, select a continuous effect pattern associated with the previous big hit symbol fluctuation effect ( S861). By the operation processing in the sixth embodiment, the former big hit fluctuation effect, the pending inside continuous effect effect B and the later big hit fluctuation effect are executed as a battle type effect using the same enemy character as the opponent. Become.

  As described above, according to the sixth embodiment, by configuring the former big hit fluctuation effect, the pending inner continuous row effect and the subsequent big hit fluctuation effect as the effect contents related to each other, the occurrence of the pending inner continuous ring is made to the player. In addition to being able to clearly teach against, the player is strongly impressed with the occurrence of pending Uranso (two big hits) across the front and back of the special game, and the new Uchizu is generated by the pending Uranso. The game can be played effectively, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the symbol variation effect and the on-hold on-line continuous-on effect are configured from the effect content related to each other, and the reliability of the effect according to the content is mutually maintained, the on-off on-line continuous-on It is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the occurrence of the game from being lost, and to prevent the loss of the fun of the game.

  In the sixth embodiment described above, only one super reach type is provided as the change pattern type, and when the super reach type is selected, the enemy character X (X1, X2, X3, X4, X5) is selected. Although the battle type production (super reach production) to be an opponent was generated, it is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of super reach types (for example, super reach A, B, C, ...) are provided, Even when the super reach type of is selected, a battle-based effect (super reach effect) may be generated in which the enemy character X (X1, X2, X3, X4, X5) is the opponent. Then, even when any super reach type is selected, the jackpot variation presentation and the on-premises in-house presentation B may be configured as a battle-based presentation in which the common enemy character is the opponent.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment described above, the ST machine having a probability variation rate of 100% is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the probability variation rate is set to less than 100%. When a big hit and a big hit are set) and a big hit is made with a specific symbol, it may be applied to a so-called normal machine in which the definite change state continues from the end of the special game until the next big hit occurs. Also in this normal machine, so-called battle specs are adopted, and in the case of a big hit with the second special symbol in the positive variation state (positive variation production mode β), the battle system effect (battle reach effect) is executed during the symbol variation. be able to. In the battle specs of this normal aircraft, the big hit becomes definite at the time when the battle system rendition occurs during the symbol change. That is, only when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, the variation effect pattern of the battle system effect is selected. Then, in the battle system, when the ally character wins the enemy character, the popping oddity variation big hit (for example, 16R probability variation big hit) is determined, and when the ally character loses the enemy character, the popping out no probability variation big hit (eg 2R probability variation big hit) or Debt ball no big hit (eg 2R normal big hit) is determined. That is, in the battle-based specs of the normal aircraft, the winning rate of the battle-based effect depending on the opponent (enemy character) represents the degree of expectation to the odd ball with certainty. And, even in such a normal machine, the above-mentioned big hit fluctuation production, the pending inside consecutive villa production B and the later big hit fluctuation production, the production contents which are related mutually (the battle system which makes the same enemy character an opponent) It may be configured as an effect).

Seventh Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, and in the following, the same reference numerals are given to parts having similar configurations. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

  Like the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is a gaming machine known as a so-called "ST machine", which has a probability changing rush rate of 100% when a big hit with a special symbol. Machine.

  FIG. 83 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine PM according to a seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83, in the seventh embodiment, only a single big winning opening 64 is mounted in the game area PA. The special winning opening 64 is configured as a slide opening / closing type attacker. A first winning sensor 79a and a second winning sensor 79b are provided in the inside of the special winning opening 64 as a large winning opening switch 641 for detecting entry of the game ball. In addition, above the big winning opening 64, the operation gate 63 and the second start opening 62 are disposed close to each other in the vertical direction, so long as the game ball passes through the operation gate 63 in the process of flowing down, the game The ball will flow down toward the second start opening 62, and at this time, if the ordinary electric jack 622 is in the open state, the gaming ball will enter the second start opening 62. On the other hand, the special winning opening 60 is disposed at a position where it is easy for the game ball hit to the right to enter. At this time, in this example, the gaming ball will flow toward the big winning opening 64 unless the game ball enters the operation gate 63 and the second start opening 62 in the process of flowing down the right side of the gaming area PA. If the special electric role 642 is in the open state, the gaming ball enters the big winning opening 64. Therefore, in the present example, when the special motorized part 642 is in the open state, the possibility of generating a waste ball is reduced.

  Subsequently, the special winning opening device 700 used as the special winning opening 64 in the seventh embodiment will be described. 84 to 88 show a specific configuration of the special winning opening device 700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), the special winning opening device 700 includes a front surface portion 701 and a rear surface portion 702 provided behind the front surface portion 701. Are fixed so as to be arranged at predetermined positions in the game area PA. The front surface portion 701 bears a part of the gauge configuration and design in the game area PA, and the back surface portion 702 is not shown in the drawings, but is provided for an opening for components (not shown) formed in the game board 20. It is inserted and a part is made to project on the back of the game board 20.

  The front surface portion 701 of the special winning opening device 700 is provided with a substrate portion 703, a shielding cover member 704, a ball passage forming portion 705, a horizontal shutter member 706, a falling door member 707, and the like. A shielding cover member 704 is attached to the front surface of the substrate portion 703, and most of the front surface of the substrate portion 703 is covered by the shielding cover member 704.

  The base plate portion 703 is a flat plate-like member screwed to the surface of the game board 20, and when viewed from the front of the game machine, at a predetermined portion such as the upper right corner portion, the lower left corner portion and the left interruption portion of the outer peripheral edge portion. , Screw holes 703 a to 703 c for mounting on the game board 20. The substrate unit 703 is disposed and fixed at the lower right corner of the game area PA.

  The shielding cover member 704 has a flat plate-like main body portion 704a, and the lower edge portion and the left and right side portions of the main body portion 704a are continuously formed in a U shape as shown in FIG. A partition wall portion 704 b is provided in a protruding manner. Furthermore, the shielding cover member 704 is combined and fixed to the central portion of the substrate portion 703, and can be opened upward in a strip shape between the substrate portion 703 and receive the game ball and allow it to flow downward. It forms a flow-down space. In addition, the shielding cover member 704 is made of a transparent plastic that is light transmissive, so that the inside flow-down space can be viewed from the outside (front side).

  The aforementioned ball passage forming portion 705 is constituted by a combination of a plurality of ribs of a predetermined shape as shown in FIG. 85 (a) and FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b). Protruding towards. The amount of protrusion of the ball passage forming portion 705 from the substrate portion 703 is set to be somewhat (about several millimeters) larger than the diameter of the gaming ball and to be substantially the same over the whole. Here, FIGS. 85A and 85B and FIGS. 86A and 86B show a state in which the shielding cover member 704 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), the ball passage forming part 705 forms the inflow ball guiding part 708, the first prize guiding part 709, and the second prize guiding part 710. The game ball having entered the guide portion 708 is guided along different paths according to the state of the horizontal shutter member 706 described above. That is, the inflow ball guiding section 708 constitutes a game ball passage which changes the flow direction of the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball from the right to the left as viewed from the front of the game machine. In addition, the first prize guiding portion 709 and the second prize guiding portion 710 constitute a gaming ball passage for guiding the entering gaming ball downward when the gaming ball flowing down the inflowing ball guiding portion 708 enters. ing.

  Among these, the inflow ball guiding portion 708 has a receiving portion 708a, a connecting portion 708b, and a discharging portion 708c in a horizontal row, and between the receiving portion 708a located at the right end and the connecting portion 708b located in the middle, And, between the connecting portion 708b and the discharging portion 708c located at the left end, a gap which is somewhat (about several millimeters) larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and which constitutes the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a. Intervenes. Furthermore, the receiving portion 708a is inclined at a predetermined angle from right to left at a predetermined angle, and the right end portion is curved obliquely upward to the right. The connection portion 708b is formed at a position slightly lower (several millimeters) than the left end portion of the receiving portion 708a, and linearly slopes downward from the right to the left. Further, the discharge portion 708c is formed to be continuous with the connection portion 708b with a gap, and is inclined in a straight line from the right to the left at a low level.

  A first entrance 709a between the receiving portion 708a and the connection portion 708b and a second entrance 710a between the connection portion 708b and the discharge portion 708c are provided in the horizontal shutter member 706 as a first shutter portion 706a. The normal time (when the big winning opening device 700 is not in operation) is closed as shown in FIG. 86 (a) by the second shutter portion 706b. That is, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the horizontal shutter member 706 has a main body portion 706c formed in a rectangular plate shape, and a plate-like first shutter portion spaced apart laterally at the front edge of the main body portion 706c. And a second shutter portion 706b. The sizes of the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b are set so that the vertical and horizontal dimensions are somewhat larger (about several millimeters) than the gaming ball. Furthermore, the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b are inclined low from right to left at an inclination similar to that of the receiving portion 708a, the connection portion 708b, and the discharge portion 708c.

  In addition, the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b are in corresponding positional relationships with the first ball inlet 709a and the second ball inlet 710a described above. In a normal state, the horizontal shutter member 706 is stopped at the forward position, and the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b protrude to the front of the substrate portion 703 as shown in FIG. 86 (a). The first entrance 709 a and the second entrance 710 a are closed together. In this state, the gaming balls having flowed into the receiving portion 708a of the special winning opening device 700 reach the discharging portion 708c through the first shutter portion 706a, the connecting portion 708b, and the second shutter portion 706b, and are further discharged. It is discharged toward the side of the first starting port 51 from the portion 708c. Here, the drive mechanism of the horizontal shutter member 706 will be described later.

  In addition, a deceleration portion 711 for reducing the speed of the gaming ball flowing down the inflowing ball guiding portion 708 is provided at a part in the middle of the inflowing ball guiding portion 708. The speed reducing portion 711 is configured by rib-shaped protrusions 711 a and 711 b integrally provided on the substrate portion 703 and the shielding cover member 704. The protrusions 711a of the substrate portion 703 and the protrusions 711b of the shielding cover member 704 are each two in number. It is a triangular prism facing the center of the back and forth direction). Furthermore, the upper ends of the protrusions 711a and 711b are inclined surfaces that become lower toward the front.

  The two protrusions 711a of the substrate portion 703 are separated in the right and left at a predetermined distance slightly (several millimeters) larger than the diameter of the gaming ball at a portion immediately above the connection portion 708b. The positional relationship between such two protrusions is the same for the two protrusions 711 b of the shielding cover member 704. Further, regarding the positional relationship between the protrusion 711a of the substrate portion 703 and the protrusion 711b of the shielding cover member 704, both protrusions 711a and 711b sandwich the upper space of the connection portion 708b, and the flow direction of the gaming ball (game It is set in a state of being shifted by a predetermined amount (about the radius of the game ball) in the substantially horizontal direction of the machine. Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the upstream one of the two projections 711 a of the substrate portion 703 is the first one of the two of the two projections 711 b of the shielding cover member 704 as compared to the first. It is located on the side close to the ball entrance 709a.

  By providing such a deceleration portion 711, the gaming balls flowing down the inflowing ball guiding portion 708 are decelerated by interfering with at least one of the four projections 711a and 711b. Then, the gaming ball travels to the downstream side of the connection portion 708b in a state in which the speed is reduced compared to the time of inflow to the inflow ball guiding portion 708 and the time of reaching the decelerating portion 711.

  The first prize guiding portion 709 and the second prize guiding portion 710 described above are the first ball entry port 709 a and the second ball exit 709 a during the non-normal time (when the big prize mouth device 700 is activated) when the big prize mouth device 700 operates. With the opening of the entrance 710a, the gaming ball can enter. That is, when the normal operation is performed, the horizontal shutter member 706 is lowered to the retracted position, and the first shutter portion 706 a and the second shutter portion 706 b are retracted toward the rear of the substrate portion 703. Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the first ball entry port 709a and the second ball entry port 710a are exposed, and the inflow ball guiding section 708, the first prize guiding section 709 and the second prize guiding section 710. And communicate with each other.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the special winning opening device 700 is operated by winning the lottery for operating the special winning opening device 700, and the special game or the small hit according to this winning It is a case where a game is performed. In addition, opening of the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a by the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b is performed during a round of a special game or the like, and a plurality of rounds are repeated. At (round interval), the first ball entrance 709a and the second ball entrance 710a are closed by the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b.

  The first winning guide unit 709 and the second winning guide unit 710 are a first detection ball guide unit 709b, a first discharge ball guide unit 709c, a second detection ball guide unit 710b, and a second discharge ball guide unit 710c. Have. Also, the part between the first detection ball guiding portion 709b and the first ejection ball guiding portion 709c and the portion between the second detection ball guiding portion 710b and the second ejection ball guiding portion 710c A first winning sensor 79a and a second winning sensor 79b as the mouth switch 641 are disposed. These winning sensors 79a and 79b are proximity sensors, and various types of micro switches and the like can be used as the proximity sensors. Furthermore, as the micro switch, various types such as contact type, non-contact type, mechanical type, optical type, electromagnetic induction type, etc. can be adopted.

  Each prize sensor 79a, 79b has a rectangular casing 712a, 712b having a thickness smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, and a detection hole 713a, 713b for passing the gaming ball in the thickness direction. Furthermore, each winning sensor 79a, 79b, through the detection holes 713a, 713b, the first detection ball guide portion 709b and the first discharge ball guide portion 709c, and the second detection ball guide portion 710b and the second discharge ball guide The portion 710c is in communication so that the game ball can flow down. In addition, the winning sensors 79a and 79b are mounted on the first winning guide 709 and the second winning guide 710 with the longitudinal directions different from each other by approximately 90 degrees. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 (a) etc., the first winning sensor 79a is oriented in the left-right direction on the front side of the substrate 703, and the first winning sensor 79b is in the longitudinal direction. , And the substrate portion 703 is directed in the front-rear direction.

  In the present embodiment, the first detection ball guiding portion 709b is bent halfway from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front, and the gaming ball which has dropped to the first detection ball guiding portion 709b is First, it interferes with the inner wall of the detection ball guide portion 709b, is decelerated, and then passes through the first winning sensor 79b. Further, in the present embodiment, a rib 709d having a predetermined amount of projection (for example, 1 mm or less) is provided along the shape of the first detection ball guide portion 709b at the center of the inner wall behind the first detection ball guide portion 709b. It is done. And, by this rib 709d, prevention of ball biting and the like in the first detection ball guiding portion 709b is achieved. Not only the first detection ball guide portion 709b but also the second detection ball guide portion 710b may be formed in a bent shape or a rib may be protruded on the inner wall.

  Further, in a situation where the horizontal shutter member 706 is retracted and the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a are opened, the gaming ball flowing down the inflowing ball guiding portion 708 is the first entering on the upstream side. The ball enters the ball mouth 709 a, is detected by the first prize sensor 79 a, and is discharged from the first prize guiding portion 709. However, it is also conceivable that some game balls jump over the first entrance 709a and reach the second entrance 710a located downstream from the connection portion 708b. In such a case, the gaming ball that has reached the second entrance 710a enters the second prize guiding unit 710, is detected by the second prize sensor 79b, and is discharged from the second prize guiding unit 710. As described above, since the decelerating portion 711 is provided between the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a, the gaming ball that has not entered the first entrance 709a temporarily Even if there is, the momentum of the gaming ball is sufficiently weakened by the deceleration portion 711 in front of the second entrance 710a.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the shielding cover member 704 is transparent as described above, the game in which the inflowing ball guiding portion 708, the first prize guiding portion 709, and the second prize guiding portion 710 flow down as described above. The state of the ball is visible to the player through the shielding cover member 704.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and (b) and FIG. 87 etc., the above-mentioned falling door member 707 has a flat door portion 707a, and the first winning guide portion 709 and the second winning guide portion 709 are formed. It is disposed below the prize guiding section 710. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, this falling door member 707 is in a positional relationship corresponding to the gaming ball collection port 714 which is opened in a rectangular shape in the substrate portion 703. The falling door member 707 is pivotally supported so as to be able to rotate in the front-rear direction about the lower edge, and as shown in FIGS. 85 (a), (b) and 86 (a) under normal conditions. , The game ball collection port 714 is closed. As shown in FIG. 85A, the length (opening dimension) of the gaming ball collection port 714 in the left-right direction is discharged from a portion inside the right end (upstream end) of the receiving portion 708a in the inflowing ball guiding portion 708 The length reaches the right end (upstream end) of the portion 708c. Further, the length in the left-right direction of the falling door member 707 is also about the same as the opening size of the gaming ball collection port 714.

  When the big winning opening device 700 is activated, the falling door member 707 is inclined so that the lower edge portion is a base end and the upper edge portion is projected forward of the substrate portion 703 as shown in FIG. 86 (b). Do. The falling door member 707 opens to face the upper first prize guiding portion 709 and the second prize guiding portion 710, and receives the game balls discharged from the first prize guiding portion 709 and the second prize guiding portion 710. Then, it is guided to the collection passage 716a at the rear of the substrate unit 703. Then, the gaming ball having entered the collection passage 716a is guided along the inclined surface which becomes lower from right to left, is guided to the collection hole 716b opened at the left end, and is directed toward the back side of the game board 30 from the collection hole 716b. Be done.

  In this embodiment, no sensors for detecting gaming balls are provided inside the recovery holes 716b, and at least counting in the vicinity of the gaming board 20 is performed on the gaming balls that have entered the gaming ball recovery port 714. It is supposed not to be. Therefore, when the game ball collection port 714 opened and closed by the falling door member 707 is opened, the game ball detected by the first prize guiding portion 709 or the second prize guiding portion 710 is the above-mentioned out-port. It performs the same function as the ball discharge function. In addition, the state of the operation of the falling door member 707 and the state of the gaming ball collection port 714 in the opened state can be visually recognized by the player through the transparent shielding cover member 704. Furthermore, a space between the falling door member 707 and the ball passage forming portion 705 is covered by a shielding cover member 704 as a cover member, and to the game ball collection port 714, a first prize guiding portion 709 and a second prize guiding Only the game ball released from the part 710 can enter.

  Further, unlike the horizontal shutter member 706, the folding door member 707 is continuously open during operation of the special winning opening device 700. And, even when a plurality of rounds are repeated, the collapsing door member 707 continues to be open from the start of the first round to the end of the last round. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the folding door member 707 is opened and the horizontal shutter member 706 is closed at a predetermined time (for example, one second) before the timing at which the horizontal shutter member 706 is opened. The falling door member 707 is closed at a timing later than a predetermined time (for example, one second).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and (b) and FIGS. 86 (a) and (b), a game ball passage port 715 is formed in the upper right portion of the substrate unit 703. The game ball passage port 715 is located below the receiving portion 708 a and is separated from the inflow ball guiding portion 708 by the ball passage forming portion 705. Furthermore, it is possible to enter the gaming ball into the above-mentioned flowing space from the right side of the shielding cover member 704, and the gaming ball having flowed into the big winning opening device 700 below the inflowing ball guiding portion 708 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 88 and the like, it is guided rearward along a shielding cover side guiding ridge 704 c formed on the shielding cover member 704 and a substrate side guiding ridge 703 d formed on the substrate portion 703.

  Next, the above-described back surface portion 702 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like, the back surface portion 702 is configured of a shutter drive unit 721, a passage configuration unit 722, and a falling door member drive unit 723. The shutter drive unit 721 is for advancing and retracting the horizontal shutter member 706 described above, and the support frame portion 721a which opens the top and encloses the front, rear, left and right, the solenoid portion 724 (see FIG. 88), the link arm member 725 And so on.

  A link arm member 725 is connected to the solenoid portion 724 via a rack and pinion mechanism (not shown), and the above-mentioned horizontal shutter member 706 is loosely connected to the link arm member 725 via a slide hole 725a. Is linked to The solenoid section 724 is normally turned off when the special winning opening device 700 is not in operation, and as shown by the solid line in FIG. Member 706 is advanced. Also, during the non-normal time when the special winning opening device 700 is in operation, the solenoid portion 724 is turned on, and the link arm member 725 is rotated rearward as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. , The horizontal shutter member 706 is retracted. That is, with the turning on and off of the solenoid portion 724, the link arm member 725 swings back and forth, and the horizontal shutter member 706 linearly advances or retracts. The advancing and retreating of the horizontal shutter member 706 is guided by the base plate portion 703, the support frame portion 721a, and a passage forming unit 722 which will be described later.

  In the passage forming unit 722, the above-mentioned ball passage forming portion 705 is formed on the front surface of the support frame portion 722a which opens the upper side and encloses the front, rear, left and right. Furthermore, the shutter drive unit 721 is mounted on the passage configuration unit 722, and the passage configuration unit 722 supports the shutter drive unit 721 from below.

  The falling door member drive unit 723 opens the above-mentioned game ball collection port 714 in the front of the rectangular box-like housing portion 723a, and the left and right lower end portions of the falling door member 707 It has a door support 726 rotatably connected. Furthermore, although not shown, the falling door member drive unit 723 has a solenoid for opening and closing the falling door member 707, a spring for biasing the closing door member 707, and the like in the housing portion 723a. ing. Further, a passage forming unit 722 is mounted on the falling door member driving unit 723, and the falling door member driving unit 723 supports the passage forming unit 722 from below.

  Here, in the special winning opening device 700, as shown in FIG. 85, a first connector 727 for electrically connecting to the main control substrate 100 via various relay substrates, and a passage for the falling door member drive unit 723 and the passage And a second connector 728 for making electrical connection with the configuration unit 722. The power supply to various electric devices, the output of signals from the winning sensors 79a and 79b, and the supply of control signals to various solenoids are performed using the first connector 727 and the second connector 728. .

  In such a big winning opening device 700, a first entry ball opening 709a (upstream opening) and a second entry ball opening 710a (downstream opening) which are upward winning prize openings by a shutter type mechanism using the horizontal shutter member 706. Opening and closing) is being done simultaneously. Therefore, size reduction in the height direction is facilitated as compared with the type in which the large winning opening in the front direction is opened and closed by the falling door type mechanism. And, the space made by the miniaturization can be used to increase the freedom of the shape and mechanism design of the big winning opening device 700, and the arrangement of other parts and game nails around the big winning opening device 700, etc. Also, the degree of freedom in design can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the inflow ball guiding portion 708, the first ball entrance 709a is located upstream of the second ball entrance 710a, and the gaming balls flowing into the inflow ball guiding portion 708 always have the first ball entrance 709a. It is supposed to pass. Therefore, it is possible to use only the first ball entrance 709a as a large winning opening of the pachinko gaming machine PM. In addition, the vertical and horizontal opening dimensions of the first ball entry port 709a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the large winning is achieved compared to the conventional type in which the large winning opening is secured in a wide band. The mouth has been shrunk. Therefore, in order to secure the function of detecting the game ball which has entered with opening, which is the minimum function of the special winning opening device 700, it is possible to miniaturize also in the left and right direction. The degree of freedom in the design of the mouth device 700 can be increased.

  In addition, since the second entrance 710a is provided downstream of the first entrance 709a, even if a game ball jumped over the first entrance 709a is generated, the second entrance 710a is reserved. It can be used as a special big prize mouth. And, at the time of operation of big winning a prize mouth device 700, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the game sphere which falls off from big winning a prize mouth device 700, it is possible to end count of the game sphere of specified number (here ten) game balls quickly. Furthermore, since the large winning opening is formed in the inflow ball guiding portion 708 by combining the first ball inlet 709a and the second ball inlet 710a, securing of the opening width of the big winning hole is easy, and the efficiency is improved. You can often let the game ball flow down and drain it.

  Furthermore, the deceleration portion 711 is provided between the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a, and the gaming balls flowing down the inflowing ball guiding portion 708 interfere with the protrusions 711a and 711b in the deceleration portion 711. It is supposed to Therefore, the speed reduction portion 711 can weaken the momentum of the gaming ball heading for the second entrance 710a. And, it is possible to make the game ball which has passed without entering the first entrance 709a enter the second entrance 710a more reliably.

  In particular, in the part on the right side of the game area PA, a space is occupied by the center decoration 22 and placement of nails etc. is difficult, and a part where nails etc. are sufficiently disposed (for example, the site on the left side of the game area PA) Compared to, the speed of the game ball flowing down tends to be faster. The behavior of the gaming ball entering the special winning opening device 700 is also difficult to stabilize, which may cause chattering in the winning sensors 79a and 79b and damage to the winning sensors 79a and 79b. However, as in the present embodiment, the receiving portion 708a of the inflow ball guiding portion 708 is curved to change the flowing direction of the gaming ball from the vertical direction to the left or right direction, or the decelerating portion 711 is provided in the inflow ball guiding portion 708 By doing this, it is possible to sufficiently reduce the force of the gaming ball heading to the first ball entry port 709a and the second ball entry port 710a. In addition, the deceleration part 711 may be provided in the front of the 1st ball entrance 709a, and the game ball heading to the 1st ball entrance 709a may be decelerated.

  In addition, performing deceleration of the gaming ball by the deceleration unit 711 leads to prolonging the time during which the gaming ball is present on the inflowing ball guiding unit 708. Therefore, the possibility of generating more winnings than the specified number (10 in this case) of one round in the special winning opening device 700 is increased, and from such a point of view, so-called over winnings and over winnings are likely to occur. Can be considered.

  Furthermore, while using the horizontal shutter member 706, the 1st ball entrance 709a and the 2nd ball entrance 710a which are big prize mouths are reduced as compared with the former as mentioned above. Therefore, with respect to the horizontal shutter member 706 and the guide portion (not shown) of the horizontal shutter member 706, design conditions such as posture maintenance and friction can be alleviated, and smooth operation of the horizontal shutter member 606 can be easily ensured. become able to.

  That is, in the case of the large winning opening device of the type in which the door is raised or lowered as in the prior art, the large winning opening faces the front and opens, so the thickness (dimension in the vertical direction) of the large winning device Become. In addition, in order to rotate the plate-like door around the lower edge, the solenoid used as a drive source has a relatively large output that can generate a moment sufficient to move the door. Is required. Furthermore, depending on the elastic force of the spring used to return the door, the door may not close or open unexpectedly due to the weight of the game ball, so care must be taken in selecting the spring. .

  Also, in the case of a large winning opening of the type that moves the shutter back and forth, if the opening (large winning opening) opened and closed by the slide of the shutter as in the prior art is large, the effects of various elements such as friction, wear and dirt In some cases, the shutter may not close. Furthermore, if an equal force is not applied to the shutter, the shutter may tilt, which may cause the shutter not to operate smoothly.

  However, as with the large winning opening device 700 in the present embodiment, using the horizontal shutter member 706 and guiding all the game balls to the first ball entrance 709a (and the second ball entrance 710a) enables a big winning game. It is possible to reduce the size of the mouth and to miniaturize the shutters (in this case, the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b) for closing the special winning opening. Then, there is no restriction that the overall shape and size of the horizontal shutter member 706 have to be determined in accordance with the shape and size of the big winning opening, and the weight reduction of the horizontal shutter member 706 and the shape of the main portion 706c Can be liberalized. And, by liberalizing the shape and size of the main body portion 706c of the horizontal shutter member 706, it is possible to design so as to suppress the influence of various elements such as friction, wear and dirt. In addition, it is possible to ease the design requirement even with respect to the equalizing of the force applied to the main body portion 706c and the inclination, and the design relating to the shutter mechanism becomes easy. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles related to the opening and closing of the special winning opening.

  In addition, since the second ball entry port 710a is provided, it is possible to win the game balls having flowed into the inflowing ball guiding portion 708 across the rounds when the special winning opening device 700 is activated. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow ball guiding portion 708 just before the end of a certain round is the case where the first ball entrance 709a is closed and can not play the ball into the first ball entrance 709a. Also, the next round is started after a predetermined period (round interval) between rounds, and when the horizontal shutter member 706 recedes, the gaming ball is the first ball entrance 709a and the second ball entrance 710a. If it remains in the part between the two, it is possible to guide the game ball to the second prize guiding section 710 via the second entrance 710a to generate a prize. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the decelerating portion 711 is provided on the upstream side of the second entrance 710a, the decelerating portion 711 enters the ball into the second entrance 710a across such a round. Can increase the possibility of Here, the round interval may be, for example, a period of less than one second.

  In addition, the open period of the falling door member 707 spans the period from the start of the first round to the end of the last round, and while the horizontal shutter member 706 performs the advancing and retracting operation according to the number of rounds, the falling door member 707 continues opening. That is, the falling door member 707 continues opening across the rounds when the special winning opening device 700 is activated. Furthermore, the folding door member 707 opens before the horizontal shutter member 706 and closes behind the horizontal shutter member 706. Therefore, it is possible to guide the gaming balls released from the first prize guiding portion 709 and the second prize guiding portion 710 into the gaming ball collection port 714 without taking over. In addition, the opening operation of the falling door member 707 can quickly notify that the special winning opening device 700 has been activated.

  Furthermore, since the decelerating portion 711 is provided in the inflow ball guiding portion 708, the speed of the gaming ball heading from the first ball entrance 709a to the second ball entrance 710a can be reduced. Therefore, the game ball having passed the first ball entrance 709a can be more reliably entered into the second ball entrance 710a. Furthermore, at the end of the above-mentioned round, the first ball entry 709a is closed and the game ball which can not enter the ball is the round interval until the next 1st ball entry 709a and the second ball entry 710a are opened. Then, it becomes possible to enter the second ball entrance 710a.

  In this example, the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a of the special winning opening device 700 are opened and closed by the horizontal shutter member 706 integrally provided with the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the first shutter 706 a and the second shutter 706 b may be separately driven, and the first entrance 709 a and the second entrance 710 a may be time-delayed. It may be opened and closed with In such a case, it is possible to illustrate an operation mode in which the opening of the second entrance 710a is started during the opening of the first entrance 709a or after the closing of the first entrance 709a.

  Subsequently, an operation pattern of the special winning opening 64 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the above-described first embodiment, in the 16R special game, only the long open round game (referred to as "long open round game") corresponding to the number of rounds is executed, and in the 2R special game, it corresponds to the number of rounds In the seventh embodiment, a configuration in which only short open round games (referred to as “short open round games”) are executed is illustrated, but in this seventh embodiment, multiple round games in the 16R special game (one special game) In, the long open round game and the short open round game are mixed. Therefore, depending on the type of the 16R jackpot, the actual number of payouts that the player can acquire varies.

  First, the upper part of FIG. 89 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the seventh embodiment. In the first special symbol per symbol table, the stop symbols "1" to "8" of the first special symbol are classified into four types of symbol groups A to D according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, symbol group A (16R specific short symbol symbol 1) is for symbol "1" and "2", symbol group B (16R specific symbol short symbol 2 for symbol "3" and "4" ) But symbol group C (16R specific short symbol symbol 3) for symbol "5" and "6", symbol group D (16R specific symbol short symbol symbol 4) for symbol "7" and "8" , Are associated with each other. In addition, as the operation pattern of the special winning opening 64, 16R opening pattern 1 is for symbol group A (16R specified symbol short symbol symbol 1) and 16R opening pattern 2 is for symbol group B (16R specified symbol short symbol symbol 2). The group R (16R specific short main symbol 3) is associated with the 16R open pattern 3, and the symbol group D (16R specific short main symbol 4) is associated with the 16R open pattern 4.

  Next, the lower part of FIG. 89 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the seventh embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, the stop symbols "11" to "18" of the second special symbol are classified into four types of symbol groups E to H according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, symbol group E (16R specific short symbol symbol 1) is for symbol "11" and "12", and symbol group F (16R specific symbol short symbol 2 for symbol "13" and "14" The symbol group G (16R specific short-time symbol symbol 3) is for the symbols "15" and "16", while the symbol group H (16R specific time symbol symbol 4) is for the symbols "17" and "18" , Are associated with each other. In addition, as the operation pattern of the special winning opening 64, 16R opening pattern 1 is for symbol group E (16R specified symbol short symbol symbol 1), and 16R open pattern 2 is for symbol symbol F (16R specific symbol short symbol symbol 2). The group G (16R specific short main symbol 3) is associated with the 16R open pattern 3, and the symbol group H (16R specific short main symbol 4) is associated with the 16R open pattern 4.

  Subsequently, FIG. 90 is a time chart for describing an operation pattern of the special winning opening 64 in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, 16R open pattern 1, 16R open pattern 2, 16R open pattern 3 and 16R open pattern 4 are provided as operation patterns of the big winning opening 64. In addition, the operation pattern shown in FIG. 90 conceptually shows the execution state of the long open round game L and the short open round game S, and the long open round game L, the short open round game S, and the special winning opening 64. The length and ratio of each time width of the interval period (waiting period) in which the closed state of the is maintained does not correspond to the actual length and ratio of time width. Here, "long open round game L" is a unit of a mode in which the big winning opening 64 is opened for only 30 seconds and then closed, or closed with a prescribed number (10 balls) of ball even if it is less than 30 seconds. It is a game. Similarly, "short opening round game S" means that the big winning opening 64 is opened for only 0.2 seconds and then closed, or even if it is less than 0.2 seconds closed with a specified number (10 balls) of balls It is a unit game of the aspect to which As described above, in this example, the long opening round game is a unit game that can expect a predetermined number (maximum number of balls) to enter during the opening period (30 seconds) of the big winning opening 64, while the short opening round game Is a unit game in which entry of the game ball is practically difficult during the opening period (0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening 64.

  First, FIG. 90A shows the 16R open pattern 1. The 16R opening pattern 1 is an operation pattern in which the long opening round game L is executed 16 times. When this 16R opening pattern 1 is activated, basically, any long opening round game L is capable of entering a specified number (10 balls), and the player gains 16 rounds of profits. I can expect it.

  FIG. 90 (B) shows the 16R open pattern 2. The 16R opening pattern 2 is an operation pattern in which the short opening round game S is executed eight times after the long opening round game L is executed eight times. When this 16R opening pattern 2 is activated, it is possible to enter a specified number (10 balls) in any long opening unit game L, while the large winning opening 64 in any short opening unit game S The player can not expect to enter the ball, and the profit substantially obtained by the player is equivalent to eight rounds.

  FIG. 90 (C) shows the 16R open pattern 3. The 16R opening pattern 3 is an operation pattern in which the short opening round game S is executed eight times after the long opening round game L is executed four times. When this 16R opening pattern 3 is activated, it is possible to enter a specified number (10 balls) in any long opening round game L, while the large winning opening 64 in any short opening unit game S The player can not expect to enter the ball, and the profit substantially obtained by the player is four rounds.

  FIG. 90 (D) shows the 16R open pattern 4. The 16R opening pattern 4 is an operation pattern in which the short opening unit game S is executed 16 times. When the 16R opening pattern 4 is activated, it is difficult for the player to get the balls out in any short opening round game S without entering the ball.

  Subsequently, various winning effects in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a table for describing types of winning effects according to the seventh embodiment. In this example, in the special game state, a predetermined winning effect is generated in response to the game ball entering the large winning opening 64 as a trigger. As shown in FIG. 91, the winning effects in the present example include a first normal winning effect, a second normal winning effect, an over winning effect, and a short open winning effect.

  The "first normal winning" is a game ball entering within the specified number to the large winning opening 64 in the long opening round game L, and the gaming ball is detected by the first detection sensor Say In addition, “second regular winning” is the entering of the game ball within the specified number to the big winning opening 64 in the long open round game L, and the game ball is detected by the second detection sensor. Case of

  The “over winning” is the entry of gaming balls (in this example, gaming balls after the 11th ball in this example) exceeding the specified number in the large winning opening 64 in the long open round game L, The case of being detected by either the detection sensor or the second detection sensor. As an example of this over winning, it is the big winning even if the subsequent gaming balls have not reached the big winning opening switch 641 until the 10th counting gaming ball reaches the big winning opening switch 641 in the big winning opening 64. If it is in the situation of entering the ball in the opening 64, the big winning opening 64 is closed by detecting the 10th count with the large winning opening switch 641, and even after the closing, the large winning opening switch 641 In the period in which the detection of the game ball is made effective by), it is considered that the ball has entered (that is, becomes a prize ball target) even if the big winning opening 64 is closed.

  “Short opening winning combination” means that, in the short opening round game S, entering the gaming ball into the large winning opening 64 in the short opening state where entering into the large winning opening 64 is difficult or impossible in principle. It is a sphere, and the case where it detects in either of the 1st detection sensor and the 2nd detection sensor is said.

  During execution of the long open round game L or the short open round game S, the main control board 100 (entering ball determining means 110) uses detection information from the special winning opening switch 642 (first detection sensor, second detection sensor). Based on this, various effect control commands are generated and transmitted to the effect control board 200. Specifically, during execution of one long opening round game L, until the number of ball entry to the large winning opening 64 reaches the specified number (10 balls), each time the entry of the game ball is detected If it is detection by the first detection sensor, an effect control command (referred to as “first normal prize command”) including the first normal winning information is generated, and if it is detection by the second detection sensor, the second normal winning An effect control command (referred to as a "second normal winning command") including information is generated. In addition, during the execution of one long opening unit game L, when there is a game ball entering the specified number (10 balls), even if it is detection by any of the winning sensors, including over winning information An effect control command (referred to as an "over winning command") is generated. Furthermore, during the execution of one short opening round game S, when there is a ball entry to the special winning opening 64, the effect control command including short opening winning information (“ Create a short opening winning combination command). As a modification, whether the winning command is common (including information indicating which of the first winning sensor 79a and the second winning sensor 79b has detected the winning of the gaming ball) and is over-winning It may be configured that the effect control board 200 side determines whether or not it is a prize in the long open state or the short open state.

  The presentation control board 200 (big hit presentation determining means 227) determines the contents of the winning presentation according to the type of the winning presentation command each time it receives various winning presentation commands from the main control board 100, and the winning presentation Control the execution. In the present embodiment, four types of winning effects are prepared as described above, and will be described in order below. The number of types of winning effects may be four or more. For example, the type of additional winning effects may be provided by a combination of at least two or more of the basic effect, the additional effect, and the special effect. Specifically, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the prize effects exemplified below may be included. First, when the winning of the gaming ball is detected by the second winning sensor 79b in the short opening round game S, a winning effect consisting of the basic effect and the additional effect, or a winning effect consisting of the basic effect, the additional effect and the special effect It may be generated. Further, when an over winning is detected by the second winning sensor 79 b in the long open round game L, a winning effect including a basic effect, an additional effect, and a special effect may be generated. Also, under any circumstances, the basic effect may be omitted.

  First, in the first normal winning effect, every time the first normal winning command is received from the main control board 100 during execution of the long open round game L, as a basic effect, entering the large winning opening 60 on the screen Display an image to report the number and the number of winning balls.

  Subsequently, in the second normal winning effect, every time the second normal winning command is received from the main control board 100 during execution of the long open round game L, in addition to the above basic effect, an effect is displayed as an additional effect. The character information “abduction” is displayed on the device 70.

  In this way, among the two winning sensors, the first normal winning effect and the second normal winning effect are divided according to whether or not entry to the special winning opening 64 is detected by any of the winning sensors. The reasons are as follows. That is, in a normal situation, the gaming ball that has flowed into the big winning opening 64 enters the first first ball entry port 709a on the upstream side and is detected by the first winning sensor 79a in most cases. In this case, basic effects associated with the winning of the big winning opening 64 should be generated. On the other hand, the game ball which has flown down to the vicinity of the big winning opening 64 just before the end of a certain round game does not play the ball into the first ball entrance 709a because the first ball entrance 709a is closed just before that. Even if the game is not detected by the first prize sensor 79a, the game ball is the first ball entry 709a and the second ball entry when the next round game is started after the interval period. If the game ball is left between the entrance 710b and the entrance 710b, the game ball may enter the second entrance 710b and be detected by the second prize sensor 79b. Therefore, in the big prize device 700 in this example, even if the game ball can not enter the first ball entry port 709a in a certain round game and the game ball is missed once, the game ball in the next round game Since it becomes possible to secure the winning combination by entering the second ball entry 710b, in that case, an additional effect is generated in combination with the basic effect, and a large winning opening across the front and back rounds This is because it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and a sense of satisfaction by notifying the player that the winning in 64 has occurred.

  Next, in the over prize game, every time an over prize command is received from the main control board 100 during execution of the long open round game L, “GET” as a special effect on the effect display device 70 in addition to the above basic effect While displaying the character information "!", The speaker 11 generates special sound effects.

  Further, in the short opening winning effect, every time the short opening winning command is received from the main control board 100 during execution of the short opening round game S, in addition to the above basic effect, the effect display device 70 is provided as a special effect. While displaying the character information "GET!", The speaker 11 generates special sound effects. The special effect may be only one of the display of the character information and the generation of the sound effect.

  That is, in the present modification, the over-winning effect and the short-opening winning effect are used in the same special effect. This enables both players to enter the big winnings opening 64 by intentional operation or accidental phenomenon while being originally in a situation where the possibility of entering the big winning openings 64 is originally extremely low. This is because it is common in terms of the same special effects, and it is possible to achieve uniformity as an effect, and also, it is possible to prevent wasteful consumption of the limited hardware resources of the gaming machine. It is possible to In addition, as a matter of course, the over-winning effect and the in-count winning effect may be effects of different display modes. However, when the long winning opening 64 is open, special effects are not generated by the winning within the count (even if the special effects are generated, they are not special sound effects, but effects similar to normal sound effects) . In the case of the special winning opening device 700 exemplified in the above-described embodiment, even at the time of short opening, it is easier to win as compared to the conventional door type big winning device (door type attacker). It becomes easy to carry out an open winning a prize production.

  As described above, according to the seventh embodiment, when the game ball wins the special winning opening during the execution of the special game, according to the type of round game at the time of the prize, the count number of the game ball, the type of detection sensor, etc. The effect of the special game can be enhanced by giving different variations (diversity) to the effect mode of the winning effect, and the player's satisfaction with the winning condition in a special situation The feeling can be enhanced, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the seventh embodiment described above, only four types of 16R opening patterns corresponding to the 16R special game are illustrated as the operation patterns of the big winning opening 64, but it is not limited to this and 8R special games A plurality of different operation patterns may be prepared, such as a corresponding 8R opening pattern or a 2R opening pattern corresponding to 2R special game. As an example, 1) 16R opening pattern 1: All long opening round game L, 2) 16R opening pattern 2: Up to 8R long opening round game L, the remaining 8R is short opening round game S, 3) 16R opening pattern 3: Long open round game L up to 4R 12R is short open round game S, 4) 8R open pattern 1: All long open round game L, 5) 8R open pattern 2: Long open round game L up to 4R 4R is short in 4R Opening unit game S, 6) 8R opening pattern 3: All short opening round game S, 7) 2R opening pattern: All short opening round game S, may be used. Further, in the seventh embodiment described above, the slide-type attacker has been described as an example, but other types of types such as a conventional tilt-type attacker, a bellows-type attacker capable of taking a projected state from a disc and a retracted state, etc. It may be an attacker.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine (ST machine) of the seventh embodiment, when the gaming state after the end of the special game shifts to a definite change state, that is, when it shifts to an ST period limited for a predetermined number of times, Although the variation pattern selection state is the high probability shortening fluctuation state β throughout the entire period, in the gaming machine (ST machine) of this modification, the variation pattern selection state in the ST period is the high probability shortening fluctuation state β1, high It may be configured from the probability shortening fluctuation state β2, the high probability shortening fluctuation state β3 and the like, and the fluctuation pattern selection state may be configured to be sequentially switched in a plurality of stages based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. In this ST period (for example, 100 times), the high probability shortening fluctuation state β1 is set when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 to 30 times (first ST period), and the high probability shortening fluctuation state β2 is the fluctuation of the special symbol It is set when the number of times is 31 to 90 times (second ST period), and the high probability shortening fluctuation state β3 is set when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is 91 to 100 times (third ST period). Then, the shortening variation pattern table (the variation pattern table of the special symbol) referred to during the ST period is composed of the limitation frequency table 1, the limitation frequency table 2, and the limitation frequency table 3. Specifically, when the variation pattern selection state is the high probability shortening variation state β1, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to, and when the high variation shortening state β2 is, the limited frequency table 2 is referenced, and the high probability shortening variation state In the case of γ, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to. That is, the limit frequency table 1 is referred to when the count value of the ST number is in the first step range (1 to 30 times), and the limit frequency table 2 has the count value in the second step range (31 to 90 times). When referred to, the limit frequency table 3 is referred to when the count value is in the third stage range (91 to 100 times). That is, when transitioning to the definite change state (except for the latent change) after the end of the special game, the fluctuation pattern table of the reference destination is based on the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol (ST number counter). It may be configured to be switched in the order of "limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 3".

Eighth Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and in the following, parts having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

  In the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, as in the gaming machine of the second embodiment, whether or not the game ball wins in a specific area (so-called V area) provided in the large winning opening during execution of the special game. In response, after the end of the special game, it is configured as a so-called ball check type game machine that determines whether or not the game state shifts to the probability change state. In this example, the special symbol probability variation function continues to operate until the variable symbol count of the special symbol counts from the end of the special game and reaches the predetermined final number of times (ST number) ( However, if the next big hit occurs before reaching the upper limit of ST times, the probability changing function will end once before reaching the upper limit, but after the end of the special game related to the big hit In the above, the above-mentioned probability variation function can operate with the number of STs as the upper limit), so-called ST machine (count cut probability change machine) is adopted.

  FIG. 92 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine PM of the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, only a single big winning opening 65 (a ball positive attacker having a so-called V area) is mounted in the game area PA. That is, also in the eighth embodiment, the special winning opening 65 is configured to be opened (long open or short open) in all rounds of the special game. The configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the above-described second embodiment (see FIG. 52), and thus the description thereof will not be repeated.

  In the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the general winning openings 51 to 53 are provided in the left-handed area of the gaming area PA, and the general winning opening 54 is provided in the right-handed area of the gaming area PA. The general winning openings 51 to 53 are disposed in the left hitting area which is a board surface area corresponding to the left hitting, and the game ball having flowed down the left hitting area can enter. The general winning openings 51 to 53 are provided with a general winning opening switch 511 for detecting entry of the game ball. The general winning opening switch 511 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) of the three general winning openings 51 to 53 from the viewpoint of cost reduction etc., and the game ball is inserted into any of the general winning openings 51 to 53. Spheres are also detectable. On the other hand, the general winning opening 54 is disposed in the right hitting area which is a board area corresponding to the right hitting, and a game ball which has flowed down the right hitting area can enter. The general winning opening 54 is provided with a general winning opening switch 541 for detecting entry of the game ball. In addition, entering a game ball to each general winning a prize opening 51-54 does not become the opportunity of the drawing of the special symbol or the normal symbol, but like the other winning a prize mouth (except for the operation gate 53), the opportunity of winning a winning ball It becomes. Note that, as a modification, the general winning opening 54 may be disposed upstream of the large winning opening 65, and is disposed upstream of the second start opening 62 (the ordinary electric jack 622). May be As a matter of course, the general winning opening 54 may be disposed upstream of both the special winning opening 65 and the second start opening 62 (the ordinary electric jack 622). The arrangement of these winning openings may be an arrangement of "big winning opening 65 → general winning opening 54 → second starting opening 62" in order from the upstream, and "second starting opening 62 → ordinary winning opening 54" in order from the upstream. → It may be an array of "big winning opening 65".

  In the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, the first starting opening 61 and the second starting opening 62 are “3” as the number of winning balls (the number of unit winning balls) to be paid out when one playing ball enters each winning opening. The general winning openings 51 to 54 are set to “five”, and the large winning opening 65 is set to “10”. The number of unit winning balls is not limited to the one exemplified in the eighth embodiment, and another number of unit winning balls may be applied. For example, as the unit winning balls, the first starting opening 61 may be “four”, the second starting opening 62 may be “one”, and the general winning openings 51 to 54 may be “three”. Also, as the unit winning balls number, the general winning openings 51 to 53 in the left hitting area are “five”, the general winning openings 54 in the right hitting area are “three”, etc. The unit winning number may be different depending on the situation.

  Similar to the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment adopts so-called preferential digestion in which the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the variation display of the first special symbol. There is. Therefore, it is configured to preferentially digest the operation retaining ball of the second special symbol while the operation retaining ball of the second special symbol is present, regardless of the presence of the operation retaining ball of the first special symbol. .

  Next, the basic configuration of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described in order.

  First, the success or failure judgment (big hit lottery) of the special symbol in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a schematic view showing a special symbol odds lottery table. In the figure, (A) is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state), and (B) is referred to when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state). In this special symbol qualification lottery table, the random number per special symbol and the result of the qualification judgment (big hit, loss) are associated, and the lottery probability (big hit probability) of the big hit according to the associated random number range It is prescribed. As can be understood from FIG. 94, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state), when the random value per special symbol falls within the range of “0 to 689”, the result of the acceptance determination is the big hit. Therefore, the jackpot probability when the gaming state is the normal state is about 1/95. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state), when the symbol random number value per special symbol corresponds to "0 to 6553", the result of the judgment of winning is a big hit. Therefore, the jackpot probability when the gaming state is a definite change state is about 1/10. That is, when the special symbol probability fluctuation function is activated, the jackpot probability changes from the low probability (about 1/95) to the high probability (about 1/10).

  Subsequently, the big hit type (big hit breakdown) in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing a big hit breakdown in the special symbol lottery in the thirteenth embodiment.

  FIG. 94 (A) is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the thirteenth embodiment. In the first special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group and a big hit type are associated with a special symbol per symbol random number value (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol per symbol table, there are five kinds of symbol groups (big hit type), symbol group A (16R condition specified big hit with symbol), symbol group B (6R condition with normal hit) 1, symbol group C (6R condition with The normal big hit 2), the symbol group D (5R condition with normal big hit 1), and the symbol group E (5R condition with normal big hit 2) are set. Here, among the plural types of big hit types, “16R conditional specified big hit” corresponds to “long open big hit” as the big hit attribute in the fifth embodiment, “6R condition usually big hit 1”, “6R condition The normal large hit 2 "," 5R conditional normal large hit 1 ", and" 5R conditional normal large hit 2 "correspond to the" short open jackpot "in the fifth embodiment. In the drawing, for reference, the actual number of rounds of special games pertaining to each jackpot type is appended.

  FIG. 94 (B) is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the eighth embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group and a big hit type are associated with a special symbol per symbol random number value (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol per symbol table, symbol group F (16R condition specific big hit), symbol group G (12R condition specific big hit), symbol group H (8R condition specific) as five kinds of symbol group (big hit type) Big hit), symbol group I (4R conditional specified big hit), symbol group J (2R conditional specified big hit) are set. Here, as a plurality of big hit types, “16R conditional specific big hit”, “12R conditional specific big hit”, “8R conditional specific big hit”, “4R conditional specific big hit”, “2R conditional specific big hit” are This corresponds to “long open jackpot” in the fifth embodiment. In the drawing, for reference, the actual number of rounds of special games pertaining to each jackpot type is appended.

  The above-mentioned big hit classification is divided roughly into "conditional specific big hit" and "conditionally normal big hit" as a big hit attribute. "Conditional specific big hit" is easy to enter the game ball to the specific area 658 by opening the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 long in the specific round (even if it includes one or more short openings). Or, it is set as possible and basically means a big hit that is determined to be a specific big hit (probable variation big hit) on condition that the gaming ball enters the specific area 658. The reason for "conditional" is that even if the specified area 658 is a long-hit big hit, when the gaming ball does not actually enter the specified area 658, it usually results in a big hit (non-deterministic change big hit) Because there is a possibility of On the other hand, "conditional normal big hit" is a game ball to the specific area 658 by short opening (including multiple short openings) without long opening the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 in the specific round. It is a big hit that is determined to be normally a big hit (non-probable variation big hit) on the condition that the game ball does not enter the specific area 658, basically. The reason for "conditional" is that even if the specific area 658 is a short hit, if the gaming ball actually enters the specific area 658, it may become a specific big hit (probable variation big hit) as a result. Because there is In the following, it is also referred to as "V winning" that the game ball enters the specific area 658 during the special game. Here, as a modification, when adopting a specification (specification that is not a so-called ball machine) having no specific area 658 (V area), “conditional specific big hit” is “specific big hit” as a big hit attribute in this example. Or, "conditionally big hit" may correspond to "normal big hit" or "non-probable big hit".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the conditional specific big hit is set to “0.5%”, and the winning probability of the conditional normal big hit is “99.5. It is set to%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), in the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the conditional specific jackpot is set to “100%”. That is, when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the type of the big hit, it will be determined to always win the conditional specified big hit. Therefore, it is more likely to win a conditionally specific big hit (equivalent to a big change big hit) when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol lottery than when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol lottery. After the end of the advantageous gaming state (high probability state) will be.

  Subsequently, the special winning opening operation pattern in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a schematic view showing a special winning opening operation pattern table in the eighth embodiment.

  In the special winning opening operation pattern table, an opening mode (opening pattern) of the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 in each round is defined for each of the above-mentioned big hit types. In the opening mode of the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658, the opening time is set to a relatively long time according to the length of the opening time, and the opening time is relative to the opening time (long opening mode). It is distinguished from short opening (short opening mode) set to a short time. In the figure, as an opening mode of the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 in each round, "L" means long opening and "S" means short opening. The opening time of the long opening is a time width in which the number of game balls entering the large winning opening 65 (specific area 658) may reach a prescribed count number (10 balls), and "28.000 seconds" It is set. On the other hand, the opening time of the short opening is a time width that makes it difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the special winning opening 65 (specific area 658) itself, and "0.052 seconds" is set. In the following, a round game including a long opening (at least one long opening) is referred to as a "long opening round" as a single round game, including a short opening (at least one short opening) and a long opening The round game not included is called "short open round game". As described above, since the long open round game is a round game that can substantially acquire the balls, the actual round number of each jackpot corresponds to the number of times of the long open round game set for the special game. There is.

  In this example, regardless of which jackpot type is won, in the special round of the special game, the presence or absence of a definite variation winning (provisional change transition) depending on whether the gaming ball enters the specific area 658 or not. It is distributed. In this specific round, the opening operation of the special winning opening 65 and the opening operation of the specific area 658 are synchronized (linked), and the special region 658 is opened with the opening of the special winning opening 65 (large winning opening The specific area 658 is opened after the point 65 is opened), and the specific area 658 is closed upon the closing of the big winning opening 65 (when the large prize opening 65 is closed, the specific area 658 Is closed). Therefore, basically, when the big winning opening 65 is long-opened, the specific area 658 is long-opening, and when the big winning opening 65 is short-opened, the specific area 658 is short-opening. In this example, this particular round is set to the second round, regardless of any winning opening operation pattern. However, in one special game, the number of executions of a particular round is not limited to one, and may be set plural times continuously or intermittently.

  As shown in FIG. 95, when the player wins the "16R conditional specified big hit" in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the special winning opening 65 is extended in all rounds of the special game. Therefore, the 16R conditional specified big hit is a big hit equivalent to substantially 16 rounds. In the specific round, since the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are long-opened, it is easy or possible to enter the game ball into the specific area 658 in the round.

  If you win the first special symbol lottery "6R condition with a regular big hit 1" or "6R condition with a regular big hit 2", the big winning opening 65 will be short open in the first to third round of the first half of the special game The big winning opening 65 is long-opened in the fourth to sixth rounds of the second half. Therefore, the 6R conditional normal big hit 1, 2 will be a big hit equivalent to substantially three rounds. In the specific round, since the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are short-opened, it is difficult or substantially impossible to enter the game ball into the specific area 658 in the round.

  If you win the first special symbol lottery "5R condition with a regular big hit 1" or "5R condition with a regular big hit 2", the big winning opening 65 is short-opened in the first and second rounds of the first half of the special game The big winning opening 65 is long-opened in the third to fifth rounds of the second half. Therefore, the 5R conditional normal big hit 1, 2 will be a big hit equivalent to substantially three rounds. In the specific round, since the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are short-opened, it is difficult or substantially impossible to enter the game ball into the specific area 658 in the round.

  When the player wins the "12R conditional specified big hit" in the second special symbol lottery, the special winning opening 65 is opened long in all the rounds of the special game. Therefore, the 12R conditional specified big hit is a big hit equivalent to 12 rounds. In the specific round, since the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are long-opened, it is easy or possible to enter the game ball into the specific area 658 in the round.

  When the player wins the “8R condition specific big hit” in the second special symbol lottery, the big winning opening 65 is opened long in all the rounds of the special game. Therefore, the 8R conditional specific big hit is a big hit equivalent to 8 rounds. In the specific round, since the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are long-opened, it is easy or possible to enter the game ball into the specific area 658 in the round.

  When the player wins the "4R conditional specified big hit" in the second special symbol lottery, the special winning opening 65 is long-opened in all rounds of the special game. Therefore, the 4R conditional specified big hit is a big hit equivalent to 4 rounds. In the specific round, since the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are long-opened, it is easy or possible to enter the game ball into the specific area 658 in the round.

  When the player wins the "2R conditional specified big hit" in the second special symbol lottery, the special winning opening 65 is opened long in all the rounds of the special game. Therefore, the 2R conditional specified big hit is a big hit equivalent to two rounds. In the specific round, since the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are long-opened, it is easy or possible to enter the game ball into the specific area 658 in the round.

  Subsequently, the gaming state in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a schematic view showing a gaming state setting table in the eighth embodiment. In the gaming state setting table, for each jackpot type, the number of times the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated after the end of the special game (referred to as the “number of probability change operations”) and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol (and electricity It is associated with the number of times the Chew support function is activated (referred to as the "time-in-time operation number"). In this example, as a type of gaming state, 1) probability variation function of special symbol, variation time shortening function of special symbol, and game status where electric power support function is activated "probable variation state" or "probability variation gaming state" The game state in which only 2) special symbol variation time shortening function and power Chuo support function are activated is referred to as "time saving state" or "time saving gaming state", and 3) all functions are not operating " It is called a normal state or a "normal game state". Both the "probable change state" and the "time reduction state" can be said to be advantageous gaming states for the player compared to the "normal state". In this example, the number of probability change operations and the number of time reduction operations given when a big hit occurs are the type of big hit (type of symbol group), the gaming state at the time of big hit, and the presence or absence of V winning in the special game. It is set accordingly.

  If you win a V during the special game when it became a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, regardless of the type of big hit and the gaming state at the time of the big hit, as the probability change number of operations "10 times", as a time reduction number of operations "100 times" is set. On the other hand, when it did not win a V during the special game when it became a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, regardless of the big hit type and the gaming state at the time of big hit winning, no probability change operation number is given, big hit "30 times" or "100 times" is set as the number of time-saving operations according to the type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit. In other words, if you did not win a V during the special game, the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the normal state and the big hit type is 16R condition specified big hit, 6R condition usually big hit 1 or 5R condition usually big hit 1 If there is, "100 times" is set as the number of time-saving operations, but if the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the normal state and its big hit type is 6R condition usually big hit 2 or 5R condition usually big hit 2 "30 times" is set as the number of time-saving operations. Further, if the player does not win a V during the special game, and the gaming state at the time of the big hit is a time saving state or a definite changing state, "100 times" is set as the time saving operation number regardless of the big hit type.

  If you win a V during the special game when it became a big hit in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit, as the probability change number of operations "10 times", as the time reduction number of operations "100 times" is set. On the other hand, when it did not win V in the special round of the special game when it became a big hit in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit, the probability change operation frequency is not given "100 times" is set as the number of time-saving operations.

  Subsequently, a variation pattern selection state in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 (A) is a schematic view showing a selection state transition pattern table in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 97 (B) is a schematic view showing a selection state setting table in the eighth embodiment.

  The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern table) as described above. In this example, eleven types of selection states 0 to 10 are set as the variation pattern selection states. The selection state 0 is a fluctuation pattern selection state set in the gaming state (normal state) in which neither the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol nor the power chew support function is activated. The selection states 1 to 10 are fluctuation pattern selection states which are set in a gaming state (a positive change state or a short time state) in which at least the change time shortening function of the special symbol and the power chew support function are activated. Therefore, after the end of the special game, one of the selection states 1 to 10 is set in the variable display within the above-mentioned time reduction operation number (30 times or 100 times), and the above time reduction operation number (30 times or 100 times) In the outer variation display, the selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 97A, three types of selection state transition patterns X, Y, and Z in which the order of transition of the variation pattern selection state is defined are prepared. The selection state transition patterns X and Y are transition patterns corresponding to 100 times of time reduction, and the selection state transition pattern Z is a transition pattern corresponding to 30 times of time reduction. In the figure, the transition of the selection states 1 to 10 within the above-mentioned time reduction number (30 times or 100 times) is shown as the variation pattern selection state, but when the above time reduction number has elapsed ( When returning to the normal state), the selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs. That is, after the gaming state transitions to the normal state, the variation pattern selection state does not transition. However, as a modification, even if the gaming state is the normal state, the selection state 0-1 is set for 20 rotations after transition to the normal state, and thereafter the selection state 0-2 is set As in the above, the variation pattern selection state may be configured to transition even while staying in the normal state. The selected state transition pattern indicates the transition tendency of the variation pattern selection state, but the transition tendency may include that the fluctuation pattern selection state does not transition. That is, as the selected state transition pattern, a pattern (for example, selected state transition pattern A) in which the variation pattern selected state does not transition even once may be prepared.

  The selection state transition pattern X is selected state 3 (once) → selected state 4 (once) → selected state 5 (once) → selected state 6 (six times) in the variable display of 100 rotations after the end of the special game. The variation pattern selection state transitions in the order of selection state 7 (once) → selection state 8 (30 times) → selection state 9 (59 times) → selection state 10 (once). When the selection state 10 ends, the selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs. Here, in the selection state 8 and the selection state 9, although at least a part of the effects among the plural types of advance notice effects and the plural types of reach effects (SP reach effects) are common (in any selected state) Although it may occur when staying), the occurrence frequency or the jackpot expectation is set to be different.

  The selection state transition pattern Y is selected state 1 (29 times) → selected state 2 (once) → selected state 1 (69 times) → selected state 2 (once) in the variable display of 100 rotations after the end of the special game. The variation pattern selection state transitions in the order of. When the selection state 10 ends, the selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs.

  In the selection state transition pattern Z, the fluctuation pattern selection state transitions in the order of selection state 1 (29 times) → selection state 2 (once) in the variable display of 30 rotations after the end of the special game. When the selection state 10 ends, the selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (B), in the selection state setting table, selection state transition patterns are associated with each jackpot type (symbol group). In this example, the selection state transition pattern is set according to the jackpot type (symbol group), the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning, and the presence or absence of the V winning in the special game. Here, regardless of whether the current gaming state is a definite variation state or a short time state, the selection states 3 to 7 in the selection state transition pattern X are common, but the selection states 3A to 7A for probability change and for time reduction The selection states 3B to 7B may be prepared, and the selection state may be branched according to the gaming state (that is, the transition timing is the same regardless of the gaming state, but the variation pattern table of the reference destination is made different Also good). In this case, part or all of the variation patterns to be selection candidates may be common to the selection states 3A to 7A for probability variation and the selection states 3B to 7B for time reduction.

  Specifically, when the player wins a 16R condition specific big hit in the first special symbol lottery, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit and the presence or absence of the V winning in the special game, the selection state transition pattern X is always set Be done. In the first special symbol lottery, 6R condition with normal jackpot 1 or 5R condition with normal jackpot 1, when winning V during the special game, always, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, A selection state transition pattern X is set. On the other hand, in the first special symbol lottery, when winning 6R condition Normal big hit 1 or 5R condition Normal big hit 1 and not winning a V during the special game, the gaming condition at the time of big hit is normal If there is, the selection state transition pattern Y is set, and if the gaming state at the time of the big hit is a time saving state or a definite variation state, the selection state transition pattern X is set. In the first special symbol lottery, when winning 6R condition usually big hit 2 or 5R condition usually big hit 2 and winning V during the special game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of big hit winning, always, A selection state transition pattern X is set. On the other hand, in the first special symbol lottery when 6R condition with a normal big hit 2 or 5R condition with a normal big hit 2 won, if you did not win a V during the special game, the gaming state at the time of the big hit was normal If there is, the selection state transition pattern Z is set, and if the gaming state at the time of the big hit is a time saving state or a definite variation state, the selection state transition pattern X is set.

  On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, it was elected in any conditional specified big hit (16R conditional specified big hit, 12R conditional specific big hit, 8R conditional specific big hit, 4R conditional specific big hit, 2R conditional specific big hit) In this case, the selection state transition pattern X is always set regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit and the presence or absence of the V winning in the special game.

  Here, if the manner of transition of the variation pattern selection state is seen for each gaming state at the time of the big hit, the following can be said. First, when the gaming state is the normal state, when a conditional specific big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, basically, V winning occurs during the special game and the selection state transition pattern X is set Be done. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal state, when winning a conditional normal big win in the first special symbol lottery, basically, the V state does not occur during the special game and the selection state transition pattern Y or A selection state transition pattern Z is set. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol when the gaming state is a normal state, the special game ends depending on whether the big hit type is a conditional specified big hit or a conditional normal big hit. The way of transition of the variation pattern selection state can be different from that of the variation pattern selection state up to 30 times of variation display after counting. However, in the selection state transition patterns Y and Z, the method of transition of the fluctuation pattern selection state from the end of the special game to the 30 times of variable display is the same.

  In addition, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a definite changing state, whenever a big hit occurs in the first special symbol, regardless of the type of the big hit and the presence or absence of the V winning in the special game, always, the selection state transition pattern X Is set, the transition pattern of the variation pattern selection state from the end of the special game to 100 variation display is the same.

  Further, in any gaming state, when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol, regardless of the type of the big hit and the presence or absence of V winning in the special game, always, the selection state transition pattern X is set Because of this, the method of transition of the variation pattern selection state from the end of the special game to the 100 times of variation display is the same.

  Here, in the above-described 100 variable displays in which the fluctuation pattern selection state transitions according to the selection state transition pattern X, the first 10 variable displays stay in the probability change state, and the second half 90 variable displays stay in the short time state . At this time, in the first 10 times of variable display to stay in the definite change state, it changes as "Selected state 3" → "Selected state 4" → "Selected state 5" → "Selected state 6" → "Selected state 7" The pattern selection state transitions four times. On the other hand, in the latter half of the 90 times of variable display staying in the short time state, the fluctuation pattern selection state transitions twice such as “selected state 8” → “selected state 9” → “selected state 10”. In this way, the number of fluctuation displays (10 times) when staying in a definite change state is set smaller than the number of fluctuation displays (90 times) when staying in a short time state, but the fluctuation pattern is selected in the positive change state The number of times of state transition (four times) is set to be larger than the number of times of variation pattern selection state transition (two times) in the short-time state. As a modification, the number of transitions of the variation pattern selection state in the first 10 tenth times and the number of transitions of the variation pattern selection state in the second 90 latter times may be reversed. That is, even if the number of transitions of the variation pattern selection state in the first half 10 times (probability variation state) is smaller than the number of transitions of the variation pattern selection state in the second half 90 times (time reduction state) Good.

  Then, the change pattern of the special symbol in 8th Embodiment is demonstrated. 98 to 108 are schematic views showing a variation pattern table of the special symbol in the eighth embodiment.

  The variation pattern table of the special symbol is set according to the type of variation pattern selection state currently staying. In this example, a plurality of types of variation pattern tables 0 to 10 are prepared corresponding to the above variation pattern selection states (selection states 0 to 10). That is, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern selection state currently staying is referred to. Then, based on the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value, the jackpot type, the number of operation pending balls, etc., any fluctuation pattern is selected from one or more kinds of fluctuation patterns set in the fluctuation pattern table. In the figure, for convenience, “selectivity” is described, but in practice, the determination number (range of random value values) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set based on the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value. The variation pattern is selected based on which determination number the special symbol variation pattern random value belongs to. In each variation pattern table, the reference fields for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different, and even if the same special symbol variation pattern random number is acquired, different variation patterns are selected. It is supposed to be able to Here, the number of operation pending balls described in each figure (“0 pending”, “1 to 2 pending”, “3 pending”) is the first special symbol variation pattern lottery, It means the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation reserved balls after reserve digestion), and if it is the variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of operation reserved spheres of the second special symbol (after reserve digestion) It means the number of operation holding balls). The number of operation reserving balls is the number of operation reserving balls existing at the time of lottery of the fluctuation pattern (at the start of the fluctuation display / after the reserve digestion) (not including the operation reserving ball digested by the fluctuation display) . In addition, you may use the total value of the number of action | operation holding balls of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol as the modification.

  Here, the variation effect of the decorative symbol performed in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) or the like of the variation pattern of the special symbol. In FIG. 98 to FIG. 108, the contents of the fluctuation effect set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern are described as a reference. In the figure, in the "super-shortening fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", and "normal fluctuation", the decorative design of the three lines fluctuates, and it is a rendering that becomes so-called "breakout" in so-called looseness without passing through the reach state once It is. In the following, the ultrashortening fluctuation, the shortening fluctuation and the normal fluctuation are collectively referred to as "non-reach out". In this non-reach deviation, the fluctuation modes differ from each other in that the fluctuation display stops in a shorter time than the fluctuation fluctuation or the ultrashort fluctuation fluctuation than the normal fluctuation fluctuation. "N reach (N reach effect)" is a state (reach state) in which the same decorative symbol is stopped in two rows (generally, the left and right rows) of the decorative symbols having three rows (one reach (the reach)) In general, if different decorative symbols stop in the middle row), it will be "off", and if the same decorative symbol stops in the remaining one row (generally the middle row), it will be a "big hit" . “SP reach (SP reach effect)” is a reach effect with a relatively high expectation of a big hit compared to the above N reach, and it develops from N reach and displays, for example, still images and videos such as animations and live-actions It is an effect to be done. In the type of fluctuation pattern in this example, the big hit expectation is set to be higher in the order of non reach <N reach <SP reach. Note that "N reach" in this example corresponds to "normal reach" in the above embodiment, and "SP reach" in this example corresponds to "super reach" in the above embodiment. Further, in each variation pattern table, a plurality of types of N reach and SP reach may be prepared, and in that case, it is preferable that “number of types of N reach” <“number of types of SP reach”. In addition, in at least one of the variation pattern selection states, provide SP reach (that is, SP reach corresponding to four or more rounds or eight or more rounds) in which four or more rounds or eight or more rounds are determined as the number of acquisition rounds It is good. That is, when the SP reach (as an example, the SP reach Z) occurs, it may be determined that the seven star effect is not generated, or it may be determined that the re-lottery effect is generated.

  Moreover, although description is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. 98-FIG. 108, in the fluctuation display of a decorative symbol, a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation production (it abbreviates also as a "pseudo series") may be performed. As for "pseudo continuous variation production (pseudo ream)", as the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (simulated stop) during one time variation display of the decoration pattern, it seems that the variation display is made several times in a pseudo manner It is an effect to show. This pseudo-continuous variation presentation is configured to execute re-variation display in which re-variation is started one or more times after all the decorative symbols in three rows have been temporarily stopped (simulated stop) in a pseudo manner. The pseudo ream is performed and displayed in the stage before the reach state is formed in the variable display including the reach production, and the occurrence of the reach production with a high hit expectation is expected as the number of re-variation display (pseudo ream) increases. It can be done. In this example, "pseudo 1" means that one re-variation display (pseudo series) is performed, "pseudo 2" means that two re-variation displays (pseudo series) are performed, "pseudo 3" Means that three times of re-variation display (simulation series) is performed. In this example, as the number of pseudo runs is increased, that is, in the order of pseudo run 1 <pseudo run 2 <pseudo run 3, the big hit expectation is set to be higher. In addition, among the decorative patterns in the three rows, the decorative symbols in the left and right rows are temporarily stopped in the non-reach state in the case where the decorative symbols in the left and right rows are temporarily stopped in the reach state (tempay). The jackpot expectation is set to be higher than in the case. In this example, as the effects to be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, in addition to the various notice effects (for example, SU notice effect and group notice effect etc.) exemplified in the first embodiment, “reach around” "Seven Star Effect", "Relottery Effect", "Final Variation Effect", "Special Continuous Effect", "Special Big Hit Effect", etc. are set, but the specific contents will be described later.

(Variation pattern table 0)
FIG. 98 is a schematic view showing a variation pattern table 0. The fluctuation pattern table 0 is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently being stayed is the selection state 0. The variation pattern table 0 is a different table according to the result (big hit / missing) of the pass / fail judgment. In the figure, "SP reach A" is a story-based reach effect in which a story attributed to a predetermined character is developed. "Seven star rendition" indicates that a big hit has been won by the appearance of a predetermined logo (characters of the seven star charge) immediately after the reach rendition which indicates that the result of the pass / fail judgment is a loss is executed. It is a resurrection production.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 0 for outliers, fluctuation patterns PH0-1 (very short), PH0-2 (short), PH0-3 (normal), PH0-4 (N reach), PH0-5 (SP reach A) Is set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a change, fluctuation pattern PH0-1 (super shortening), PH0-2 (short), PH0-3 (normal), PH0-4 (N reach) , PH0-5 (SP reach A) is selected. At this time, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is disapproval, the table content of the reference destination is set to be different according to the number of operation pending balls, and the special symbol variation pattern random value is the same. Even different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern (ultra-shortened fluctuation or shortened fluctuation) whose fluctuation time is set relatively short tends to be selected as the number of operation pending balls increases, and the fluctuation time relatively increases as the number of operation pending balls decreases. A long set fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation or N reach) is easily selected. On the other hand, when the result of the pass / fail determination of the second special symbol is a loss, the variation pattern PH0-2 (short) or PH0-3 (normal) is selected. That is, when the result of the determination of success or failure of the second special symbol is a loss, unlike the case where the result of the determination of success or failure of the first special symbol is a loss, the fluctuation time is relatively independent of the number of operation holding balls. Only short set variation patterns (short or normal) are selected. In addition, as a modification, when the result of the judgment of the success or failure of the second special symbol is a departure, it does not depend on the number of operation pending of the second special symbol, only the variation pattern of the ultra shortening is selected or the variation pattern of the ultra shortening It may be the most selectable (in that case, the selection ratio is the same regardless of the number of activated balls in the second special symbol).

  In the fluctuation pattern table 0 for the jackpot, fluctuation patterns PA0-1 (N reach), PA0-2 (SP reach A), and PA0-3 (SP reach A → 7 star effect) are set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, fluctuation pattern PA0-1 (N reach) or PA0-2 (SP reach A) is selected regardless of the big hit type. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is 16R condition specific big hit, 12R condition specific big hit, 8R condition specific big hit, 4R condition specific big hit, fluctuation pattern If PA0-2 (SP reach A) is selected and the big hit type is 2R conditional specified big hit, variation pattern PA0-3 (SP reach A → 7 star effect) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 99 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 1. The fluctuation pattern table 1 is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a different table according to the result (big hit / missing) of the pass / fail determination. In the figure, “SP reach B” is a mission that presents the player with an instruction that the effect result should exhibit a specific mode as a pseudo condition for making the result of the success or failure judgment a big hit. It is an effect. In the mission effect in this example, as the command, if the character selected by the player can defeat the enemy character, the mission is successful (big hit), and if the enemy character is not defeated, the mission is failure (missing). "Seven star effect" means that a predetermined logo (letter of seven star charge) appears immediately after the ally character is defeated and the mission fails in the above-mentioned mission effect (immediately after the mission effect of Gasse is executed). It is a resurrection production showing that the big hit was won.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 1 for disconnection, fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (very short), PH1-2 (normal), and PH1-3 (SP reach B) are set. Here, in the case where the result of the determination of the first special symbol is disqualification, fluctuation pattern PH1-2 (normal) or PH1-3 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. . That is, in the case where the result of the determination of the first special symbol is disapproval, the variation pattern PH1-1 (super-shortened) is not selected regardless of how many operation pending balls exist. On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, any one of the fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (very short), PH1-2 (normal) and PH1-3 (SP reach B) is selected Be done. At this time, if the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is out, the table contents of the reference destination are set to be different according to the number of operation pending balls (more specifically, according to the presence or absence of operation pending balls) Even if the special symbol variation pattern random number value is the same, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the variation pattern PH1-1 (ultra-shortened) is not selected when the operation reserving ball is not present, and only when the operation reserving ball is present, the variation pattern PH1-1 (super Since the shortening can be selected, a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time tends to be selected more easily in the presence of the operation holding ball than in the case where the operation holding ball is not present. .

  In the fluctuation pattern table 1 for the jackpot, fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (SP reach B) and PA1-2 (SP reach B → seven star effect) are set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (SP reach B) is selected regardless of the type of the big hit. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is 16R condition specific big hit, 12R condition specific big hit, 8R condition specific big hit, 4R condition specific big hit, fluctuation pattern If PA1-1 (SP reach B) is selected and the jackpot type is 2R conditional specified big hit, fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (SP reach B → seven star effect) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 100 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 2. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is a fluctuation pattern table which is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a different table according to the result (big hit / missing) of the success / failure determination. In the figure, “final fluctuation effect A” is executed on the fluctuation display of only one rotation (the 30th rotation or the 100th rotation of the non-transmission mode described later, which will be described later) as the fluctuation pattern selection state. It is an effect. “Final fluctuation effect A (mode continuation / end)” is a shutter effect (shutter image changes from open to closed to open almost over the entire screen), and is currently in effect mode (non-transmission mode) A mode continuation effect informing that the) continues also after the next fluctuation display, or an effect in which a mode ending effect informing that the currently executing production mode (non-dual mission mode) is ended by the current fluctuation display is performed It is. That is, the “final change effect A (mode continuation / end)” is an effect asking about whether or not it is the final change of the time saving state (the change display of the final round). Specifically, in the case where the current variable display is a variable display of the 30th rotation, counting from the end of the special game, if the number of time-saving operations given at the time of the big hit is 100, “mode continuation effect” Is selected, and if the number of time shortening operations given at the time of jackpot win is 30 times, "mode end effect" is selected. On the other hand, if the current fluctuation display is counted after the end of the special game and it is the fluctuation display of the 100th rotation, since the number of time shortening operations provided at the time of the big hit is 100 times, “mode end effect Is selected. The “final change effect A (relief)” is a big hit by the appearance of the premier character in this open state, after the shutter effect (shutter image changes from open to closed to open from almost the entire area of the screen). It is a bailout effect which shows having won. “Final fluctuation effect A (seven stars)” is a shutter effect (shutter image changes from open state to closed state to open state over almost the entire screen), and a predetermined logo (letter of seven star charge) is displayed in this open state It is a resurrection effect that shows that the jackpot was won by the appearance of). The present invention is not limited to this, and in the final variation production A, without passing through the shutter production, an effect such as reach establishment → SP reach B (→ seven star production), that is, the same hit as the non-djoint mission mode before the final variation It is also good. Further, it may be configured to select either the hit method via the shutter effect or the hit method by lottery.

  The fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (final fluctuation effect A (continuation / end)) is set in the fluctuation pattern table 2 for disconnection. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a loss, the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (final fluctuation effect A (continuation / end)) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. Similarly, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (final fluctuation effect A (continuation / end)) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. That is, when the result of the determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is disqualification, only the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (final fluctuation effect A (continuation / end)) is always selected. In addition, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol or the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a disconnection, it always becomes the mode continuation effect or mode end effect via the shutter effect, and the relief effect or seven star effect occurs There is no such thing, and there is no occurrence of fluctuation effect such as reach establishment → SP reach B.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 2 for the jackpot, fluctuation patterns PA2-1 (final fluctuation effect A (relief)) and PA2-2 (final fluctuation effect A (seven stars)) are set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2-1 (final variation effect A (relief)) is selected regardless of the big hit type. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is 16R condition specific big hit, 12R condition specific big hit, 8R condition specific big hit, 4R condition specific big hit, fluctuation pattern If PA2-1 (final change effect A (relief)) is selected and the big hit type is 2R conditional specific big hit, a change pattern PA2-2 (final change effect A (7 stars)) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 101 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 3. The fluctuation pattern table 3 is a fluctuation pattern table which is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state 3. The fluctuation pattern table 3 is a table different according to the result (big hit / missing) of the success / failure determination. In the figure, "special continuous effect" is an effect to be executed across one or more variable displays from the end of the special game. Note that “special continuous rendition” is essentially different from other renditions (those that are completed in one change display described in the “render contents” column of FIGS. 98 to 108), and may be one or more times. Since the effect (moving image) is displayed across the variable display of the times, it is not the effect selected in the effect drawing at the start of the change but it is like a background effect. In this example, the variation patterns selected in the selection states 3 to 5 (variation pattern tables 3 to 5) are all configured as variation patterns with special continuous effects. The "special jackpot effect", according to the jackpot type (special game type) by button operation, after notifying that the movable character 24 has dropped to the front of the screen and the jackpot has been decided after the end of the above-mentioned special continuous effects This is an effect in which a count-up effect (round-up effect) is performed on which the scheduled acquisition prize ball number (the number of prize balls that the player is scheduled to acquire in the special game) is added.

  The fluctuation pattern PH 3-1 (special continuous effect) is set in the fluctuation pattern table 3 for disconnection. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH3-1 (special continuous effect) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. Similarly, in the case where the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is out, the fluctuation pattern PH3-1 (special continuous effect) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. That is, when the result of the pass / fail determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a disconnection, only the variation pattern PH3-1 (special continuous effect) is selected.

  On the other hand, fluctuation pattern PA 3-1 (special continuous effect → special big hit effect) is set in the fluctuation pattern table 3 for the big hit. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, fluctuation pattern PA 3-1 (special continuous effect → special big hit effect) is selected without depending on the type of the big hit. Similarly, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, fluctuation pattern PA 3-1 (special continuous effect → special big hit effect) is selected without depending on the type of the big hit. That is, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PA 3-1 (special continuous effect → special jackpot effect) is always selected.

(Variation pattern table 4)
FIG. 102 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 4. The fluctuation pattern table 4 is a fluctuation pattern table which is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state 4. The variation pattern table 4 is a different table according to the result (big hit / missing) of the success / failure determination. In the drawing, “special continuous effect” and “special jackpot effect” are the same as the effect contents described in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table 3 (FIG. 101), and therefore, redundant description will be omitted here.

  The fluctuation pattern PH 4-1 (special continuous effect) is set in the fluctuation pattern table 4 for disconnection. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is an off, fluctuation pattern PH4-1 (special continuous effect) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. Similarly, in the case where the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is out, the fluctuation pattern PH4-1 (special continuous effect) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. That is, when the result of the pass / fail determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is disengaging, only the fluctuation pattern PH4-1 (special continuous effect) is always selected.

  On the other hand, fluctuation pattern PA 4-1 (special continuous effect) is set in the fluctuation pattern table 4 for the big hit. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, fluctuation pattern PA 4-1 (special continuous effect → special big hit effect) is selected without depending on the type of the big hit. Similarly, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, fluctuation pattern PA 4-1 (special continuous effect → special big hit effect) is selected without depending on the type of the big hit. That is, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PA4-1 (special continuous effect → special big hit effect) is always selected.

(Variation pattern table 5)
FIG. 103 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 5. The fluctuation pattern table 5 is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state 5. The variation pattern table 5 is a table different according to the result (big hit / missing) of the success / failure determination. Note that "special continuous effect" and "special big hit effect" in the figure are the same as the effect contents described in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table 3 (FIG. 101), and therefore redundant description will be omitted here.

  The fluctuation pattern PH5-1 (special continuous effect) is set in the fluctuation pattern table 5 for disconnection. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is dissembling, the fluctuation pattern PH5-1 (special continuous effect) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. Similarly, in the case where the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is out, the fluctuation pattern PH5-1 (special continuous effect) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. That is, when the result of the pass / fail determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a disconnection, only the fluctuation pattern PH5-1 (special continuous effect) is always selected.

  On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table 5 for the big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA 5-1 (special continuous effect → special big hit effect) is set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, fluctuation pattern PA 5-1 (special continuous effect → special big hit effect) is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, fluctuation pattern PA 5-1 (special continuous effect → special big hit effect) is selected without depending on the type of the big hit. That is, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PA 5-1 (special continuous effect → special jackpot effect) is always selected.

(Variation pattern table 6)
FIG. 104 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 6. The fluctuation pattern table 6 is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state 6. The variation pattern table 6 is a different table according to the result (big hit / missing) of the pass / fail judgment. In the figure, "reach hit" is an effect asking whether or not reach is established, and reach reach succeeds if reach is established, and reach fails if reach is not established. “SP reach C” is a reach effect in which a battle effect is developed in which an ally character battles against an enemy character and decides the outcome. In this battle effect, basically, when an ally character beats an enemy character, a big hit is decided, and when the ally character loses to the enemy character, the outset is decided. Therefore, in principle, the timing at which the outcome of the battle is decided is set as the timing of the final branch. The “relottery effect” is a promotion effect in which the number of acquired rounds (the number of obtainable payouts) is determined by relottery after the big hit is confirmed by the allied character winning in the above-mentioned battle effect. Count up effect / round up effect). However, since the number of winning rounds (the number of obtainable payouts) is determined in advance according to the type of jackpot at the time of jackpot winning, this re-lottery means a lottery on effect. "Seven Star Effect" indicates that a big hit is won by the appearance of a predetermined logo (characters of the Seven Star Charge) after the ally character is defeated in the above-mentioned battle direction (after the Gase has not been executed for the battle effect). It is a resurrection production.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 6 for outliers, fluctuation patterns PH6-1 (about reach) and PH6-2 (about reach → SP reach C) are set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a departure, fluctuation pattern PH6-1 (around reach) or PH6-2 (around reach → SP reach C) without depending on the number of operation pending balls. Is selected. Similarly, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is out, fluctuation pattern PH6-1 (reach around) or PH6-2 (reach around → SP reach C) is not dependent on the number of operation pending balls. It is selected.

  In fluctuation pattern table 6 for the big hit, fluctuation pattern PA6-1 (reach around → SP reach C), PA 6-2 (reach around → SP reach C → re-lottery effect), PA 6-3 (reach around → SP reach C → Seven star effect is set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, it does not depend on the big hit type, fluctuation pattern PA 6-1 (reach around → SP reach C) or PA 6-2 (reach around → SP reach) C → Re-lottery effect is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if 16R conditional specific big hit, 12R conditional specific big hit, 8R conditional specific big hit, fluctuation pattern PA6-2 (reach around → SP reach If C → re-lottery effect is selected, and the big hit type is 4R conditional specified big hit, the variation pattern PA 6-1 (reach around → SP reach C) is selected, and the big hit type is 2R conditional specific big hit , Fluctuation pattern PA6-3 (reach around → SP reach C → seven-star effect) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 7)
FIG. 105 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 7. The fluctuation pattern table 7 is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state 7. The variation pattern table 7 is a different table depending on the result (big hit / missing) of the pass / fail judgment. The "mode entry effect" is the next effect mode after passing through a shutter effect (the shutter image changes from an open state to a closed state to an open state using almost the entire area of the screen) after the ally character is defeated in the battle effect described above. This is an effect in which a rush effect to (Musou battle dance mode) is performed. The “relottery effect” is a promotion effect in which the number of acquired rounds (the number of obtainable payouts) is determined by relottery after the big hit is confirmed by the allied character winning in the above-mentioned battle effect. Count up effect / round up effect). However, since the number of winning rounds (the number of obtainable payouts) is determined in advance according to the type of jackpot at the time of jackpot winning, this re-lottery means a lottery on effect. “Final fluctuation effect B” is an effect executed in fluctuation display of only one rotation staying in the selected state 7 as a fluctuation pattern selected state (the fluctuation display of the last round of the seven-star battle dance mode described later). “Final fluctuation effect B (rescue)” is a shutter effect (shutter image is open over almost the entire area of the screen → closed) after the ally character is defeated in the battle effect (after the battle effect of Gasse is executed). This state is a relief effect indicating that a big hit has been won by the appearance of the premier character in this open state after the state changes to the open state). “Final fluctuation effect B (Nanaboshi)” is a shutter effect (shutter image is open in almost all the area of the screen → closed) after the ally character is defeated in the above battle effect (after the battle effect of Gasse is executed). It is a resurrection effect indicating that a big hit is won by the appearance of a predetermined logo (characters of the seven star charge) in this open state after passing through the state → open state).

  The fluctuation pattern PH7-1 (SP reach C → final fluctuation effect B (end)) is set in the fluctuation pattern table 7 for disconnection. Here, if the result of the determination of the first special symbol is a disqualification, fluctuation pattern PH7-1 (SP reach C → final fluctuation effect B (end)) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls Ru. Similarly, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH7-1 (SP reach C → final fluctuation effect B (end)) is always selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls Be done.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 7 for the big hit, fluctuation patterns PA7-1 (SP reach C), PA7-2 (SP reach C → re-lottery effect), PA 7-3 (SP reach C → seven star effect), PA 7-4 ( SP reach C → final change effect B (rescue) is set. Here, if the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, if it is 16R conditional specified big hit, fluctuation pattern PA7-2 (SP reach C → re-lottery) or PA 7-4 (SP reach C → If the final fluctuation effect B (relief) is selected, and if the other big hit type (6R conditional normal big hit 1, 6R conditional normal big hit 2, 5R conditional normal big hit 1, 5R conditional normal big hit 2), The variation pattern PA7-1 (SP reach C) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if it is 16R conditional specified big hit, fluctuation pattern PA7-2 (SP reach C → re-lottery effect) or PA 7-4 (SP reach C → If the final change effect B (relief) is selected and the 12R conditional specified big hit or the 8R conditional specified big hit, the change pattern PA7-2 (SP reach C → re-lottery effect) is selected, the 4R specified specific hit If it is, fluctuation pattern PA7-1 (SP reach C) is selected, and if it is 2R conditional specified big hit, fluctuation pattern PA7-3 (SP reach C → seven star effect) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 8)
FIG. 106 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 8. The fluctuation pattern table 8 is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state 8. The variation pattern table 8 is a different table according to the result (big hit / missing) of the pass / fail determination. In the drawing, "SP reach D" is a reach effect in which an extermination effect is developed in which an ally character destroys many miscellaneous fish characters. In this eradication effect, basically, when the ally character succeeds in eradicating the miscellaneous fish group, the big hit is determined, and when the ally character fails in eradicating the miscellaneous fish group, the outset is established. The "relottery effect" is a promotion in which the number of winning rounds (the number of obtainable payouts) is determined by relottery after the big hit is confirmed by the allied character succeeding in eradicating the miscellaneous fish group in the above-mentioned eradication effect. It is an effect (count-up effect / round-up effect performed during variable display). However, since the number of winning rounds (the number of obtainable payouts) is determined in advance according to the type of jackpot at the time of jackpot winning, this re-lottery means a lottery on effect. "Seven Star Production" is a big hit winning with the appearance of a predetermined logo (letter of the Seven Star Charge) after failing to eradicate the miscellaneous fish group in the above extermination production (after the Gase Destruction is performed). It is a resurrection production showing.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 8 for disconnection, fluctuation patterns PH8-1 (very short), PH8-2 (normal), and PH8-3 (SP reach D) are set. Here, in the case where the result of the determination of the first special symbol is disqualification, the fluctuation pattern PH8-2 (normal) or PH8-3 (SP reach D) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. . On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, any one of the fluctuation patterns PH8-1 (very short), PH8-2 (normal), PH8-3 (SP reach D) is selected Be done. At this time, if the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is disapproval, the table contents of the reference destination may differ according to the number of operation pending balls (more specifically, according to whether or not the operation pending balls exist) Even if the special symbol variation pattern random number value is the same, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, when the operation reserving ball is not present, the fluctuation pattern PH8-1 (super shortening) is not selected, and only when the operation reserving ball is present, the fluctuation pattern PH8-1 (Very short) may be selected. Therefore, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time tends to be selected in the case where the operation reserving ball is present rather than the case where the operation reserving ball is not present.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 8 for the big hit, fluctuation patterns PA8-1 (SP reach D), PA8-2 (SP reach D → re-lottery effect), PA 8-3 (SP reach D → seven star effect) are set. . Here, if the result of the success or failure of the first special symbol is a big hit, if the 16R conditional specific big hit, the variation pattern PA8-2 (SP reach D → re-lottery effect) is selected, otherwise the big hit For the type (6R conditional normal large hit 1, 6R conditional normal large hit 2, 5R conditional normal large hit 1, 5R conditional normal large hit 2), the variation pattern PA8-1 (SP reach D) is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if 16R conditional specific big hit, 12R conditional specific big hit, 8R conditional specific big hit, fluctuation pattern PA8-2 (SP reach D → re If the lottery effect is selected and the 4R conditional specified big hit, the variation pattern PA8-1 (SP reach D) is selected, and if it is the 2R conditional specified big hit, the variation pattern PA8-3 (SP reach D → seven stars) The effect is selected.

(Variation pattern table 9)
FIG. 107 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 9. The fluctuation pattern table 9 is a fluctuation pattern table which is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state 9. The variation pattern table 9 is a table different according to the result (big hit / missing) of the success / failure determination. In the drawing, “SP reach D”, “re-lottery effect”, and “resurrection effect” are the same as the effect contents described in the above-described fluctuation pattern table 8 (FIG. 106), and therefore redundant description will be omitted here.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 9 for disconnection, fluctuation patterns PH9-1 (very short), PH9-2 (normal), and PH9-3 (SP reach D) are set. Here, in the case where the result of the determination of the first special symbol is disqualification, fluctuation pattern PH9-2 (normal) or PH9-3 (SP reach D) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. . On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, any one of the fluctuation patterns PH9-1 (very short), PH9-2 (normal), PH9-3 (SP reach D) is selected Be done. At this time, if the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is disapproval, the table contents of the reference destination may differ according to the number of operation pending balls (more specifically, according to whether or not the operation pending balls exist) Even if the special symbol variation pattern random number value is the same, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, when the operation reserving ball is not present, the fluctuation pattern PH9-1 (super shortening) is not selected, and only when the operation reserving ball is present, the fluctuation pattern PH9-1 (Very short) may be selected. Therefore, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time tends to be selected in the case where the operation reserving ball is present rather than the case where the operation reserving ball is not present.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 9 for the big hit, fluctuation patterns PA9-1 (SP reach D), PA9-2 (SP reach D → re-lottery effect), PA 9-3 (SP reach D → seven star effect) are set. . Here, if the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, if it is 16R conditional specific big hit, the variation pattern PA9-2 (SP reach D → re-lottery effect) is selected, other big hit For the type (6R conditional normal large hit 1, 6R conditional normal large hit 2, 5R conditional normal large hit 1, 5R conditional normal large hit 2), the variation pattern PA 9-1 (SP reach D) is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the success or failure of the second special symbol is a big hit, 16R conditional specific big hit, 12R conditional specific big hit, 8R conditional specific big hit, fluctuation pattern PA9-2 (SP reach D → re If the lottery effect is selected and the 4R conditional specified big hit, the variation pattern PA9-1 (SP reach D) is selected, and if the 2R conditional specified big hit, the variation pattern PA9-3 (SP reach D → seven stars) An effect is selected.

  In this variation pattern table 9, SP reach D is selected with a probability of "20%" when the result of the success or failure judgment is a loss, while "100" when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit SP reach D is selected with a probability of%. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table 8 described above, when the result of the pass / fail determination is a loss, the SP reach D is selected with a probability of “10%”, but when the result of the pass / fail determination is a big hit SP reach D is selected with a probability of "100%". Therefore, as the fluctuation pattern selection state, the big hit expectation of the SP reach D becomes higher when staying in the selection state 8 than when staying in the selection state 9. That is, it can be said that the big hit expectation of SP reach D is higher in the first half of 30 rotations in the incompetent dance mode described later than in the second half of 59 rotations.

(Variation pattern table 10)
FIG. 108 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 10. As shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 10 is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently being stayed is the selection state 10. The fluctuation pattern table 10 is a table different according to the result (big hit / missing) of the success / failure determination. In the figure, "Final fluctuation effect C" is an effect executed in the fluctuation display of only one rotation staying in the selected state 10 as the fluctuation pattern selected state (the fluctuation display of the last round of the dazzling dance mode described later) . “Final fluctuation effect C (end)” is a shutter effect (shutter image changes from open to closed to open from almost the entire area of the screen), and the currently running effect mode (non-transmission mission mode) is the current It is a mode end production which notifies that it is ended by the fluctuation display of. The “final change effect C (relief)” is a big hit by the appearance of the premier character in this open state after the shutter effect (shutter image changes from open to closed to open from almost the entire area of the screen). It is a bailout effect which shows having won. "Final fluctuation effect C (seven stars)" has a shutter effect (shutter image changes from open to closed to open over almost the entire area of the screen), and a predetermined logo (letter of seven stars charge) is displayed in this open state It is a resurrection effect that shows that the jackpot was won by the appearance of). The present invention is not limited to this, and in the final variation production C, without passing through the shutter production, a reach establishment → SP reach D (→ seven star production), that is, the same hit as the incompetence dance mode before the final variation. May be Further, it may be configured to select either the hit method via the shutter effect or the hit method by lottery.

  The fluctuation pattern PH10-1 (final fluctuation effect C (end)) is set in the fluctuation pattern table 10 for disconnection. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH10-1 (final fluctuation effect C (end)) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. Similarly, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is out, the fluctuation pattern PH10-1 (final fluctuation effect C (end)) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. That is, when the result of the determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is disapproval, only the fluctuation pattern PH10-1 (final fluctuation effect C (end)) is always selected. In addition, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol or the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is an end, the mode end effect via the shutter effect always becomes, and neither relief effect nor seven star effect occurs Also, there is no fluctuation effect such as reach establishment → SP reach D.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 10 for the jackpot, fluctuation patterns PA10-1 (final fluctuation effect C (relief)) and PA10-2 (final fluctuation effect C (seven stars)) are set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA10-1 (final variation effect C (relief)) is selected regardless of the big hit type. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is 16R conditional specific big hit, 12R conditional specific big hit, 8R conditional specific big hit, 4R conditional specific big hit, fluctuation pattern If PA10-1 (final change effect C (relief)) is selected and the big hit type is 2R conditional specific big hit, a change pattern PA10-2 (final change effect C (7 stars)) is selected.

  As described above, in the variation pattern tables 0 to 10, the variation time of the special symbol is set for each variation pattern, however, even if any variation pattern is selected, the determined stop time of the special symbol is “0. "3 seconds" is set. In addition, the decision stop time of the special symbol is the time when the special symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is held). In addition, the fluctuation time and the fixed stop time of the decorative symbol are also set corresponding to the fluctuation time and the fixed stop time of such a special symbol (a temporary stop time will be described later).

  Subsequently, the effect mode in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a schematic view showing the correspondence between the variation pattern selection state and the effect mode in the eighth embodiment. In this example, one of a plurality of effect modes is alternatively set according to the variation pattern selection state (or gaming state) or the like managed on the main control board 100 side. The variable presentation according to the presentation mode is performed.

  In this example, as the above-described plural types of effect modes, a normal effect mode (effect mode 0), a special effect mode (effect mode 0), a non-transmission mode (effect mode 1 and 2), and a hold sequence mode (effect mode 3, 4, 5), the seven-star battle dance mode (rendering modes 6, 7), and the incompetent dance mode (rendering modes 8, 9, 10) are set. Regarding the correspondence between the variation pattern selection state and the rendering mode, “normal rendering mode” and “special rendering mode” correspond to selection state 0, and “non-mission mode” corresponds to selection states 1 and 2. “Selection mode 3” corresponds to the selection states 3, 4 and 5, “7 star combat mode” corresponds to the selection states 6 and 7, and “select mode 8, 9 and 10” It is compatible with the "Destroy Dance Mode". The normal rendering mode and the special rendering mode are rendering modes that are set when the electric cheering support state is not activated, and the non-split missions mode, the hold link mode, the seven star battle dance mode and the non-pairing missions mode are activated This is an effect mode set when the player is playing. Note that, in the following, the holding series mode, the seven-star fighting mode, and the incompetent dance mode are collectively referred to as a "continuous mode". Here, in the production modes 3 to 10, at least for any of the production modes 3 to 7 or 10, only a big hit via reach non-reach occurs or a big hit via reach non-reach is more likely to occur than a big hit via reach For the presentation modes 8 and 9, a specification may be adopted that only a big hit via reach or a big hit via reach is more likely to occur than a big hit without reach. In addition, the big hit of non-reach is a big hit (so-called, hit) in which the fluctuation variation of the decorative pattern of the three lines does not go to temper (without going through the reach state) as it is.

  FIG. 110 is a transition diagram of the effect mode in the eighth embodiment. In the figure, "conditional specific big hit" means the case where the 16R conditional specific big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the case where any conditional specific big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. "Conditional normal big hit" means the case where one of the conditional normal big hits was won in the first special symbol lottery.

  Basically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal rendering mode is set as the rendering mode. The normal effect mode is, as described above, an effect mode corresponding to the selection state 0 as the variation pattern selection state. However, when transitioning to the normal state based on the end of the time saving state, the special effect mode is set in the variable display of the predetermined number of times after the gaming state has transitioned to the normal state, and the variable display of the predetermined number of times is ended. Usually, the effect mode is set. The predetermined number of times is "four times" as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol. This means that the variable display count of the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "four times". However, usually, with the variable display of 4 rotations staying in the special effect mode, the second special symbol generated when the gaming state is the time saving state (the state where the electric cheering support function is activated) under preferential digestion. Since the operation reserving ball is to be digested (the second special symbol fluctuation display should be executed), if a big hit occurs during this special effect mode, an expectation of conditional specified big hit winning (V prize winning) Feeling is enhanced. Here, when the currently staying effect mode is the normal effect mode or the special effect mode, if the condition specific jackpot is won, transition to the hold sequence mode regardless of the presence or absence of the V winning in the special game, the condition normal If you win the jackpot and do not get a V during the special game, you will switch to the missionless mode. However, even if the player wins a conditionally normal jackpot, if the player wins a V during the special game, the mode shifts to the hold series mode.

  The dual mission mode is, as described above, an effect mode corresponding to the selection states 1 and 2 as the variation pattern selection state. The number of stays in the non-mission mission mode is "30 times" or "100 times" as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol. Even if the number of stays in the non-mission mission mode is either "30 times" or "100 times", the remaining number of times of fluctuation display up to the bifurcation point (the 30th rotation fluctuation display) is displayed on the screen . At this branch point (the 30th rotation fluctuation display), the above-mentioned final fluctuation effect A is generated, and it is described whether the non dual mission mode (time saving state) continues or the non dual mission mode (time saving status) ends. (Shutter effect) is developed. When staying in the mission mode, the only possible gaming state is the time saving state. When the next big hit occurs while staying in the matchless mission mode, the mode shifts to the continuous play mode (the hold continuous mode) regardless of the type of the big hit and the presence or absence of the V winning in the special game.

  The connection mode includes “hold connection mode”, “seven star battle dance mode”, and “incomparable dance mode”, and the hold linkage mode (three rotations) → seven star battle dance mode (seven rotations) → cross battle dance Transition in the order of mode (90 rotations). The number of times of stay in this consecutive mode is "100 times" as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol.

  As described above, the hold sequence mode is an effect mode corresponding to the selection states 3 to 5 as the variation pattern selection state. When staying in the hold association mode, the possible gaming states are the probability change state or the short time state. The number of stays in the hold series mode is “three times” as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol. As will be described in detail later, while staying in the hold series mode, special continuous effects are generated across the big hit end demo. When the hold series mode (first to third rotations) ends, the next effect mode (seven star battle mode) is entered.

  As described above, the seven-star battle mode is an effect mode corresponding to the selection states 6 to 7 as the variation pattern selection state. The number of stays in the seven-star battle dance mode is "7 times" as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol. When staying in the seven star battle dance mode, the possible gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state. When this seven-star battle dance mode (the fourth rotation to the tenth rotation) is finished, it shifts to the next rendering mode (the battleless dance mode).

  In addition, when staying in the seven-star battle dance mode, when the fluctuation pattern accompanied by "SP reach C" is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, as described above, the ally character is selected as the SP reach effect. A battle rendition against the enemy character occurs. In this example, the same opponent (Enemy character every time the battle effect occurs in any of the variable display of 7 rotations (the fourth rotation to the 10th rotation) staying in the seven star battle dance mode. ) Is set to be selected. Here, the opponent (enemy character) of the battle effect is determined by the pre-reading lottery performed at the start of the seven star dance mode (when the variable display of the third rotation ends or the start of the variable display of the fourth rotation). Be done. That is, according to the preliminary determination result (big hit expectation degree) of one or more operation reserving balls existing at the start of the seven star battle mode (at the end of the third rotation change display or at the start of the fourth rotation change display) And one of the plurality of enemy characters X1 to X5 is selected as the opponent. Here, the operation reserving ball which is the target of the pre-reading lottery is the operation reserving ball of the second special symbol. The strength of the enemy character is set in the order of "enemy character X1"> "enemy character X2"> "enemy character X3"> "enemy character X4"> "enemy character X5". That is, of the plurality of characters X1 to X5, the enemy character X1 is the strongest and the enemy character X5 is the weakest. Therefore, when the strongest enemy character X1 appears as an opponent, the possibility that the allied character will lose in the battle becomes high, and the jackpot expectation of the SP reach effect becomes relatively low. On the other hand, when the weakest enemy character X5 appears as an opponent, the possibility that the allied character will win in the battle is high, and the jackpot expectation of the SP reach effect is relatively high. It should be noted that when the seven-star battle dance mode is started (when the variable display of the fourth rotation is started), the opponent character name determined by the pre-reading lottery is displayed on the screen. There is. Therefore, based on the type of enemy character displayed on the screen, at least one operation pending at the start of the seven-star action mode (at the end of the third rotation change display or at the start of the fourth rotation change display) It is suggested or informed that there may be a big hit reserve in the ball. In other words, when there is a big hit as a result of the pre-reading lottery, a strong enemy character is hard to be selected and a weak character is easy to be selected. It will be difficult to select weak characters.

  As described above, the incompetence mode is an effect mode corresponding to the selection states 8 to 10 as the variation pattern selection state. The number of times of stay in the matchless dance mode is "90 times" as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol. When staying in the Incomparable Dance Mode, the only possible gaming state is the time saving state. If the matchless dance mode (the 11th to 100th rotations) is completed, that is, if the continuous play mode is ended, the special effect mode is entered, and the gaming state is returned to the normal state. As a modification, the special effect mode may not be provided, and when the continuous mode is ended, the normal effect mode may be entered.

  On the other hand, when the next big hit occurs when the currently running production mode is the continuous play mode (the hold continuous mode, the seven-star battle dance mode, the insane battle dance mode), the jackpot type and the presence or absence of V winning in the special game Regardless of the above, the mode shifts to the hold mode (hold mode) again, and the continuous mode will be continued.

  When one of the plural effect modes is set, a background dedicated to the effect mode is displayed on the screen as an effect (variation effect) indicating that the user is staying in the effect mode. An image is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11.

  Subsequently, the decorative symbol in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a schematic view showing symbol attributes of a decorative symbol in the eighth embodiment. The decorative design in this example is formed by the combination of the identification element consisting of numerals and the color (display color) given to the identification element. In this example, all nine types of numbers “1” to “9” are set as identification elements (that is, all nine types of decorative designs exist). The decorative symbols are arranged in the order of “1” to “9” according to the arrangement of the symbol rows, and on the effect display device 70, the order of “1” to “9” (or the order of “9” to “1”) Is cyclically displayed or scrolled in each display area Z1, Z2, Z3, and after “9”, it returns to “1” again (or after “1”, it returns to “9” again) . This specification is the same as in the other embodiments. Each decorative symbol has a symbol attribute determined by the type of color attached to the identification element. That is, even if a plurality of decorative symbols are configured from different identification elements, they are grouped into the same symbol attribute by being given the same color. In this example, three types of "blue", "red", and "golden" are set as the color of the decorative symbol. In the drawings, the display modes of three kinds of decorative symbols of "blue", "red" and "gold" are expressed by "white", "hatched" and "filled". Specifically, the decorative symbols "2", "4", "6" and "8" are classified into blue pattern attributes (blue attributes), and the decorative symbols "1", "3", "5" and "9" "" Is classified into a red pattern attribute (red attribute), and the decorative pattern "7" is classified into a gold pattern attribute (golden attribute). In this example, as the symbol attribute of the decorative symbol, the degree of expectation for winning the winning balls and the degree of expectation for the probability transition (V prize) increase one by one in the order of “blue” <“red” <“gold”. Hereinafter, for convenience, the decorative symbol of blue attribute is also referred to as “blue symbol”, the decorative symbol of red attribute is referred to as “red symbol”, and the decorative symbol of golden attribute is also referred to as “gold symbol”.

  FIG. 112 is a schematic view showing a big hit symbol table in the eighth embodiment. In the big hit symbol table, a big hit symbol (a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs) is associated with each big hit type. In the eighth embodiment, the "big hit symbol" refers to a combination of decorative symbols at the occurrence of a big hit.

  The big hit design is composed of a combination "* · * · *" of stop modes in which three decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) are aligned (*: decorative symbol of any number). The jackpot symbol in this example is a gold symbol combination that is determined to have won the conditional identification jackpot (16R conditional identification jackpot) of “7 · 7 · 7”, “1 · 1 · 1”, “3 · 3.・ Red symbol combination which indicates that the possibility of winning a conditional specified jackpot such as 3 "," 5, 5 and 5 "and" 9 and 9 and 9 "is relatively high," 2 and 2 and 2 ", A distinction is made between blue pattern combinations indicating that the possibility of winning a conditional specific jackpot such as “4.4.4.”, “6.6.6.6,” “8.8.8.8” is relatively low. In other words, “7. 7 • 7” is a big hit symbol that determines that “conditional specific big hit” is won, while other odd symbol (red symbol) combinations and even symbols (blue symbol) With regard to the combination, it is an uncertain jackpot symbol that it is uncertain which of “conditional specific big hit” and “conditional regular big hit” is won. In addition, also in the case of winning the 16R conditional specified big hit, as a big hit symbol, a red symbol combination or a blue symbol combination may be adopted. Furthermore, in the case of winning the 2R conditional specified big hit, as a big hit symbol, it includes barrage eyes (for example, "1. 9 · 8"), reach deviation eyes (for example, "2 · 1 · 2"), and special symbols An eye (for example, “3 · □ · 3”) may be adopted. Here, “□” may be, for example, a decorative symbol described as “seven star”.

  The jackpot symbol is determined according to the jackpot type selected in the special symbol lottery process. In addition, in FIG. 112, although it is comprised as a common big hit symbol table which does not depend on the playing state at the time of big hit winning, it is not limited to this, For example, several kinds which differ according to playing state at the time of big hit winning You may prepare a jackpot symbol table.

  When the player wins the "16R conditional specified big hit" in the lottery process of the first special symbol, a gold symbol combination is selected as the big hit symbol. In addition, in the lottery process of the first special symbol winning either "6R conditional normal big hit 1", "6R conditional normal big hit 2", "5R conditional normal big hit 1" and "5R conditional normal big hit 2" In this case, a red symbol combination or a blue symbol combination is selected as a big hit symbol.

  When the player wins the "16R conditional specified big hit" in the lottery process of the second special symbol, a gold symbol combination is selected as the big hit symbol. In addition, in the lottery process of the second special symbol, if you win any of "12R conditional specific big hit", "8R conditional specific big hit", "4R conditional specific big hit" and "2R conditional specific big hit", A red symbol combination or a blue symbol combination is selected as a big hit symbol.

  Subsequently, the jackpot effect in the eighth embodiment will be described. The effect pattern of the jackpot effect is basically determined based on the type of the jackpot if the result of the judgment of the acceptance or rejection is a jackpot. However, even if the type of the big hit is the same, the presentation pattern of the big hit during the big hit may differ depending on the gaming state at the time of the big hit, the presence or absence of the V winning, and the like.

  In the jackpot effect, although it will be described in detail later, the right upper part of the screen displays a right hitting image prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the right hitting area, and the lower left part of the screen plays the special game The notification of the number of balls awarded for notifying the number of balls awarded to the player is displayed (for details, refer to FIG. 122). In addition, during consecutive loafing, the number of consecutive loafings which is the number of times a big hit continues in the specific gaming state is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. Further, in the jackpot effect, when the gaming ball enters the specific area in the specific round (the second round in this example), the V winning notification image is displayed. In addition, the detail of said prize ball number alerting | rendering effect is mentioned later. In addition, as a modification of the big hit internal effect, in each round of the special game, the pseudo decoration pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "pseudo decoration pattern") is displayed in a variable display and stop display (provisional stop display, final stop display) You may configure it. It is preferable that this pseudo-decorative symbol is a symbol aspect (special symbol for big hit) that is different from the normal decorative symbol that is variably displayed during non-special game. However, it is desirable to use numbers (for example, “1” to “9”, etc.) as the identification elements of this pseudo decorative symbol, as in the case of general identification elements (the display mode of the numbers is a special display mode Is desirable). As a matter of course, the simulated decorative symbol may be in the same or similar symbol form as the decorative symbol variably displayed during non-special game. The variable display and the stop display (provisional stop display, decision stop display) of the pseudo decorative symbol are performed for each round of the special game. That is, the variable display of the pseudo-decorative symbol is completed in round units. For example, when the number of special game rounds is 16 rounds, the variable display of the simulated decorative symbol is performed 16 times during the special game. It is determined that the player is in an advantageous state when the simulated decorative symbol is stopped for a specific combination. The advantageous state is, for example, promotion of a jackpot type or a special game type. Specifically, transition to a definite change state (high probability state) after the end of the special game currently being executed, and an increase (round up) of the number of rounds of the special game currently being executed. In addition, it may be determined that a pending hitan (that there is a big hit pending in the operating pending ball currently possessed). A specific example is as follows. Although illustration is omitted, first, the combination of even symbols (blue symbols) is fixedly stopped and displayed in a certain variable display, and it is suggested or notified that the player has won the low profit jackpot. When the special game is started, the variable display of the simulated decoration symbol is performed in each round. That is, the game is developed as one round of change display of pseudo one rotation. Here, until the N-th round, the pseudo decoration pattern is displayed in a non-specific combination mode and stopped and displayed at the end of each round (when the big winning opening is closed). And at the end of the (N + 1) th round (when the big winning opening is closed), the pseudo decoration symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed in a specific combination mode, suggesting or notifying that the big hit type has been promoted to high profit big hit Ru. In this manner, the pseudo decorative symbol is displayed as a fixed stop in a specific combination mode (for example, a combination of the same odd symbols (such as "3.3.3" or "7.7.7" as a special display mode). In this way, it is suggested or notified to the player that the special game is transitioned to the definite change state after the end of the special game, or that the number of rounds of the special game has been rounded up. Also, in addition to that, during the special game execution, reach effect (SP reach effect) with the pseudo decoration pattern is performed, and it is seamless over the execution of the special game to after the end (fluctuating display after the end) By being displayed as a series of effects, it is possible to expand the time width of the notification regarding notification of a state advantageous to the player. By adopting the above-described modified example, it is possible to perform surprise with a big hit that is not found in the conventional game machine, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, FIG. 113 (A) is a schematic diagram showing a big hit start demonstration time setting table, and FIG. 113 (B) is a schematic diagram showing a big hit end demonstration time setting table. The big hit start demonstration time and the big hit end demonstration time are set based on the above-mentioned demonstration time setting table.

  The jackpot start demonstration time is determined according to the type of jackpot and the gaming state at the time of jackpot occurrence. The determination of the jackpot start demonstration time is not included in the selection condition of the jackpot start demonstration time since the presence or absence of the V winning is not determined unlike the judgment of the jackpot end demonstration time. When the gaming state at the time of the big hit occurrence is the normal state, as the big hit type, “13 seconds” if you win the 2R condition specific big hit with the condition 2R, “10 seconds” if you win the other condition specific big hit If conditionally, the jackpot is won, "4.68 seconds" is selected. When the gaming state at the time of the big hit occurrence is a time saving state, as the big hit type, “13 seconds” if you win the 2R condition specific big hit with the condition 2R, if other condition specific big hit and the condition normal big hit you win "2 seconds" is selected. When the gaming state at the time of jackpot occurrence is a definite change state, "two seconds" is selected regardless of the jackpot type.

  The big hit end demonstration time is determined according to the type of big hit, the gaming state at the time of the big hit occurrence, and the presence or absence of the V prize. When the gaming state is the normal state and the condition winning jackpot is won normally and V is not awarded in the special game, “12.5 seconds” is set as the big hit end demonstration time. That is, typically, “12.5 seconds” is selected when a conditional normal big hit is won as the first hit (when transitioning to the non-double mission mode after the end of the special game). The big hit end demonstration time (12.5 seconds) at the time of the first hit is used as a performance measure of a notice information effect for calling attention to prevent forgetting of the prepaid card or theft. In this example, a text image of a message such as "Please be careful about forgetting a prepaid card and theft" is displayed on the matchless entry screen displayed in the big hit end demo. In addition, when winning a conditional specific big hit (except for the 2R conditional specific big hit) when the gaming state is a normal state, regardless of the presence or absence of V winning in the special game, as a big hit end demonstration time "one second "Is set. In that case, during the execution of the big hit end demonstration, do not perform the alert notification effect regarding forgetting etc. of the prepaid card, but instead perform the above-mentioned alert notification effect during the execution of the final round in the special game It has become.

  On the other hand, in other cases, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit or the presence or absence of the V winning in the special game, "1 second" as the big hit end demonstration time, regardless of which big hit type was won Is set. Here, when the effect mode shifts to the continuous play mode (the hold continuous mode) after the end of the special game, “1 second” of the big hit end demonstration time is used as a play length of the special continuous effect.

[Various effects]
In the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment of this configuration, as described above, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200, the image control board 300, etc. according to the progress of the game and the like. It is configured. In the following, among the various types of game effects, the "hold series mode effect" and the "number of balls informing effect game effect" will be described in detail.

<On-hold series mode effect>
The hold series mode effect is executed across the big hit end demonstration and the hold series mode (variation display within 3 rotations after the end of the special game) when transitioning to the hold series mode as a production mode after the special game ends. It is an effect. This hold-up mode effect connects the big-hit end demonstration effect and the change effect in the hold-action mode as a series of continuous effects, and if a big hit occurs while staying in the hold-action mode, it is as if It is an effect that makes it appear as if a big hit occurred at the first turn after the end of the special game.

  First, the variation production pattern set in the hold series mode will be described. FIG. 114 is a schematic view showing a variation effect pattern table when the currently-executed effect mode is the hold series mode. The change effect pattern table dedicated to the hold series mode is a change effect pattern table corresponding to the change pattern tables 3 to 5 of the special symbol. In the figure, (A) shows a variation effect pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern table 3 (the first rotation in the hold series mode), and (B) in the figure corresponds to the variation pattern table 4 (the second rotation in the hold series mode) (C) in the figure is a variation effect pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern table 5 (the third rotation of the hold series mode). In the variation effect pattern table, the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol is associated with the variation pattern of the special symbol for each result (big hit / displacement) of the success / failure determination.

  As shown in (A) in the figure, in the first rotation of the hold series mode, the fluctuation effect pattern PEH3-1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern PH3-1 of the removal, and the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 of the big hit The fluctuation presentation pattern PEA 3-1 is associated. The fluctuation effect pattern PEH3-1 is a fluctuation effect pattern of outliers for which a special continuous effect is executed, and "0 times" is set as the number of times of execution of the pseudo ream. On the other hand, the fluctuation effect pattern PEA3-1 is a big hit fluctuation effect pattern in which a special continuous effect and a special big hit effect are executed, and "three" is set as the number of times of execution of the pseudo ream.

  As shown in (B) in the figure, in the second rotation of the retention series mode, the fluctuation effect pattern PEH4-1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern PH4-1 of the out-of-plane variation, and the fluctuation pattern PA4-1 of the big hit The fluctuation presentation pattern PEA4-1 is associated. The variation effect pattern PEH4-1 is a variation effect pattern of outliers for which a special continuous effect is executed, and "0 times" is set as the number of times of execution of the pseudo sequence. On the other hand, the fluctuation effect pattern PEA4-1 is a big hit fluctuation effect pattern in which a special continuous effect and a special big hit effect are executed, and "twice" is set as the number of times of execution of the pseudo ream.

  As shown in (C) in the figure, in the third rotation of the retention series mode, the fluctuation effect pattern PEH5-1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern PH5-1 of the loss, and the fluctuation pattern PA5-1 of the big hit The fluctuation presentation pattern PEA 5-1 is associated. The fluctuation effect pattern PEH5-1 is a fluctuation effect pattern of out-of-order for which special continuous effect is executed, and "0 times" is set as the number of times of execution of the pseudo ream. On the other hand, the fluctuation effect pattern PEA 5-1 is a big hit fluctuation effect pattern in which a special continuous effect and a special big hit effect are executed, and “one” is set as the number of times of execution of the pseudo ream.

  Subsequently, an outline of the hold series mode effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a time chart for illustrating the flow of the hold series mode effect. The reserve series mode effect is large in the "preset series mode deviation production" in which the fluctuation display in the reserve series mode is all out, and the "hold series mode big hit demonstration" in which the big hit occurs in the fluctuation display in the reserve series mode It is divided. In the figure, (A) shows the flow of the staging system out-of-order production, and (B) to (D) show the flow of the staging series big hit presentation. In the eighth embodiment, when it is not necessary to distinguish between “hold series mode shift effect” and “hold series mode jackpot effect”, both are simply referred to as “hold series mode effect” without distinction.

  When the effect mode currently being executed is the hold series mode, the decorative symbol is variably displayed as a small symbol at the edge of the screen and displayed as a temporary stop or a final stop (see FIGS. 117 and 118 for details). ). In the following, “determination stop” means to display a decoration symbol stop display (completely stop display) in a definite manner. Further, "temporary stop" refers to stop display of the decorative symbol in a provisional state (not completely stop display, for example, slightly fluctuating in the vertical or horizontal direction). The "fixed stop time" is a time for holding the decorative symbol in a fixed stop state. The "temporary stop time" is a time for holding a state where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. In this example, the same time value (0.3 seconds) is set as the fixed stop time and the temporary stop time.

«Pending run off mode production»
As shown in FIG. 115 (A), the hold-up mode release effect is an effect that is executed when all of the first to third rotation change displays of the hold-up mode are missed. The off-hold mode off stage effect is developed in a flow of a big hit end demonstration → first rotation fluctuation display (off) → second rotation fluctuation display (off) → third rotation fluctuation display (off). In this hold-off mode out-of-order effect, although the details will be described later, a special continuous effect is executed across the big hit end demonstration and the three-rotation fluctuation display of the hold-on mode. When the effect on the off-hold mode is ended, the next effect mode (seven star dance mode) is entered, and the variable display of the fourth rotation is started.

  In the case where the hold-off mode is out of effect, in principle (when each variable display is performed without interruption), from the start of the variable display of the first rotation to the end of the variable display of the third rotation The time scale of is set to "7 seconds". The above time scale is the sum of each fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation to the end of the fluctuation display of the third rotation and its fixed stop time (except the fixed stop time of the third rotation) It consists of a value. Specifically, "4.4 seconds" is set as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the first rotation (see the fluctuation effect pattern PH3-1 in FIG. 114). In the fluctuation display (see the fluctuation effect pattern PH4-1 in FIG. 114) of the second rotation, “1 second” is set as the fluctuation time. In the fluctuation display (see the fluctuation effect pattern PH5-1 in FIG. 114) of the third rotation, “1 second” is set as the fluctuation time. Therefore, the above time scale is the fluctuation time of the first rotation (4.4 seconds) + determination stop time of the first rotation (0.3 seconds) + fluctuation time of the second rotation (1 second) + determination stop time of the second rotation (0.3 seconds) + the third rotation fluctuation time (1 second) = “7 seconds”. The time scale of "7 seconds" is a reference effect time of special continuous effect described later (a standard effect time in the case where each variation display is continuously performed without interruption).

  Here, as described above, when all of the first to third rotations in the suspension series mode are off, the fluctuation time of the first rotation is the longest time among the fluctuation time of the first to third rotations (4 .4 seconds). The fluctuation time (4.4 seconds) of this first rotation is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the normal symbol (winning symbol, non-winning symbol) stop display in the state that the electric chew support function is activated (ball entry easy state) It is preferable to set the time to be longer than the open time (total open time) of the normal motorized character 622. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the second and third rotations (1 second) is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the state where the electric support function is activated (the ball entering state is easy), the normal symbol (winning symbol, non-winning symbol) It is preferable to set the stop display time of time shorter than the open time (total open time) of the normal motorized part 622.

«Holding mode jackpot effect»
As shown in FIGS. 115 (B) to (D), the holding series mode jackpot effect is an effect that is executed when a big hit occurs in any of the three rotations of the fluctuation display staying in the holding mode. . Therefore, in the holding series mode jackpot effect, when a big hit occurs in the first rotation fluctuation display, when a big hit occurs in the second rotation fluctuation display, and when a big hit occurs in the third rotation fluctuation display There is. The holding series mode jackpot effect performed when a big hit occurs in the first rotation fluctuation display is developed in a flow of a big hit start demonstration → first rotation fluctuation display (big hit). Hold series mode big hit effect performed when big hit occurs in the 2nd rotation fluctuation display, it is developed by the flow of the big hit end demonstration → 1st rotation fluctuation display (missing) → 2nd rotation fluctuation display (big hit) Be done. Hold series mode big hit effect performed when big hit occurs in the 3rd rotation fluctuation display, big hit end demonstration → 1st rotation fluctuation display (missing) → 2nd rotation fluctuation display (missing) → 3 rotation It is developed by the flow such as fluctuation display (big hit) of. Although this holding system mode jackpot effect will be described in detail later, after a special continuous effect is performed across the big hit end demonstration and the fluctuation display of 3 rotations of the holding system mode, a jackpot is announced and the number of rounds (earning It is an effect that a special jackpot effect that the expected prize ball number is promoted is performed.

  Even if a big hit occurs in any of the fluctuation displays of the first to third rotations in the hold series mode, the fluctuation display relating to the big hit occurrence from the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation The time scale until the end time is always set to "24 seconds". The above time scale is a sum of the fluctuation time from the fluctuation display of the first rotation to the fluctuation display relating to the big hit occurrence and the decided stop time (except the decided stop time at the big hit occurrence). In the present example, even if a big hit occurs in the fluctuation display of what number of rotation among the fluctuation display of the first to third rotation, the above time scale is set as the same time value (24 seconds) There is. In addition, although the production time of special continuous production in the case of big hit in holding series mode is designed to become the same time value even when big hit occurs in any of the 1st rotation to the 3rd rotation, There may be a slight error or may be substantially the same (other design values may be used as the design value of the fluctuation time other than the time values shown in FIG. 114).

  As shown in (B) of the figure, when a big hit occurs in the first rotation fluctuation display, the fluctuation display (the first rotation fluctuation display) related to the big hit occurrence from the start of the first rotation fluctuation display The time scale until the end time is set to "24 seconds". Specifically, in the fluctuation display (see the fluctuation effect pattern PEA 3-1 in FIG. 114) of the first rotation of the big hit, as described above, “24 seconds” is set as the fluctuation time. Therefore, the above-mentioned time scale is the first rotation variation time (24 seconds) = “24 seconds”.

  As shown in (C) in the figure, when a big hit occurs in the second rotation fluctuation display, the fluctuation display (the second rotation fluctuation display) related to the big hit occurrence from the start of the first rotation fluctuation display. The time scale until the end time is set to "24 seconds". Specifically, “4.4 seconds” is set as the fluctuation time in the variable display of the first rotation, which is the change (refer to the fluctuation effect pattern PEH3-1 in FIG. 114). In the fluctuation display (see the fluctuation effect pattern PEA 4-1 in FIG. 114) of the second rotation of the big hit, “19.3 seconds” is set as the fluctuation time. Therefore, the above-mentioned time scale is the fluctuation time of the first rotation (4.4 seconds) + determination stop time of the first rotation (0.3 seconds) + fluctuation time of the second rotation (19.3 seconds) = "24 seconds" It becomes.

  As shown in (D) in the figure, when a big hit occurs in the third rotation change display, the change display related to the big hit occurrence from the start of the first rotation change display (third rotation change display) The time scale until the end time is set to "24 seconds". Specifically, “4.4 seconds” is set as the fluctuation time in the variable display of the first rotation, which is the change (refer to the fluctuation effect pattern PEH3-1 in FIG. 114). In the fluctuation display (see the fluctuation effect pattern PEA 4-1 in FIG. 114) of the second rotation, “1 second” is set as the fluctuation time. In the fluctuation display of the third rotation of the big hit (see the fluctuation effect pattern PEA 5-1 in FIG. 114), “18 seconds” is set as the fluctuation time. Therefore, the above time scale is the fluctuation time of the first rotation (4.4 seconds) + determination stop time of the first rotation (0.3 seconds) + fluctuation time of the second rotation (1 second) + determination stop time of the second rotation (0.3 seconds) + the third rotation fluctuation time (18 seconds) = “24 seconds”.

(Number of symbol stops in holding mode)
Even if a big hit occurs in any of the fluctuation displays of the first to third rotations in the hold series mode, the fluctuation display relating to the big hit occurrence from the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation The total number of stops of the decorative symbol until the end time (the number of stops of the addition of the number of times that the decorative symbol stops and the number of temporary stops) is set to the same number. As shown in (B) in the figure, when the fluctuation display of the first rotation is a big hit, three temporary stops and one fixed stop by the pseudo-train occur in the fluctuation display of the first rotation. The total number of stops for the decorative symbol is "4 times". As shown in (C) in the figure, when the fluctuation display of the second rotation is a big hit, one fixed stop occurs in the fluctuation display of the first rotation, and twice by the pseudo-series in the fluctuation display of the second rotation. Because the temporary stop and the fixed stop occur once, the total number of stops for the decorative symbol is "four times". As shown in (D) in the figure, when the fluctuation display of the third rotation is a big hit, one definite stop occurs in the fluctuation display of the first rotation and one definite stop in the fluctuation display of the second rotation. Occurs, and one temporary stop and one final stop due to the pseudo run occur in the variable display of the third rotation, so the total number of stops for the decorative symbol is "four times". As described above, when a big hit occurs in any of the first to third rotation display while staying in the hold series mode, a big hit is generated from the start of the first rotation display. The total number of stops of the fixed number of stops and the number of temporary stops of the decorative symbol until the end of the variable display is always set to “four times”. As a result, even if a big hit occurs in any of the fluctuation displays of the first to third rotations in the hold series mode, a big hit occurs after the same number of fluctuation displays. It can look like it does. In addition, when this configuration requirement is described in a generalized or higher-level concept, "the total number of times of variation display which is the number of additions of the number of times of variation display of the first symbol and the number of variation of second symbol is calculated after the end of the special game If the result of the first success or failure judgment or the result of the second success or failure judgment is a big hit under the condition of being within X times, the variable display pertaining to the big hit is counted after the end of the special game and the Yth ( In the case of the variable display of Y ≦ X), the number of times that the decorative symbol combination is determined and stopped between the end of the special game and the Y-th variable display and the number of times that the decorative symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed From the end of the special game to the Zth variable display in the case where the variable display relating to the number of times of accumulation and the big hit is the Zth (Z ≦ X and Z ≠ Y) variable display, counting from the end of the special game Decorative symbol combination is finalized during Can be a combined count of the number of times as the decorative symbol combination is stopped display is temporarily stopped and displayed is expressed as configured "be the same. As a modification example, the number of pseudo runs in the big hit fluctuation in the case of big hit in the 1st rotation of the hold series mode is "2 times", and the number of pseudo runs in the big hit fluctuation in the case of big hit in the 2nd rotation of the hold series mode May be set to “1 time”, and the number of times of pseudo run in the big hit fluctuation in the case of a big hit in the third rotation of the hold run mode may be set to “0 times”. That is, in FIG. 115, the third pseudo-series in the big hit fluctuation in the case of big hit in the first rotation of the retention series mode, and the second pseudo in the big hit fluctuation in the case of big hit in the second rotation of the retention series mode. The first pseudo run in the big hit change in the case of making a big hit in the third turn of the run and hold run modes may be eliminated, and the change may be continued as it is.

(Disengagement symbol in pending train mode)
The combination of temporary stop symbols when temporary stop display is performed as a combination of three off-set decorative symbols in the first to third rotation variable display in the hold series mode is “2 · 4 · 6” . Similarly, in the variable display of the first rotation to the third rotation in the hold series mode, the combination of the fixed stop symbols when the fixed stop display is performed as the combination of the three symbol off patterns in the 1st to 3rd rotation is “2 · 4 · 6” It is. Therefore, in the lottery process of the decorative symbols in the hold series mode, the combination of the disappointing symbols, whether it is the combination of the temporary stop symbols or the combination of the fixed stop symbols, is “2 as loose eyes (non-reach eyes) -"4-6" is to be selected. For the player who pays attention to the variation display of the decorative symbol, the same off-position symbol is used each time by adopting the saliency with the even-numbered & same color attribute "2 ・ 4 ・ 6" as the combination of the out-of-character pattern. It is possible to strongly impress the player that the temporary stop display or the final stop display is displayed, and it is possible to further enhance the rendering effect in the hold series mode.

  Subsequently, specific effect contents of the on-hold series mode effect will be described. As described above, the hold series mode effect includes the special continuous play performed across the big hit end demonstration and the hold series mode. Even when the on-hold series mode jackpot effect is executed or the off-on-station mode deviation production is executed, the contents of the special continuous effect are basically the same.

«Special continuous production»
The special continuous rendition is a movie rendition in which a predetermined image is made to flow through the entire period of the performance measure. Specifically, in the special continuous rendition, a predetermined character image is displayed while sequentially switching one character at a time in the order of "seven" → "star" → "fight" → "dance" on the screen, and finally "seven stars" It is an effect of displaying a character image (logo image) of “fight dance”. This final screen (the logo image of "Seven Star Fighting Dance") is loop-displayed using the remaining period until the end timing of the special continuous rendering comes. That is, the special continuous rendition is configured as a danglingly displayed rendition without restriction on the display time of the final screen.

  The end timing of the special continuous effect is basically at the end of the fluctuation display of the third rotation when the fluctuation display of the first to third rotations in the holding series mode is all off, and the suspension is performed. In the case where a big hit occurs in any of the first to third rotation change displays in the continuous mode, it is 17 seconds before the end of the change display related to the big hit occurrence. The time scale of "17 seconds" is a special big hit effect production time (fixed time).

  During execution of this special continuous rendition, a series of movie renditions are reproduced on the screen after the big hit end demonstration starts, and the three lines of decoration symbols are shrunk as small symbols, for example, in the right corner of the screen Is displayed. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the main effect (special continuous effect), and this special continuous effect can be shown as if it is an effect during a big hit end demonstration. Therefore, after this special continuous effect ends, it can be made to look like the variable display of the first rotation after the end of the special game is started. Therefore, even if a big hit occurs in any of the first to third variation display, it can be simulated as if a big hit occurred in the first variation display. In addition, as described above, even if the decorative symbol is variably displayed as a small symbol at the edge of the screen, when the decorative symbol suddenly appears and the variable display of the first rotation starts, the special game is ended. Since there is a risk that the player (the variable display of the first turn is started) may be easily missed by the player, the decorative symbol (for example, the combination of the previous big hit symbols) from before or at the start of the big hit end demonstration It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the special game has ended (that the variable display of the first rotation is started) by displaying the variable display and connecting it to the first rotation of the variable display.

  Here, in this example, regardless of the holding status at the end of the special game (the presence or absence of the operation holding ball, the number, the success or failure), the variable display of the first to third rotations from the start of the big hit end demonstration ( Special continuous effects until the end of the fluctuation display of the all out), or until the predetermined timing (the end timing described above) of the fluctuation display relating to the occurrence of a big hit among the first to third rotations comes Is performed (the movie effect is played back). Specifically, if there are three or more operation holding balls at the end of the special game, or if there are operation holding balls that will be a big hit even if there are less than three operation holding balls at the end of the special game Since the variable display in the hold series mode can be continuously executed without interruption, the movie effect (special continuous effect) can be reproduced during the above-mentioned reference effect time (7 seconds). On the other hand, if there is no operation holding ball at the end of the special game, or if there are less than 3 operation holding balls at the end of the special game (all with an action holding ball for all off), all of them will be digested In the case where the operation holding ball ceases to exist, the blank time (a situation in which the fluctuation display is temporarily interrupted) in which the fluctuation display of each time is interrupted during the holding series mode occurs. However, in this example, the movie effect is played back in a ditch from the end of the special game (at the start of the big hit end demo), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the final screen is looped without restriction of time. Even if the above-mentioned blank time (the time when there is no operation holding ball and the fluctuation display stops), the reproduction time of the final screen is only extended by that amount than the standard presentation time (7 seconds), The above problems do not occur (the problems that the movie rendering ends on the way do not occur).

  Further, in the present example, the chance-up effect can be performed while the hold on mode (special continuous effect) is being performed. The chance-up effect is a pre-reading effect for suggesting or notifying that a big hit may occur in the fluctuation display of the first rotation to the third rotation in the hold series mode. This chance-up effect is an effect in which the logo image “one shot per thousand” is lighted and displayed in a predetermined display color at a predetermined timing during execution of the special continuous effect, and whether the logo image appears or not, or Depending on the type of light emission color of the logo image, the level of the big hit expectation in the hold series mode is suggested or notified (details will be described later).

  Whether the chance-up effect is performed or not and the pattern of the effect are determined in accordance with the jackpot expectation of the operation holding ball existing immediately before the start of the jackpot end demonstration. That is, the pre-read lottery timing of the chance up effect is set to any timing from the end of the round game (last round) to the start of the big hit end demonstration. The operation holding balls to be subjected to the pre-reading lottery are the first to third operation holding balls of the second special symbol. Therefore, even if there are any number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol, it is not a target of the pre-reading lottery. The reason is that, as described above, in this example, so-called preferential digestion is adopted, which preferentially digests the action-retention ball of the second special symbol over the action-retention ball of the first special symbol. In addition, the reason for limiting the operation reserve ball of the 2nd special symbol of pre-reading object to 3 or less (1st-3rd) is whether this chance up production occurs a big hit during reserve series mode or not This is because it is necessary to set the operation holding ball (hold 1 to hold 3) corresponding to the first to third rotations staying in the hold series mode as the target of the pre-reading lottery, since it is the advance notice announcement effect to give notice. Therefore, just before the big hit start demonstration, even if four operation upper limit balls of the second special symbol are present, all four operation suspension balls are subject to the pre-reading lottery. Instead, the first to third operation holding balls are subject to the pre-reading lottery. In addition, when there are less than 3 action | operation pending balls of the 2nd special symbol which exists immediately before a big hit end demonstration, less than 3 (1 or 2) action pending balls become a target of a pre-reading lottery. However, as a modification, it may be configured to execute the prefetch lottery for the chance-up effect only when there are three or more operation reserved balls of the second special symbol at the prefetch lottery timing.

  FIG. 116 is a schematic view showing a chance-up effect lottery table. In the chance-up effect lottery table, whether or not the chance-up effect is executable and its effect pattern are defined. In the drawing, for convenience, the “selection rate” is described, but in fact, according to the acquired lottery random number value, the judgment memory for determining the executability of the chance-up effect and the effect pattern thereof (lottery A range of random number values is set, and whether or not the chance-up effect is to be executed and the effect pattern thereof are determined based on which determination number the lottery random number value belongs to. In this example, whether or not the chance-up effect is performed and the effect pattern thereof are determined to be big hit pending within the operation pending ball of the second special symbol (the first to third operation pending balls) to be subjected to the pre-reading lottery. It is determined depending on whether it exists or not. In the chance-up effect lottery table in the figure, one of “No effect”, “Normal pattern (white)”, and “Premier pattern (rainbow color)” is displayed for the pre-judgment result (presence or absence of big hit) A selection rate (determination number) is assigned to be selectable. The normal pattern is an effect pattern in which a logo image of “Nana-Sangai” is lighted and displayed in white on the screen. The premier pattern is an effect pattern in which a logo image of "Seven Star Fighting Dance" is displayed in rainbow colors on the screen. The Premier pattern is selected when there is a big hit in the pre-judgment result, but it is not selected if there is no big hit in the pre-judgment result (in the case of all being dropped). It is an effect pattern of. Therefore, regarding this chance-up effect, there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur during the execution of the hold series mode (first to third rotations) in the order of “no effect” <“normal pattern” <“premium pattern”. It can be said that

  Here, the execution timing of the chance-up effect (normal pattern, premier pattern) in the hold series mode is as follows. That is, when the first to third rotations in the holding series mode are all off, the execution timing of the chance-up effect is set to the third rotation. Further, when the first rotation in the hold series mode is a big hit, the execution timing of the chance-up effect is set in the pseudo third train of the first rotation. Further, when the second rotation in the hold series mode is a big hit, the execution timing of the chance-up effect is set to the second pseudo second rotation. Further, when the third rotation in the hold series mode is a big hit, the execution timing of the chance-up effect is set in the first pseudo-series of the third rotation. As a modification, the chance-up effect may not be configured as the preview effect but may be configured as the change effect (that is, an effect of performing the effect lottery / determination at the start of the change). In that case, if the first to third rotation variable display is off, the effect lottery / decision is made at the start of the third rotation second variable display, and any of the first to third rotation display When the jackpot is hit, the effect lottery / decision may be made at the start of the variable display of the first, second and third rotations respectively. In addition, about presentation execution timing, it is suitable to make it the same as the above-mentioned timing.

  Subsequently, an example of special special effects (including chance-up effects) will be described. FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the special continuous effect when all of the first to third rotations in the holding series mode are off, and FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram showing the third rotation in the holding series mode is a big hit It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of production of special continuous production when it becomes.

  First, an example of the special continuous effect when the first to third rotations in the hold series mode are all off will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in (A) of the figure, the big hit end demonstration is started at the end of the special game, and the reproduction of a predetermined movie effect is started as the special continuous effect. Along with the start of this special continuous rendition, "7, 7, 7" is displayed on the right end of the screen in a reduced size as the previous big hit symbol. In addition, the character of the first "seven" is displayed on the screen among the character string "seven stars fighting dance". In addition, at the start of the big hit end demonstration, a look-up lottery for chance-up effect is executed. In this pre-reading lottery, based on the prior determination result of the 1st to 3rd operation suspension ball of the second special symbol existing at the end of the big hit, does the operation suspension ball which becomes a big hit exist in the operation retention ball? Whether or not it is determined is determined, and whether or not the chance-up effect can be performed and the effect pattern thereof are determined according to the determination result. It is assumed that "no execution" is determined as the result of the look-ahead lottery this time.

  As shown in (B) in the figure, the effect mode shifts to the hold series mode, and variable display of the first rotation after the end of the special game is started. As described above, even when the effect mode shifts to the hold series mode, the special continuous effect (predetermined movie effect) is continuously displayed on the screen. In addition, the character "star" of the 2nd is displayed on the screen among the characters "Seven Star Battle Dance". In addition, while staying in the hold series mode, the decorative symbols of the three rows are variably displayed as small symbols at the right end of the screen.

  As shown in (C) in the figure, the variable display of the first rotation is finished, and “2 · 4 · 6” is displayed as a fixed stop as an out pattern. In addition, on the screen, the third character "fight" is displayed in the character string "seven stars fight dance".

  As shown in (D) in the figure, the variable display of the second rotation is started. In addition, the character "Mai" of the 4th is displayed on the screen among the characters "Seven Star Battle Dance". Thus, in the beginning of the special continuous production, the character string "Seven Star Fighting Dance" is displayed while switching one character at a time in the order of "seven" → "star" → "fight" → "dance".

  As shown in (E) in the figure, the variable display of the second rotation is finished, and “2 · 4 · 6” is displayed as a fixed stop as an out pattern. On the screen, the final screen of the movie rendering (the logo image of "Seven Star Fighting Dance") is displayed. Note that this final screen is displayed in a loop until the end timing of the special continuous effect (7 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation) comes.

  As shown in (F) in the figure, the variable display of the third rotation is started. On the screen, the final screen of the movie effect is continuously displayed.

  As shown in (G) in the figure, the fluctuation display of the third rotation is finished, and “2 · 4 · 6” is displayed as a fixed stop as an out pattern. As described above, as the stop symbols of the variable display of the first rotation to the third rotation, all the same out-of-design symbols “2 • 4 • 6” are displayed for a definite stop. At this time, the end timing of the special continuous effect comes, and the reproduction of the movie effect ends. In addition, when the first to third rotations of the variable display are ended, the hold series mode is ended.

  As shown in (H) in the figure, the word "1st BATTLE" is displayed on the screen, and the next effect mode (7 star battle dance mode) is entered, and the variation display of the fourth rotation after the end of the special game is displayed. Is started.

  Subsequently, an example of the special continuous effect when the variable display of the third rotation in the hold series mode is a big hit will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in (A) of the figure, the big hit end demonstration is started at the end of the special game, and the reproduction of a predetermined movie effect is started as the special continuous effect. Along with the start of this special continuous rendition, "7, 7, 7" is displayed on the right end of the screen in a reduced size as the previous big hit symbol. In addition, the character of the first "seven" is displayed on the screen among the character string "seven stars fighting dance". In addition, at the start of the big hit end demonstration, a look-up lottery for chance-up effect is executed. In this pre-reading lottery, based on the prior determination result of the 1st to 3rd operation suspension ball of the second special symbol existing at the end of the big hit, does the operation suspension ball which becomes a big hit exist in the operation retention ball? Whether or not it is determined is determined, and whether or not the chance-up effect can be performed and the effect pattern thereof are determined according to the determination result. It is assumed that the "premier pattern" has been determined as the result of the pre-reading lottery.

  As shown in (B) in the figure, the effect mode shifts to the hold series mode, and variable display of the first rotation after the end of the special game is started. As described above, even when the effect mode shifts to the hold series mode, the special continuous effect (predetermined movie effect) is continuously displayed on the screen. In addition, the character "star" of the 2nd is displayed on the screen among the characters "Seven Star Battle Dance". In addition, while staying in the hold series mode, the decorative symbols of the three rows are variably displayed as small symbols at the right end of the screen.

  As shown in (C) in the figure, the variable display of the first rotation is finished, and “2 · 4 · 6” is displayed as a fixed stop as an out pattern. In addition, on the screen, the third character "fight" is displayed in the character string "seven stars fight dance".

  As shown in (D) in the figure, the variable display of the second rotation is started. In addition, the character "Mai" of the 4th is displayed on the screen among the characters "Seven Star Battle Dance". Thus, in the beginning of the special continuous production, the character string "Seven Star Fighting Dance" is displayed while switching one character at a time in the order of "seven" → "star" → "fight" → "dance".

  As shown in (E) in the figure, the variable display of the second rotation is finished, and “2 · 4 · 6” is displayed as a fixed stop as an out pattern. On the screen, the final screen of the movie rendering (the logo image of "Seven Star Fighting Dance") is displayed. Note that this final screen is displayed in a loop until the end timing of the special continuous effect (7 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation) comes.

  As shown in (F) in the figure, the variable display of the third rotation is started. On the screen, the final screen of the movie effect is continuously displayed. Immediately after the variable display of the third rotation is started, a chance-up effect is generated, and a character image of "one hit per thousand" is lighted and displayed.

  As shown in (G) in the figure, “2 · 4 · 6” is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the third rotation. As described above, during the execution of the special continuous effect, the same off pattern “2 ···· 6” is used as the final stop symbol for the first rotation, the final stop symbol for the second rotation, and the temporary stop symbol for the third rotation. It will be the fixed stop display or the temporary stop display.

  As shown in (H) of the figure, when the re-variation display of the decorative symbol is started (when the variation display of the third rotation is resumed), the characters “1st BATTLE” are displayed (FIG. The same screen as in H) is displayed, and it looks as if the first display of variable display of the first game after the end of the special game is started (appears as if it has entered the seven star battle dance mode). Thus, when the re-variation display is started, special jackpot effect (detailed next description) is started.

«Special jackpot production»
Next, the special jackpot effect in the hold series mode will be described. The special jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 115, is a jackpot announcement effect notifying that the movable character 24 has dropped and a jackpot was won, and the number of prize balls that the player can acquire in the special game after the jackpot is decided. And an up-counting effect to inform the user. In the case of a big hit in any of the first to third rotation variation displays in the hold series mode, the same time value (17 seconds) is set as the time scale of the special big hit effect.

  The jackpot notification effect is an instruction to notify that the movable character 24 has fallen to the front of the screen and the jackpot has been decided. In addition, at this time, it is not notified to the player until which jackpot type is won, and the jackpot type (the number of prize balls theoretically obtainable in the special game in this special game) is played by the count-up effect described below. To the person who

  The count-up effect is a promotion effect in which the process of adding the theoretical number of prize balls obtainable (the number of obtainable prize balls) in the special game executed based on the current big hit is displayed. It should be noted that the number of obtainable winning balls (which may be referred to as “expected winning number of winning balls”) is actually determined in advance according to the jackpot type (the actual number of rounds). Here, the promotion effect (count-up effect) in the present example is a degree of profit than that of the provisional profit aspect after temporarily suggesting or notifying the provisional profit aspect that can be enjoyed based on the jackpot notified in the variable display. It is configured as an effect that suggests or informs a high true profit mode. Specifically, a false gainable prize ball number “0” is temporarily presented as a temporary profit mode (or without displaying a temporary profit mode), and a profit mode (a temporary profit mode is not displayed). The number of obtainable prize balls is promoted, and finally, the true profit mode (the number of obtainable true prize balls set according to the jackpot type) is presented. That is, in the count-up effect in this example, the round promotion effect (round-up effect in which the substantial number of rounds is suggested to be increased or promoted) is obtained through increase (promotion) of the obtainable number of obtainable prize balls that can be enjoyed by the player. It can be said that it is).

  In the count-up effect, a process of progressing the number of winning balls is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 15 by the player, and the final effect of displaying theoretically obtainable winning balls as a final result. It consists of an effect. The final result of the obtainable award number of balls is presented to the player at the timing when the variation display of the decorative symbol ends (the timing when the big hit symbol is decided and stopped) or before that.

  “Available winning ball number” is a theoretical winning ball that can be obtained by the player based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 65 in one special game executed based on the present big hit. Means number (theoretical value). Therefore, the number of obtainable winning balls is preset based on the type of big hit (special game). The number of winning prize balls (planned winning balls number) is the number of long open rounds (substantial round number) in the special game to be executed this time, and the upper limit number of winning balls to the big winning opening 65 in one round game ( It is calculated based on the specified count number) and the number of winning balls (the number of unit winning balls for the big winning opening) to be paid out each time the gaming ball enters one big winning opening 65. In the present example, “10 balls” is set as the prescribed count number, and “10 balls” is set as the unit winning number of balls. For example, in the special game executed by winning the “16R condition specific big hit”, the number of obtainable prize balls is 16 rounds (actual number of rounds) × 10 balls (specified count number) × 10 balls (unit prize balls) Number) becomes 1,600.

  FIG. 119 is a schematic view showing a count-up effect pattern table. The lottery timing of the count-up effect is the start time (or the start time or end time of the special continuous effect) of the variable display related to the big hit. The count-up effect pattern includes count-up effect pattern A and count-up effect pattern B. The count-up effect pattern A is effect content in which the number of winning balls is added by a single operation of the effect button 15. In the count-up effect pattern A, the number of effective operations of the effect button 15 permitted for one operation input instruction displayed on the screen is one. In this example, since a total of two operation input instructions are generated during the special jackpot effect, the operation of the effect button 15 in total is effective. The count-up effect pattern B is effect content in which the number of winning balls is added by continuous operation (so-called continuous hit) of the effect button 15. In the count-up effect pattern B, basically, while the instruction of "continuous hit" is displayed on the screen, there is no restriction on the number of effective operations of the effect button 15 (or 50 times which greatly exceeds two times or the like) The player can operate the effect button 15 a plurality of times (can be hit repeatedly). In this example, the expected value of the number of winning balls obtained in the special game is higher when the count-up effect pattern A is displayed than when the count-up effect pattern B is displayed. That is, rather than winning a big hit (a big hit with a small number of real rounds) with a relatively low available winning ball number, a big hit (a big hit with a large number of real rounds) was won In the case, it is set so that the probability that the count-up effect pattern A is selected is high (conversely, the probability that the count-up effect pattern B is selected is set low) . As a modification, the expected value of the number of winning balls obtained in the special game is higher in the case where the count-up effect pattern B is displayed than in the case where the count-up effect pattern A is displayed. It is also good. That is, rather than winning a big hit (a big hit with a small number of real rounds) with a relatively low available winning ball number, a big hit (a big hit with a large number of real rounds) was won In this case, the possibility that the count-up effect pattern B is selected may be set to be high (the probability that the count-up effect pattern A is selected may be set to be low). In the case of winning the jackpot that the number of actual rounds is set to 4 rounds or less (6R conditional normal jackpot 1, 2, 5R conditional normal jackpot 1, 2, 4R conditional specific jackpot, 2R conditional specific jackpot) The count-up effect pattern A is not selected, and only the count-up effect pattern B is selected. Note that, as a modification, in the case of a big hit where the number of actual rounds is set to four or less, the count-up effect itself may not be generated in the variable display. In addition, with regard to the 16R conditional specified big hit at the time of big hit in the gold symbol combination ("7 · 7 · 7"), it may be configured not to execute the count-up effect in the variable display.

  FIG. 120 is a schematic view showing a count-up effect lottery table. In this example, using this count-up effect lottery table, the addition value of the number of award balls displayed in the intermediate effect and the final display value (the number of obtainable prize balls) displayed in the final effect are determined. Do. Here, as a method of determining the addition value, the addition value corresponding to one button operation may be determined one by one from the count-up effect lottery table, or the scenario as the count-up effect (addition value And so on) may be determined. In order to determine the scenario, a combination of the first and second addition values may be determined at one time for the count-up effect pattern A, or a combination of the first to fifty addition values for the count-up effect pattern B. May be determined at one time. In the figure, for convenience, the numerical value to be provided for the lottery is omitted, but in fact, the determination number for determining the display value of the count-up effect for the acquired lottery random number value (range of lottery random value ) Is set, and the display value of the count-up effect is determined based on which determination number the lottery random number value belongs to.

  In (A) in the figure, the final display value (the number of obtainable prize balls) to be finally displayed in the count-up effect patterns A and B is defined. The final display value (acquired award ball number) is determined according to the type of big hit (the number of actual rounds), and if it is 2R conditional specified big hit, "200", 5R conditional normal big hit or 6R condition If the jackpot is a regular big hit "300", if the 4R conditional specific jackpot is "400", if the 8R conditional specific jackpot is "800", if the 12R conditional specific jackpot "1200", In the case of the specified jackpot with the 16R condition, “1600” is set.

  In (B) and (C) in the figure, in the count-up effect pattern A, an addition value (overlay value) of the number of prize balls displayed each time the effect button is operated once is defined. In the figure, (B) is an addition value of the number of winning balls to the first operation of the effect button, and (C) is an addition value of the number of winning balls to the second operation of the effect button 15. Specifically, “200”, “400”, “600”, “800”, “1000”, “1200”, “200”, “1000”, “1200”, “200”, “600”, “1000”, “200”, “600”, “600”, as the addition value of the number of winning balls displayed by one operation of the effect button 15 "1400" is set. Thus, the addition value of the number of winning balls set in the count-up effect pattern A is a value that is an integral multiple of the number of unit winning balls (10 balls) of the large winning opening 65. In addition, the addition value of the number of winning balls for each round is selected in such a range that the sum of the adding number of the first winning balls and the adding value of the second winning balls does not exceed the obtainable number of winning balls. Be done. Here, as a modification, “0” may be included in the candidate for the addition value shown in FIG. On the other hand, "1600" may be included in the candidates for the addition value shown in (C) in the figure.

  In (D) in the figure, in the count-up effect pattern B, the number of winning balls (overlay value) displayed each time the effect button is operated once is defined. Specifically, “1”, “2”, “3”, “5”, “10”, “20”, “30” are added values of the number of prize balls displayed by one operation of the effect button. “50”, “100”, “200”, “300”, “500”, and “1000” are set. Thus, the added value of the number of winning balls set in the count-up effect pattern B is different from the added value of the number of winning balls set in the count-up effect pattern A, and the number of unit winning balls in the special winning opening 65 (10 There are cases (for example, “1” to “5”, etc.) different from the numerical value of (integer multiple). Here, as a modification, “0” may be included in the candidate for the addition value shown in (D) in the figure. The additional value "0" is preferably selected at the time of consecutive hits after reaching the final display value (the number of obtainable prize balls), but before this final display value (the number of obtainable prize balls) is reached. It may be selected.

  Subsequently, an example of the effect of the count-up effect will be described. FIG. 121 is a schematic view showing an example of effect of count-up effect. The upper part in the drawing shows the count-up effect pattern A, and the lower part in the drawing shows the count-up effect pattern B. As will be described later in detail, in the eighth embodiment, after the final display value (the number of obtainable prize balls) is displayed, the combination “7, 7 or 7” of the decorative symbols etc. After the temporary stop display of the combination "7, 7, 7" or the like of the decorative symbol, the count up effect may be executed. Also, the display "Get ****" in the figure may be omitted.

  First, a presentation example of the count-up presentation pattern A will be described. Here, (A1) to (A4) in the figure indicate intermediate effects, and (A5) indicate final effects.

  As shown in (A1) in the figure, at the start of the count-up effect, a message (operation input instruction) of "one blow" is displayed on the screen together with an image imitating the effect button 15. In the upper left of the screen, a display area for presenting the number of obtainable prize balls at the current stage is provided, and "Get 0000" is displayed as an initial value of the obtainable prize balls.

  As shown in (A2) in the figure, when the player operates the effect button 15 once, a numerical value of "+200" is displayed as the addition value of the number of winning balls, and "200" is obtained as the obtainable number of winning balls at the current stage. It is informed that "has been added". As a result, the value of the obtainable winning number of balls displayed on the screen is updated to "200".

  As shown by (A3) in the figure, a message (operation input instruction) of "one blow" is displayed again on the screen together with the image imitating the effect button 15.

  As shown in (A4) in the figure, when the player operates the effect button 15 once, a numerical value of "+800" is displayed as an addition value of the number of winning balls, and "800 of the obtainable number of winning balls at the current stage is displayed. It is informed that the prize ball of '' has been added. As a result, the numerical value of the obtainable award number of balls displayed on the screen is updated to "1000".

  As shown in (A5) in the figure, at the timing when the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished and the big hit symbol "7, 7, 7" is displayed for a definite stop, the numerical value "1600" is displayed as the final display value It is informed that the number of obtainable balls obtainable by the player in the special game this time is "1600". Thus, finally, the player can be correctly notified of the true obtainable prize ball number. As a modification, the addition value displayed by the second operation of the effect button 15 is the addition value reaching the final display value (the addition value reaching the final display value when added to the first addition value) It may be configured as follows. That is, as the second addition value, a difference value between the final display value and the first addition value may be selected. Specifically, when applied to the above illustrated example, a numerical value “+1400” is displayed as the second addition value, and the final display value (1600) is reached.

  Subsequently, an effect example of the count-up effect pattern B will be described. Here, (B1) to (B4) in the figure indicate intermediate effects, and (B5) indicate final effects.

  As shown in (B1) in the figure, at the start of the count-up effect, a message (operation input instruction) of "continuous hit" is displayed on the screen together with an image imitating the effect button 15. In the upper left of the screen, a display area for presenting the number of obtainable prize balls at the current stage is provided, and "Get 0000" is displayed as an initial value of the obtainable prize balls.

  As shown in (B2) in the figure, when the player operates the effect button 15 once, a numerical value of "+5" is displayed as an addition value of the number of winning balls, and "five" is obtained as the number of obtainable winning balls at the current stage. It is informed that the prize ball of '' has been added. As a result, the numerical value of the obtainable award number of balls displayed on the screen is updated to "five".

  As shown in (B3) in the figure, when the player operates the effect button 15 again, a numerical value of "+30" is displayed as an addition value of the number of winning balls, and a winning ball of "30" is obtained as the winning number of balls. It is informed that has been added. As a result, the numerical value of the obtainable award number of balls displayed on the screen is updated to "35".

  As shown in (B4) in the figure, when the player continuously presses the effect button 15 (operated several times), the added value of the number of winning balls is displayed accordingly, and the winning balls corresponding to the total number of the added values. It is informed that the number has been added to the obtainable prize ball number. As a result, the numerical value of the obtainable award number of balls displayed on the screen is updated to "355".

  As shown in (B5) in the figure, at the timing when the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished and the big hit symbol "3 ・ 3 ・ 3" is displayed for a definite stop, the numerical value "800" is displayed as the final display value In this special game, it is informed that the number of obtainable winning balls that the player can acquire is 800. Thus, finally, the player can be correctly notified of the true obtainable prize ball number. As a modification, the final display value may be reached during continuous hitting. Specifically, when applied to the above illustrated example, the numerical value "GET 800" is displayed on the upper left of the screen during continuous hitting, and the final display value (800) is reached. Here, after reaching the final display value, it is preferable that “0” is always displayed as the added value, even if the effect button 15 is operated again (even if the player continuously hits).

<Prize ball number notification production>
Next, a prize ball number informing effect in the eighth embodiment will be described. The prize ball number notification effect is provided to the player for the number of prize balls (the number of winning prize balls) paid out based on the entry of the gaming ball to the large winning opening 65 or the general winning hole 54 during execution of the special game. It is an effect to inform.

  FIG. 122 is a schematic view showing a basic screen of the number-of-prisms-notification-indication effect displayed during the special game. In the prize ball number notification effect, as the number of prize balls paid out during the special game, the first winning prize ball number A1, the second winning prize ball number A2, the first cumulative winning prize ball number B1, the second cumulative winning prize Let B2 be the target of notification.

  The first winning prize ball number A1 is the number of winning balls that can be won so far based on the entry of the gaming ball into the large winning opening 65 in one special game currently being executed (a prize that can be actually won Means the ball number). Since the first winning prize ball number A1 is the winning ball number that the player has actually won, it is smaller than the above-mentioned obtainable winning ball number (theoretical expected prize ball number) set according to the jackpot type Although it will be, it will never exceed the number of awardable balls.

  The second winning prize ball number A2 is the number of winning balls that can be won so far based on the entry of the gaming ball into the general winning hole 54 in one special game currently being executed (a prize that can be actually won Means the ball number). The number of prize balls paid out by the game ball entering the general winning opening 54 disposed in the right hitting area is added to the second winning prize number A2, but it is placed in the left hitting area. The number of winning balls paid out by the game ball entering the general winning opening 51 to 53 is not added. That is, the second winning prize ball number A2 can not enter the large winning opening 65 with the gaming ball that was shot aiming at the right hitting area (large winning opening 65) during the execution of the special game, and instead a general winning opening The number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the ball 54 is the target of notification. The number of winning balls paid out by the game ball entering the general winning opening 54 during the specific gaming state is not added to the second winning ball number A2.

  With the first accumulated winning prize ball number B1, the number of winning balls that have been earned so far based on the entry of the gaming ball into the big winning opening 65 in the special game during consecutive villas (the number of winning balls actually won Means the cumulative number of). The "in-line state" or "in-line state" is to return to the non-specific game state after the occurrence of the first hit serving as a transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state as the game state in the non-special game state. Instead, it is a state in which the specific gaming state is continuing (a state in which a big hit in the specific gaming state is continuously occurring). The first accumulated winning prize ball number B1 includes the number of winning balls which can be obtained by entering the gaming ball into the large winning opening 65 in the special game when the first hit. In addition, "specific gaming state" is a state where the transition probability to the special game is higher than the normal state (low probability state, non-opening extension state), the probability variation function of special symbol, variation of special symbol At least one of the time-saving function and the electronic chew support function is activated. In this example, it refers to a gaming state in which at least the power chew support function is activated as the specific gaming state. Thus, the specific gaming state in this example corresponds to the probability changing state and the time saving state. In this example, regardless of which jackpot type is won, at least the power Chew support state is activated in the variable display of 30 rotations or 100 rotations after the end of the special game, so this 30 rotations or During the 100 revolutions, the game is in the specific game state, and the continuous play state continues on the condition that a big hit occurs during this time.

  The 2nd cumulative winning number of balls B2 is the number of winning balls that can be obtained up to now based on the entry of the gaming ball into the general winning opening 54 in the special game during consecutive residences (the number of winning balls actually obtained Means the cumulative number of). The second accumulated winning number B2 of balls includes the number of winning balls obtained by entering the gaming balls into the general winning opening 54 in the special game at the first hit. The number of winning balls paid out by the game ball entering the general winning opening 54 during the specific gaming state is not added to the second cumulative winning number B2.

  On the effect control board 200, as shown in FIG. 123, in order to control the number A1, A2, B1, B2 of winning balls in the big hit, the first winning balls for counting the first winning balls A1 are obtained. A number counter CA1; a second winning prize ball counter CA2 for counting the second winning prize ball number A2; and a first cumulative winning prize ball number count CB1 for counting the first accumulated winning prize ball number B1 , And a second cumulative winning number counter CB2 for counting a second cumulative winning number B2. Specifically, each time a special winning opening winning command is received from the main control board 100 by the game ball entering the special winning opening 65 during execution of the special game, the first winning prize ball number counter A1 and The count value of the first accumulated winning prize ball counter B1 is updated, and accordingly, the acquisition information (the first winning prize ball A1 and the first accumulated winning prize ball B1) displayed on the screen is also updated. The first winning prize ball number counter A1 and the first accumulated winning prize ball number counter B1 are reset to zero at the start or end of the special game. Similarly, the second winning prize is received every time a general winning opening winning command is received from the main control board 100 by the game ball entering the general winning opening 54 disposed in the right hitting area during execution of the special game. The count values of the ball number counter CA2 and the second accumulated acquisition number ball number counter CB2 are updated, and accordingly, the acquisition information displayed on the screen (second acquisition ball number A2 and second accumulated acquisition number B2) Is also updated. The second winning prize ball number counter CA2 and the second accumulated winning prize ball number counter CB2 are reset to zero at the end of the run (when the time saving state ends or when the normal state is restored).

  With respect to the number of winning balls, "10" winning balls are paid out for one ball entering the big winning opening 65 (that is, the number of winning balls for the large winning opening 65 is 10). Therefore, the first winning prize ball number A1 and the first accumulated winning prize ball number B1 are updated in “10” units. Similarly, in this example, "3" winning balls are paid out for the entry of one ball to the general winning opening 54 (ie, the number of unit winning balls for the general winning opening 54 is three). The second winning prize ball number A2 and the second cumulative winning prize ball number B2 are updated in “3” units.

  As described above, in the prize ball number notification effect in this example, during the execution of the special game (round game), the first winning prize ball number A1, the second winning prize ball number A2, and the first cumulative winning prize ball number B1 , And the second cumulative winning prize ball number B2 is displayed. In FIG. 122, on the screen, "1280" as the first winning prize ball number A1, "30" as the second winning prize ball number A2, "9850" as the first accumulated winning prize ball number B1, and the second cumulative winning prize “160” is displayed as the ball number B2. As a result, in one special game currently being executed, at the current stage, 1280 winning balls are obtained based on the entry to the big winning opening 65, and to the general winning opening 54 disposed in the right hitting area It is presented to the player that 30 winning balls have been obtained based on entering the ball. Similarly, in the special game in the twin villa, at the current stage, 9850 prize balls are obtained based on the entry to the big winning opening 65, and based on the entry to the general winning entry 54 arranged in the right hitting area It is presented to the player that 160 winning balls have been won. As described above, the player enters the special winning opening 65 by actively notifying the player of the number of winning balls based on entering the ball to the special winning opening 54 in the special game which the player was not conscious of so much. While it becomes possible to make the player clearly recognize that the game ball (spilled ball) which did not exist has entered the general winning opening 54, the player aims to enjoy not only the large winning opening 65 but also the general winning opening 54. (It can be expected that the player increases the chance of positively entering the game ball into the general winning opening 54). As a modification, instead of separately displaying the first winning prize ball number A1 and the second winning prize ball number A2, respectively, the first winning ball number A1 and the second winning prize ball number A2 are displayed in total. In addition, instead of separately displaying the first accumulated winning prize B1 and the second accumulated winning B2 separately, the first accumulated winning B1 and the second accumulated winning B2 may be displayed. The sum of B2 may be displayed. That is, the combined number of the first winning prize ball number A1 and the second winning prize ball number A2 may be displayed, and the first accumulated winning prize ball number B1 and the second cumulative winning prize ball number B2 may be combined. You may display the number. Specifically, when applied to the illustrated example of FIG. 122, “1310” is the total number of the first winning prize ball number A1 (1280) and the second winning prize ball number A2 (30) as the winning prize ball number. Is displayed, and "10010", which is the total number of the first cumulative winning prize B1 (9850) and the second cumulative winning prize B2 (160), is displayed as the cumulative winning prize.

(Modified example 1 of prize ball number notification production)
In the above-described embodiment, during the execution of the special game, the first winning prize ball number A1 which the player can actually obtain in this one special game is displayed. One winning prize ball number A1 may be displayed in pairs with the theoretical obtainable prize ball number obtainable by the player. For example, in the case of winning a specific big hit with the 16R condition as the big hit type, since the obtainable winning number of balls is "1600", the first winning number of balls A1 at the current stage is "780" Preferably, the first winning prize ball number A1 and the obtainable winning ball number are displayed as a pair such as "780/1600". Here, when an over winning, which will be described later, occurs, it can be displayed as "1610/1600" or "1650/1600", exceeding "1600" of the obtainable prize balls. That is, only the number of winning balls based on the over winning is displayed over the obtainable number of winning balls (theoretical value). In addition, also for such a pair display, the first winning prize ball number A1 and the second winning prize ball number A2 may be displayed in total, and in such a case, it is referred to as "1605-1600" or "1635/1600" It can be displayed. That is, the number of winning balls based on the entry of the gaming balls into the general winning opening 54 is displayed more than the obtainable number of winning balls (theoretical value).

(Modification 2 of prize ball number informing effect)
The first winning prize ball number A1 and the first cumulative winning prize ball number B1 include the big winning hole 65 in addition to the winning ball number paid out based on the entry of the gaming ball within the prescribed count to the big winning hole 65. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the entry of the gaming ball outside the prescribed count to (i.e., the number of winning balls due to over winning) may be added. The over-winning is a winning mode in which people are generally called over-winning, and the number of gaming balls exceeding the prescribed count number (10 balls) in one round game enters the special winning opening 65 and the special winning opening switch It says that it is detected at 651. In reality, this over-winning does not occur in the short opening round, but occurs in the long opening round. Here, in the case where the first winning prize ball number A1 and the obtainable winning prize ball number are displayed as a pair as in the above-described modified example, the number of winning balls awarded by the excess winning prize whenever the excess winning prize occurs. It is preferable to add not only to the first winning prize ball number A1, but also to update the obtainable winning ball number accordingly. For example, the number of obtainable prize balls “1600” is updated by the number of prize balls based on the over winning, and displays as “1610/1610” or “1650/1650”. That is, when the over-winning has occurred, the player can be accurately informed that the over-winning has occurred by changing the theoretical numerical value (the number of winning prize balls). . It should be noted that instead of adding the number of winning balls due to over wins to the number of first winning balls A1 and the number of first accumulated winning balls B1, the number of second winning balls A2 and the number of second cumulative winning balls B2 It may be added. That is, the number of winning balls due to the over-winning may be treated as "extra", and the theoretical obtainable number of balls itself may hold the value as originally set.

(Modification 3 of prize ball number informing effect)
In the above embodiment, every time the game ball enters the general winning opening 54 during execution of the special game, the second winning prize ball number A2 displayed on the screen is updated in “five” units. However, for example, the total number of prize balls paid out by the game ball entering the general winning opening 54 during execution of the special game is collectively displayed at the end of the special game. It may be configured. According to the configuration, when the number of unit winning balls in the general winning opening 54 is small, or when it is difficult to enter the general winning opening 54, the number of winning balls is updated and displayed in small portions. Is also effective when the rendering effect is low.

(Modification 4 of prize ball number informing effect)
Then, the modification at the time of applying the above-mentioned prize ball number alerting production to the game machine of the model called "small hit V" is explained. The present model is provided with a first large winning opening corresponding to a big hit game (including a case of small hit development big hit) and a second large winning hole corresponding to a small hit game. In this modification, a big hit, a small hit, and an off are set as a result of the judgment of the special symbol. The type of "small hit" is a small hit development big hit and transition to a time saving state after the end of the special game "time reduction there is a small hit" and the small hit development big hit changes to a normal state after the end of the special game There is a "time saving no small hit" to do. Here, in the case where the result of the success or failure judgment is a small hit, as a small hit game, one round game (unit game) with the opening of the second large winning opening is performed. In this small hit game, when the game ball enters a specific area (V zone) provided in the second big winning opening, it is promoted from "small hit" to "big hit" (ie, it is elected to small hit development big hit) ), As a special game (big hit game), a plurality of round games (unit games) with the opening of the first big winning opening are performed. After the end of the special game, when the gaming state shifts to a short time state, a small hit triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 62 is likely to occur, and the possibility of developing from the small hit to the big hit Will also be high. Also, when a small hit occurs in the time saving state, the probability that the gaming state shifts to the time saving state after the end of the special game is higher than when the small hit occurs in the normal state (in other words, there is time saving The probability of winning in a small hit is high). Therefore, in the present model called small hit V, the small hit development big hit is repeated in a short time state, and it becomes a game property aiming to continue so-called "long-running". That is, by continuing the time saving state, the game ball aiming at the small hit V can be continued by causing the gaming ball to enter the second starting opening 62 under the electric chow support state (entering the ball easy state). Become. On the other hand, after the end of the special game, when the gaming state does not shift to the short time state (when transitioning to the normal state), the electric chow support state (entering easy state of the ball) ends, so the second start Since entering the game ball into the mouth 62 becomes difficult (substantially impossible), it becomes a playability aimed at the first starting hole 61. In addition, in the small hit game, when it is not possible to enter the game ball into the specific area (V Thorn), it does not shift to the special game, the gaming state before occurrence of the small hit will continue (i.e. The small hit is a winning type that does not trigger the transition of the gaming state). In the prize ball number notification effect of this model of this configuration, the number of prize balls actually paid out by the game ball entering the first large winning opening during execution of one special game (big hit game) ( The total number of winning balls is reported as “the first winning winning balls A1” and is actually paid out by entering the second big winning opening during the execution of one small hitting game. It is preferable that the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) is notified as “second winning number of balls A2”. That is, when a small hit development big hit occurs, the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game (one round game) is notified as the second winning prize ball number A2, and the big hit game based on the small hit development big hit ( The number of winning balls obtained in a plurality of round games) is notified as a first winning number of balls A1. The same applies to the first accumulated winning prize ball number B1 and the second accumulative winning ball number B2. Here, the number of winning balls obtained by entering the gaming balls into the general winning hole 54 may be added to the second winning number of balls A2. Also in the fourth modification, the first winning prize ball number A1 and the second winning prize ball number A2 may be displayed in total, and the first cumulative winning prize ball number B1 and the second cumulative winning prize ball number B2 And may be displayed in total. Furthermore, the specifications of the second and third modifications may be applied to the fourth modification.

  The main effects achieved in the eighth embodiment are summarized as follows.

  (1) The variation pattern is selected according to the gaming condition and the big hit type at the time of the big hit until the variation display number of the symbol reaches the predetermined number (end number of times of electric chew support function) after counting up after the special game is over Since the transition modes of the state are different, various game characteristics can be created, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (2) If a big hit occurs when the gaming state is normal, and it shifts to a relatively short-term easy entry state, if a big hit occurs again in the short-term easy entry state, it is relatively Since the transition to the long-term easy entry state is made, the possibility that the big hit can be continued in the relatively long-term easy entry state (the continuous state can be continued) is increased thereafter. In other words, once you transition from a relatively disadvantageous gaming state (non-electric cheering support state) to a relatively advantageous gaming state (electric cheering support state), you break through the barrier where the relatively advantageous gaming state is likely to be continued The playability of the system can be realized, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (3) In the variable display of the specified number of times after the end of the special game, the number of times of fixed stop of the decorative symbol and the number of temporary stop are made the same number and the temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol and the fixed stop symbol are the same symbol By doing this, even if a big hit occurs in any of the variable display of the predetermined number of times after the end of the special game, as seen from the player, it is as if the same timing Because it can appear as if a big hit has occurred in the (variable display) of, it is possible to create a new game effect that has not been achieved before, and at the same time, effects of the effect mode (hold group mode) set after the special game is over The effect can be enhanced, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (4) A special game is connected with a predetermined number of variable displays after the end of the special game as a series of effects having continuity, as if a big hit end demo continues the process of the predetermined number of variable displays. Even when a big hit occurs in any of the variable display among the predetermined number of variable displays by making the effect, it is as if from the player the variable display of the first rotation after the end of the special game when viewed from the player Since it can be recognized as if a big hit has occurred (it can be made to look as if the big hit and the big hit of this time have occurred continuously in a pseudo manner), a new and unconventional new A game effect can be created, and the effect of the effect mode (hold mode) set after the end of the special game can be enhanced, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (5) As the effect pattern of the promotion effect (count-up effect) to be executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol, the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B having different display processes in the middle are provided, variously in the effect development of the promotion effect By giving the character, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game production, and also prevent the final display result (the number of winning balls) from being preempted in the middle display process, and obtain the winning prize until the final display result is obtained. It is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the number of balls, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (6) During the special game, notification of the number of winning balls obtained by the game ball entering the large winning opening with the game ball and the number of winning balls obtained by the game ball entering the general winning hole It is a fun to aim at the general winning a prize opening by preventing the player's only concern if it is possible to aim at the large winning opening in the special game in the twin villa and gain a large number of winning balls. Can be enjoyed by the player (the player can expect to increase the chance of positively entering the game ball into the general winning opening), and the player's It will be possible to be sexually rich.

  In the eighth embodiment described above, the gaming state after the end of the special game is in a high probability state (based on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area of the large winning opening in the specific round in the special game) In the special symbol lottery, the type of symbol group (big hit) is the specific symbol (specific big hit) and the normal symbol A configuration may be adopted to determine whether or not the gaming state after the end of the special game shifts to the high probability state (probable change state) according to which of the normal big hits) falls under. In that case, in FIG. 94, “conditional specific big hit” in this example corresponds to “specific big hit (probable variation big hit)”, and “conditional normal big hit” in this example is “normal big hit (non-deterministic big hit)”. Equivalent to. Then, for the application of FIG. 96 and FIG. 97, when the "specific big hit" is won, the column "game state or variation pattern selection state when winning V" is applied, and when "normal big hit" is won. The column of "playing state or variation pattern selection state when V does not win" is applied.

Eighth Embodiment--First Modification
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, and in the following, parts having the same configuration will be described with the same reference numerals. Will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described.

  In the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment described above, eleven types of selection states are provided as the variation pattern selection states, but in the gaming machine according to the present modification, twelve types of selection states are provided as the variation pattern selection states There is. That is, in this modification, “selection state 2A” and “selection state 2B” are prepared as modifications of the “selection state 2” described above. More specifically, in the eighth embodiment, in the variable display at the 30th rotation in the dual-transmission mode, “selected” is selected as the change pattern selection state regardless of whether or not the time saving state ends in the variable display. "State 2" was set. In this variation, in the variable display at the 30th rotation in the non-double mission mode, the state is selectively branched to the selection state 2A or the selection state 2B according to the number of short operations (30 times or 100 times) given by the big hit occurrence. Is configured as. That is, in the variable display of the 30th rotation in the dual-mission mode, when 30 times is set as the time reduction operation number (when the time reduction state continues even after the 31st rotation), the selected state 2A is entered, and the time reduction operation is performed. When 100 times is set as the number of times (when the time saving state ends at the 30th rotation of this time), the state shifts to the selection state 2B.

  Here, FIG. 124A is a schematic view showing a selection state transition pattern in the first modified example of the eighth embodiment. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern table) as described above. In this modification, 12 types of selection states 0, 1, 2A, 2B, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 are prepared as fluctuation pattern selection states. Note that among the 12 types of selection states, the selection states other than the selection states 2A and 2B are the same as those in the eighth embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  In this modification, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), three types of selection state transition patterns X, Y, Z in which the order of transition of the variation pattern selection state is defined are prepared. The selected state transition patterns X and Y are transition patterns corresponding to 100 time-shortening operations, and the selection state transition pattern Z is a transition pattern corresponding to 30 time-shorting operations. The selected state transition pattern X is the same as that of the above-described eighth embodiment, and therefore, is omitted in the following description except in a special case.

  The selected state transition pattern Y is selected state 1 (29 times) → selected state 2A (once) → selected state 1 (69 times) → selected state 2B (once) in the variable display of 100 rotations after the end of the special game. The variation pattern selection state transitions in the order of. When selection state 2B ends, selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs.

  In the selection state transition pattern Z, the fluctuation pattern selection state transitions in the order of selection state 1 (29 times) → selection state 2B (once) in the variable display of 30 rotations after the end of the special game. When selection state 2B ends, selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs.

  Subsequently, FIG. 124 (B) is a schematic view showing a selection state setting table in the first modified example of the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 124 (B), in the variation pattern selection state setting table, selection state transition patterns are associated with each jackpot type (symbol group). Also in this modification, the selection state transition pattern is set according to the jackpot type (symbol group), the gaming state at the time of the big hit, and the presence or absence of the V winning in the special game.

  The selection state transition pattern Y is “6R conditional normal big hit 1” or “5R conditional normal big hit 1” in the lottery process of the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state, and the special game It is a transition pattern set when there is no V prize winning. That is, the selected state transition pattern Y is a transition pattern during the fluctuation display of a total of 100 rotations to which the short time state is given. Therefore, the time saving state continues even if the fluctuation display of one rotation (the fluctuation display of the 30th rotation) staying in the selection state 2A as the fluctuation pattern selection state ends.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal state, the selection state transition pattern Z is won by the lottery process of the first special symbol and wins “6R condition with normal big hit 2” or “5R condition with normal big hit 2” It is a transition pattern that is set when the V prize is not won during the special game. That is, the selected state transition pattern Z is a transition pattern in the variable display of total 30 rotations to which the short time state is given. Therefore, when the fluctuation display of one rotation (the fluctuation display of the 30th rotation) staying in the selection state 2B as the fluctuation pattern selection state ends, the time saving state ends and returns to the normal state.

  Then, FIGS. 125-126 are schematic diagrams which show the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol in the 1st modification of 8th Embodiment. Hereinafter, only the fluctuation pattern table set corresponding to the selection states 2A and 2B will be described. In addition, since "final change effect A" in the figure has already been described, duplicate explanation is omitted here.

(Variation pattern table 2A)
FIG. 125 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 2A. The fluctuation pattern table 2A is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state 2A. The variation pattern table 2A is a different table according to the result (big hit / missing) of the pass / fail determination.

  The fluctuation pattern PH2A-1 (final fluctuation effect A (continuation)) is set in the fluctuation pattern table 2A for disconnection. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH2A-1 (final fluctuation effect A (continuation)) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. Similarly, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH2A-1 (final fluctuation effect A (continuation)) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. That is, when the result of the yes or no determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a disconnection, only the variation pattern PH2A-1 accompanied by the final variation effect A (continuation) is selected.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 2 for the jackpot, fluctuation patterns PA2A-1 (final fluctuation effect A (relief)) and PA2A-2 (final fluctuation effect A (seven stars)) are set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2A-1 (final variation effect A (relief)) is selected regardless of the big hit type. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is 16R condition specific big hit, 12R condition specific big hit, 8R condition specific big hit, 4R condition specific big hit, fluctuation pattern If PA2A-1 (final change effect A (relief)) is selected and the big hit type is 2R conditional specified big hit, a change pattern PA2A-2 (final change effect A (7 stars)) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 2B)
FIG. 126 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 2B. The fluctuation pattern table 2B is a fluctuation pattern table which is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state 2B. The variation pattern table 2B is a different table depending on the result (big hit / missing) of the success / failure determination.

  The fluctuation pattern PH2B-1 (final fluctuation effect A (end)) is set in the fluctuation pattern table 2B for disconnection. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH2B-1 (final fluctuation effect A (end)) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. Similarly, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH2B-1 (final fluctuation effect A (end)) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. That is, when the result of the yes or no determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a release, only the variation pattern PH2B-1 accompanied by the final variation effect A (end) is selected.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 2 for the jackpot, fluctuation patterns PA2B-1 (final fluctuation effect A (relief)) and PA2B-2 (final fluctuation effect A (seven stars)) are set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2B-1 (final variation effect A (relief)) is selected regardless of the big hit type. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is 16R condition specific big hit, 12R condition specific big hit, 8R condition specific big hit, 4R condition specific big hit, fluctuation pattern If PA2B-1 (final change effect A (relief)) is selected and the jackpot type is 2R conditional specific big hit, a change pattern PA2B-2 (final change effect A (seven star)) is selected.

  Here, the variation time (12 seconds) of the "variation variation pattern PH2A-1" selected in the selection state 2A and the variation time (11 seconds) of the "variation variation pattern PH2B-1" selected in the selection state 2B And) are set as mutually different time values. In addition, the fluctuation effect (final fluctuation effect A (continuation)) of "outside fluctuation pattern PH2A-1" selected in selection state 2A and the fluctuation of "outside fluctuation pattern PH2B-1" selected in selection state 2B The effect (final change effect A (end)) is set as effect contents (effect mode) different from each other. The variation time of the out-of-order variation pattern PH2A-1 may be a time value (for example, 8 seconds) shorter than the variation time of the out-of-date variation pattern PH2B-1.

  On the other hand, the variation time (13 seconds) of the "big hit variation pattern PA2A-1" selected in the selection state 2A and the variation time (13 seconds) of the "big hit variation pattern PA2B-1" selected in the selection state 2B Are set as the same time value, and the variation time (10 seconds) of the "big hit variation pattern PA2A-2" selected in the selected state 2A and the "big hit variation pattern PA2B selected in the selected state 2B as well". The fluctuation time (10 seconds) of “−2” is set as the same time value. In addition, the fluctuation effect (final fluctuation effect A (relief)) of the “big hit fluctuation pattern PA2A-1” selected in the selected state 2A and the fluctuation of the “big hit fluctuation pattern PA2B-1” selected in the selected state 2B The effect (final change effect A (relief)) is set as the same effect content (effect mode), and similarly, the change effect (final change effect A (final change effect A (a) of the "big hit change pattern PA2A-2" selected in the selection state 2A The seven star) and the fluctuation effect (final fluctuation effect A (seven star)) of the “big hit fluctuation pattern PA2B-2” selected in the selection state 2B are set as the same effect content (render mode).

  It should be noted that during a period in which one of the selection states 1, 2A and 2B is set as the variation pattern selection state, the non-stationary mode is maintained as the effect mode. Here, the final fluctuation effect A that appears in the 30th rotation fluctuation display (selected states 2A and 2B) in the non-transmission mission mode is the fluctuation display of the first to 29th rotations before that (selection state 1) It is configured as an effect that never appears. That is, the final fluctuation effect A is a limited effect which appears only on the 30th rotation fluctuation display (one fluctuation display) among the fluctuation display of the first rotation to the 30th rotation. .

  As described above, according to the first modification of the eighth embodiment, when the number of times of variation display of the symbol reaches a predetermined number (the number of closing times of the electric chew support function) after counting up after the end of the special game, at the time of big hit Since the transition mode of the variation pattern selection state differs depending on the game state and the jackpot type, various game characteristics can be created, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Eighth Embodiment Second Modified Example
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, and in the following, parts having the same configuration will be described with the same reference numerals. Will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described.

  In the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, the award ball number informing effect is executed during the execution of the special game, but in the gaming machine according to the present modification, in addition to the execution of the special game, the end of the continuous state Also at times, a prize ball number notification effect is executed.

  FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen of the number-of-prisms-notch notification effect and the number-of-continuous-times notification effect executed at the end of the continuous state. In the present example, “when end of continuous state” is when the continuous mode ends, that is, the last variable display (the 100th variable display after the end of the special game) in the incompetent dance mode is executed. It is time to As described above, the incompetence mode is an effect mode that is set when the gaming state is in the short time state, and the game state changes from the short time state to the normal state by the end of the variation display of the last time. I will be back.

  At the end of the continuous soaking mode, in addition to the above-mentioned prize ball number informing effect, an informing effect on the number of in-series times is performed. In the prize ball number notification effect, “first accumulated winning prize ball number B1” and “second cumulative winning prize ball number B2” are notified as the cumulative number of prize balls paid out in the special game in the consecutive villas Subject to On the other hand, in the notification of the number of consecutive times of socking, the so-called "number of times of consecutive socking C" is the target of notification as the number of consecutive big hits during consecutive sock (the number of times the big hit that becomes a transition trigger to a specific gaming state occurs continuously). Become.

  In the notification of the number of consecutive episodes, the character “N insular N times” is displayed corresponding to the above number of consecutive passages (N = the number C of consecutive passages). In this modification, as shown in FIG. 123, in order to manage the number of consecutive loaves, the number of consecutive loaves counter CC for counting the number of consecutive loaves is provided. The count value of the number-of-times counter CC is updated each time a big hit occurs in a state where the pairs are continuing. In addition, the number-of-times counter CC counts the first hit time as “once”. Then, the number of times of continuous rotation count CC is reset to zero at the end of the continuous movement state.

  Here, the prize ball number informing effect and the continuous number of times informing effect are executed on the condition that the result of the pass / fail judgment is out in the last time of the variable display in the matchless dance mode. That is, the result of the pass / fail judgment in the last time of the variable display in the matchless dance mode is out, and the gaming state changes from the specific gaming state (time saving state) to the non-specific gaming state (normal state) from the next variable display. Is determined (when it is determined that the continuous state ends), the prize ball number notification effect and the continuous number of times notification effect are executed. In this example, the cumulative acquisition prize ball number B1 and B2 and the number C of consecutive runs are individually displayed on the screen at a predetermined timing during the last variable display in the incomparable dance mode. Also in the present modification, the first cumulative winning number B1 and the second cumulative winning number B2 are not displayed separately without displaying the first cumulative number of winning balls B1 and the second cumulative number of winning balls B2 individually. And may be added up. The predetermined timing is, for example, a timing at which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle of the last variable display. As described above, the cumulative acquisition prize ball number B1 and B2 and the number C of times of consecutive loafing are separately displayed on the screen from the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol to the final stop display after the re-variation display. In addition, when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit in the last variable display in this incompetent dance mode, the continuous state will continue after the next variable display. The number of times notification production is not performed. In addition, as a modification, in the case of performing a big hit in the last variable display, it may be configured to perform a hit after performing a prize ball number notification effect and a continuous number notification effect.

  In the prize ball number informing effect and the consecutive number of times informing effect in the present example, as shown in FIG. 127, a first accumulated acquisition number B1 of balls, a second cumulative acquisition number B2 of balls, and a number C of consecutive lines are displayed. In the illustrated example, “15420” is displayed as the first accumulated winning prize ball number B1, “580” is displayed as the second accumulated winning prize ball number B2, and “10 times incompetence” is displayed as the consecutive c number of times C on the screen. . Thereby, in a plurality of special games in a row, at the current stage, 15420 winning balls are obtained based on the entry to the big winning opening 65, and to the general winning opening 54 disposed in the right hitting area It is presented to the player that 580 prize balls have been obtained based on the ball entry and that the number of consecutive shots has ended 10 times.

  As described above, according to the second modification of the eighth embodiment, at the time of termination of the connected state, the number of winning balls acquired by the game ball entering the large winning opening in the special game in the connected state and the number of winning balls Aims at the special winning opening in the special game during consecutive running by notifying individually the number of winning balls obtained by the game ball entering the general winning opening and notifying the final number of consecutive runnings It is possible for the player to enjoy enjoyment aiming at the general winning opening by preventing the player's only concern whether or not a large number of winning balls can be obtained (the player actively plays the game) It can be expected to increase the opportunity for the ball to enter the general winning opening), and it is possible to increase the player's gambling feeling and to make the game even more entertaining.

Eighth Embodiment Third Modified Example
Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the third modification basically has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, and in the following, parts having the same configuration will be described with the same reference numerals. Will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described.

  Like the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present variation is called the "ST machine", which is a number-delimited breakup machine with a probability change entry rate set to 100% when a big hit is made with a special symbol. Game machine. Therefore, in the game state after the end of the special game, the definite change state continues until the variable display number of the special symbol reaches the predetermined ending number of times (ST number). Although “100 times” is set as the ST number in this modification, it is needless to say that other numbers may be set. As in the first embodiment, when the variable display of the ST number (100 times) ends, the gaming state returns to the normal state.

  In this modification, as in the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 6), as a symbol group of the big hit of the first special symbol, 16R specific short-lived special symbol (hereinafter, the big hit type "16R specific big hit" Also referred to as 8R specific time short symbol symbol (hereinafter, the big hit type is also referred to as "8R specific big hit"), and 2R specific time short symbol symbol (hereinafter, the big hit type is also referred to as "2R specific big hit") ing. In addition, similarly, as a big hit symbol group of the second special symbol, 16R specific time short symbol (hereinafter, the big hit type is also referred to as "16R specific big hit"), 8R specific time short symbol (hereinafter, the big hit type " 8R specific jackpot)).

  In this variation, when the game state after the end of the special game is in the definite change state, the change pattern selection state is “selected state A” → “selected” in the fluctuation display (during ST) of 100 rotations after the end of the special game Transition is made in the order of state B "→" selected state C ". That is, the selection states A to C are fluctuation pattern selection states which are set when the gaming state is a definite change state. Specifically, the selection state A is set in the variable display from the first rotation to the third rotation in ST after the end of the special game. The selection state B is set in the variable display from the fourth rotation to the seventh rotation in ST after the end of the special game. The selection state C is set in the variable display from the 8th rotation to the 100th rotation in ST after the end of the special game.

  128 to 130 are schematic views showing a fluctuation pattern table in the third modification of the eighth embodiment. In the present modification, only the fluctuation pattern tables A, B and C among the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables will be described as an example. The fluctuation pattern table A is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state is the selection state A. The fluctuation pattern table B is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state is the selection state B. The fluctuation pattern table C is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state is the selection state C.

(Variation pattern table A)
FIG. 128 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table A. The fluctuation pattern table A is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state A. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table A is set to the first to third rotations after the end of the special game. The variation pattern table A is a different table according to the result (big hit / missing) of the pass / fail determination.

  Fluctuation pattern PHA-1 (super-shortened) is set in fluctuation pattern table A for outliers. Here, when the result of the determination of the first special symbol is disapproval, the variation pattern PHA-1 (super shortening) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. Similarly, in the case where the result of the determination of the second special symbol is disapproval, fluctuation pattern PHA-1 (super shortening) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. That is, when the result of the pass / fail determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out, only the fluctuation pattern PHA-1 (very short) is always selected.

  In the fluctuation pattern table A for the jackpot, fluctuation patterns PAA-1 (per-instant) and PAA-2 (per-permination (special jackpot notification effect A)) are set. Here, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is 8R specified big hit or 2R specified big hit, the variation pattern PAA-1 (immediate hit) is selected, the big hit type is 16R In the case of the specific big hit, the variation pattern PAA-2 (immediately hit (special big hit notification effect A)) is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the success or failure of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is 8R specific big hit, the variation pattern PAA-1 (immediately hit) is selected, if the big hit type is 16R specific big hit , Fluctuation pattern PAA-2 (immediately hit (special jackpot notification effect A)) is selected. The “immediate hit” is an effect in which the big hit symbol is displayed in a fixed stop within a short time without passing through the reach after the variable display is started. The “special jackpot notification effect A” is an effect for notifying (confirming notification) that a particular jackpot has been won. "Specific jackpot" means high profit jackpot (16R specified jackpot). The special jackpot notification effect A will be described in detail later. Here, as a variation of the fluctuation pattern table A, when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is disapproval, only when the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is 0 to 3, , If the result of the decision of the second special symbol is a disqualification, even if the number of operation pending ball number of the second special symbol is 0, even if it is possible to select the variation pattern of the normal variation (14 seconds) Good. On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, the variation pattern of SP reach A (40 seconds) may also be selectable when the big hit type is 8R specific big hit or 2R specific big hit, or SP reach A ( The variation pattern of 40 seconds) may be selected and the variation pattern of 4 seconds may not be selected immediately.

(Variation pattern table B)
FIG. 129 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table B. The fluctuation pattern table B is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state B. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table B is set to the fourth to seventh rotations after the end of the special game. The variation pattern table B is a table different according to the result (big hit / missing) of the pass / fail judgment.

  The fluctuation pattern PHB-1 (very short) is set in the fluctuation pattern table B for outliers. Here, when the result of the determination of the first special symbol is disapproval, fluctuation pattern PHB-1 (super shortening) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. Similarly, in the case where the result of the determination of the second special symbol is disapproval, fluctuation pattern PHB-1 (super shortening) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls. That is, when the result of the determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is disapproval, only the fluctuation pattern PHB-1 (super shortening) is always selected.

  In the fluctuation pattern table B for the jackpot, fluctuation patterns PAB-1 (per-instant) and PAB-2 (per-permination (special jackpot notification effect A)) are set. Here, when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is 8R specific big hit or 2R specific big hit, the variation pattern PAB-1 (immediate hit) is selected, and the big hit type is 16R In the case of the specific big hit, the variation pattern PAB-2 (immediately hit (special big hit notification effect B)) is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is 8R specific big hit, the variation pattern PAB-1 (immediate hit) is selected, if the big hit type is 16R specific big hit , Fluctuation pattern PAB-2 (immediately hit (special jackpot notification effect B)) is selected. The “immediate hit” is an effect in which the big hit symbol is displayed in a fixed stop within a short time without passing through the reach after the variable display is started. The “special jackpot notification effect B” is an effect for notifying (confirming notification) that a particular jackpot has been won. "Specific jackpot" means high profit jackpot (16R specified jackpot). The special jackpot notification effect B will be described later in detail. Here, as a variation of the fluctuation pattern table B, when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is disapproval, only when the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol is 0 to 3, , If the result of the decision of the second special symbol is a disqualification, even if the number of operation pending ball number of the second special symbol is 0, even if it is possible to select the variation pattern of the normal variation (14 seconds) Good. On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, the variation pattern of SP reach B (40 seconds) may also be selectable when the big hit type is 8R specific big hit or 2R specific big hit, or SP reach B ( The variation pattern of 40 seconds) may be selected and the variation pattern of 4 seconds may not be selected immediately.

(Variation pattern table C)
FIG. 130 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table C. The fluctuation pattern table C is a fluctuation pattern table which is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the selection state C. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table C is set to the eighth to 100th rotations after the end of the special game. The variation pattern table C is a different table according to the result (big hit / missing) of the pass / fail judgment. In the figure, "reach hit" is an effect asking whether or not reach is established, and reach reach succeeds if reach is established, and reach fails if reach is not established. “SP reach C” is a reach effect in which a battle effect is developed in which an ally character battles against an enemy character and decides the outcome. In this battle effect, basically, when an ally character beats an enemy character, a big hit is decided, and when the ally character loses to the enemy character, the outset is decided. Therefore, in principle, the timing at which the outcome of the battle is decided is set as the timing of the final branch. "Seven Star Effect" indicates that a big hit is won by the appearance of a predetermined logo (characters of the Seven Star Charge) after the ally character is defeated in the above-mentioned battle direction (after the Gase has not been executed for the battle effect). It is a resurrection production.

  In the fluctuation pattern table C for outliers, fluctuation patterns PHC-1 (about reach) and PHC-2 (about reach → SP reach C) are set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a departure, fluctuation pattern PHC-1 (around reach) or PHC-2 (around reach → SP reach C) without depending on the number of operation pending balls. Is selected. Similarly, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PHC-1 (reach around) or PHC-2 (reach around → SP reach C) without depending on the number of operation pending balls. It is selected.

  In the fluctuation pattern table C for the jackpot, fluctuation patterns PAC-1 (reach around → SP reach C) and PAC-2 (reach around → SP reach C → seven star effect) are set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, fluctuation pattern PAC-1 (reach around → SP reach C) is selected regardless of the big hit type. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, 16R conditional specific big hit, 12R conditional specific big hit, 8R conditional specific big hit, 4R conditional specific big hit, fluctuation pattern PAC-2 If (reach reach-> SP reach C) is selected and the big hit type is 2R conditional specified big hit, the fluctuation pattern PAC-2 (reach reach-> SP reach C-> seven star effect) is selected. Here, as a modified example of the fluctuation pattern table C, if the result of the judgment of acceptance is a loss, it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern of ultrashort (2 seconds) or a fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation (14 seconds). At that time, if the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, the variation pattern of ultra-short (2 seconds) only when the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is 1 to 3 It may be selectable. In addition, when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is disapproval, only when the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is 0 to 3, also, the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is If it is out of position, the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation (14 seconds) may be selectable only when the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero.

  FIG. 131 is a transition diagram of the effect mode in the present modification. Also in the present modification, one of a plurality of effect modes is alternatively selected and set according to the variation pattern selection state (or gaming state) managed on the main control board 100 side. The variable presentation according to the presentation mode is performed. However, FIG. 131 shows only the transition of the effect mode during the continuous mode, for convenience of explanation.

  In the present modification, as in the above-described eighth embodiment, after the end of the special game, the mode is shifted to the continuous mode. The number of stays in the consecutive mode is "100 times" as the variable display number of the special symbol. That is, while the definite change state is set as the game state, the player stays in the continuous play mode.

  The continuous mode includes a limited frequency mode A, a limited frequency mode B, and a probability variation effect mode, and the limited frequency mode A (3 turns) → the limited frequency mode B (4 turns) → the probability variation effect mode (93 turns) Transition in the order of). The limited frequency mode A is an effect mode set when the variation pattern selection state is the selection state A. The limited frequency mode B is an effect mode set when the variation pattern selection state is the selection state B. The probability change effect mode is an effect mode set when the variation pattern selection state is the selection state C. That is, after the end of the special game, the limited frequency mode A is set for the first to third rotations, the limited frequency mode B is set for the fourth to seventh rotations, and the probability change effect mode is set for the eighth to 100th rotations. After the 101st rotation, the normal effect mode (normal state) is returned.

  Also in this modification, basically, when any of the effect modes is set, a background dedicated to the effect mode is displayed on the screen as an effect (variation effect) indicating that the user is staying in the effect mode. An image is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11.

  Specifically, while staying in the limited frequency mode A, a special continuous effect is displayed straddling the big hit end demo. While staying in the limited frequency mode B, a background image dedicated to the probability change state (a background image notifying that the gaming state is the probability change state) is displayed. While staying in the probability variation production mode C, as in the limited frequency mode B, a background image dedicated to the probability variation state (a background image notifying that the gaming state is the probability variation state) is displayed. As described above, in the limited frequency mode MB and the probability variation effect mode MC, a common background image is displayed, and it is possible to make an impression that the player is staying in the same effect mode (the same gaming state).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 131, an example of effects in the continuous mode in the present modification will be described. In the figure (A) shows the effect screen displayed when a big hit occurs in the limited frequency mode A, and (B) in the figure shows the effect screen displayed when a big hit occurs in the limited frequency mode B In the figure, (C) in the figure shows the effect screen displayed when a big hit occurs in the probability variation effect mode.

  First, as shown in (A) in the figure, while staying in the limited frequency mode A, a special continuous effect is executed across the big hit end demonstration effect. That is, as in the above-described eighth embodiment, a movie effect of flowing a predetermined image is performed using the effect measure of the big hit end demonstration and the limited frequency mode A (the first to third variation display). Ru. Specifically, in the special continuous rendition, the character image is displayed while sequentially switching one character at a time in the order of "seven" → "star" → "fight" → "dance" on the screen, and finally "seven stars struggle" The letter image (logo image) is displayed. At this time, in order to focus the player on the main effect (special continuous effect), the decorative symbols in the three lines are variably displayed as small symbols, for example, in the state of being reduced at the right corner of the screen. Therefore, in the first to third rotations staying in the limited frequency mode A, the appearance can be made as if the big hit end demonstration continues.

  Here, when a high profit big hit (16R specific big hit) occurs in the variable display when the effect mode currently being executed is the limited frequency mode A, a special big hit immediately after the variable display is started. As the notification effect A, a message “next advance notice” is displayed on the screen, and the player hits immediately in a short time without passing through the reach. In the special big hit notification effect A, when the effect mode currently being executed is the limited frequency mode A (first to third rotations), a specific big hit (high profit big hit) occurs in the variable display. It is an advance notice effect that notifies (confirmation notification). Therefore, the special jackpot notification effect A is generated on the condition that the big hit is won with the variable display within 3 turns, counting from the end of the special game, so between the present big hit and the previous big hit It can also be said that it is an effect (post-retention on-hold in-store consecutive-play effect) informing that the on-hold storage has been established. However, in fact, with the situation leading to the occurrence of a big hit during the hold series mode, (1) Big hit hold is stored at the end of the special game, and the big hit is held in the variable display after the special game end. If a big hit occurs due to being digested, (2) Big hit hold is not stored at the end of the special game, big hit hold is caused by the start winning after the special game end, and the fluctuation display after the special game end There is a case that a big hit occurs due to the big hit retention being digested. Therefore, the special jackpot notification effect A is the same result as that the pending inside row was actually established at the end of the previous special game, or the result was that the pending inside row was established. It is an effect that announces that it has become. The special jackpot notification effect A is configured as a highly rare effect that is unlikely to appear in any scene other than the limited frequency mode A, or hard to appear in a scene other than the limited frequency mode A.

  Subsequently, as shown in (B) in the figure, while staying in the limited frequency mode B, a background image (probable background image) dedicated to the probability variation state is displayed. Therefore, although the first variable display shifted to the limited frequency mode B is actually the variable display on the fourth rotation after the end of the special game, as described above, the probability change state is only made after shifting to the limited frequency mode B By displaying the dedicated background image notifying that it is, it is possible for the player to make it appear as if it is a variable display of the first rotation after the end of the special game. Therefore, the fluctuation display (total display of 4 rotations to 7 rotations) of total 4 rotations staying in the limited frequency mode B is as if it is the fluctuation display of 1 rotation to 4 rotations after the end of the special game. Can be shown to the player in a simulated manner.

  Here, when a big hit occurs in the variable display when the currently-playing effect mode is the limited frequency mode B, immediately after the variable display is started, a special jackpot notification effect B is displayed on the screen. The premier character is displayed and hits immediately in a short time without going through reach. In this special jackpot notification effect B, when the effect mode currently being executed is the limited frequency mode B (the fourth rotation to the seventh rotation), a specific big hit (high profit big hit) occurs in the fluctuation display. It is an advance notice effect that notifies (confirmation notification). Therefore, the special jackpot notification effect B visually notices that a big hit will occur in the first to fourth rotation (actually the fourth to seventh rotation) after the end of the special game. Therefore, it can be said that it is an effect (pseudo- and post-pending on-hold Uchi-nasu production) that appears as if the on-hold U-hi-zhuang was artificially established between the current big hit and the previous big hit. However, if the fourth operation suspension ball (operation suspension ball corresponding to the fourth rotation change display) existing at the end of the big hit is the big hit suspension, the fourth rotation change display after the special game is over (limit Since a big hit will occur in staying in the frequency mode B), it will be that the pending inside run has actually been established between the current big hit and the previous big hit at the end of the special game ( It can be said that it is an extemporary on-the-fly chopsticks production) Note that the special jackpot notification effect B is configured as a highly rare effect that does not appear in any scene other than the limited frequency mode B or is difficult to appear in a scene other than the limited frequency mode B.

  Subsequently, as shown in (C) in the figure, while staying in the probability variation production mode, a background image dedicated to the probability variation state (a probability variation background image) is displayed. Here, when a big hit occurs in the variation display when the currently-playing effect mode is the probability variation production mode MC, for example, the low expectation degree effect selected by the effect lottery such as SP reach effect or advance notice effect. Or high expectation degree presentation is developed (the fluctuation display of relatively long time is performed). That is, when a big hit is made while staying in the definite variation production mode, special effects such as immediate hit or special big hit notification effects A and B are not executed.

  As described above, according to the third modified example of the eighth embodiment, although the upper limit number of operation pending balls existing at the end of the special game is not actually established to establish the pending inside row, the big hit end demonstration and By connecting a predetermined number of variable displays after the end of the special game as a series of effects having continuity, a predetermined number of variable display processes after the end of the special game are set as if the big hit end demonstration is continuing. Thus, when viewed from the player, the variable display after the predetermined number of times can be shown as the variable display of the predetermined number of times immediately after the end of the special game (the variable display corresponding to the upper limit number of holdings). Since it can appear as if the pending Uranso was established at the end in a pseudo manner (since the timing at which the pending Uranso is established can be artificially extended), it is novel and diverse like before A game Able to create output, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the eighth embodiment and the modified example described above, as the digesting order of the actuation reserved balls of the special symbol, the preferential digestion that preferentially digests the actuation reserved balls of the second special symbol over the actuation reserved balls of the first special symbol However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the first special symbol and the second according to the order of ball entry into the first starting opening 61 and the second starting opening 62 by making the number of the operating special ball of the first special symbol and the number of the operating special ball of the second special symbol coexist 2 You may be configured to digest the special design of the action holding ball. As described above, in the case where the digesting order of the operating reserving ball is the entering order to the start opening 61, 62, naturally, the variation start condition of the special symbol is different from the case of the preferential digesting. That is, in the case of ball entry order, (1) not being in the big hit or small hit as a variation start condition of the special symbol, (2) both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation (3) that the number of activated balls is present in at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and (4) that the digesting order of the activated balls to be digested this time is consistent with the order of ball entry When all the conditions of, are satisfied, it is determined that the fluctuation can be started. In addition, when the action-retention ball is in the order of entering the start ports 61 and 62, the action-retention ball is updated when the action-retention ball is renewed, ie, when the action-retention ball is acquired or digested. This is different from the case in which preferential digestion is adopted in that it is necessary to update not only the update of the first special symbol and the second special symbol but also the update of the total number of activated balls in the second special symbol and the update of the ball entry sequence.

  Moreover, in the above-described eighth embodiment and modification, even when the operation reserving ball is present in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of operation reserving balls is digested is one of the special symbols That is, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are so-called in-line models in which a win or loss lottery or symbol variation is not performed simultaneously. On the other hand, a so-called parallel model may be adopted in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are independently subjected to a winning lottery or symbol variation. According to this parallel model, it is not necessary to put the operating condition of the special symbol on the other side (that is, waiting for fluctuation) as the condition to start changing the special symbol, thus reducing the processing load on control. .

  Further, in the above-described eighth embodiment, basically, a model in which only one large winning opening (attacker) is mounted in the game area is described as an example, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a specific area A model equipped with two or more large winning openings (attacker) of a large winning opening provided with (V area) and a large winning opening not provided with a specific area may be adopted.

  In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the technical significance of the eighth embodiment described above, the problem of the eighth embodiment will be outlined at the end.

  The pachinko gaming machine of the conventional type, for example, various probability conditions such as a probability change gaming state in which the winning probability of the success or failure judgment is increased, and a time-saving gaming state in which the efficiency of symbol variation for indicating or notifying the result of the success or failure judgment is enhanced. A game state is provided, and a variable effect according to the type of the game state is developed (for example, see "Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-115441").

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the conventional model, the number of prize balls paid out based on the game ball entering the large winning opening during execution of the special game is notified (for example, “special Open 2015-033452 ").

  However, since pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration already exist in large numbers as conventional models, in order to differentiate them from conventional models, there is a demand for further improvement in the fun of gaming. .

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, the above-described configuration is adopted for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, and the above-described effects are achieved.

[Common modification example]
Next, a gaming machine according to a common modification of the first to eighth embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this common modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of any of the above-described first to eighth embodiments, and the same configuration will hereinafter be described. The same symbols are given to the parts that are possessed, the explanation is omitted, and mainly the different parts are explained.

(Common Modification 1)
In this modification 1, when a big hit with the second special symbol in the non-deterministic state (time saving state, easy ball entering state), the execution of the pending inside consecutive effects effect than when the big hit with the second special symbol in the positive change state It is configured so as to lower the probability, or configured so as not to execute the on-hold reservation effect. As described above, in the indeterminate state and the indeterminate state, the transition to the different effect modes is made, so the tendency of the effect during the symbol change is different. Therefore, in the non-deterministic change state, it becomes a big hit with the second special symbol, and considering the case of transitioning to the definite change state after the end of the special game, the non-deterministic change through the event of pending Uranzou (occurrence of two big hits) Seamlessly connecting symbol variation production in the state, the special game above, the symbol variation production in the definite change state, and the special game later, and assembling it as a series of continuous effects (production with consistent story nature) Is difficult. Therefore, even if the second special symbol in the non-determination state will be a big hit, and there is a possibility that the pending inner row will be decided, there is a high possibility that the pending inner row is not fully effective. Lower the execution probability of or As an example, in the production mode (battle mode) in the definite change state, a specific big hit symbol (big hit symbol "fist, fist, fist") dedicated to the production mode is set, and the stop display of this specific big hit symbol Considering the case where special continuous rendition (special continuous rendition of a battle system) is started when the pending inner row is finalized, the pending inner row when the effect mode (non-battle mode) in the time-shortened state is considered. Even under circumstances where can occur, the specific jackpot symbol does not appear, and if the special continuous rendition is not generated, consistency of the connection and rendition of the big hit before and after can be taken. It is from.

(Common Modification 2)
In the above-described first embodiment, even if any of the plural types of big hits (16R big hit, 8R big hit, 2R big hit) falls under any of the big wins, the fixed period immediately after the end of the special game (second special Only limited period over the fluctuation display of the number of times (4 rotations) of the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the maximum number (4) of the operation holding balls of the symbol), it shifts to the limited frequency state (high probability special fluctuation state γ), and the limited frequency table The variation pattern of the special symbol is configured to be selected with reference to (special variation pattern table). On the other hand, in the second modification, the special game is ended only when it corresponds to a specific big hit (high profit big hit: 16R big hit) among multiple types of big hits (16R big hit, 8R big hit, 2R big hit). It transfers to a limited frequency state only for a fixed period (4 rotations) immediately after, and it is comprised so that the variation pattern of a special symbol may be selected with reference to a limited frequency table. In the limited frequency state, when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a specific big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation (for example, fluctuation time = 2 seconds) is selected. At this time, as described above, a specific big hit (high profit big hit) among multiple types of big hits in the case of the second special symbol when it becomes the big hit than when it is the big hit in the first special symbol The probability of becoming is high. Therefore, basically, the case of becoming a big hit with the second special symbol (in the case of consecutive villas) is more of that special game than when it becomes the big hit with the first special symbol (in the case of the first hit) It can be said that it is easy to shift to the limited frequency state immediately after the end. Then, in the limited frequency state, the shortening variation pattern (for example, variation time = 2 seconds) is selected on the main control substrate 100 side, and various symbol variation effects corresponding to the shortening variation pattern are selected on the presentation control substrate 200 side. Is to be selected.

  Here, the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol (in particular, the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol which is scheduled to digest four times of symbol variation after the big hit (after the end of the special game)) occurs before the big hit starts There are cases, and cases that occur after the jackpot start (or after the jackpot end). Specifically, when the game ball enters the second starting opening during the variable display of the symbol and the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol occurs, and the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol is 4 pieces (maximum The game ball may enter the second starting opening during execution of the special game under the condition of less than the holding number), and the operation holding ball of the second special symbol may occur. In addition, it is after the end of the special game under the situation where the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is less than 4 (maximum number of pending) at the end of the special game, the variation of the second special symbol When the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 62, there is a case where the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol occurs. At this time, as described above, whether or not the on-hold in-line consecutive effect (special continuous effect) is to be executed is determined at the start of the big hit, so in order to generate the on-hold in-continuous effect (special continuous effect), at least the big hit It is assumed that there is a specific hold at the start. Therefore, on the basis of the jackpot start time, when the specific hold is generated before the jackpot start, it is possible to generate the pending inside consecutive effects B (special continuous staging), but after the jackpot start (or after the jackpot end) If a specific hold is made on the other hand, it is not possible to generate a hold internal continuous effect B (special continuous effect). Thereby, when the specific suspension occurs before the big hit start, while the special symbol fluctuation production occurs within the limited period (four rotations) immediately after the end of the special game along with the execution of the special continuous effect, the big hit If a specific hold occurs after the start (or after the end of the big hit), the special symbol variation effect will not occur within the limited period (four revolutions) immediately after the end of the special game. Also, as described above, the limited period of 4 rotations corresponds to the maximum number (4) of the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol.

  Therefore, when the suspension within the group is established by the specific suspension being triggered before the big hit starts, the symbol variation related to the specific suspension corresponds to the shortening variation (for example, variation time = 2 seconds) in the limited frequency state To generate the special symbol variation effect (for example, a series of movie images and symbol variation and occurrence of big hit inconspicuously generated), and the first special game, the symbol variation effect, and the second special game are consistent. Seamlessly connect in a storytic way. On the other hand, when specific suspension is triggered after the big hit is started, and there is a hold inside arrangement, special symbol fluctuation effect (special continuous performance) does not occur in the symbol change related to the specific suspension, but shortening fluctuation in limited frequency state By generating an immediate effect (a mode in which the occurrence of a big hit is emphasized) corresponding to (for example, fluctuation time = 2 seconds), the extension until the occurrence of a big hit is prevented. That is, in the second modification, even if the timing of occurrence of the specific suspension is either before or after the big hit start, if the big hit with a specific big hit symbol, the variation pattern selection state after the special game is In order to transition to the limited frequency state, the contents of the subsequent big hit fluctuation rendition can be made different according to the timing of the occurrence of the specific suspension, with the occurrence of the shortening fluctuation in this limited frequency state. In addition, in this modification, at the time of the judgment of the executability of a reservation Uchi-San effect (special continuous production), it was set at the time of the big hit start, but it is not limited to this; Medium timing may be used.

(Common Modification 3)
Moreover, in the above-mentioned 1st-8th embodiment, although the structure which provided only one type of out-of-hand pattern was illustrated as a stop symbol of a special symbol, it is not limited to this and provides several types of out-of-out pattern May be At this time, for example, only when a specific missing symbol is selected as the pre-judgment result, the on-premise-on-run effect (Gase effect) may be generated. In the seventh to eighth embodiments described above, the configuration (one attacker type) having only a single big winning opening 65 having a specific area in the game area PA is adopted. The configuration is not limited, and a configuration (two-attacker type) including a special winning opening 64 having no specific area and a special winning opening 65 having a specific area is adopted as in the second embodiment and the like described above. You may

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although two types of on-premises in-line effects effects A and B which differed in generation | occurrence | production time were illustrated and demonstrated, the specification in which on-off in-line effects are decided at the time of occurrence However, it may be a specification that the on-premises in-line villa is determined by the occurrence of the on-premises in-line effect A, and the predetermined condition is satisfied and the on-premises in-row effect B is similarly established. It may be a specification in which the connection is determined, or may be a specification in which the connection within connection P is determined by a predetermined condition being established only by the occurrence of the internal transfer connection effect B. Further, in the above embodiment, even if the configuration in which the pending inner row presentation is executed is performed only when one or more specific pendings exist in the subsequent operation pending balls, the specific pending is performed in the subsequent operation pending balls. Even when it does not exist, it may be configured to be executed (as a so-called gusset effect).

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and modification, and can be appropriately improved without departing from the scope of the present invention. In addition, components obtained by appropriately combining the components described in the above embodiment and the modification, or some of the components described in the above embodiment and the modification may be deleted or converted by a known technique or the like Are also included in the scope of the present invention. In the present invention and the above embodiment, "not executed" may include a low execution probability (frequency of occurrence), and "low execution probability" includes a non-execution. May be Further, in the present invention and the above embodiment, the phrase "high hit expectancy is high" or "special game transition expectation is high" means that the big hit expectation is 100% or the special game shift expectation is 100%. May be included.

PM Pachinko game machine PA game area 1 outer frame 2 front frame 5 glass frame 20 game board 34 prize ball payout unit (prize ball payout means)
54 General winning opening (predetermined winning opening)
61 1st starting opening 62 2nd starting opening 64 1st big winning opening 65 2nd big winning opening 70 effect display device 71 1st special symbol display device (1st symbol display device)
72 second special symbol display device (second symbol display device)
100 main control board 135 pre-judging means 141 special symbol pass / fail judging means (pass / fail judgment means)
143 Special symbol variation pattern judgment means (variation display time selection means)
156 Special symbol display control means (symbol display control means)
160 Electric character control means (special game execution means)
165 game state control means (lottery state control means, ball entry state control means)
200 effect control board 220 effect general control means (effect determination means)
400 Dispensing Control Board (Prize Ball Dispensing Means)

Claims (1)

A game board in which a game area is formed,
A starting opening provided in the gaming area and capable of entering game balls;
Pass / fail judgment means that executes a hit / fail judgment triggered by entering the starting opening;
A large winning opening provided in the gaming area and opened according to the result of the determination of acceptance or rejection, and a game ball can enter.
A predetermined winning opening provided at a position different from the starting opening in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball.
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a round game to be closed after opening the big winning opening is performed a plurality of times when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit,
An effect display device for displaying an effect indicating the result of the success or failure determination;
And effect determination means for determining the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device,
When one gaming ball enters the big winning opening, the first prescribed number of gaming balls is paid out as a winning ball,
When one gaming ball enters the predetermined winning opening, the second prescribed number of gaming balls are paid out as winning balls,
The special winning a prize winning total number which is the total number of the prize balls which are paid out during the execution of the special game which is triggered by the game ball entering the big winning opening during the execution of the round game in the special game, The sum total with the predetermined winning prize total number of balls, which is the total number of winning balls paid out during the special game, triggered by the game ball entering the predetermined winning opening during the execution of the round game in Can be displayed,
As a display content capable of updating and displaying the total number of the large winning a prize winning ball total number and the predetermined winning a prize winning total ball number, the total number of the large winning opening winning balls total and the predetermined winning a prize winning balls paid out in the special game currently being executed. Total number display A, which is a display of the total number with the total number, the total number of special winning opening prize balls paid out in one or more special games executed prior to the currently running special game, and a predetermined winning opening prize Total number display B, which is the sum of the sum of the total number of balls and the total number of the large winning prize total balls paid out in the special game currently being executed and the predetermined number of winning prize total balls The combined number display A and the combined number display B can be simultaneously displayed during the round game in the special game currently being executed,
In any of the total number display A and the total number display B, the game ball is updated and displayed every time the game ball enters the special winning opening or the predetermined winning opening during execution of the round game in the special game.
During execution of a round game in the special game, it is possible to display a predetermined image prompting the player to shoot the game ball in the direction of the game area in which the big winning opening is arranged in the game area.
Wherein the predetermined image and summing the number of display A and summing the number of display B while simultaneously can be displayed, wherein the predetermined image and the sum amount display A and summing the number of display B is configured so as not to be displayed superimposed each Yes,
As the predetermined winning opening, at least a predetermined winning opening A, and a predetermined winning opening B provided at a position different from the predetermined winning opening A,
The predetermined winning opening A is provided in a predetermined gaming area of the gaming area, and the predetermined winning opening B and the special winning opening are different from the predetermined gaming area of the gaming area. The predetermined winning opening B is provided on the upstream side of the big winning opening in the different gaming area, provided in the gaming area,
The winning ball by entering the game ball to the predetermined winning hole A in the round game in the special game currently being executed is not a target of the update display of the total number display A, while the round in the currently running special game A pachinko gaming machine, wherein a winning ball by entering a game ball into the predetermined winning hole B during a game is a target of update display of a total number display A.

Images